Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids

Question 1.
Explain the equilibrium state of solids at a given temperature.
Answer:

  1. Solids are made up of atoms or a group of atoms placed in a definite geometric arrangement.
  2. This arrangement is decided by nature so that the resultant force acting on each constituent due to others is zero. This is the equilibrium state of a solid at room temperature.
  3. This equilibrium arrangement does not change with time but it can only change when an external stimulus, like compressive force is applied to a solid from all sides.
  4. The constituents vibrate about their equilibrium positions even at very low temperature but cannot leave their fixed positions.
  5. As a result, the solids possess a definite shape and size.

Question 2.
Explain the effects of applied force on a rigid body.
Answer:

  1. When an external force is applied to a solid, the constituents are slightly displaced and restoring forces are developed in it.
  2. These restoring forces try to bring the constituents back to their equilibrium positions so that the solid can regain its shape.
  3. When the deforming forces are removed, the inter-atomic forces tend to restore the original positions of the molecules and thus the body regains its original shape and size.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of deforming force with the help of examples.
Answer:

  1. When a force (within specific limit) is applied to a solid (which is not free to move), the size or shape or both change due to changes in the relative positions of molecules. Such a force is called deforming force.
  2. The larger the deforming force on a body, the larger is its deformation.
  3. Deformation could be in the form of change in length of a wire, change in volume of an object or change in shape of a body.
  4. Examples:
    • When a deforming force such as stretching, is applied to a rubber band, it gets deformed (elongated) but when the force is removed, it regains its original length.
    • When a similar force is applied to a dough or a clay, it also gets deformed but it does not regain its original shape and size after removal of the deforming force.

Question 4.
Define plasticity.
Answer:
If a body does not regain its original shape and size and retains its altered shape or size upon removal of the deforming force, it is called a plastic body and the property is called plasticity.

Question 5.
When is a body said to be perfectly elastic? Give an example for perfectly elastic body and perfectly plastic body.
Answer:

  1. If a body regains its original shape and size completely and instantaneously upon removal of the deforming force, then it is said to be perfectly elastic.
    • There is no solid which is perfectly elastic or perfectly plastic,
    • The best example of a near perfectly elastic body is quartz fibre and that of a plastic body is putty.

Question 6.
State SI unit and dimensions of strain.
Answer:
Strain is the ratio of two similar quantities. Hence strain is a dimensionless physical quantity and it has no units.

Question 7.
State and explain longitudinal stress (Tensile stress and Compressive stress).
Answer:
i. Stress produced by a deforming force acting along the length of a body or a rod is called longitudinal stress.

ii. Tensile stress: Consider a force F is applied along a length of a wire, or perpendicular to its cross-section A of a wire (or along its length).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 1

[Note: Elongation of wire ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]
This produces an elongation in the wire and the length of the wire increases, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 2

iii. Compressive stress: When a rod is pushed from two ends with equal and opposite forces.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 3
[Note: Compression of wire ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]
This restoring force per unit area is called compressive stress.
Compressive stress = \(\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|}{\mathrm{A}}\)

Question 8.
State and explain longitudinal strain (Tensile strain or Linear strain).
Answer:
The strain produced by a tensile deforming force is called longitudinal strain (tensile strain or linear strain,).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 4
where, L = Original length,
∆l = Change in length.

Question 9.
State and explain volume stress / hydraulic stress.
Answer:
When a deforming force acting on a body produces change in its volume, the stress is called volume stress.
Volume stress/hydraulic stress:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 5
[Note: Change in size is exaggerated for explanation.]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 6

  1. Let \(\vec{F}\) be a force acting perpendicular to the entire surface of the body.
  2. It acts normally and uniformly all over the surface area A of the body.
  3. Such a stress which produces change in size but no change in shape is called volume stress.
    Volume stress = \(\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|}{\mathrm{A}}\)
  4. Volume stress produces change in size without change in shape of body, hence it is also called as hydraulic or hydrostatic volume stress.

Question 10.
Explain volume strain.
Answer:

  1. A deforming force acting perpendicular to the entire surface of a body produces a volume strain.
  2. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 7
    where ∆V = change in volume,
    V = original volume.

Question 11.
Define and explain shearing stress.
Answer:
The restoring force per unit area developed due to the applied tangential force is called shearing stress or tangential stress.
Shearing stress:

  1. When a deforming force acting on a body produces change in the shape of a body shearing stress is produced.
  2. Consider ABCD as a front face of a cube, a tangential force is applied to the cube so that the bottom of the cube is fixed and only the top surface is slightly displaced.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 8

Question 12.
Explain shearing strain.
Answer:

  1. The relative displacement of the bottom face and the top face of the cube is called shearing strain.
  2. Shearing strain = \(\frac{\Delta l}{\mathrm{~L}}\) = tan θ
    where, ∆l = displaced length,
    L = Original length.
  3. When ∆l is very small,
    tan θ ≈ θ and shearing strain = θ

Question 13.
State and explain Hooke’s law.
Answer:
Statement: Within elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to strain.
Explanation:

  1. According to Hooke’s law,
    Stress-Strain
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 9
    This constant of proportionality is called modulus of elasticity.
  2. Modulus of elasticity of a material is the slope of stress-strain curve in elastic deformation region and depends on the nature of the material.
  3. The graph of strain (on X-axis) and stress (on Y-axis) within elastic limit is shown in the figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 10

Question 14.
Define elastic limit.
Answer:
The maximum value of stress upto which stress is directly proportional to strain is called the elastic limit.

Question 15.
Define modulus of elasticity.
Answer:
The modulus of elasticity of a material is the ratio of stress to the corresponding strain.

Question 16.
State different types of modulus of elasticity.
Answer:

  1. Young’s modulus (Y): It is the modulus of elasticity related to change in length of an object like a metal wire, rod, beam, etc., due to the applied deforming force.
  2. Bulk modulus (K): It is the modulus of elasticity related to change in volume of an object due to applied deforming force.
  3. Shear modulus or Modulus of rigidity (η): The modulus of elasticity related to change in shape of an object is called modulus of rigidity.

Question 17.
Explain the usefulness of Young’s modulus.
Answer:

  1. Young’s modulus indicates the resistance of an elastic solid to elongation or compression.
  2. Young’s modulus of a material is useful for characterization of an object subjected to compression or tension.

Question 18.
Within elastic limit, prove that Young’s modulus of material of wire is the stress required to double the length of wire.
Answer:

(i) Let, L = Initial length of wire
2 L = Final length of wire
∴ Increase in length = ∆l = 2L – L = L

(ii) Longitudinal strain of wire = \(\frac{\Delta l}{\mathrm{~L}}=\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{L}}=1\)

(iii)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 11
∴ Y = Longitudinal stress

(iv) Hence, Young’s modulus of material of wire is the stress required to double the length of wire.

Question 19.
What is bulk modulus? Derive an expression for bulk modulus.
Answer:
Definition:
Bulk modulus is defined as the ratio of volume stress to volume strain.
It is denoted by ‘K’.
Unit: N/m2 or Pa in SI system
Dimensions: [L-1M1T-2]
Expression for bulk modulus:

(i) If a sphere made from rubber is completely immersed in a liquid, it will be uniformly compressed from all sides.
Let, F = Compressive force,
dP = Change in pressure,
dV = Change in volume,
V = Original volume.

(ii) Volume stress = \(\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}|}{\mathrm{A}}\) = dP

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 12

(iii) The negative sign indicates that there is a decrease in volume.
The magnitude of the volume strain is \(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 13

Question 20.
Explain the usefulness of bulk modulus.
Answer:

  1. Bulk modulus indicates the resistance of gases, liquids or solids to change their volume.
  2. Materials with small bulk modulus and large compressibility are easier to compress.

Question 21.
State few applications of bulk modulus.
Answer:

  1. When a balloon is filled with air at high pressure, its walls experience a force from within. It tries to expand the balloon and change its size without changing shape. When the volume stress exceeds the limit of bulk elasticity, the balloon explodes.
  2. A gas cylinder explodes when the pressure inside it exceeds the limit of bulk elasticity of its material.
  3. A submarine when submerged under water is under volume stress. The depth it can reach within water depends upon its limit of bulk elasticity.

Question 22.
Define compressibility. State its unit and dimensions.
Answer:

  1. The reciprocal of bulk modulus of elasticity is called compressibility of the material.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 14
  2. Compressibility is the fractional decrease in volume, (-dV/V) per unit increase in pressure.
    Compressibility = \(\frac{-\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V} \mathrm{dP}}\)
  3. Unit: m2/N or Pa-1 in SI system.
  4. Dimensions: [L1M-1T2]

Question 23.
What is modulus of rigidity? Derive an expression for it.
Answer:
Definition: It is defined (is the ratio of shear stress to shear strain within elastic limit.
It is denoted by ‘η’.
Unit: N/m2 or Pa in SI system.
Dimension: [L-1M1T-2]

Expression for modulus of rigidity:

Consider a solid cube as shown in the figure.

Let, F = Tangential force
A = Cross sectional area
∆l = Relative displaced length
l = Original length
θ = Shear strain
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 15
[Note: Displacement of upper surface is exaggerated for explanation.]
The forces applied on the block is subjected to a shear stress,
Shearing stress = F/A
The comer angle which changes by a small amount θ (expressed in radian) is given by,
Shearing strain = \(\frac{\Delta l}{l}\) ≈ θ
From definition,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 16

Question 24.
What does modulus of rigidity indicate?
Answer:
Modulus of rigidity indicates resistance offered by solid to change in its shape.

Question 25.
Explain the change of diameter of a wire when it is stretched and compressed.
Answer:
i. When a wire is fixed at one end and a force is applied at its free end so that the wire gets stretched, length of the wire increases and at the same time, its diameter decreases, i.e., the wire becomes longer and thinner as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 17
[Note: Linear expansion ∆l is exaggerated far explanation.]

ii. If equal and opposite forces are applied to an object along its length inwards, the object gets compressed. There is a decrease in dimensions along its length and at the same time there is an increase in its dimensions perpendicular to its length. When length of the wire decreases, its diameter increases.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 18

[Note: Compression of wire ∆l is exaggerated for explanation.]

Question 26.
Derive expression for Poisson’s ratio.
Answer:
i. Let,
L = original length
l = increase/decrease in length
D = original diameter
d = change in diameter

ii. The ratio of change in dimensions to original dimensions in the direction of the applied force is called linear strain.
Linear strain = \(\frac{l}{\mathrm{~L}}\) …. (1)

iii. The ratio of change in dimensions to original dimensions in a direction perpendicular to the applied force is called lateral strain.
Lateral strain = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{D}}\) ….(2)

iv. Poisson’s ration,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 19

Question 27.
A wire of length 20 m and area of cross section 1.25 × 10-4 m2 is subjected to a load of 2.5 kg. (1 kg wt = 9.8 N). The elongation produced in wire is 1 × 10-4 m. Calculate Young’s modulus of the material.
Solution:
L = 20 m, A = 1.25 × 10-4m2,
F = mg = 2.5 × 9.8 N, l = 10-4 m
Formula Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
To find: Young’s modulus (Y)
Calculation: From formula,
Y = \(\frac{2.5 \times 9.8 \times 20}{1.25 \times 10^{-4} \times 10^{-4}}\) = 3.92 × 1010Nm-2
Answer: The Young’s modulus of the material is 3.92 × 1010 Nm-2.

Question 28.
A wire of diameter 0.5 mm and length 2 m is stretched by applying a force of 2 kg wt. Calculate the increase in length of the wire, (g = 9.8 m/s2, Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2)
Solution:
Given:
L = 2 m, F = 2 kg wt, d = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10-4 m,
∴ r = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{2}\) = 2.5 × 10-4 m.
Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Increase in length (l)
Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}=\frac{\mathrm{MgL}}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2} l}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 20
Answer:
The increase in length of the wire is 2.218 × 10-3 m.

Question 29.
A brass wire of length 4.5 m with cross-section area of 3 × 10-5 m2 and a copper wire of length 5.0 m with cross section area 4 × 10-5 m2 are stretched by the same load. The same elongation is produced in both the wires. Find the ratio of Young’s modulus of brass and copper.
Solution:
LB = 4.5 m, AB = 3 × 10-5 m2
LC = 5 m, AC = 4 × 10-5 m2 lB = C, FB = FC
To find: Ratio of Young’s modulus \(\left(\frac{Y_{B}}{Y_{C}}\right)\)
Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
Calculation: For brass,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 21
= 1.2
Answer:
The ratio of Young’s modulus of brass and copper is 1.2 : 1.

Question 30.
The length of wire increases by 9 mm when weight of 2.5 kg is hung from the free end of wire. If all conditions are kept the same and the radius of wire is made thrice the original radius, find the increase in length.
Solution:
Given; l1 = 9mm = 9 × 10-3m,
M = 2.5 kg, r2 = 3r1,
Y1 = Y2 = Y (material is same)
To find: Increase in length (l2)
Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 22
Answer:
The longitudinal strain produced in 1st wire is

Question 31.
Two wires of diameter 0.25 cm, one made of steel and the other made of brass are loaded as shown in the figure. The unloaded length of steel wire is 1.5 m and that of brass wire is 1.0 m. Compute the elongations of the steel and the brass wires.(Ys = 2.0 × 1011 Nm-2, YB = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2) (NCERT)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 23
Solution:
Given: D = 0.25 cm = 0.25 × 10-2 m,
LS = 1.5 m, LB = 1 m,
YS = 2.0 × 1011 Nm-2,
YB = 0.91 × 1011 Nm-2
To find: Elongations of brass wire (lB)
Elongations of steel wire (lS)

Formula: Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)

Calculation: Since, A = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}^{2}}{4}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 24
Answer:
The elongation of the steel wire is 1.5 × 10-4 m and that of brass wires is 1.32 × 10-4 m.

Question 32.
One end of steel wire is fixed to a ceiling and load of 2.5 kg is attached to the free end of the wire. Another identical wire is attached to the bottom of load and another load of 2.0 kg, is attached to the lower end of this wire as shown in the figure. Compute the longitudinal strain produced in both the wires, if the cross-sectional area of wires is 10-4m2, (Ysteel = 20 × 1010N/m2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 25
Solution:
Given: M1 = 2.5 kg, M2 = 2kg, A = 10-4m2, Ysteel = 20 × 1010 N/m2, L1 = L2 = L
To find: Longitudinal strain of 1st wire (Strain1).
Longitudinal strain of 2nd wire (Strain2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 26
Answer:
The longitudinal strain produced in 1st wire is 1.225 × 10-6 and in 2nd wire is 2.205 × 10-6

Question 33.
A steel wire having cross-sectional area 2 mm2 is stretched by 10 N. Find the lateral strain produced in the wire. (Given: Y for steel = 2 × 1011 N/m2, Poisson’s ratio σ = 0.29)
Solution:
Given: A = 2 mm2 = 2 × 10-6 m2,
F = 10 N, Ystee; = 2 × 1011 N/m2, σ = 0.29

To find: Lateral strain
Formulae:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 27
Calculation: From formula (i),
longitudinal stress = \(\frac{10}{2 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 5 × 106 N/m2
From formula (ii),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 28
From formula (iii),
lateral strain = σ × longitudinal strain
= 0.29 × 2.5 × 10-5
∴ lateral strain = 7.25 × 10-6
Answer:
Lateral strain produced in the wire is 7.25 × 10-6.

Question 34.
A brass wire of radius 1 mm is loaded by a mass of 31.42 kg. What would be the decrease in its radius? (Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2, Poisson’s ratio σ = 0.36)
Solution:
Given: R = 1 mm = 1 × 10-3 m, M = 31.42 kg, Y = 9 × 1010 N/m2, σ = 0.36
To find: Decrease in radius (r)

Formulae:

i. Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
ii. σ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Lr}}{l \mathrm{R}}\)

Calculation: From formula (i),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 29
Answer:
The decrease in radius of the brass wire would be 3.92 × 10-7 m

Question 35.
A metal cube of side 1 m is subjected to a force. The force acts normally on the whole surface of cube and its volume changes by 1.5 × 10-5 m3. The bulk modulus of metal is 6.6 × 1010 N/m2. Calculate the change in pressure.
Solution:
Given: L = 1 m, dV = 1.5 × 10-5 m3,
K = 6.6 × 1010 N/m2.
To find: Change in pressure (dP)
Formula: K = V\(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 30
Answer:
The change in pressure is 9.9 × 105 N/m2.

Question 36.
Determine the volume contraction of solid copper cube, 10 cm on an edge, when subjected to a hydraulic pressure of 7.0 × 106 P.a. (Bulk modulus of copper = 140 × 109 pa)
Solution:
Given: L = 10 cm =0.1 m, ∆P = 7 × 106 Pa, K = 140 × 109 pa
To find: Volume contraction (dV)
Formula: K = V × \(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
dV = \(\mathrm{L}^{3} \times \frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}}\) = (0.1)3 × \(\frac{7 \times 10^{6}}{140 \times 10^{9}}\)
∴ dV = 5 × 10-8 m3
Answer:
The volume contraction of solid copper cube is 5 × 10-8 m3

Question 37.
Calculate the modulus of rigidity of a metal, if a metal cube of side 40 cm is subjected to a shearing force of 2000 N. The upper surface is displaced through 0.5 cm with respect to the bottom. Calculate the modulus of rigidity of the metal.
Solution:
Given: L = 40 cm = 0.4 m,
F = 2000 N = 2 × 103N
l = 0.5 cm = 0.005 m, A = L2 = 0.16 m2
To find: Modulus of rigidity (η)

Formulae:

i. θ = \(\frac{l}{\mathrm{~L}}\)
ii. η = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A} \theta}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
θ = \(\frac{0.005}{0.4}\) = 0.0125
From formula (ii),
η = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{3}}{0.16 \times 0.0125}\) = 1 × 106 N/m2
Answer:
The modulus of rigidity of the metal cube is 1 × 106 N/m2.

Question 38.
A piece of copper having a rectangular cross-section of 15.2 mm × 19.1 mm is pulled in tension with 44500 N forces producing only elastic deformation. Calculate the resulting strain. (Rigidity modulus of copper = 42 × 109 N m-2)
Solution:
Given: A = 15.2 × 19.14 × 10-6 m2,
F = 44500 N, η = 42 × 109 N m-2
To find: Strain (θ)
Formula: η = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A} \theta}\)

Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 31
Answer:
The strain produced in the piece of copper is 3.64 × 10-3

Question 39.
A copper metal cube has each side of length 1 m. The bottom edge of cube is fixed and tangential force 4.2 × 108 N is applied to top surface. Calculate the lateral displacement of the top surface, if modulus of rigidity of copper is 14 × 1010 N/m2.
Solution:
Given: L = h = 1 m, F = 4.2 × 108 N, η = 1.4 × 1011 N/m2
To find: Lateral displacement (x)
Formula: η = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A} / \theta}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{Fh}}{\mathrm{Ax}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
x = \(\frac{\mathrm{Fh}}{\mathrm{A\eta}}\)
∴ x = \(\frac{4.2 \times 10^{8} \times 1}{(1 \times 1) \times 1.4 \times 10^{11}}\) = 3 × 10-3 m
∴ x = 3 mm
Answer:
The lateral displacement of top is 3 mm.

Question 40.
The area of the upper face of a rectangular block is 0.5 m × 0.5 m and the lower face is fixed. The height of the block is 1 cm. A shearing force applied at the top face produces a displacement of 0.0 15 mm. Find the strain and shearing force. (Modulus of rigidity: η = 4.5 × 1010 N/m2)
Solution:
Given: A = 0.5 m × 0.5 m = 0.25 m2,
h = 1 cm = 10-2m,
x = 0.015 mm = 15 × 10-6m
η = 4.5 × 1010 N/m2
To find: Strain (θ). Shearing force (F)

Formulae:

i. θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{h}}\)
ii. F = ηAθ

Calculations:

Using formula (i),
θ = \(\frac{15 \times 10^{-6}}{10^{-2}}\) = 1.5 × 10-3
Using formula (ii),
F = 4.5 × 1010 × 0.25 × 1.5 × 10-3
= 1.688 × 107 N
Answer:
Shearing force is 1.688 × 107 N and strain is 1.5 × 10-3

Question 41.
Explain the behaviour of metal wire under increasing load.
Answer:
Consider a metal wire suspended vertically from a rigid support and stretched by applying load to its lower end. The load is gradually increased in small steps until the wire breaks. The elongation produced in the wire is measured during each step. Stress and strain are noted for each load and a graph is drawn by taking tensile strain along X-axis and tensile stress along Y-axis. It is a stress-strain curve as shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 32

  1. Proportional limit: The initial part of the graph is a straight line OA. This is the region in which Hooke’s law is obeyed and stress is directly proportional to stain. The straight line portion ends at A. The stress at this point is called proportional limit.
  2. Yield point: If the load is further increased till point B is reached, stress and strain are no longer proportional and Hooke’s law is not valid. If the load is gradually removed starting at any point between O and B. The curve is retracted until the wire regains its original length. The change is reversible. The material of the wire shows elastic behaviour in the region OB. Point B is called the yield point. It is also known as the elastic limit.
  3. Permanent Set: When the stress is increased beyond point B, the strain continues to increase. If the load is removed at any point beyond B, for example (at C), the material does not regain its original length. It follows the line CE. Length of the wire when there is no stress is greater than the original length. The deformation is irreversible and the material has acquired a permanent set.
  4. Fracture point: Further increase in load causes a large increase in strain for relatively small increase in stress, until a point D is reached at which fracture takes place. The material shows plastic flow or plastic deformation from point B to point D. The material does not regain its original state when the stress is removed. The deformation is called plastic deformation.

Question 42.
Stress-strain curve for two materials A and B are shown in the figure. The graphs are drawn to the same scale.

  1. Which material has greater Young’s modulus?
  2. Which of the two is the stronger material? (NCERT)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 33
Answer:

  1. For a given strain, stress for A is more than that of B. Hence, Young’s modulus (= stress/strain) is greater for A than that of B.
  2. Material A is stronger than B because A can bear greater stress before the breaking of the wire.

Question 43.
Figure shows the stress-strain curve for a given material. What are

  1. Young’s modulus and
  2. approximate yield strength for this material? (NCERT)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 34
Answer:

  1. The graph, implies stress of 150 × 106 N m-2 corresponds to a strain of 0.002. Therefore, Young’s modulus is,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 35
  2. The yield strength for the material is less than 300 × 106 N m-2, i.e.. 3 × 108 N m-2 and greater than 2.5 × 108 N m-2.

Question 44.
Explain the following terms:

  1. Ductile
  2. Malleable

Answer:

  1. Metals such as copper, aluminium, wrought iron, etc. have large plastic range of extension. They lengthen considerably and undergo plastic deformation till they break. They are called ductile.
  2. Metals such as gold, silver which can be hammered into thin sheets are called malleable.

Question 45.
Define strain energy.
Answer:
The elastic potential energy gained by a wire during elongation b a stretching force is called as strain energy.

Question 46.
A steel wire is acted upon by a load of 10 N. Calculate the extension produced in the wire, if the strain energy stored in the wire is 1.1 × 10-3 J.
Solution:
Given: F = 10 N, Strain energy =1.1 × 10-3 J,
To find: Extension (l)
Formula: W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × l
Calculation:
From formula,
l = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~W}}{\mathrm{~F}}\) = \(\frac{2 \times 1.1 \times 10^{-3}}{10}\) = 2.2 × 10-4 m.
Answer:
The extension produced in the wire is 2.2 × 10-4 m.

Question 47.
Calculate the strain energy per unit volume in a brass wire of length 3 m and area of cross-section 0.6 mm2 when it is stretched by 3 mm and a force of 6 kg-wt is applied to its free end.
Solution:
Given: L = 3 m, F = 6 kg wt = 6 × 9.8N = 58.8N, A = 0.6 mm2 = 0.6 × 10-6 m2, l = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m
To find: Strain energy per unit volume (u)

Formulae:

i. Stress = \(\frac{F}{A}\)
ii. Strain = \(\frac{l}{L}\)
iii. u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Stress × Strain

Calculation:

From formula (i),
Stress = \(\frac{F}{A}\) = \(\frac{58.8}{0.6 \times 10^{-6}}\) = 98 × 106 N/m2
From formula (ii),
Strain = \(\frac{l}{L}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{-3}}{3}\) = 10-3
From formula (iii),
u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Stress × Strain
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 98 × 106 × 10-3
u = 49 × 103 J/m3
Answer:
Strain energy per unit volume in the brass wire is 49 × 103 J/m3

Question 48.
A steel wire of diameter 1 × 10-3 m is stretched by a force of 20 N. Calculate the strain energy per unit volume. (Ysteel = 2 × 1011 N/m2)
Solution:
Given: d = 1 × 10-3 m, r = 5 × 10-4 m, ysteel = 2 × 1011 N/m2
To find: Strain energy per unit volume
Formula: Strain energy per unit volume
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{\text { (stress) }^{2}}{\mathrm{Y}}\)
Calculation:
From formula.
Strain energy per unit volume
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 36
Answer:
The strain energy per unit volume of the steel wire is 1621 J.

Question 49.
A uniform steel wire of length 3 m and area of cross section 2 mm2 is extended through 3 mm. Calculate the energy stored in the wire, if the elastic limit is not exceeded. (Ysteel = 20 × 1010 N/m2)
Solution:
Given: L = 3 m, A = 2 mm2 = 2 × 10-6 m2,
l = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m,
Ysteel = 20 × 1010 N/m2
To find: Energy stored (U)
Formula: W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × l
Calculation: Since, Y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{Al}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 37
Answer:
The energy stored in the steel wire is 0.6 J.

Question 50.
Explain the following terms:
i. Hardness
ii. Strength
iii. Toughness
Answer:

i. Hardness:

  1. Hardness is the property of a material which enables it to resist plastic deformation.
  2. Hard materials have little ductility and they are brittle to some extent.
  3. The term hardness also refers to stiffness or resistance to bending, scratching, abrasion or cutting.
  4. It is the property of a material which gives it the ability to resist permanent deformation when a load is applied to it.
  5. The greater the hardness, greater is the resistance to deformation.
  6. Hardness of material is different from its strength and toughness.
  7. The most well known example for hard material is diamond, while metal with very low hardness is aluminium.

ii. Strength:

  1. If a force is applied to a body, it produces deformation in it.
  2. Higher is the force required for deformation, the stronger is the material, i.e., the material has more strength.
  3. Steel has high strength whereas plasticine clay is not strong because it gets easily deformed even by a small force.

iii. Toughness:

  1. Toughness is the ability of a material to resist fracturing when a force is applied to it.
  2. Plasticine clay is relatively tough as it can be stretched and deformed due to applied force without breaking.

Question 51.
Explain the concept of frictional force.
Answer:

  1. Whenever the surface of one body slides over another, each body exerts a certain amount of force on other body.
  2. These forces are tangential to the surfaces. The force on each body is opposite to the direction of motion between two bodies.
  3. It prevents or opposes the relative motion between two bodies.
  4. It is common experience that an object placed on any surface does not move easily when a small force is applied to it.
  5. This is because of certain force of opposition acting between the surface of the object and the surface on which it is placed.
  6. To initiate any motion between pair of surfaces, we need a certain minimum force. Also, after the motion begins, it is constantly opposed by some natural force.
  7. This mechanical force between two solid surfaces in contact with each other is called as frictional force.

Question 52.
Explain few examples of friction.
Answer:

  1. A rolling ball comes to rest after covering a finite distance on playground because of friction.
  2. Our foot ware is provided with designs at the bottom of its sole so as to produce force of opposition to avoid slipping. It is difficult to walk without such opposing force. When we try to walk fast on polished flooring at home with soap water spread on it. There is a possibility of slipping due to lack of force of friction.
  3. Relative motion between solids and fluids (i.e. liquids and gases) is also opposed naturally by friction, eg.: a boat on the surface of water experiences opposition to its motion.

Question 53.
Explain the origin of friction.
Answer:

  1. If smooth surfaces are observed under powerful microscope, many irregularities and projections are observed.
  2. Friction arises due to interlocking of these irregularities between two surfaces in contact.
  3. The surfaces can be made extremely smooth by polishing to avoid irregularities but then case also, friction does not decrease but may increase.
  4. Hence the interlocking of irregularities is not the real cause of friction.
  5. According to modem theory, cause of friction is the force of attraction between molecules of two surfaces in actual contact in addition to the. force due to the interlocking between the two surfaces.
  6. When one body is in contact with another body, the real microscopic area in contact is very small due to irregularities in contact.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 38
  7. Due to small area, pressures at points of contact is very high. Hence there is strong force of attraction between the surfaces in contact.
  8. When the surfaces in contact become more and more smooth, the actual area of contact goes on increasing.
  9. Due to this, the force of attraction between the molecules increases and hence the friction also increases.

Question 54.
State the following terms:

  1. Cohesive force
  2. Adhesive force

Answer:

  1. When two Surfaces are of the same material, the force of attraction between them is called cohesive force.
  2. When two surfaces are of different materials, the force of attraction between them is called adhesive force.

Question 55.
Explain the concept of static friction.
Answer:

  1. Consider a wooden block placed on a horizontal surface as shown in the figure and small horizontal force F is applied to it.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 39
  2. The block does not move with this force as it cannot overcome the frictional force between the block and horizontal surface.
  3. In this case the force of static friction is equal to F and balances it.
  4. The frictional force which balances applied force when the body is static is called force of static friction. In other words, static friction prevents sliding motion.
  5. If we keep increasing F, a stage will come
    • For F < Fmax, the force of static friction is equal to F.
    • when for F = Fmax, the object will start moving.
    • For F ≥ Fmax, the kinetic friction comes into play.
  6. Static friction opposes impending motion i.e. the motion that would take place in absence of frictional force under the applied force.

Question 56.
Define limiting force of friction.
Answer:
Just before the body starts sliding over another body, the value of frictional force is maximum, it is called as limiting force of friction.

Question 57.
Explain the concept of kinetic friction.
Answer:

  1. Once the sliding of block on the surface starts the force of friction decreases.
  2. The force required to keep the body sliding steadily is thus less than the force required to just start its sliding.
  3. The force of friction that comes into play when a body is in steady state of motion over another surface is called kinetic fòrce of friction.
  4. Friction between two surfaces in contact when one body is actually sliding over the other body, is called kinetic friction or dynamic friction.

Question 58.
Why ball bearings are used in machines?
Answer:

  1. For same pair of surfaces, the force of static friction is greater than the force of kinetic friction while the force of kinetic friction is greater than force of rolling friction.
  2. As ball bearing undergo rolling friction and rolling friction is the minimum, ball bearings are used to reduce friction in parts of machines to increase its efficiency.

Question 59.
The coefficient of static friction between a block of mass 0.25 kg and a horizontal surface is 0.4. Find the horizontal force applied to it.
Solution:
Given: μs = 0.4, m = 0.25 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Force (FL)
Formula: FL = μsN = μs(mg)
Calculation: From formula,
FL = 0.4 × 0.25 × 9.8 = 0.98 N
Answer:
The horizontal force applied to it is 0.98 N.

Question 60.
Calculate the force required to move a block of mass 20 kg resting on a horizontal surface, if μs = 0.3 and g = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, μs = 0.3, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find. Force required (F)
Formula: FS = μsN = μsmg
Calculation: From formula,
FS = 3 × 20 × 9.8 = 58.8N
Answer:
The force required to move the block is 58.8 N.

Question 61.
A block of mass 40 kg resting on a horizontal surface just begins to slide when a horizontal force of 120 N is applied to it. Once the motion starts, It can be maintained by a force of 80 N. Determine the coefficients of static friction and kinetic friction (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: FL= 120N, Fk = 80N, m = 40 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2

To find:

i. Coefficient of static friction (μs)
ii. Coefficient of kinetic friction (μk)

Formulae:

i. μs = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{N}}\)
ii. μk = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{k}}}{\mathrm{N}}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i) we get.
N = mg = 40 × 9.8 = 392 N
∴ μs = \(\frac{F_{L}}{N}\) = \(\frac{120}{392}\) = 0.306
From formula (ii) we get,
∴ μk = \(\frac{F_{k}}{N}\) = \(\frac{80}{392}\) = 0.204
Answer:

  1. The coefficient of static friction is 0.306.
  2. The coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.204.

Question 62.
A 20 kg metal block is placed on a horizontal surface. The block just begins to slide when horizontal force of 100 N is applied to it. Calculate the coefficient of static friction. If coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.4, then find minimum force to maintain its uniform motion.
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, FL = 100 N, μk = 0.4

To find:

i. Coefficient of static friction (μs)
ii. Minimum force required (Fk)

Formulae:

i. μs = \(\frac{F_{L}}{N}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{L}}}{\mathrm{mg}}\)
ii. μs = \(\frac{F_{k}}{N}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
μs = \(\frac{100}{20 \times 9.8}\) = 0.5102
From formula (ii),
Fk = μkN = μk × mg = 0.4 × 20 × 9.8
∴ Fk = 78.4 N
Answer:

  1. The coefficient of static friction is 0.5102.
  2. The minimum force required is 78.4 N.

Question 63.
The Mariana trench is located in the Pacific Ocean and at one place it is nearly 11 km beneath the surface of water. The water pressure at the bottom of the trench is about 1.1 × 108 Pa. A steel ball of initial volume 0.32 m3 is dropped into the ocean and falls to the bottom of the trench. What is the change in the volume of the ball when it reaches the bottom? (K = 1.6 × 1011 N/m2)
Answer:
Given: V = 0.32 m3, K = 1.6 × 1011 N/m2,
PW= 1.1 × 108 Pa, Patm = 1.01 × 105 Pa
∴ dP = PW – Patm = 1.1 × 108 – 1.01 × 105 ≈ 1.1 × 108 Pa
As, bulk modulus is given as,
K = V × \(\frac{d P}{d V}\)
∴ dV = \(\frac{\mathrm{V} \times \mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}}\) = \(\frac{\left(1.1 \times 10^{8}\right) \times 0.32}{1.6 \times 10^{11}}\)
∴ dV = 2.2 × 10-4 m3
The change in the volume of the ball when it reaches the bottom will be 2.2 × 10-4 m3.

Question 64.
Two spheres A and B having same volume are dropped from same height in ocean. Sphere A is made up of brass and sphere B is made up of steel. Will there be same change in volume of spheres at a certain depth inside water? What will be the ratio of change in volumes of the two spheres at this depth?
Answer:

  1. Brass and copper have different elastic moduli. Hence, there won’t be same change in the volume of spheres at a certain depth inside water.
  2. As two spheres are dropped from same height and are at same depth in water pressure exerted on them remains same.
    ∴ dPA = dPB = dP
    VA = VB = V
  3. If dVA and dVB be the change in volume of two spheres A and B then,
    dVA = \(\frac{\mathrm{V} \mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{A}}}\) and dVB = \(\frac{\mathrm{V} \mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}}}\)
  4. Ratio of change in volume,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 40
    where, KA and KB are bulk modulus of material of spheres A and B respectively.

Question 65.
What is the basis of deciding the thickness of metallic ropes used in crane to lift the heavy weight?
Answer:

  1. The thickness of the metallic ropes used in cranes is decided on the basis of the elastic limit of the material of the rope and the factor of safety.
  2. To lift a load upto 104 kg, the rope is made for a factor of safety of 10.
  3. It should not break even when a load of (original load × factor of safety = 104 × 10) 105 kgf i.e., 105 × 9.8 N is applied on it.
  4. If ‘r’ is the radius of the rope, then maximum stress = \(\frac{10^{5}}{\pi r^{2}}\).
  5. The maximum stress (ultimate stress) should not exceed the breaking stress (5 to 20 × 108 N/m2) as well as elastic limit of steel Ys(30 × 107 N/m2).
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 41
  6. In order to have flexibility, the rope is made up of large number of thin wires twisted together.

Question 66.
Multiple choice questions

Which one of the following substances possesses the highest elasticity?
(A) Rubber
(B) Glass
(C) Steel
(D) Copper
Answer:
(C) Steel

Question 1.
S.I unit of stress is
(A) Newton/ metre
(B) Newton/ metre2
(C) Newton2/metre
(D) Newton/metre3
Answer:
(B) Newton/ metre2

Question 2.
A wire is stretched to double of its length. The strain is
(A) 2
(B) 1
(C) zero
(D) 0.5
Answer:
(B) 1

Question 3.
A and B are two steel wires and the radius of A is twice that of B. If they are stretched by the same load, then the stress on B is ____.
(A) four times that of A
(B) two times that of A
(C) three times that of A
(D) same as that of A
Answer:
(A) four times that of A

Question 4.
Two wires of the same material have radii rA and rB respectively. The radius of wire A is twice the radius of wire B. If they are stretched by same load then stress on wire B is ___
(A) equal to that of A
(B) half that of A.
(C) two times that of A.
(D) four times that of A.
Answer:
(D) four times that of A.

Question 5.
The length of a wire increases by 1% by a load of 2 kg wt. The linear strain produced in the wire will be
(A) 0.02
(B) 0.001
(C) 0.01
(D) 0.002
Answer:
(C) 0.01

Question 6.
A wire of length ‘L’, radius ‘r’ when stretched with a force ‘F’ changes in length by l’. What will be the change in length of a wire of same material having length ‘2L’ radius ‘2r and stretched by a force ‘2F’?
(A) l/2
(B) l
(C) 2l
(D) 4l
Answer:
(B) l

Question 7.
A force of 100 N produces a change of 0.1% in a length of wire of area of cross section 1 mm2. Young’s modulus of the wire is ____
(A) 105 N/m2
(B) 109 N/m2
(C) 1011 N/m2
(D) 1012 N/m2
Answer:
(C) 1011 N/m2

Question 8.
A copper wire (Y = 1 × 1011 N/m2) of length 6 m and a steel wire (Y = 2 × 1011 N/m2) of length 4 m each of cross-section 10-5 m2 are fastened end to end and stretched by a tension of 100 N. The elongation produced in the copper wire is
(A) 0.2 mm
(B) 0.4 mm
(C) 0.6 mm
(D) 0.8 mm
Answer:
(C) 0.6 mm

Question 9.
When a force is applied to the free end of a metal wire, metal wire undergoes
(A) longitudinal and lateral extension.
(B) longitudinal extension and lateral contraction.
(C) longitudinal contraction and lateral extension.
(D) longitudinal and lateral contraction.
Answer:
(B) longitudinal extension and lateral contraction.

Question 10.
A force of 1 N doubles the length of a cord having cross-sectional area 1 mm2. The Young’s modulus of the material of cord is
(A) 1 N m-2
(B) 0.5 × 106 N m-2
(C) 106 N m-2
(D) 2 × 106 N m-2
Answer:
(C) 106 N m-2

Question 11.
In equilibrium the tensile stress to which a wire of radius r is subjected by attaching a mass ‘m’ is ____.
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{r}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 \pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\pi \mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Question 12.
When load is applied to a wire, the extension is 3 mm, the extension in the wire of same length but half the radius by the same load is
(A) 0.75 mm
(B) 6 mm
(C) 1.5 mm
(D) 12.0 mm
Answer:
(D) 12.0 mm

Question 13.
The S.I. unit of compressibility is ____.
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}^{2}}{\mathrm{~N}}\)
(B) Nm2
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{m}^{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\mathrm{kg}}{\mathrm{m}^{3}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}^{2}}{\mathrm{~N}}\)

Question 14.
When the pressure applied to one litre of a liquid is increased by 2 × 106 N/m2. Its volume decreases by 1 cm3. The bulk modulus of the liquid is
(A) 2 × 109 N/m2
(B) 2 × 103 dyne/cm2
(C) 2 × 103 N/m2
(D) 0.2 × 109 N/m2
Answer:
(A) 2 × 109 N/m2

Question 15.
A cube of aluminium of each side 0.1 m is subjected to a shearing force of 100 N. The top face of the cube is displaced through 0.02 cm with respect to the bottom face. The shearing strain would be
(A) 0.02
(B) 0.1
(C) 0.005
(D) 0.002
Answer:
(D) 0.002

Question 16.
A wire has Poisson’s ratio of 0.5. It is stretched by an external force to produce a longitudinal strain of 2 × 10-3. If the original diameter was 2 mm, the final diameter after stretching is
(A) 2.002 mm
(B) 1.998 mm
(C) 0.98 mm
(D) 1.999 mm
Answer:
(B) 1.998 mm

Question 17.
The compressibility of a substance is the reciprocal of ___.
(A) Young’s modulus
(B) Bulk modulus
(C) Modulus of rigidity
(D) Poisson’s ratio
Answer:
(B) Bulk modulus

Question 18.
For which of the following is the modulus of rigidity highest?
(A) Aluminium
(B) Quartz
(C) Rubber
(D) Water
Answer:
(B) Quartz

Question 19.
An elongation of 0.2% in a wire of cross-section 10-4 m2 causes a tension of 1000 N. Then its Young’s modulus is
(A) 6 × 108 N/m2
(B) 5 × 109 N/m2
(C) 108 N/m2
(D) 107 N/m2
Answer:
(B) 5 × 109 N/m2

Question 20.
Within the elastic limit, the slope of graph between stress against strain gives ____
(A) compressibility
(B) Poisson’s ratio
(C) modulus of elasticity
(D) extension
Answer:
(C) modulus of elasticity

Question 21.
Solids which break or rupture before the elastic limits are called
(A) brittle
(B) ductile
(C) malleable
(D) elastic
Answer:
(A) brittle

Question 22.
Substances which break just after their elastic limit is reached are ___.
(A) ductile
(B) brittle
(C) malleable
(D) plastic
Answer:
(B) brittle

Question 23.
Which of the following substances is ductile?
(A) glass
(B) high carbon steel
(C) Steel
(D) copper
Answer:
(D) copper

Question 24.
The Young’s modulus of a material is 1011 Nm-2 and its Poisson’s ratio is 0.2. The modulus of rigidity of the material is
(A) 0.42 × 1011 N/m2
(B) 0.42 × 1014 N/m2
(C) 0.42 × 1016 N/m2
(D) 0.42 × 1018 N/m2
Answer:
(A) 0.42 × 1011 N/m2

Question 25.
Two pieces of wire A and B of the same material have their lengths in the ratio 1:2, and their diameters are in the ratio 2:1. If they are stretched by the same force, their elongations will be in the ratio
(A) 2 : 1
(B) 1 : 4
(C) 1 : 8
(D) 8 : 1
Answer:
(C) 1 : 8

Question 26.
Young’s modulus of material of wire is ‘Y’ and strain energy per unit volume is ‘E’, then the strain is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 42
Answer:
(C) \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{\mathrm{Y}}}\)

Question 27.
Strain energy per unit volume is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 43
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{(\text { stress })^{2}}{\mathrm{Y}}\)

Question 28.
The strain energy per unit volume of the wire under increasing load is
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (stress)2 × strain
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × stress × (strain)2
(C) 0.5 × stress × strain
(D) 0.5 × (strain)2 × \(\frac{1}{Y}\)
Answer:
(C) 0.5 × stress × strain

Question 29.
The energy stored per unit volume of a strained wire is
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (load) × (extension)
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × \(\frac{Y}{(\text { strain })^{2}}\)
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Y × (strain)2
(D) Stress × strain
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\) × Y × (strain)2

Question 30.
If work done in stretching a wire by 1 mm is 2 J, the work necessary for stretching another wire of same material, but with double the radius and half the length by 1 mm in joule is
(A) 1/4
(B) 4
(C) 8
(D) 16
Answer:
(D) 16

Question 31.
When the load on a wire is slowly increased from 3 to 5 kg wt, the elongation increases from 0.61 to 1.02 mm. The work done during the extension of wire is
(A) 0.16 J
(B) 0.016 J
(C) 1.6 J
(D) 16 J
Answer:
(B) 0.016 J

Question 32.
A body lies on a table. Its weight is balanced by the ___.
(A) frictional force
(B) normal force
(C) force causing motion on the body
(D) surface of the table
Answer:
(B) normal force

Question 33.
The friction that exists between the surface of two bodies in contact when one body is sliding over the other, is called ___.
(A) rolling friction
(B) friction
(C) kinetic friction
(D) static friction.
Answer:
(C) kinetic friction

Question 34.
Limiting force of static friction does NOT depend on
(A) actual area of contact.
(B) geometrical area of contact.
(C) interlocking between surfaces in contact.
(D) intermolecular forces of attraction between molecules of the two surfaces.
Answer:
(C) interlocking between surfaces in contact.

Question 35.
In case of coefficient of static friction (µs), kinetic friction (µk) and rolling friction (µr), which of the following relation is true
(A) µs > µk > µr
(B) µs > µr > µk
(C) µr > µs > µk
(D) µr > µk > µs
Answer:
(A) µs > µk > µr

Question 36.
A body of weight 50 N is placed on a smooth surface. If the force required to move the body on the surface is 30 N, the coefficient of friction is
(A) 0.6
(B) 0.4
(C) 0.3
(D) 0.8
Answer:
(A) 0.6

Question 37.
A wooden block of 50 kg is at rest on the table. A force of 70 N is required to just slide the block. The coefficient of static friction is
(A) \(\frac{6}{7}\)
(B) \(\frac{5}{7}\)
(C) \(\frac{7}{35}\)
(D) \(\frac{1}{7}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{1}{7}\)

Question 38.
When a block of mass M is suspended by a long wire of length L, the length of the wire becomes (L + l). The elastic potential energy stored in the extended wire is:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)Mgl
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\)MgL
(C) Mgl
(D) MgL
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\)Mgl
Hint: elastic potential energy: \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × L = \(\frac{1}{2}\)Mgl

Question 67.
A steel wire having a radius of 2.0 mm, carrying a load of 4 kg, is hanging from a ceiling. Given that g = 3.1 π ms-2, What will be the tensile stress that would be developed
(A) 6.2 × 106 N m-2
(B) 5.2 × 106 N m-2
(C) 3.1 × 106 N m-2
(D) 4.8 × 106 N m-2
Answer:
(C) 3.1 × 106 N m-2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 44

Question 68.
A boy’s catapult is made of rubber cord which is 42 cm long, with 6 mm diameter of cross-section and of negligible mass. The boy keeps a stone weighing 0.02 kg on it and stretches the cord by 20 cm by applying a constant force. When released, the stone flies off with a velocity of 20 ms-1. Neglect the change in the area of cross-section of the cord while stretched. The Young’s modulus of rubber is closest to:
(A) 106 N m-2
(B) 104 N m-2
(C) 108 Nm-2
(D) 103 N m-2
Answer:
(A) 106 N m-2
Hint: d = 6 mm = 0.006 m, l = 42 cm = 0.42 m, ∆l = 20 cm = 0.2 m, m = 0.02 kg, v = 20 m/s
Energy stored in the catapult,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 45

Question 69.
The stress-strain curves are drawn for two different materials X and Y. It is observed that the ultimate strength point and the fracture point are close to each other for material X but are far apart for material Y. We can say that materials X and Y are likely to be (respectively),
(A) Plastic and ductile
(B) Ductile and brittle
(C) Brittle and ductile
(D) Brittle and plastic
Answer:
(C) Brittle and ductile
Hint: Ductile materials have a fracture strength lower than the ultimate Tensile strength (i.e., the points are far apart.) whereas in brittle materials, the fracture strength is equivalent to ultimate tensile strength (i.e., the points are close.)
∴ Material X is brittle and Y is ductile in nature.

Question 70.
The compressibility of water is ‘o’ per unit atmospheric pressure. The decrease in its volume ‘V’ due to atmospheric pressure ‘P’ will be
(A) \(\frac{\sigma \mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\sigma P}{\mathrm{~V}}\)
(C) σPV
(D) \(\frac{\sigma}{\mathrm{PV}}\)
Answer:
(C) σPV

Question 71.
Two wires are made of the same material and have the same volume. The first wire has cross-sectional area A and the second wire has cross-sectional area 3A. If the length of the first wire is increased by ∆l on applying a force F, how much force is needed to stretch the second wire by the same amount?
(A) 9 F
(B) 6 F
(C) 4 F
(D) F
Answer:
(A) 9 F
Hint: As material is same, Young’s modulus of two wires is same.
Also, volume of both wires is same.
V1 = V2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 46

Question 72.
A solid sphere of radius r made of a soft material of bulk modulus K is surrounded by a liquid in a cylindrical container. A massless piston of area a floats on the surface of the liquid, covering entire cross section of cylindrical container. When a mass m is placed on the surface of the piston to compress the liquid, the fractional decrement in the radius of the sphere, \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{dr}}{\mathrm{r}}\right)\),is:
where negative sign indicates volume decreases with increase in pressure.
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathbf{3} \mathrm{Ka}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathrm{Ka}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{Ka}}{\mathrm{mg}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\mathrm{Ka}}{3 \mathrm{mg}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\mathbf{3} \mathrm{Ka}}\)
Hint:
Bulk modulus is given as,
K = \(\left(\frac{-\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dV} / \mathrm{V}}\right)\)
where negative sign indicates volume decreases with increase in pressure.
∴ Fractional decrease in volume will be,
\(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{K}}\)
If area of cross-section of cylinder is a, then,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 47

Question 73.
Two metal wires ‘P’ and ‘Q’ of same length and material are stretched by same load. Their masses are in the ratio m1 : m2. The ratio of elongations of wire ‘P’ to that of’Q’ is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 48
Answer:
(C) m2 : m1
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 6 Mechanical Properties of Solids 49

Question 74.
The increase in energy of a metal bar of length ‘L’ and cross-sectional area ‘A’ when compressed with a load ‘M’ along its length is (Y = Young’s modulus of the material of metal bar)
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{2 \mathrm{AY}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{F}^{2} \mathbf{L}}{\mathbf{2 A Y}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{AY}}\)
(D) \(\frac{F^{2} L^{2}}{2 A Y}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{F}^{2} \mathbf{L}}{\mathbf{2 A Y}}\)
Hint:
U = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × l
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × F × \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{AY}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}^{2} \mathrm{~L}}{2 \mathrm{AY}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Infectious stage of Plasmodium is …………………
(a) trophozoite
(b) sporozoite
(c) cryptozoite
(d) metacercaria
Answer:
(b) sporozoite

Question 2.
After birth, antibodies are transferred from mother to infant through …………………
(a) colostrum
(b) placenta
(c) blood
(d) tissue fluid
Answer:
(a) colostrum

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 3.
Which cells give rise to T-lymphocytes?
(a) Thymocytes
(b) Bone marrow cells
(c) Erythrocytes
(d) Leucocytes
Answer:
(a) Thymocytes

Question 4.
Where is antigen D is present?
(a) On Rhesus factor
(b) On the surface of RBCs
(c) On A-antigen
(d) On AB-antigen
Answer:
(b) On the surface of RBCs

Question 5.
Erythroblastosis foetalis is caused when mother is …………………
(a) Rh +ve
(b) with antibody ‘a’
(c) Rh -ve
(d) with antibody ‘b’
Answer:
(c) Rh -ve

Question 6.
Which of the following is NOT a parasitic vector insect?
(a) Mosquito
(b) Housefly
(c) Honey bee
(d) Head louse
Answer:
(c) Honey bee

Question 7.
Which is the proper sequence in the developmental stages of Plasmodium?
(a) Merozoites → Sporozoite → Trophozoites → Schizonts
(b) Trophozoites → Merozoites → Sporozoite → Schizonts
(c) Sporozoite → Merozoites → Trophozoites → Schizonts
(d) Schizonts → Merozoites → Sporozoite → Trophozoites.
Answer:
(c) Sporozoite → Merozoites → Trophozoites → Schizonts

Question 8.
There is no vaccination on this disease till today.
(a) Typhoid
(b) Tuberculosis
(c) Polio
(d) AIDS
Answer:
(d) AIDS

Question 9.
Charas, hashish, ganja are obtained from …………………
(a) Papaver somnijerum
(b) Erythroxylum coca
(c) Atropa belladorta
(d) Cannabis sativa
Answer:
(d) Cannabis sativa

Question 10.
………………. Plant is used to obtain cocaine alkaloid.
(a) Marijuana
(b) Papaver somntferum
(c) Cannabis sativa
(d) Coca
Answer:
(d) Coca

Question 11.
………………… fish is released in the waterbody to prevent the spread of Malaria and Filaria.
(a) Pomfret
(b) Tilapia
(c) Gambusia
(d) Gold fish
Answer:
(c) Gambusia

Question 12.
The carcinogen that can cause vaginal cancer is …………………
(a) Vinyl chloride
(b) Diethylstilboestrol
(c) Mustard gas
(d) Cadmium oxide
Answer:
(b) Diethylstilboestrol

Question 13.
Prostate cancer can be caused due to exposure to …………………
(a) cadmium oxide
(b) mustard gas
(c) asbestos
(d) Nickel and chromium compounds
Answer:
(a) cadmium oxide

Question 14.
Choose the correct definition of health …………………
(a) Health is not contracting any disorder or disease.
(b) State of complete physical, mental and social well-being.
(c) Health is complete absence of any disease.
(d) Health is feeling good all the time.
Answer:
(b) State of complete physical, mental and social well-being

Question 15.
The interval between infection and appearance of disease symptoms is called …………………
(a) inoculation
(b) penetration
(c) infection period
(d) incubation period
Answer:
(d) incubation period

Question 16.
What is injected in vaccination ?
(a) Half killed pathogen
(b) Dead pathogens
(c) Live pathogens
(d) Readymade antibodies
Answer:
(a) Half killed pathogen

Question 17.
Who among the following is considered as father of immunology ?
(a) Ferdinand Kohn
(b) Robert Koch
(c) Louis Pasteur
(d) Edward Jenner
Answer:
(d) Edward Jenner

Question 18.
Who coined the term antibiotics ?
(a) Charles Darwin
(b) Louis Pasteur
(c) Alexander Fleming
(d) Selman Waksman
Answer:
(d) Selman Waksman

Question 19.
Who coined the term antibody?
(a) Selman Waksman
(b) Alexander Fleming
(c) Paul Ehrlich
(d) Edward Jenner
Answer:
(c) Paul Ehrlich

Question 20.
Widal test is used for the diagnosis of …………………
(a) Malaria
(b) Typhoid
(c) Diabetes mellitus
(d) HIV/AIDS
Answer:
(b) Typhoid

Question 21.
Which bacterial genus out of the following is the common pathogen causing pneumonia ?
(a) Streptococcus sps
(b) Lactobacillus sps
(c) Pseudomonas sps
(d) Salmonella sps
Answer:
(a) Streptococcus sps

Question 22.
Given below are some statements. Which among them are symptoms of pneumonia ?
(i) Greenish, yellow sputum coughed out.
(ii) Hepatomegaly and hypoglycemia.
(iii) High fever with shaking chills.
(iv) Thickening of skin and underlying tissues.
(v) Stabbing chest pain with shortness of breath.
(vi) Mood swings and joint pains along with nausea and vomiting.
(a) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)
(b) (i), (iii), (v), (vi)
(c) (i), (ii), (iv), (vi)
(d) (ii), (iii), (iv), (v)
Answer:
(b) (i), (hi), (v), (vi)

Question 23.
Which of the following is not the common way to prevent common cold ?
(a) Using hand sanitizers
(b) Blowing nose in open
(c) Staying away from people suffering from cold
(d) Sipping warm water
Answer:
(b) Blowing nose in open

Question 24.
Common cold is not cured by antibiotics because it is …………………
(a) caused by a virus
(b) caused by a Gram-positive bacterium
(c) caused by a Gram-negative bacterium
(d) not an infectious disease
Answer:
(a) caused by a virus

Question 25.
Motile zygote of Plasmodium occurs in …………………
(a) gut of female Anopheles
(b) salivary glands of Anopheles
(c) Human RBCs
(d) Human liver
Answer:
(a) gut of female Anopheles

Question 26.
Haemozoin is …………………
(a) a precursor of haemoglobin
(b) a toxin from Streptococcus
(c) a toxin from Plasmodium
(d) a toxin from Hemophilus
Answer:
(c) a toxin from Plasmodium

Question 27.
Vaccination against malaria is not possible because …………………
(a) they produce antibodies and antitoxins
(b) they do not produce antibodies and antitoxins
(c) antibodies resistant to vaccines are produced
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) they do not produce antibodies and antitoxins

Question 28.
The active form of Entamoeba histolytica feeds upon …………………
(a) blood only
(b) erythrocytes, mucosa and submucosa of colon
(c) mucosa and submucosa of colon only
(d) food in intestine
Answer:
(b) erythrocytes, mucosa and submucosa of colon

Question 29.
Eating unwashed and raw green leafy vegetables grown along the railway tracks in Mumbai may cause …………………
(a) malaria
(b) influenza
(c) amoebic colitis
(d) ringworm
Answer:
(c) amoebic colitis

Question 30.
Which method of water purification can terminate amoebae ?
(a) Chlorination
(b) Sedimentation
(c) Filtration
(d) Boiling
Answer:
(d) Boiling

Question 31.
Which of the following measures should be taken to control amoebic dysentery ?
(A) Using insecticidal sprays to kill flies.
(B) Not allowing stagnant water to be accumulated over a long time.
(C) To avoid eating uncovered food.
(D) Drinking only boiled water.
(E) Eating plenty of fruits.
(a) (A) (C) (D)
(b) (A) (B) (D)
(c) (B) (C) (E)
(d) (A) (B) (E)
Answer:
(a) (A) (C) (D)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 32.
Which of the following should be avoided for endemic spread of amoebiasis ?
(a) Cleaning bathroom taps and toilet seats with disinfectants.
(b) Washing hands and using hand sanitizers.
(c) Proper sewage disposal and treatment.
(d) Eating uncovered roadside food.
Answer:
(d) Eating uncovered roadside food.

Question 33.
Name the disease in which the genital organs are grossly affected due to infective helminth.
(a) Ascariasis
(b) Ring worm
(c) Scabies
(d) Filariasis
Answer:
(d) Filariasis

Question 34.
Find the odd organism:
(a) Wuchereria bancrofti
(b) Brugia malayi
(c) Brugia timori
(d) Ascaris lumbricoides
Answer:
(d) Ascaris lumhricoides

Question 35.
When is hydrocele formed in a man ?
(a) When testis are not functioning properly.
(b) When scrotum is infected with filarial worms.
(c) When testis are injured due to accident.
(d) When there is water accumulation in testis.
Answer:
(b) When scrotum is infected with filarial worms

Question 36.
Which medicine is used for eradicating microfilariae from endemic areas ?
(a) Diethyle carbamacine
(b) Mebendazole
(c) Albendazole
(d) Rimfampcin
Answer:
(a) Diethyle carbamacine

Question 37.
Which of the following fungi are causative organisms of ringworm ?
(a) Microsporum
(b) Candida
(c) Thrush
(d) Tinea pedis
Answer:
(a) Microsporum

Question 38.
On which material present on the outer skin surfaces of the human body does the fungus causing infections feed on ?
(a) Melanin
(b) Keratin
(c) Lignin
(d) Suberin
Answer:
(b) Keratin

Question 39.
Which of the following statements is correct ?
(a) Fungus grows well on dry skin.
(b) Fungus cannot survive on the outside of the hair shafts.
(c) Fungus thrives well on the warm and moist skin.
(d) Nails can never show fungal infections.
Answer:
(c) Fungus thrives well on the warm and moist skin.

Question 40.
Which of the following pair is viral diseases ?
(a) Common cold, AIDS
(b) Dysentery, Common cold
(c) Typhoid, Tuberculosis
(d) Ringworm, AIDS
Answer:
(a) Common cold, AIDS

Question 41.
Which one of the following glands is often referred in relation with AIDS ?
(a) Thymus
(b) Adrenal
(c) Thyroid
(d) Pancreas
Answer:
(a) Thymus

Question 42.
The first patient of AIDS was detected in India in …………………
(a) 1980
(b) 1986
(c) 1990
(d) 1996
Answer:
(b) 1986

Question 43.
Why is it said that for AIDS prevention is the only cure ?
(a) AIDS does not have any cure, once it is contracted.
(b) By prevention AIDS cannot be cured.
(c) AIDS can be cured by proper medication and vaccination.
(d) Only prevention helps as there is no cure for AIDS.
Answer:
(d) Only prevention helps as there is no cure for AIDS.

Question 44.
After a person is detected to be having AIDS by ELISA test, which is the next confirmatory test ?
(a) Western blot
(b) Southern blot
(c) PCR
(d) Northern blot
Answer:
(a) Western blot

Question 45.
What is full form of ELISA ?
(a) Enzyme Linked Inductive Assay
(b) Enzyme Linked Iron Sorbent Assay
(c) Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Enzyme Linked Immunosorbent Assay

Question 46.
The possible ways of transmission of AIDS are …………………
(A) Intimate sexual contact
(B) Hugging and kissing
(C) Blood transfusion without properly checking it
(D) Eating from the same plate
(E) Sharing bed linen
(F) Transplacental infection from infected mother
(G) Sharing same tattoo gun and syringes
(a) (A), (C), (F), (G)
(b) (B), (D), (E), (G)
(c) (C), (D), (E), (F)
(d) (A), (B), (C), (D)
Answer:
(a) (A), (C), (F), (G)

Question 47.
Which one of the following statements is correct ?
(a) Benign tumours show the property of metastasis.
(b) Heroin accelerates body functions.
(c) Malignant tumours may exhibit metastasis.
(d) Patients who have undergone surgery are given cannabinoids to relieve pain.
Answer:
(c) Malignant tumours may exhibit metastasis.

Question 48.
Heroin or smack is chemically …………………
(a) diclofenac
(b) diacetyl morphine
(c) benzodiazepine
(d) amphetamines
Answer:
(b) diacetyl morphine

Question 49.
Ecstasy is a drug that is used in most of the Rev parties which is chemically a derivative of …………………
(a) Barbiturates
(b) Amphetamines
(c) Catecholamine
(d) Morphine
Answer:
(b) Amphetamines

Question 50.
From which plant is charas obtained?
(a) Cannabis sativa
(b) Erythroxylum coca
(c) Papaver somniferum
(d) Atropa belladonna
Answer:
(a) Cannabis sativa

Question 51.
Opium is obtained from the latex of the unripe fruits of …………………
(a) Cannabis sativa
(b) Thea siensis
(c) Papaver somniferum
(d) Erythroxylon coca
Answer:
(c) Papaver somniferum

Question 52.
Use of Cannabis products results in …………………
(a) depressed brain activity and feeling of calmness
(b) suppressed brain function and relief of pain
(c) stimulation of nervous system, increased alertness and activity
(d) alteration in perception, thoughts and feelings
Answer:
(d) alteration in perception, thoughts and feelings

Question 53.
Marijuana, ganja and LSD are …………………
(a) narcotics
(b) stimulants
(c) hallucinogens
(d) all of these
Answer:
(c) hallucinogens

Question 54.
What is the source of LSD ?
(a) Poppy seeds
(b) Datura plant
(c) Sugar
(d) Claviceps purpurea
Answer:
(d) Claviceps purpurea

Question 55.
Narcotics are …………………
(a) amphetamines and caffeine
(b) morphine and heroine
(c) LSD and cocaine
(d) barbiturates and benzodiazepine
Answer:
(b) morphine and heroine

Question 56.
Which is an incorrectly matched pair ?
(a) LSD – Ergot fungus
(b) Heroin – Opium
(c) Amphetamines – Depressant
(d) Benzodiazepine – Calmpose tablets
Answer:
(c) Amphetamines – Depressant

Question 57.
Choose the incorrect statement
(a) The excessive use of anabolic steroids cause severe acne.
(b) In both the sexes there is increased aggressiveness and mood swings, due to steroids.
(c) In females, anabolic steroids cause breast enlargement.
(d) In males, anabolic steroids cause enlargement of prostate gland.
Answer:
(c) In females, anabolic steroids cause breast enlargement.

Question 58.
Who are the first ones to note the danger signs of drug or alcohol abuse in the adolescents ?
(a) Alert parents and teachers
(b) Neighbours
(c) Relatives
(d) Doctors
Answer:
(a) Alert parents and teachers

Question 59.
Who can give professional help for the deaddiction?
(a) Highly qualified psychiatrist
(b) Parents
(c) Teachers
(d) Friends
Answer:
(a) Highly qualified psychiatrist

Match the columns

Question 1.

Column I Column II
(a) Metchnikoff (i) ABO Blood group system
(b) Fleming (ii) Concept of immunity
(c) Edward Jenner (iii) Phagocytic cells
(d) Karl Lands teiner (iv) Lysozyme

Answer:

Column I Column II
(a) Metchnikoff (iii) Phagocytic cells
(b) Fleming (iv) Lysozyme
(c) Edward Jenner (ii) Concept of immunity
(d) Karl Lands teiner (i) ABO Blood group system

Question 2.

Disease Vector species
(a) Dengue (i) Anopheles
(b) Malaria (ii) Housefly
(c) Filaria (iii) Culex
(d) Typhoid (iv) Aedes

Answer:

Disease Vector species
(a) Dengue (iv) Aedes
(b) Malaria (i) Anopheles
(c) Filaria (iii) Culex
(d) Typhoid (ii) Housefly

Classify the following to form Column B as per the category given in Column A

Question 1.
Benzyl penicillin, Chloromycetin, Mebendazole, Levamisole, Pyrimethamine Ampicillin, Ty21a vaccine, Sulfadoxine.

Column A (Disease) Column B (Treatment)
(1) Pneumonia ————–
(2) Malaria ————–
(3) Ascariasis ————–
(4) Typhoid ————–

Answer:

Column A (Disease) Column B (Treatment)
(1) Pneumonia Benzyl penicillin, Ampicillin
(2) Malaria Pyrimethamine, Sulfadoxine
(3) Ascariasis Mebendazole, Levamisole
(4) Typhoid Chloromycetin, Ty21a vaccine

Question 2.
Lung cancer, Pituitary, Spleen, Skin cancer, Cancer of adipose tissue, lymph nodes, Adrenal, Bone tumour.

Column (A Type of cancer) Column B (Organs affected)
(1) Carcinoma ————–
(2) Sarcoma ————–
(3) Lymphoma ————–
(4) Adenocarcinoma ————–

Answer:

Column (A Type of cancer) Column B (Organs affected)
(1) Carcinoma Lung cancer, Skin cancer
(2) Sarcoma Cancer of adipose tissue, Bone tumour
(3) Lymphoma Spleen, Lymph nodes
(4) Adenocarcinoma Pituitary, Adrenal

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
By which process T-cells and B-cells are produced?
Answer:
T-cells and B-cells are produced from the stem cells called haemocytoblasts, in bone marrow of adults and in liver of the foetus, by the process of haematopoiesis and in the bone marrow in adult.

Question 2.
What is a hinge?
Answer:
Hinge is the region of Y-shaped structure, holding arms and stem of antibody where four polypeptide chains of antibody are held together by disulfide bonds (-s-s-) to form a ‘Y’-shaped structure.

Question 3.
What is epitope?
Answer:
Epitope is antigenic determinant, which is present on antigens.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 4.
What is paratope?
Answer:
Paratope is antigen binding site that is present on the antibodies.

Question 5.
Which antigen is present in Rh +ve person?
Answer:
Antigen D is present in Rh +ve person.

Question 6.
Give the role of flushing action of lachrymal secretions.
Answer:
The conjunctiva is freed from foreign particles by the flushing action of lachrymal secretions.

Question 7.
What happens when lachrymal secretion is absent in eyes?
Answer:
Eyes become susceptible to infection when lachrymal secretion is absent.

Question 8.
In tears which antibacterial substance is present?
Answer:
Lysozyme is the antibacterial substance present in the tears.

Question 9.
Which kind of immunity is provided by vaccination?
Answer:
Artificial acquired active and passive immunity is provided by vaccination.

Question 10.
Who was Edward Jenner?
Answer:
Edward Jenner was the British scientist who developed cowpox vaccine for the protection against small pox virus.

Question 11.
Mrunmayi is called universal blood acceptor. What is her blood group?
Answer:
Blood group of Mrunmayi is AB.

Question 12.
What are antigens?
Answer:
Different foreign substances that invade the body and are capable of stimulating an immune response are called antigens.

Question 13.
In which animal Rh factor was discovered at first?
Answer:
Rh factor was first discovered in Rhesus monkey for the first time.

Question 14.
What is elephantiasis?
Answer:
Elephantiasis is one of the symptoms of lymphatic filariasis, in which there is thickening of skin and underlying tissues due to presence of malarial parasite.

Question 15.
What is dermatophytosis ?
Answer:
Dermatophytosis is a clinical condition in which fungal infection of skin occur in humans, pets and cattle which is commonly called as ringworm.

Question 16.
What is sporozoite?
Answer:
Sporozoite is a developmental stage of Plasmodium produced by rupture of oocyst. Sporozoite can enter the bloodstream in human body and then infect hepatocytes or liver cells, where they multiply into merozoites.

Question 17.
Why does male mosquito not spread Malaria?
Answer:
Male mosquito feed only on plant sap and not blood of human beings; therefore it does not spread Malaria.

Question 18.
Where does Plasmodium reproduce asexually?
Answer:
Plasmodium reproduce asexually in the liver cells and red blood cells of infected human being.

Question 19.
Where does Plasmodium reproduce sexually?
Answer:
Plasmodium undergoes sexual reproduction by the process of fertilization and development in the intestine of mosquito.

Question 20.
Which fish can be used for mosquito control?
Answer:
Gambusia fish can be used for mosquito control.

Question 21.
What is arthralgia?
Answer:
Arthralgia means joint pains.

Question 22.
What do you mean by hepatomegaly?
Answer:
Hepatomegaly means enlargement of liver.

Question 23.
Which organism yields LSD?
Answer:
Ergot fungus, Claviceps purpurea yield LSD.

Question 24.
Enlist various types of barriers which prevent entry of foreign agents into the body.
Answer:

  1. Epithelial surface
  2. Antimicrobial substances in blood and tissues
  3. Cellular factors in innate immunity
  4. Fever
  5. Acute phase proteins (APPs).

Question 25.
Which is the gastro-intestinal disease by which 15% Indian population is affected?
Answer:
Amoebiasis or amoebic dysentery is the gastro-intestinal disease by which 15% Indian population is affected.

Question 26.
What are the anti-helminthic drugs which are used in treatment of Ascariasis?
Answer:
Anti-helminthic drugs like Piperazine, Mebendazole, Levamisole, Pyrantel are used against Ascaris lumbricoidies.

Question 27.
Which are the diseases that can be avoided by eradication of mosquitoes in your area?
Answer:
Malaria, dengue, chikungunya and filariasis or elephantiasis can be avoided by eradication of mosquitoes.

Define the following

Question 1.
Serology
Answer:
A branch of immunology which deals with the study of antigen-antibody interactions is called serology.

Question 2.
Hygiene
Answer:
Hygiene is the science of health, which aims at preserving, maintaining and improving the health of an individual or the community as a whole.

Question 3.
Disease
Answer:
Disease is a condition of disrupted or deranged functioning of one or more organs or systems of the body caused due to infection, detective diet or heredity.

Question 4.
Immune system
Answer:
The system which protects us from various infectious agents is called immune system.

Question 5.
Resistance
Answer:
Resistance is an ability to ward off damage or disease through our defence mechanism.

Question 6.
Immunity
Answer:
The immunity is defined as the general ability of a body to recognize and neutralize or destroy and eliminate foreign substances or resist a particular infection or disease.

Question 7.
Antibody
Answer:
The protective chemicals produced by immune cells in response to antigens is called antibodies.

Question 8.
Opsonisation
Answer:
The process of coating of bacteria to facilitate their subsequent phagocytosis by macrophages is called opsonisation.

Question 9.
Pathogen
Answer:
Pathogen are living agents such as viruses, ricketssia, bacteria, fungi, protozoans, helminth and certain insect larvae which are capable of causing diseases.

Question 10.
Parasite
Answer:
An organism that lives in or on another organism called host and takes its nourishment from it (host) is called parasite.

Question 11.
Pathogenicity
Answer:
The ability of an organism to enter a host and cause a disease is called pathogenicity.

Question 12.
Infectious disease
Answer:
The disease which is transmitted from infected person to another healthy person either directly or indirectly is called infectious disease or communicable disease.

Question 13.
Non-infectious disease
Answer:
The disease that cannot be transmitted from one infected person to another healthy person, either directly or indirectly is called non infectious or non-communicable disease.

Question 14.
Innate immunity
Answer:
Innate immunity is defined as the resistance to infections that an individual possesses due to his or her genetic make-up and thus it is inborn defence mechanism present naturally in the body.

Question 15.
Acquired immunity
Answer:
The resistance developed during lifetime is called acquired immunity.

Question 16.
APP proteins
Answer:
APP proteins or acute phase proteins are certain collection of plasma proteins which are suddenly increased by the infection caused after injury.

Question 17.
Incubation period
Answer:
Incubation period is the time interval from the invasion of a pathogen to the development of clinical manifestations or symptoms.

Name the following

Question 1.
Name the cell that produces lymphokines.
Answer:
Helper T-cells

Question 2.
Blood group systems in human beings.
Answer:
ABO, Rh, Duffy, Kidd, Lewis, P MNS, Bombay blood group.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 3.
Types of sarcoma.
Answer:

  1. Osteosarcoma (bone)
  2. Myosarcoma (muscle)
  3. Chondrosarcoma (cartilage)
  4. Liposarcoma (adipose tissue)

Question 4.
Therapies used for treatment of cancer.
Answer:

  1. Chemotherapy
  2. Radiotherapy
  3. Surgery
  4. Immunotherapy
  5. Supportive therapy

Question 5.
Name the term for the transmission of HIV from pregnant mother to foetus.
Answer:
Transplacental.

Question 6.
Factors that maintain good health.
Answer:

  1. Balanced diet
  2. Personal hygiene
  3. Regular exercise
  4. Right attitude of mind
  5. Good habits.

Question 7.
Two examples of ascaricides.
Answer:
Mebendazole and Albendazole, etc.

Question 8.
Two vaccines for typhoid.
Answer:

  1. Oral Ty21a
  2. Injectable Typhoid polysaccharide vaccine or Typhium vi/ Typherix.

Question 9.
Parasites causing lymphatic filariasis.
Answer:

  1. Wuchereria bancrojti
  2. Brugiamalayi
  3. Brugia timori.

Question 10.
Parasites causing Subcutaneous Filariasis.
Answer:

  1. Loa loa
  2. Mansonella spp.

Question 11.
Name the scientists who discovered AB blood group?
Answer:
Decastallo and Sturti

Distinguish between the following

Question 1.
Inborn immunity and acquired immunity.
Answer:

Inborn Immunity Acquired Immunity
1. Inborn immunity or innate immunity is also called natural immunity. 1. Acquired immunity is also called adaptive immunity.
2. Innate immunity is present right from the birth. 2. Acquired immunity is not present at birth, but is acquired during lifetime of the individual.
3. Inborn immunity does not depend upon the previous exposure to a pathogen or foreign substance. 3. Acquired immunity always depends upon the previous exposure to a pathogen or foreign substance.
4. It is non-specific immunity as it can offer resistance to any pathogen. 4. It is specific immunity as it can offer resistance only to a particular pathogen.
5. Innate immunity consists of various types of barriers for defence against the pathogens. 5. Acquired immunity consists of various types of cells which are able to produce antibodies.
6. Inborn immunity shows immediate effect in the body. 6. Acquired immunity requires several days to become activated.
7. Inborn immunity is seen in all animals. 7. Acquired immunity is seen only in vertebrates.
8. Inborn immunity is genetic in nature and is heritable. 8. Acquired immunity is non-genetic in nature and is non-heritable.

Question 2.
Communicable and non-communicable diseases.
Answer:

Communicable diseases Non-communicable diseases
1. Diseases transmitted from infected person to healthy person are called communicable or infectious diseases. 1. Diseases that are not passed from one person to other are non-communicable or non-infectious diseases.
2. Communicable diseases spread through pathogens. 2. Non-communicable diseases do not spread through pathogens.
3. Communicable diseases are not inherited from parental generation to offspring. 3. Non-communicable diseases like cancer can be from parental generation to offspring.
4. Vectors play the major role in spreading disease from one person to another. 4. Caused due to allergy, illness, malnutrition or abnormalities in cell proliferation, changes in lifestyle, environment play a significant role.
5. Treated by conventional methods using antibiotics and other drugs. 5. Treated conservatively for a long time or surgically.
6. Diseases are acute which develop suddenly due to infections.

E.g. Pneumonia, Tuberculosis, AIDS, Typhoid, Cholera, Malaria.

6. Diseases are chronic which develop and persist for a long time.
E.g. Cancer, Rickets, Allergies, Kwashiorkor, Diabetes, Heart disease, etc.

Question 3.
Ascariasis and Filariasis.
Answer:

Ascariasis Filariasis
1. Only one species Ascaris lumbricoid.es cause ascariasis. 1. There are many species of nematode that can cause filariasis.
2. Ascaris causes the infection of alimentary canal. 2. Wuchereria bancrofti causes the infection of lymphatic system.
3. Ascaris does not cause swellings of upper and lower limbs. 3. Filariasis cause swellings of extremities.
4. Ascaris is caused due to faeco-oral transmission. 4. Filariasis is caused due to vector transmission (Culex mosquito).
5. Medicines for treatment of Ascariasis are Piperazine, Mebendazole, Levamisole, Pyrantel. 5. Medicines for treatment of filariasis are diethyl- carbamazine citrate.

Short answer questions

Question 1.
Despite constant exposure to variety of pathogens, why do most of us remain healthy?
Answer:

  1. All human beings are exposed to various foreign bodies, including infectious agents like bacteria, viruses, etc. which are called pathogens.
  2. But human body can resist almost all types of these pathogens.
  3. For this purpose, there is immune system which protects us from various infectious agents.
  4. There is resistance and prevention of the damage or disease, through our defence mechanisms.
  5. Thus, despite constant exposure to variety of pathogens, most of us remain healthy.

Question 2.
What are the unique features of acquired immunity?
Answer:
Following are the unique features of acquired immunity:

  1. Specificity : Production of specific antibody or T-lymphocyte against a particular antigen/ pathogen is called specificity.
  2. Diversity : Ability to recognize vast variety of diverse pathogens or foreign molecules by immunity is called diversity.
  3. Discrimination between self and non¬self : Acquired immunity can differentiate between own body cells (self) and foreign (non-self) molecules.
  4. Memory : The first immune response upon encounter of a specific foreign agent and its elimination is retained as a memory. This results in quicker and stronger immune response when the same pathogen is encountered again.

Question 3.
Describe the polypeptide chains seen in the structure of an antibody.
Answer:

  1. There are four polypeptide chains which make the antibody.
  2. There are two heavy or H-chains and two light or L-chains.
  3. Each chain has two distinct regions, the variable region and the constant region.
  4. Variable regions carry the antigen binding site or paratope.
  5. This part of antibody recognizes and bindsto the specific antigen to form an antigen- antibody complex.

Question 4.
Which are the antimicrobial substances in blood and tissues?
Answer:

  1. There are more than 30 serum proteins, circulating in the blood in an inactive state, which forms the complement system.
  2. ‘Complement cascade’ is activated by presence of pathogens and thus they eliminate pathogens.
  3. Cells which are affected by viruses secrete interferons which are a class of cytokines. These soluble proteins attack the pathogens.
  4. Some leucocytes stimulate other cells to protect themselves from viral infection.

Question 5.
Is developing fever a bad sign or a good action? Explain.
Answer:

  1. Fever is the innate immunity mechanism. When there is fever, the body rises.
  2. This is in response to infection in a natural way.
  3. Developing fever is a natural defence mechanism.
  4. Fever helps to accelerate the physiological processes by which the invading pathogens are destroyed.
  5. Fever stimulates the production of interferon and helps in recovery from viral infections.
  6. Taking all these points into consideration, getting fever is a good action that innate immunity is working properly, however, entry of pathogen in the body causing illness is a bad sign.

Question 6.
With the help of a chart explain the compatibility of human blood groups.
Answer:
Different types of blood groups:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 1

  1. Person with blood group A can donate blood to persons having blood group A or AB and receive blood from A or O.
  2. Person with blood group B can donate blood to persons having blood group B or AB and receive blood from B or O.
  3. Person with blood group O can donate blood to all the persons having blood group either A, B, AB or O, because blood group O is universal donor. But can receive blood only from person having blood group O.
  4. Person with blood group AB can donate blood to only AB but can receive blood from all the persons having blood group either, A, B, O or AB because AB is universal recipient.

Question 7.
The blood group of Krutika is O Rh +ve. What would be the possible blood groups of her parents?
Answer:

  1. Krutika has O blood group, therefore her genotype is I°I°.
  2. Her parents can be of following combinations.
  3. They may be having blood group A or B with heterozygous genotype respectively, i.e. IAI° and IBI°. If both of them are heterozygous, having either A or B blood group, Krutika can be of O type.
  4. Other possibility is both the parents have to be O.
  5. For being Rh positive, her at least one parent should be Rh positive. Rh negative is a recessive phenotype and hence needs double dose of these genes.

Question 8.
Can a person with blood group O Rh+ve donate blood to a patient with blood group O Rh-ve? Why?
Answer:
No. blood group O may be common to both donor and recipient but their Rh factor is different. A person with RH+ve blood cannot donate to a patient with Rh-ve blood group. In Rh+ve blood there is antigen D. This antigen D when enters the body of recipient, there are production of anti-RH antibodies in his or her body. These anitibodies with cause agglutination of the Rh +ve blood which will be given to the patient. This agglutination will cause clots inside the vital organ of the recipient and the death may follow.

Question 9.
Why do we suffer from common cold repetitively in our life, but other viral diseases like Influenza or Small pox only once?
Answer:
Influenza infection causes production of antibodies in our body, once the virus attacks us. Therefore, second encounter with the virus may not cause effect. But in case of common cold, large number of different virus families are responsible for developing infection of common cold. Many a times different allergens are also inducing agents for common cold. Thus we may suffer from common cold again and again.

Question 10.
What are the symptoms of pneumonia?
Answer:

  1. Main symptoms of infectious pneumonia are cough producing greenish or yellow sputum or phlegm and a high fever with chills.
  2. Shortness of breath, stabbing chest pain, coughing up blood, headaches, sweaty and clammy skin, loss of appetite, fatigue, blueness of the skin, nausea, vomiting, mood swings and joint pains or muscle aches are some other symptoms.

Question 11.
What is the diagnosis and treatment of filariasis? How can we control this disease ?
Answer:
I. Diagnosis and Treatment : For the patient, diethyl-carbamazine citrate is the drug used for twice a day for three weeks. Thereafter for five days every six months the same treatment is repeated. This becomes effective against filarial worms.

II. Prevention and Control:

  1. Mosquito eradication should be done for controlling filariasis.
  2. In the areas with mosquitoes, avoid mosquito bite by using mosquito nets and insect repellents.

Question 12.
What are the signs and symptoms of filariasis?
Answer:
Signs and symptoms of filariasis:

  1. As the lymphatic drainage does not take place, there is oedema with thickening of skin and underlying tissue.
  2. Extremities like legs, arms, breasts, scrotum, etc. are affected by nematode causing lymphatic filariasis, i. e. Wuchereria bancrofti.
  3. Lymph vessels and lymph nodes are enlarged and swollen.
  4. Elephantiasis is seen in which limbs are swollen like legs of elephant.
  5. Lymphoedema, i.e. accumulation of lymph fluid is seen in tissue causing swelling.
  6. Hydrocele condition develops in which testis are enlarged due to accumulation of lymphatic fluid in testis.

Question 13.
What are the various ways in which mosquitoes can be eradicated from any area?
Answer:
Eradication of mosquitoes:

  1. Removal of all stagnant water pools around the houses.
  2. If such water bodies are there, they should be sprayed with insecticides.
  3. But better option which is eco-friendly is releasing mosquito eating fish like Gambusia or Tilapia.
  4. Use of mosquito repellent plants like Citronella. Use of coils and repellent creams.
  5. Fumigation of the area to kill the mosquito.
  6. Aedes sps. breed in man-made containers, especially plastic and cement tanks. Care should therefore be taken to dispose such containers properly. Water should not be accumulated in them.

Question 14.
What precautions will you take if you are travelling in an area which has lot of mosquitoes?
Answer:

  1. Avoiding areas where mosquitoes are in more concentration.
  2. Carrying mosquito repellent creams or coils.
  3. Use of mosquito nets and other fumigation devices.
  4. Wearing full clothing in light colours.
  5. Staying indoors when mosquitoes are swarming, especially in the evening.
  6. Taking anti-malarial pills as a precautionary measure.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 15.
Deaddiction may be difficult but not impossible. Collect information about NGOs, working in the field of deaddiction.
Answer:
There are many NGOs that work in the field of deaddiction. In different cities, there are different organizations. Even the central Government has started helpline number 1800-11-0031 for those drug and alcohol addicts who need help to come out of these addictions. Muktangan in Pune is one such reputed organization which does the great work in the field of deaddiction.

Question 16.
What are the most common warning signs of drug and alcohol abuse among youth ?
Answer:
The most warning signs of addictions are as follows:

  1. Drop in academic performance, absenteeism from school or college.
  2. No interest in personal hygiene and hobbies.
  3. Withdrawal from the society, increased tendency of isolation and depression.
  4. Aggressive and rebellious behaviour resulting into strained relationships with family and friends.
  5. Fatigue and change in sleeping and eating habits.
  6. Fluctuations in weight, appetite, deteriorating health, etc.

Question 17.
What are the preventive measures for malaria?
Answer:
Preventive measures of malaria :

  1. Transmission of malarial parasite can be reduced by preventing mosquito bites. Therefore, mosquitoes should be controlled or totally eradicated.
  2. This can be done by using of mosquito nets and insect repellents.
  3. Mosquito control measures such as spraying insecticides inside houses and draining stagnant water where mosquitoes lay their eggs.
  4. The mosquito larvae can be eradicated by releasing Gambusia fish which can feed upon these larvae.
  5. Vaccine against malaria is also under preparation.

Question 18.
How does Entamoeba histolytica causes amoebiosis ?
Answer:

  1. Amoebiosis is spread through ingestion of the cyst form of Entamoeba histolytica. This is a commensal organism.
  2. Cyst is a semi-dormant and hardy structure found in faeces of infected person.
  3. Non-encysted amoebae are called trophozoites. The trophozoites die quickly after leaving the body but may also be present in faeces.
  4. Trophozoites are rarely the source of new infections.
  5. The infection may remain asymptomatic for many days as Amoeba can remain latent in the gastrointestinal tract.

Question 19.
Describe the signs and symptoms of amoebiasis.
Answer:
Amoebiasis shows following common symptoms:

  1. Diarrhoea, flatulence, stool with mucus and abdominal pains (cramps) are common.
  2. Stool sticky with mucus and blood.
  3. Amoebae form cysts in the liver, in such case there is hepatomegaly, i.e. enlargement of liver.
  4. Liver shows amoebic liver abscess accompanied with fever and pain in right side of the abdomen.

Question 20.
How can amoebiasis be prevented?
Answer:
Prevention of amoebiasis is to be done at two levels, viz. at home and at endemic level.
1. Prevention of the spread of amoebiasis at the home level:

  • Washing hands with soap and water after using the toilet or changing a baby’s diaper and before handling and eating food.
  • Cleaning bathrooms and toilets properly with germicides.
  • Avoiding raw vegetables when in endemic areas where they are grown in soil fertilized by human faeces.
  • Boiling and purifying the drinking water.

2. Prevention of the spread of amoebiasis at endemic level:

  • Avoiding consumption of street foods especially in public places.
  • Following good sanitary practice, as well as using proper sewage disposal or treatment.
  • E. histolytica cysts are usually resistant to chlorination; therefore sedimentation and filtration of water supplies are necessary to reduce the incidence of infection.
  • Avoiding shared towels or face washers.

Question 21.
Describe the symptoms of ascariasis.
Answer:

  1. After infection by Ascaris lumbricoides, there is appearance of eggs in stools in 60 – 70 days.
  2. In larval ascariasis, symptoms are seen in 4-16 days after infection.
  3. The final symptoms are gastrointestinal discomfort, colic and vomiting, fever and appearance of live worms in faeces.
  4. Some patients may have pulmonary symptoms. Inflammation of alveolar walls is seen. This is known as pneumonitis.
  5. Some may show neurological disorders during migration of the larvae.
  6. Loss of appetite which reflects in weight loss.
  7. A bolus of worms may obstruct the intestine.
  8. Larvae that migrate may also cause eosinophilia, i.e. increase in number of eosinophils.

Question 22.
What are the preventive measures against ascariasis?
Answer:

  1. Prevention of ascariasis can be done by adopting the following measures :
  2. Use of proper toilet facilities.
  3. Safe disposal of excreta.
  4. Protection of food from dirt and soil.
  5. Washing of vegetables before cooking and avoiding eating raw, unwashed vegetables and fruits.
  6. Hand washing and use of safe food. Observing personal hygiene.
  7. Use of pharmaceutical drugs such as Mebendazole and Albendazole can kill Ascaris.

Question 23.
Discuss the clinical manifestation of AIDS.
Answer:
There are four stages of clinical manifestations or symptoms of AIDS.

  1. Stage I : This is initial infection with the virus and formation of antibodies, usually 2-8 weeks after initial infection.
  2. Stage II : In this stage the person is asymptomatic carrier. Incubation takes place with a period ranging for 6 months to 10 years.
  3. Stage III : This is called AIDS related complex (ARC). In this stage, one or more of the following clinical signs are seen. E.g. Recurrent fever for longer than one month, fatigue, unexplained diarrhoea, night sweats, shortness of breath, loss of more than 10 per cent body weight, etc.
  4. Stage IV : This is the end stage in which patient shows full blown AIDS. Thus it is called the end stage of HIV infection. Life threatening opportunistic infections (like pneumonia, tuberculosis, Kaposi sarcoma, etc.) are easily caught during this period.

Question 24.
Through which modes HIV infection does not spread?
Answer:

  1. HIV does not spread through casual contact such as hugging, etc.
  2. Insect bite such as mosquito bites does not transmit HIV.
  3. Participation in sports is not the mode by which HIV transmits.
  4. Contact between articles used by AIDS patient, a hand shake with him or her does not transmit HIV
  5. HIV infections do not occur through swimming pool or by sharing clothes, utensils, etc.

Question 25.
Write about laboratory diagnosis and treatment of AIDS.
Answer:
I. Laboratory diagnosis :

  1. There are two tests for diagnosis of AIDS.
  2. First test is ELISA (Enzyme-Linked Immunosorbent Assay) which is used to detect the HIV antibodies.
  3. The second confirmatory test is Western Blot, which is used to weed out any false positive results. It is a highly specific test.
  4. It is based on detecting specific antibody to viral core protein and envelope glycoprotein.

II. Treatment of AIDS:

  1. AIDS cannot be cured.
  2. Antiretroviral drugs are used to reduce the viral load and prolong the life of HIV patient. E.g. Antiretroviral therapy (ART) uses drugs such as TDF (tenofovir), EFV (Efavirenz), Lamivudine (3TC), etc.

Question 26.
Describe the structure of HIV with a suitable diagram.
Answer:

  1. Human Immunodeficiency Virus or HIV is spherical and 100 to 140 nm in diameter.
  2. It has centrally located two ss RNA molecules along with reverse transcriptase enzymes.
  3. There are coverings of two layers of proteins. The outer layer formed by matrix protein (pi7) while in inner layer is of capsid protein (p24).
  4. An additional layer of lipids is seen over the matrix protein layers. This layer is impregnated with glycoprotein GP120 and GP41.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 2

Question 27.
What are the modes of transmission of HIV or AIDS?
Answer:
The transmission of HIV occurs through following routes:

  1. Sexual relations, mainly unsafe sexual contact including oral, vaginal and anal sex.
  2. Through blood and blood products either by blood transfusions or sharing needles and syringes.
  3. Transplacental From pregnant mother to her foetus through placenta. Nursing mother can also transmit HIV to her baby through lactation.
  4. Spreading the virus is very rare in case of accidental needle injury, artificial insemination with infected donated semen and transplantation with infected organs.
  5. HIV is seen in urine, tears, saliva, breast milk and vaginal secretions but unless these body fluids enter the injuries and wounds, transmission is not easy.

Question 28.
What are the measures of prevention and control of AIDS ?
Answer:

  1. Preventive measures : AIDS has no cure, hence prevention is the best choice. The
    following steps help in preventing this dreadful disease.
  2. High risk group people should be educated about HIV transmission. They should never donate blood.
  3. Use of disposable needles and syringes should be done with proper disposal.
  4. Risky sexual habits should be avoided.
  5. Tooth brushes, razors, other articles that can become contaminated with blood should not be shared.
  6. Blood should be screened before receiving it.
  7. Routine screening of blood and semen donors, organ donors (kidney, liver, lung, cornea), and patients undergoing haemodialysis must be done.
  8. Pregnant women or those women who are contemplating pregnancy should be regularly screened.

Question 29.
Explain the ill-effects of opioids and cannabinoids on health.
OR
What are harmful effects of drug abuse?
Answer:

  1. Opioids bind to specific opioid receptors which are present in central nervous system and gastrointestinal tract. Some opioids e.g. heroin act like depressants and slow down all the body functions.
  2. Cannabinoids have the capacity to interact with receptors present in the brain. Inhalation or ingestion of cannabinoids such as marijuana, hashish, charas and ganja have adverse effect on cardiovascular system.
  3. Cannabinoid like LSD causes hallucinations.
  4. All these substances are addictive and hence cause adverse effects on the body and health.

Question 30.
Give the adverse effects of opioids, cannabinoids and morphine on human health.
Answer:
1. Opioids:

  • Opioids bind to specific opioid receptors present in the central nervous system and in gastrointestinal tract.
  • They are depressants and slow down the body functions.

2. Cannabinoids:

  • Cannabinoids interact with receptors in the brain.
  • They affect cardiovascular system of the body.

3. Morphine:

  • Morphine is an effective sedative and pain killer when used for medicinal purpose.
  • When abused it affects physical, physiological and psychological functions.

Give reasons

Question 1.
Vaccines are safe.
Answer:
During their manufacture, vaccines are rigorously tested. Many rounds of study, examination and research are carried out before they are used for general public. Extensive research and evidences are gathered to check their safety. Sometimes, some vaccines produce side effects but these are rare and mild. Hence vaccines are considered to be safe.

Question 2.
Innate immunity is also known as non-specific immunity.
Answer:
Innate immunity is non-specific because it does not depend on previous exposure to foreign substances. It is inborn capacity of the body to resist the pathogen that causes the disease. It is natural immunity and hence it remains non-specific, trying to protect the body in case of any invasion of foreign body.

Question 3.
Vaccination is important for preventing pneumonia.
Answer:
Vaccinations for pneumonia are available against Haemophilus influenzae and Streptococcus pneumoniae. If given earlier in life, they reduce the chances of catching pneumococcal infections. The deaths can be prevented which are common due to lung infections. Since it is a common and chronic j disease for all age groups, for the prevention one must take vaccination.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 4.
Common cold is the most frequent ! infectious disease in humans.
Answer:
Common cold is caused by virus which is abundantly present in congested city environments. The upper respiratory tract is infected due to these rhinoviruses and corona viruses. Average adult contracts such infections 2 to 4 times in a year while children capture it 6 to 12 times in a year. Therefore, it is said to be the most frequent infectious disease of human beings.

Question 5.
Typhoid is food and water-borne disease.
Answer:
Typhoid is caused due to Salmonella typhi which isa Gram-negative bacterium, transmitted from a patient or carrier to another healthy person through contaminated food or water. Flying insects, mostly houseflies transmit the bacteria from faeces to the food. Poor hygienic habits and improper public sanitation system spreads typhoid. Therefore, it is said to be food and water-borne disease.

Question 6.
Malignant tumour is more dangerous than benign tumour.
Answer:
Malignant tumour cells can show metastasis and hence can spread far and wide in the body, affecting other healthy cells and tissues. They are difficult to cure by any therapy as one does not know exact location of the cancerous cells. They also produce variety of symptoms depending on their i location. On the contrary, benign tumours can be treated surgically. Since they are covered by a cyst like membrane, the cancerous cells do not spread from them. Thus malignant tumour can be lethal as against the benign tumour.

Question 7.
Prevention is better than cure for AIDS.
Answer:
Till this time, there is no preventive vaccination for AIDS. There is also no cure for AIDS. The medicines are also costly and may not give complete cure. The only way to remain away from AIDS is the complete awareness about it. Thus it should be prevented by not allowing HIV to enter our body. Once HIV finds the entrance, the cure is impossible. Therefore, it is said that prevention is better them cure for AIDS.

Write short notes

Question 1.
Cellular factors in innate immunity.
Answer:

  1. Phagocytic cells ingest and destroy the pathogens.
  2. This is natural defence against the invasion of pathogenic microorganisms and other foreign particles in blood and tissues.
  3. Phagocytic cells are of two types, viz. microphages and macrophages. They can remove foreign particles that enter the body.
  4. Natural killer (NK) cells is a class of lymphocytes which carry out important and non-specific defence against viral infections and tumours.

Question 2.
Acute phase proteins (APPs).
Answer:

  1. Acute phase proteins are involved in innate immune mechanism.
  2. When there is an infection or injury, it leads to a sudden increase in concentration of certain plasma proteins, which are called acute phase proteins or APPs.
  3. These include C Reactive Protein (CRP), Mannose binding protein, Alpha-1-acid glycoprotein, Serum Amyloid P etc.
  4. APPs enhance host resistance, prevent tissue injury and promote repair of inflammatory lesions.

Question 3.
Rh factor.
Answer:
Rh factor:

  1. Rh factor is the term adapted from Rhesus monkey.
  2. In rhesus monkey, there is antigen D on the surface of their RBCs.
  3. Landsteiner and Wiener discovered this antigen and termed it as Rh factor.
  4. Persons having Rh factor or D antigen are called Rh positive while those lacking D antigen or Rh factor are called Rh negative.

Question 4.
Erythroblastosis foetalis.
Answer:

  1. Erythroblastosis foetalis is condition in which there is destruction of the erythrocytes of the foetus. It is the haemolytic disease of the newborn (HDN).
  2. This is caused in foetus, if mother is Rh -ve and father is Rh +ve. Rh +ve is the dominant allele, the foetus becomes Rh +ve, when its father is RH +ve.
  3. Rh +ve blood groups have D antigen which induces a strong immunogenic response when introduced into Rh -ve individuals.
  4. During foetal life, there is connection between mother and foetus through placenta, therefore Rh +ve antigen D from the foetus enters maternal circulation.
  5. This triggers formation of anti-Rh antibodies in mother. Subsequently Rh+ve foetus receives anti-Rh antibodies produced by mother.
  6. This causes agglutination reaction resulting into haemolysis in foetus. In order to prevent HDN, Rh -ve mother is injected with the anti-Rh antibody during all her pregnancies if her husband is Rh +ve.

Question 5.
Common cold.
Answer:

  1. The common cold (nasopharyngitis or rhinopharyngitis) is a viral infectious disease of the upper respiratory system. The causative organisms are rhinoviruses and coronaviruses.
  2. Symptoms include cough, sore throat, runny nose and fever.
  3. There is no known treatment, however, symptoms usually resolve spontaneously in 7 to 10 days.
  4. The best prevention for the common cold is to stay away from infected people and places where infected individuals have been.
  5. Hand washing with plain soap and water is recommended. Also alcohol-based hand sanitizers provide very little protection.

Question 6.
Life cycle of Plasmodium.
Answer:

  1. Anopheles Female mosquito which is a carrier carries sporozoites. When it bites the human, these sporozoites enter human circulation.
  2. Sporozoites undergo asexual reproduction through fission or schizogony in the liver cells or erythrocytes of the human.
  3. It forms merozoites. The cells formed within erythrocytes function as gametocytes. They undergo gamogony.
  4. Upon biting such person, the gametocytes enter into female Anopheles, fertilization occurs in its gut.
  5. Diploid zygote transforms into oocyst. Oocyst forms large number of haploid sporozoites through meiosis (sporogony).
  6. Sporozoites migrate to salivary glands and are ready to infect new human host.
  7. Again Sporozoite → Merozoite → Trophozoite → Schizont sequence is carried on for plasmodial stages in human body.
  8. The sexual life cycle of Plasmodium occurs in mosquito body which acts as a vector. While its asexual phase takes place in human body.

Question 7.
Pneumonia.
Answer:

  1. Pneumonia is an inflammatory condition of alveoli in the lungs causing formation of fluid in the lungs. This condition is called consolidation and exudation.
  2. Causes of pneumonia are infection due to bacteria, viruses, fungi or parasites, chemical burns or physical injury to the lungs.
  3. Influenza virus, adenovirus, para influenza and Respiratory Syncytial Virus (RSV) are some viruses that can cause pneumonia. Bacteria like Streptococcus pneumoniae and fungal pathogens e.g. Pneumocystis jirovecii and Pneumocystis carinii can also spread infection of pneumonia. Chemical burns of physical injury to lungs also cause similar infection.
  4. Main symptoms of infectious pneumonia are cough producing greenish or yellow sputum or phlegm and a high fever with chills.
  5. Shortness of breath or dyspnea, stabbing chest pain, coughing up blood, headaches, sweaty and clammy skin, loss of appetite, fatigue, blueness of the skin, nausea, vomiting, mood swings and joint pains or muscle aches are some other symptoms.
  6. Preventive vaccination against pneumonia is available. Medicines such as Benzyl penicillin, Ampicillin and Chloramphenicol are effective to prevent pneumonia.

Question 8.
Ringworm.
Answer:

  1. Ringworm or Dermatophytosis is a clinical condition caused by Trichophyton and Microsporum fungal infection of the skin. This infection is seen in humans and pets.
  2. Dermatophytes are the fungi that feed on keratin. Keratin is the material found in the outer layer of skin, hair and nails.
  3. These fungi attack various parts of the body. Infections on the body forms enlarged raised red rings. These patches have intense itching. Infection on the skin of the feet may cause athlete’s foot and jock itch.
  4. When the nails are infected it causes onychomycosis. During this the nails thicken, discolour and finally crumble and fall off.
  5. Prevention of ringworm infection is to be done by avoiding sharing of clothing, sports equipment, towels or sheets. Clothes should be washed in hot water with fungicidal soap after suspected exposure to ringworm. One should not walk barefoot but use appropriate footwear.
  6. Diagnosis of ringworm is done by physical examination and treatment is done with uses drugs like nystatin, fluconazole, itraconazole, etc.

Question 9.
Dengue.
Answer:

  1. Dengue is a viral disease causing high fever. It is a painful, debilitating vector-borne disease.
  2. There are four closely related dengue viruses that cause infection.
  3. Vector of Dengue virus is female Aedes mosquito. The mosquito takes up the dengue virus when it sucks blood of a person suffering from dengue.
  4. The spread of dengue is not directly from one person to another person.

Question 10.
Performance enhancers.
Answer:

  1. Performance enhancers are certain drugs used by sportspersons to enhance their performance during competitions.
  2. Narcotic analgesics, anabolic steroids, diuretics and certain hormones are misused by such sportspersons to increase muscle strength and bulk. It also promotes aggressiveness and improve overall performance.
  3. Use of anabolic steroids cause side effects.
  4. Females show masculinization, increased aggressiveness, mood swings, depression, abnormal menstrual cycles, excessive hair growth on the face and body, enlargement of clitoris, deepening of voice.
  5. Males show acne, increased aggressiveness, mood swings, depression, and reduction of size of the testicles, decreased sperm production, kidney and liver dysfunction, breast enlargement, premature baldness, enlargement of the prostate gland.
  6. These effects may be permanent with prolonged use. Using such drugs is illegal and punishable.

Chart Based Questions

Question 1.
Complete the chart of ABO blood group system and answer the questions given below:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 3
Questions:
(i) Which blood group from the above table is called universal acceptor?
(ii) Which blood group from the above table is called universal donor?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 4
(i) Blood group AB is called universal acceptor.
(ii) Blood group O is called universal donor.

Question 2.
Complete the table

Plasmodium species Incubation period Pattern of fever
———— ————– High fever after 48 hours.
————– 28 days ————–
————– 17 days ————-
———— ————- High fever at irregular intervals between 22 to 48 hours.

Answer:

Plasmodium species Incubation period Pattern of fever
P. vivax 14 days High fever after 48 hours.
P. malariae 28 days High fever after 72 hours interval
P. ovale 17 days High fever after 48 hours interval
P. falciparum 12 days High fever at irregular intervals between 22 to 48 hours.

Question 3.
Complete the following table
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 6

Question 4.
Complete the following table:

Carcinogen Organ affected
N-nitrosodimethlene ————–
Aflatoxin ———-
————– Vagina
————– Urinary bladder
————– Prostate
————– Skin and lungs

Answer:

Carcinogen Organ affected
N-nitrosodimethlene Lungs
Aflatoxin Liver
Diethylstilboestrol Vagina
2-naphthylamine and 4-aminobiphenyl Urinary bladder
Cadmium oxide Prostate
Soot, coal tar (2-4 benzopyrene) Skin and lungs

Diagram Based Questions

Question 1.
Label the given diagram
Img 7Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 7
Answer:

  1. Antigen binding site.
  2. Variable region of heavy chain
  3. Varible region of light chain
  4. Constant region of light chain
  5. Constant region of heavy chain
  6. Disulphide bond
  7. Hinge
  8. Light chain
  9. Heavy chain

Question 2.
Observe the given diagram and answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 8
(1) What is I and II in the above diagram?
Answer:
I is a virus which is trying to cause infection, II are two antigen molecules which are trying to attack the virus.

(2) What structures are responsible for antigen and antibody complex? Identify them in the above diagram.
Answer:
(a) is epitope which is antigen determinant and
(b) is a paratope which is part of the antibody. Epitope and paratope are specific to each other and hence they form a complex.

(3) What is the study of antigen-antibody interactions called?
Answer:
The study of antigen-antibody interactions is called serology.

Question 3.
Fill in the blanks after observing the diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 9
On the right side of the diagram, the stages of plasmodium are passed in the body of ……………….. Whereas on the left side of the diagram, those take place in the body of ………………, ………………. is the stage that is dormant in the liver of human host. From this ………………… and then ………………… is the stage in the erythrocytes, which rupture and gives rise to …………….. Microgamete and macrogamete fuse with each other to form …………………… which later gives rise to ookinete which forms ………………… This enters the salivary glands of mosquito …………………. phase of Plasmodium occurs in mosquito body, whereas …………………… phase is in human body.
Answer:
On the right side of the diagram, the stages of plasmodium are passed in the body of human. Whereas on the left side of the diagram, those take place in the body of mosquito. Hypnozoite is the stage that is dormant in the liver of human host. From this schizont and then merozoites Trophozoite is the stage in the erythrocytes, which rupture and gives rise to gamerocyte. Microgamete and macrogamete fuse with each other to form zygote which later gives rise to ookinete which forms sporozoites. This enters the salivary glands of mosquito. Sexual phase of Plasmodium occurs in mosquito body, whereas asexual phase is in human body.

Question 4.
Observe the given diagram and answer the following questions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 10
(1) Enlist the stages of Entamoeba histolytica you see in the above diagram.
Answer:
Trophozoite, pre-cystic form, cyst, binucleate cyst, quadrinucleate cyst, Metacycstic amoeba, amoebulae are the different stage of Entamoeba histolytica that are seen in the above diagram.

(2) Where are these stages passed?
Answer:
These stages are passed in the lumen of intestine of the host human being.

(3) How does Entamoeba come out of the body of the host?
Answer:
Encysted Entamoeba pass out with the faecal matter of the host.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 5.
Observe the given diagram and answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 11

(1) In life cycle of Ascaris at what stage do they enter the human body?
Answer:
When there is development of infective larva inside the egg of Ascaris, it enters the human body.

(2) How do they enter the human body and through which organ do they enter?
Answer:
Ascaris eggs are deposited in the faeces. They mix in the soil, if faeces is exposed in open. From there, it can enter into nearby water body or it may contaminate vegetables or other food stuffs. Such unhygienic food or unclean hands pass these eggs in the body of human through the mouth.

(3) What are the vital organs affected by the Ascaris during its development within the body of host human ?
Answer:
Ascaris can affect trachea, lungs, heart, brain and eyes too.

(4) In which organ do they copulate and produce fertilized eggs?
Answer:
Adult male and female copulate in the intestine of the host human.

Question 6.
Observe the given diagram and answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 12

(1) In which host stage II is completed?
Answer:
Stage II is completed in human.

(2) What happens in step 1 and step 2?
Answer:
Humans are infected at step 1 when mosquito bites human and larvae enter blood stream. In step 2 adult Wuchereria worms are formed in lymphatics.

(3) Describe the events in step 3.
Answer:
Mosquito carries the blood as it bites the human in step 4 and ingests microfilariae in human blood. Later the microfilariae start growing in the midgut of mosquito.

(4) In which host stage I is completed?
Answer:
Stage I is completed in mosquito.

Question 7.
Sketch and label the diagram of pathogen that causes typhoid.
Answer:
Pathogen of typhoid is Salmonella typhi.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 13

Question 8.
Sketch and label disease causing agents of pneumonia.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 14

Question 9.
Sketch and label benign and malignant tumours.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 15

Question 10.
Sketch and label structure of HIV.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 16

Long answer questions

Question 1.
Describe different ways in which epithelial surface offers the innate immunity.
Answer:

  1. Skin and mucous covering, when intact protects the body against the invasion by pathogens. The healthy skin has bactericidal activity due to the salts present in drying sweat.
  2. Sebaceous glands in the skin produce secretions and long chain of fatty acids. These are bactericidal and fungicidal.
  3. Respiratory tract is provided with mucosa which prevents entry of microorganisms to a large extent.
  4. The inhaled particles are arrested through hair in the nasal passage. The particles that pass beyond nasal passage are caught by mucus lining the epithelium. They are swept back to pharynx. Then they are either swallowed or coughed out.
  5. The cough reflex is an important defence mechanism of respiratory tract.
  6. There is saliva in the mouth which has inhibitory effect on microorganisms. Gastric secretions has acidity and hence microorganisms are destroyed in stomach.
  7. The flushing action of urine eliminates bacteria from the urethra. Semen too has antibacterial substances, e.g. Spermine and zinc.

Question 2.
Explain ABO blood group system in human being with a suitable chart.
Answer:

  1. In ABO system, the blood groups are determined by the antigen present on the surface of red blood cells.
  2. The blood groups are of four types, viz. A. B, AB and O.
  3. In person with blood group A there is antigen ‘A’ on the surface of their red blood cells (RBCs) and antibodies ‘b’ in their plasma.
  4. In person with blood group B there is antigen ‘B’ on the surface of their red blood cells (RBCs) and antibodies ‘a’ in their plasma.
  5. In person with blood group AB there are both antigens ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the surface of their RBCs and no antibodies in their plasma.
  6. In person with blood group ‘O’ there are no antigens ‘A’ and ‘B’ on the surface of their RBCs but have both ‘a’ and ‘b’ antibodies in their plasma.
  7. During blood transfusion compatibility of blood has to be taken into consideration.
  8. Person with ‘O’ blood group is called universal donor while the person with ‘AB’ blood group is called universal recipient. Individuals with blood group O can donate blood to anyone, while those individuals with blood group AB can receive blood from any person.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases 17

Question 3.
What are the main causes of cancer?
Answer:
Causes of Cancer : Following carcinogenic factors are responsible for causing cancer.

  1. Chemicals : Many induce development of cancer. E.g. nicotine, caffeine, polycyclic hydrocarbons and products of combustion of coal and oil. Sex hormone and steroids, if given or secreted in excess, can cause cancer. E.g. Breast cancer.
  2. Radiation : Radiations such as X-rays, gamma-rays, cosmic rays, ultra-violet rays are carcinogenic.
  3. Viruses : Virus possessing oncogenes (v-onc genes) are carcinogenic. E.g. EBV (Epstein-barr virus), HPV (Human papiloma virus) are oncogenic viruses.
  4. Oncogenes : Cellular oncogenes (c-onc genes) or proto-oncogenes can cause cancer. They are present in normal cells but if activated they lead to oncogenic transformation of cells.
  5. Addiction : Addictive substances like cigarette smoke, tobacco lead to cancer of mouth, lips and lungs. Alcohol can cause cancer of oesophagus, stomach, intestine and liver. Drugs like marijuana or anaerobic steroids can also cause cancer.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 10 Human Health and Diseases

Question 4.
What are the different ways of treating cancer?
Answer:
Cancer treatment consists of combination of a number of therapies which are follows:
(1) Chemotherapy : Chemotherapy means giving certain anticancer drugs. These drugs check cell division by inhibiting DNA synthesis. But these are more toxic to cancerous cell than to normal cells. Chemotherapy shows side effects such as hair loss or anaemia.

(2) Radiotherapy : In addition to chemotherapy, radiations are given. The cancer cells are bombarded with the radiations from radioactive materials such as cobalt, iridium and iodine. The X-rays, gamma rays and charge particles are used to destroy the cancerous tissue or cells. They cause minimum damage to the surrounding normal tissue or cells.

(3) Surgery : Entire cancerous tissue or cells are removed surgically. E.g. breast tumour or uterine tumour. After removing the cancerous tissue, additionally other treatments are also given.

(4) Immunotherapy : For tackling with tumour, patients are given biological response modifiers such as a-interferon which activates their immune system to destroy the tumour.

(5) Supportive therapy : With supportive therapy, patient’s quality of life is increased. To treat symptoms of cancer and side effects of cancer treatments, this therapy is used. This therapy varies depending upon condition of individual patient.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Multiple choice questions

Question 1.
The supporting cells that produce myelin sheath in the CNS are ……………….
(a) Oligodendrocytes
(b) Satellite cells
(c) Astrocytes
(d) Schwann cells
Answer:
(a) Oligodendrocytes

Question 2.
Human brain develops to its full size at an age of year/s.
(a) 1
(b) 6
(c) 12
(d) 18
Answer:
(b) 6

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 3.
Telencephalon is the other name of ……………….
(a) pons varolii
(b) medulla oblongata
(c) cerebrum
(d) cerebellum
Answer:
(c) cerebrum

Question 4.
Olfactory tracts merge in olfactory area of lobe.
(a) Frontal
(b) Parietal
(c) Occipital
(d) Temporal
Answer:
(d) Temporal

Question 5.
………………. is the largest commissure of the human brain.
(a) Corpora striata
(b) Corpora quadrigemina
(c) Habencular commissure
(d) Corpus callosum
Answer:
(d) Corpus callosum

Question 6.
Grey matter of the brain shows large collection of ……………….
(a) dendrons
(b) cytons
(c) axons
(d) synapsis
Answer:
(b) cytons

Question 7.
Masses of grey matter in white matter of the cerebrum are called ……………….
(a) corpora striata
(b) corpus callosum
(c) paracoel
(d) basal ganglia
Answer:
(d) basal ganglia

Question 8.
Parietal and temporal lobes of cerebrum are separated by sulcus.
(a) lateral
(b) parieto occipital
(c) central
(d) median longitudinal
Answer:
(a) lateral

Question 9.
……………… area is motor speech area
(a) Acoustic
(b) Wernike’s
(c) Somato sensory
(d) Broca’s
Answer:
(d) Broca’s

Question 10.
Maxillary nerve is a branch of nerve.
(a) Occulomotor
(b) Trochlear
(c) Trigeminal
(d) Facial
Answer:
(c) Trigeminal

Question 11.
Spinal accessory is the cranial nerve.
(a) IV
(b) VI
(c) IX
(d) XI
Answer:
(d) XI

Question 12.
Rotation of eye ball is controlled by ……………….
(a) Optic nerve
(b) Pathetic nerve
(c) Auditory nerve
(d) Hypoglossal nerve
Answer:
(b) Pathetic nerve

Question 13.
The spinal nerves emerge out of vertebral column through ……………….
(a) intervertebral foramina
(b) neural canal
(c) central canal
(d) foramen magnum
Answer:
(a) intervertebral foramina

Question 14.
The neuro transmitter is removed by an enzyme called ……………….
(a) noradrenaline
(b) acetylcholine
(c) hyaluronidase
(d) cholinesterase
Answer:
(d) cholinesterase

Question 15.
The reflex action originates in ……………….
(a) sensory neuron
(b) motor neuron
(c) receptor organ
(d) effector organ
Answer:
(c) receptor organ

Question 16.
Cytons of neurons are located in dorsal root ganglion.
(a) afferent
(b) efferent
(c) adjustor
(d) association
Answer:
(a) afferent

Question 17.
Wall of carotid arteries contain ……………….
(a) thermoreceptors
(b) mechanoreceptors
(c) baroreceptors
(d) statoacoustic receptors
Answer:
(c) baroreceptors

Question 18.
The electronegativity inside the membrane is due to ……………….
(a) less anions than cations
(b) less cations than anions
(c) bicarbonates
(d) carbonates
Answer:
(b) less cations than anions

Question 19.
The neuro transmitters stimulate ……………….
(a) presynaptic membrane
(b) cyton
(c) axon terminals
(d) postsynaptic membrane
Answer:
(d) postsynaptic membrane

Question 20.
………………. is an extero-receptor.
(a) Thermoreceptor
(b) Baroreceptor
(c) Proprioreceptor
(d) Enteroreceptor
Answer:
(a) Thermoreceptor

Question 21.
The are described as windows for brain.
(a) sensory neurons
(b) motor neurons
(c) effectors
(d) sense organs
Answer:
(d) sense organs

Question 22.
Otolith organ is formed of ……………….
(a) cochlea and vestibule
(b) sacculus and utriculus
(c) semicircular canals
(d) ear ossicles
Answer:
(b) sacculus and utriculus

Question 23.
Olfactory bulbs are extensions of brain’s ……………….
(a) cerebrum
(b) limbic system
(c) RAS
(d) pons varolii
Answer:
(b) limbic system

Question 24.
Gustatory senses are noted by ……………….
(a) retina
(b) skin
(c) nose
(d) tongue
Answer:
(d) tongue

Question 25.
………………. is attached to the eardrum.
(a) Malleus
(b) Incus
(c) Stapes
(d) Cochlea
Answer:
(a) Malleus

Question 26.
Eustachian tube is present in ……………….
(a) external ear
(b) internal ear
(c) heart
(d) middle ear
Answer:
(d) middle ear

Question 27.
The internal ear is a fluid filled structure called ……………….
(a) cochlea
(b) vestibule
(c) labyrinth
(d) otolith
Answer:
(c) labyrinth

Question 28.
The space within cochlea is known as ……………….
(a) scala vestibule
(b) scala tympani
(c) aqueous chamber
(d) scala media
Answer:
(d) scala media

Question 29.
Thermoregulatory centre in the body is ……………….
(a) hypothalamus
(b) cerebellum
(c) spinal cord
(d) pituitary
Answer:
(a) hypothalamus

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 30.
Which of the following is a sensory nerve?
(a) Vagus
(b) Auditory
(c) Facial
(d) Lumbar
Answer:
(b) Auditory

Question 31.
Chemical transmission in synapse occurs due to ……………….
(a) cholesterol
(b) ADH
(c) acetylcholine
(d) cholinesterase
Answer:
(c) acetylcholine

Question 32.
Voluntary muscular coordination is under the control of ……………….
(a) medulla
(b) pons
(c) hypothalamus
(d) cerebrum
Answer:
(d) cerebrum

Question 33.
All involuntary vital activities are under the control of ……………….
(a) medulla oblongata
(b) cerebellum
(c) cerebral hemispheres
(d) pons Varolii
Answer:
(a) medulla oblongata

Question 34.
Cerebellum is controlling centre for ……………….
(a) muscular strength
(b) memory
(c) equilibrium
(d) muscular coordination
Answer:
(c) equilibrium

Question 35.
Which receptors are present in the retina?
(a) Chemoreceptors
(b) Thermoreceptors
(c) Photoreceptors
(d) Baroreceptors
Answer:
(c) Photoreceptors

Question 36.
Breathing is controlled by ……………….
(a) trachea
(b) medulla oblongata
(c) lungs
(d) hypothalamus
Answer:
(b) medulla oblongata

Question 37.
Corpus callosum is a nerve fibre bridge which connects ……………….
(a) two cerebral hemispheres
(b) cerebrum and cerebellum
(c) cerebellum and medulla
(d) midbrain and hindbrain
Answer:
(a) two cerebral hemispheres

Question 38.
Centre for thirst and hunger are located in ……………….
(a) cerebrum
(b) cerebellum
(c) hypothalamus
(d) medulla
Answer:
(c) hypothalamus

Question 39.
Gyri in the brain are present in ……………….
(a) cerebral cortex
(b) olfactory lobes
(c) medulla oblongata
(d) hypothalamus
Answer:
(a) cerebral cortex

Question 40.
Which of the following is a structure of mesencephalon?
(a) Inferior colliculi
(b) Thalamus
(c) Cerebellum
(d) Pons varolii
Answer:
(a) Inferior colliculi

Question 41.
Third ventricle lies in ……………….
(a) midbrain
(b) forebrain
(c) cerebellum
(d) medulla oblongata
Answer:
(b) forebrain

Question 42.
Medulla oblongata encloses ……………….
(a) third ventricle
(b) fourth ventricle
(c) first ventricle
(d) second ventricle
Answer:
(b) fourth ventricle

Question 43.
Loss of memory may result from injury to the ……………….
(a) corpora quadrigemina
(b) pons varolii
(c) cerebellum
(d) cerebrum
Answer:
(d) cerebrum

Question 44.
Terminal non-nervous part of spinal cord is ……………….
(a) funiculus
(b) filum terminale
(c) cauda equina
(d) conus terminalis
Answer:
(b) filum terminale

Question 45.
Which part of the pituitary is neurohaemal organ?
(a) Pars distalis
(b) Infundibulum
(c) Pars nervosa
(d) Pars intermedia
Answer:
(c) Pars nervosa

Question 46.
Development of secondary sexual characteristics in female is under the control of ……………….
(a) growth hormone
(b) TSH
(c) estrogen
(d) progesterone
Answer:
(c) estrogen

Question 47.
Hypersecretion of STH in children causes ……………….
(a) cretinism
(b) gigantism
(c) dwarfism
(d) myxoedema
Answer:
(b) gigantism

Question 48.
Milk secretion in lactating woman is controlled by ……………….
(a) LH
(b) prolactin
(c) relaxin
(d) oestrogen
Answer:
(b) prolactin

Question 49.
ADH is secreted by
(a) adrenal gland
(b) thyroid
(c) hypothalamus
(d) pancreas
Answer:
(c) hypothalamus

Question 50.
BMR is increased by the administration of ……………….
(a) insulin
(b) GH
(c) thyroxine
(d) testosterone
Answer:
(c) thyroxine

Question 51.
The largest endocrine gland in the body is ……………….
(a) pituitary
(b) adrenal
(c) liver
(d) thyroid
Answer:
(d) thyroid

Question 52.
Diabetes insipidus is caused by the deficiency of ……………….
(a) calcitonin
(b) oxytocin
(c) atrial natriuretic factor
(d) vasopressin
Answer:
(d) vasopressin

Question 53.
Simple goitre is caused by the deficiency of ……………….
(a) TSH
(b) thyrocalcitonin
(c) thyroxine
(d) iodine
Answer:
(d) iodine

Question 54.
Exopthalmic goitre is also known as ……………….
(a) Grave’s disease
(b) Gull’s disease
(c) Simple goitre
(d) Cushing’s disease
Answer:
(a) Grave’s disease

Question 55.
Cushing’s syndrome is developed due to ……………….
(a) hyposecretion of ACTH
(b) hypersecretion of corticoids
(c) hyposecretion of thyroxine
(d) hypersecretion of thyroxine
Answer:
(b) hypersecretion of corticoids

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 56.
Pituitary gland is under the control of ……………….
(a) thyroid
(b) adrenal
(c) pineal
(d) hypothalamus
Answer:
(d) hypothalamus

Question 57.
FSH is secreted by ……………….
(a) pituitary gland
(b) thyroid gland
(c) ovary
(d) adrenal gland
Answer:
(a) pituitary gland

Question 58.
ICSH stimulates ……………….
(a) ovary
(b) Leydig cells
(c) seminiferous tubules
(d) kidney
Answer:
(b) Leydig cells

Question 59.
Which of the following secrete LH ?
(a) Pituitary
(b) Thyroid
(c) Ovary
(d) Adrenal
Answer:
(a) pituitary

Question 60.
TSH regulates secretion.
(a) thyroxine
(b) MSH
(c) androgens
(d) insulin
Answer:
(a) thyroxine

Question 61.
Deficiency of thyroxine in adults cause ……………….
(a) cretinism
(b) myxoedema
(c) diabetes
(d) Cushing’s disease
Answer:
(b) myxoedema

Question 62.
Osmotic pressure and blood pressure are maintained by ……………….
(a) glucocorticoids
(b) aldosterone
(c) TRF
(d) MSH
Answer:
(b) aldosterone

Question 63.
Hormone secreted by corpus luteum is ……………….
(a) aldosterone
(b) progesterone
(c) testosterone
(d) cortisol
Answer:
(b) progesterone

Question 64.
………………. is also called hypophyseal stalk.
(a) Infundibulum
(b) Median eminence
(c) Pars intermedia
(d) Sphenoid bone
Answer:
(a) infundibulum

Question 65.
………………. is like a collar around hypophyseal stalk.
(a) Pars distalis
(b) Pars nervosa
(c) Pars intermedia
(d) Pars tuberalis
Answer:
(d) Pars tuberalis

Question 66.
Herring bodies are the parts of ……………….
(a) hypothalamo-hypophyseal tracts
(b) pituicytes
(c) hypothalamo-hypophyseal portal system
(d) pituitary cleft
Answer:
(a) hypothalamo-hypophyseal tracts

Question 67.
Corticotropin is the other name of ……………….
(a) ACTH
(b) STH
(c) Aldosterone
(d) ADH
Answer:
(a) ACTH

Question 68.
Adrenal failure leads to ……………….
(a) Acromegaly
(b) Simmond’s disease
(c) Midget
(d) Addison’s disease
Answer:
(d) Addison’s disease

Question 69.
Prolactin inhibiting factor is secreted by ……………….
(a) Hypophysis
(b) Hypothalamus
(c) Thyroid
(d) Mammary glands
Answer:
(b) Hypothalamus

Question 70.
Which one of the following is not applicable to prolactin ?
(a) Mammotropin
(b) Lactogenic hormone
(c) Somatotropin
(d) Luteotropin
Answer:
(c) Somatotropin

Question 71.
………………. is a gonadotropic hormone.
(a) STH
(b) LTH
(c) ACTH
(d) FSH
Answer:
(d) FSH

Question 72.
Rhythmic integrated contractions of jejunum are controlled by ……………….
(a) coherin
(b) insulin
(c) glucagon
(d) ADH
Answer:
(a) coherin

Question 73.
Thyroid gland is derived from of embryo.
(a) ectoderm
(b) mesoderm
(c) endoderm
(d) ecto-endoderm
Answer:
(c) endoderm

Question 74.
Deficiency of thyroxine in infants causes ……………….
(a) Cretinism
(b) Grave’s disease
(c) Myxoedema
(d) Exophthalmos
Answer:
(a) Cretinism .

Question 75.
………………. is a hypercalcemic hormone.
(a) PTH
(b) TCT
(c) Thyroxine
(d) ACTH
Answer:
(a) PTH

Question 76.
………………. is a middle layer of adrenal cortex.
(a) Zona fasciculata
(b) Zona pellicida
(c) Zona glomerulosa
(d) Zona reticularis
Answer:
(a) Zona fasciculata

Question 77.
Decrease in the blood calcium level is ……………….
(a) hyperglycemia
(b) hypercalcemia
(c) hypoglycemia
(d) hypocalcemia
Answer:
(d) hypocalcemia

Question 78.
………………. stimulates RBC production.
(a) Aldosterone
(b) Cortisol
(c) Epinephrine
(d) Parathormone
Answer:
(b) Cortisol

Question 79.
Chemicals which are released at the synaptic junction are called ……………….
(a) hormones
(b) neurotransmitters
(c) cerebrospinal fluid
(d) lymph
Answer:
(b) neurotransmitters

Question 80.
Potential difference across resting membrane is negatively charged. This is due to differential distribution of the following ions.
(a) Na+ and K+ ions
(b) Ca++ and Cl ions
(c) Ca++ and Mg++ ions
(d) Mg++ and Cl ions
Answer:
(a) Na+ and K+ ions

Question 81.
Which of the following is not involved in Knee-jerk reflex?
(a) Muscle spindle
(b) Motor neuron
(c) Brain
(d) Inter neurons
Answer:
(c) Brain

Question 82.
An area in the brain which is associated with strong emotions is ……………….
(a) Cerebral cortex
(b) Cerebellum
(c) Limbic system
(d) Medulla
Answer:
(c) Limbic system

Question 83.
Which is the vitamin present in Rhodopsin?
(a) Vitamin A
(b) Vitamin B
(c) Vitamin C
(d) Vitamin D
Answer:
(a) Vitamin A

Question 84.
Wax gland present in the ear canal is modified ……………….
(a) Sweat gland
(b) Vestibular gland
(c) Cowper’s gland
(d) Sebaceous gland
Answer:
(d) Sebaceous gland

Question 85.
The part of internal ear responsible for hearing is ……………….
(a) cochlea
(b) semicircular canal
(c) utriculus
(d) sacculus
Answer:
(a) cochlea

Question 86.
The organ of corti is a structure present in ……………….
(a) external ear
(b) middle ear
(c) semi circular canal
(d) cochlea
Answer:
(d) cochlea

Question 87.
Select the right match of endocrine gland and their hormones among the options given below.
A. Pineal i. Epinephrine
B. Thyroid ii. Melatonin
C. Ovary iii. Estrogen
D. Adrenal medulla iv. Tetraiodothyronine
(a) A-iv, B-ii, C-iii, D-i
(b) A-ii, B-iv, C-i, D-iii
(c) A-iv, B-ii, C-i, D-iii
(d) A-ii, B-iv, C-iii, D-i
Answer:
(d) A-ii, B-iv, C-iii, D-i

Question 88.
Listed below are the hormones of anterior pituitary origin. Tick the wrong entry.
(a) Growth hormone
(b) FSH
(c) Oxytocin
(d) ACTH
Answer:
(c) Oxytocin

Question 89.
Mary is about to face an interview. But during the first five minutes before the interview she experiences sweating, increased rate of heartbeat, respiration, etc. Which hormone is responsible for her restlessness?
(a) Estrogen and progesterone
(b) Oxytocin and vasopressin
(c) Adrenaline and noradrenaline
(d) Insulin and glucagon
Answer:
(c) Adrenaline and noradrenaline

Question 90.
The steroid responsible for balance of water and electrolytes in our body is ……………….
(a) Insulin
(b) Melatonin
(c) Testosterone
(d) Aldosterone
Answer:
(d) Aldosterone

Question 91.
Thymosin is responsible for ……………….
(a) raising the blood sugar level
(b) raising the blood calcium level
(c) increased production of T lymphocytes
(d) decrease in blood RBC
Answer:
(c) increased production of T lymphocytes

Question 92.
In the mechanism of action of a protein hormone, one of the second messengers is ……………….
(a) Cyclic AMP
(b) Insulin
(c) T3
(d) Gastrin
Answer:
(a) Cyclic AMP

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 93.
Leydig cells produce a group of hormones called ……………….
(a) androgens
(b) estrogen
(c) aldosterone
(d) gonadotropins
Answer:
(a) androgens

Question 94.
Corpus luteum secretes a hormone called ……………….
(a) prolactin
(b) progesterone
(c) aldosterone
(d) testosterone
Answer:
(b) progesterone

Question 95.
Cortisol is secreted from ……………….
(a) pancreas
(b) thyroid
(c) adrenal
(d) thymus
Answer:
(c) adrenal

Question 96.
A hormone responsible for normal sleep – wake cycle is ……………….
(a) epinephrine
(b) gastrin
(c) melatonin
(d) insulin
Answer:
(c) melatonin

Question 97.
Match the pairs and choose the correct answer among the following options.
A. Epinephrine
i. Increase in muscle growth
B. Testosterone
ii. Decrease in blood pressure
C. Glucagon
iii. Decrease in liver glycogen content
D. Atrial natriuretic factor
iv. Increase in heartbeat
(a) A-ii, B-i, C-iii, D-iv
(b) A-iv, B-i, C-iii, D-ii
(c) A-i, B-ii, C-iii, D-iv
(d) A-i, B-iv, C-ii, D-iii
Answer:
(b) A-iv, B-i, C-iii, D-ii

Question 98.
Blood calcium level is a resultant of how much dietary calcium is absorbed, how much calcium is lost in the urine, how much bone dissolves releasing calcium into the blood and how much calcium from blood enters tissues. Several factors play an important role in these processes. Mark the one which has no role.
(a) Vitamin D
(b) Parathyroid hormone
(c) Thyrocalcitonin
(d) Thymosin
Answer:
(d) Thymosin

Question 99.
All the following tissues in mammals except one consists of a central ‘medullary’ region surrounded by a cortical region. Mark the wrong entry.
(a) Ovary
(b) Adrenal
(c) Liver
(d) Kidney
Answer:
(c) Liver

Match the columns

Question 1.
Match the hormones with their source

Column A Column B
(1) Glucagon (i) Neurohypophysis
(2) Adrenaline (ii) Islets of Langerhans
(3) Somato tropins (iii) Adenohypophysis
(4) ADH (iv) Medulla

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Glucagon (ii) Islets of Langerhans
(2) Adrenaline (iv) Medulla
(3) Somato tropins (iii) Adenohypophysis
(4) ADH (i) Neurohypophysis

Question 2.
Match the layer of adrenal with its hormone.

Column A (Layers of adrenal cortex) Column B (Hormones)
(1) Zona glomerulosa (A) Cortisols
(2) Zona fasciculata (B) Androgens
(3) Zona reticularis (C) Aldosterone

Answer:

Column A (Layers of adrenal cortex) Column B (Hormones)
(1) Zona glomerulosa (C) Aldosterone
(2) Zona fasciculata (A) Cortisols
(3) Zona reticularis (B) Androgens

Question 3.
Match the disorder with the gland associated with it.

Column A (Disorder) Column B (Associated Gland)
(1) Addison’s disease (A) Hypothalamus
(2) Grave’s disease (B) Pituitary
(3) Diabetes insipidus (C) Thyroid
(4) Acromegaly (D) Adrenal

Answer:

Column A (Disorder) Column B (Associated Gland)
(1) Addison’s disease (D) Adrenal
(2) Grave’s disease (C) Thyroid
(3) Diabetes insipidus (A) Hypothalamus
(4) Acromegaly (B) Pituitary

Classify the following to form Column B as per the category given in Column A

Question 1.

Column A Column B
(1) Forebrain ————–
(2) Midbrain ————–
(3) Hindbrain ————–

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Forebrain Olfactory lobes, Corpus callosum
(2) Midbrain Superior colliculi, Iter
(3) Hindbrain Pons varolii, Vermis

Question 2.
Types of nerves
Occulomotor, Facial, Optic, Vagus, Abducens, Vestibulocochlear

Column A Column B
(1) Sensory ————–
(2) Motor ————–
(3) Mixed ————–

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Sensory Optic, Vestibulocochlear
(2) Motor Occulomotor, Abducens
(3) Mixed Facial, Vagus

Question 3.
Hormones
Estrogen, Glucagon, Epinephrine, Relaxin, Somatostatin, Nor-Adrenalin

Column A Column B
(1) Ovary ————
(2) Pancreas ————
(3) Adrenal Medulla ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Ovary Estrogen, Relaxin
(2) Pancreas Glucagon, Somatostatin
(3) Adrenal Medulla Epinephrine, Nor-Adrenaline

Question 4.
Disorders
Dwarfism, Myxoedema, Addison’s disease, Cushing’s disease, Gigantism, Goitre

Column A Column B
(1) Pituitary ————
(2) Thyroid ————
(3) Adrenal Cortex ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Pituitary Dwarfism, Gigantism
(2) Thyroid Myxoedema, Goitre
(3) Adrenal Cortex Addison’s disease, Cushing’s disease

Very short answer questions

Question 1.
What is the need for the control and coordination in multicellular animals?
Answer:
Multicellular animals need control and coordination to maintain constancy of internal environment, i.e. homeostasis.

Question 2.
How do plants carry out control and coordination?
Answer:
Plants carry out control and coordination by sending chemical signals and bringing about various types of movements.

Question 3.
What is the type of nervous system of Earthworm?
Answer:
Earthworm is an annelid having ventral, ganglionated nervous system. It consists mainly of nerve ring, nerve cord and peripheral segmentally arranged nerves.

Question 4.
What kind of nervous system is seen in Hydra, earthworm and cockroach?
Answer:
In Hydra, the nervous system is in the form of nerve net, while in earthworm and cockroach the nervous system is ganglionated.

Question 5.
What is a gland?
Answer:
An organized collection of secretory epithelial cells capable of producing of some secretion is called a gland.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 6.
What do you mean by discrete endocrine glands ?
Answer:
The glands which are exclusively endocrine in function are discrete endocrine glands.

Question 7.
What is genu and splenium?
Answer:
Genu is anterior and splenium is posterior fold of corpus callosum.

Question 8.
Which is the largest basal nucleus of brain ?
Answer:
Corpus striatum is the largest basal nucleus of the brain.

Question 9.
What is EEG?
Answer:
EEG is electro encephalography. It is used to detect the electrical changes taking place in the brain.

Question 10.
Mention the major sulci present in the cerebral hemispheres.
Answer:
The sulci present in the cerebral hemisphere are – central sulcus, parieto-occipital sulcus and lateral sulcus.

Question 11.
What is the difference in ‘tract’ and ‘nerve’?
Answer:
A bundle of axons within CNS is called a ‘tract’ while the one outside the CNS is called ‘nerve’.

Question 12.
What is a choroid plexus? State its locations.
Answer:
Network of blood capillaries associated with the brain is called choroid plexus, which are anterior choroid plexus present on the roof of epithalamus and posterior choroid plexus located on the roof of medulla oblongata.

Question 13.
What is a synapse ?
Answer:
The interconnection between two neurons or neuron with motor organ is called synapse.

Question 14.
What is a polarised membrane?
Answer:
The cell membrane of a neuron at resting stage is called polarised membrane. In such membrane, the outer side of the cell membrane is more electropositive due to more Na+ ions.

Question 15.
What is summation effect?
Answer:
Many weak stimuli given in a quick succession may produce a response due to summation or additive effect of stimuli, which is known as summation effect.

Question 16.
What is synaptic delay?
Answer:
The time required for a nerve impulse to cross a synapse during transmission of a nerve impulse is called synaptic delay, which is about 0.3-0.5 milliseconds.

Question 17.
What is refractory period?
Answer:
The time interval between two consecutive nerve impulses is called refractory period, during which a nerve cannot be stimulated. Nerve is stimulated only after completion of this period.

Question 18.
What is a synaptic cleft?
Answer:
Small intercellular space between two successive neurons which is about 20¬30 nm in width, is called synaptic cleft.

Question 19.
What is synaptic transmission?
Answer:
The process by which the impulse from the pre-synaptic neuron is conducted to the post-synaptic neuron or cell is called synaptic transmission.

Question 20.
What is a pre-synaptic neuron?
Answer:
The neuron carrying an impulse to the synapse is the pre-synaptic neuron.

Question 21.
What is transmission terminal and generator region?
Answer:
The pre-synaptic membrane of a neuron is transmission terminal while the post- synaptic membrane is called generation region.

Question 22.
What is synaptic fatigue?
Answer:
The synaptic fatigue is the time lag or halting of the transmission of nerve impulse, temporarily at synapse due to exhaustion of its neurotransmitter.

Question 23.
What is the width of synaptic cleft?
Answer:
The width of synaptic cleft is about 20-30 nm.

Question 24.
How much is the resting potential of axon?
Answer:
The resting potential of axon is -70 mV.

Question 25.
How does Na+ – K+ pump work?
Answer:
During repolarisation of certain part of a nerve, Na+ – K+ Pump, pumps out 3 Na+ ions for every 2 K+ ions they pump into the cell.

Question 26.
What is blood-brain barrier?
Answer:
The barrier that keeps a check on passage of ions and large molecules from the blood to the brain tissue is called blood-brain barrier. Endothelial cells lining the blood capillaries help in this process along with the astrocytes.

Question 27.
Enlist meninges of human brain.
Answer:
Dura mater, arachnoid mater or membrane and pia mater are the meninges of human brain.

Question 28.
What is the source of CSF?
Answer:
CSF is secreted by the choroid plexuses of brain and ependymal cells lining the ventricles of brain and central canal of spinal cord.

Question 29.
What is the function of tympanic membrane?
Answer:
Tympanic membrane vibrates on receiving the sound waves and then transfers the vibrations to malleus, the first of the three ear ossicles.

Question 30.
Mention the role of semicircular canals in ear.
Answer:
Semicircular canals help in balancing the equilibrium of the body.

Question 31.
What is the cause for diabetes insipidus?
Answer:
Diabetes insipidus is caused by the deficiency of ADH.

Question 32.
Give role of Parathormone.
Answer:
Parathormone regulates the calcium balance in the body. It increases blood calcium level by increasing reabsorption of calcium from bones.

Question 33.
What is meningitis?
Answer:
Infection of meninges is called meningitis.

Question 34.
Where is general motor area located? What is the function of this area?
Answer:
General motor area is located on precentral gyrus of frontal lobe. It is concerned with all motor activities.

Question 35.
What is the role of Wernicke’s area?
Answer:
Wernicke’s area is the sensory speech area responsible for understanding and formulating written and spoken language.

Question 36.
What is the location of Wernicke’s area?
Answer:
Wernicke’s area is located in the area of contact between temporal, parietal and occipital lobes of cerebrum.

Question 37.
What is the role of Broca’s area?
Answer:
The role of Broca’s area which is the motor speech area that translates thoughts into speech and controls movement of tongue, lips and vocal cords.

Question 38.
What is the location of Broca’s area?
Answer:
Broca’s area is present in the frontal lobe of cerebrum.

Question 39.
Which areas are present in the post central gyrus?
Answer:
General sensory areas concerned with sensation of temperature, touch, pressure, pain and speech are present in the post central gyrus.

Question 40.
Which areas are located on temporal lobe?
Answer:
The areas concerned with sense of taste, sense of hearing and sense of smell are located on temporal lobe.

Question 41.
What is the main function of occipital lobe?
Answer:
Occipital lobe carries sensory visual area which is concerned with the sense of sight. Association visual area is concerned with perception, analysis and storing of information obtained by sight.

Question 42.
What is neuroendocrine system?
Answer:
Neuroendocrine system is an integrated and coordinated system consisting of nervous and endocrine system which brings about the coordination of the body.

Question 43.
What is the quantity of cerebrospinal fluid in adult human being?
Answer:
Cerebrospinal fluid is about 120 ml in adult human being.

Question 44.
How many neurons are present in the brain?
Answer:
There are about 30,000 million neurons in the brain.

Question 45.
Which part of the brain forms 80-85% of the brain?
Answer:
Cerebrum forms 80-85% of the brain.

Question 46.
Which sense is poorly developed in human beings and what is the reason for this?
Answer:
Sense of smell is poorly developed in human beings and it is due to less developed olfactory lobes.

Question 47.
Where are lateral ventricles situated and what is its roof called?
Answer:
Lateral ventricles are the cavities filled with cerebrospinal fluid, present inside the cerebrum and its roof is called pallium.

Question 48.
What is foramen of Monro?
Answer:
Foramen of Monro is a narrow opening that connects lateral ventricle present in cerebrum with third ventricle present in diencephalon.

Question 49.
What is the roof and floor of diencephalon called respectively?
Answer:
Roof of diencephalon is epithalamus and floor of diencephalon is hypothalamus.

Question 50.
Which hormones are produced from pineal gland? Name their functions.
Answer:
Serotonin and melatonin are hormones of pineal gland which are concerned with metabolic activities and regulation of biological rhythm respectively.

Question 51.
What is Habenular commissure?
Answer:
Habenular commissure connects the lateral walls of diencephalon or thalami with each other.

Question 52.
What structure is present on the anterior side of the hypothalamus?
Answer:
Optic chiasma or crossing of two optic nerves is seen on the anterior side of the hypothalamus.

Question 53.
Name the parts of corpora quadrigemina and give their functions.
Answer:
The upper two lobes of corpora quadrigemina are called superior colliculi which receive impulse from optic nerves while the lower two lobes are called inferior colliculi which receive auditory stimuli. Both colliculi control and coordinate head movements.

Question 54.
What is arbour vitae?
Answer:
Arbor vitae is white, branching tree-like processes of white matter that are sent into grey cortex of cerebellum.

Question 55.
Which cranial nerve is called a dentist nerve?
Answer:
Trigeminal, the Vth cranial nerve is called a dentist nerve.

Question 56.
What is central canal?
Answer:
Central canal is the narrow central cavity present inside the spinal cord.

Question 57.
Which cranial nerves originate from the midbrain?
Answer:
Cranial nerves (III) Occulomotor, (IV) Pathetic and (VI) Abducens originate from the midbrain.

Question 58.
What is the other name for the auditory cranial nerve?
Answer:
Vestibulocochlear.

Question 59.
What is the difference between unconditioned and conditioned reflexes?
Answer:
Unconditioned reflexes are inborn or hereditary and permanent while the conditioned reflexes are temporary, learnt or acquired during lifetime.

Question 60.
Give examples of unconditional reflexes.
Answer:
Blinking of eyes, withdrawing of hand upon pricking, suckling to breast by infant, swallowing, knee jerk, sneezing and coughing are some of the unconditional reflexes.

Question 61.
What do you mean by accommodation power of the lens?
Answer:
The ability of the lens by which the light ray from far and near objects is focused on the retina is called accommodation power of the lens. The lens makes fine adjustments to bring such sharp focus on retina.

Question 62.
Where is pituitary located?
Answer:
Pituitary is located inside a depression called sella turcica which is present in sphenoid bone of the skull.

Question 63.
What is the difference between Lorain dwarf and Frohlic dwarf?
Answer:
Lorain dwarf is mentally normal while Frohlic dwarf is mentally abnormal.

Question 64.
How is Simmond’s disease caused?
Answer:
Simmond’s disease is caused due to hyposecretion of GH during adulthood.

Question 65.
How is Addison’s disease caused?
Answer:
Addison’s disease is caused by the hyposecretion of ACTH that leads to adrenal failure.

Question 66.
How is Cushing’s disease caused?
Answer:
Hypersecretion of corticoids causes Cushing’s disease.

Question 67.
What is the main difference between diabetes mellitus and diabetes insipidus?
Answer:
Diabetes mellitus is caused due to deficiency of insulin while diabetes insipidus is caused due to deficiency of ADH.

Question 68.
Which cells secrete coherin? What is the function of coherin?
Answer:
Coherin is the hormone secreted by hypothalamic neurons that brings about prolonged, rhythmic integrated contractions of the jejunum.

Question 69.
What is the difference between Gull’s disease (Myxoedema) and Grave’s disease?
Answer:
Gull’s disease is caused due to hyposecretion of thyroxine while Grave’s disease is caused due to hypersecretion of thyroxine.

Question 70.
In which part thyroid gland stores its hormones?
Answer:
The lumen of thyroid follicles store the thyroid hormones in the form of thyroglobulins.

Question 71.
What are thymosins?
Answer:
Thymosins are hormones secreted by thymus gland which promote the production of antibodies.

Question 72.
Which hormone is secreted by the heart?
Answer:
Heart secretes ANF or Atrial Natriuretic Factor.

Name the following

Question 1.
Name the region consisting of nerve fibres that connects cerebrum and medulla oblongata.
Answer:
Pons Varolii.

Question 2.
Give the names of cranial nerve number VIth and VIIth.
Answer:
VTth cranial nerve is Abducens and Vllth cranial nerve is Facial.

Question 3.
Name the three sulci present on the cerebral hemispheres.
Answer:
Central sulcus, lateral sulcus and parieto¬occipital sulcus.

Question 4.
Name the band of nerve fibres that connect cerebrum, cerebellum and spinal cord.
Answer:
Crura cerebri.

Question 5.
Name the second largest part of the brain.
Answer:
Cerebellum.

Question 6.
Name the three branches of trigeminal nerve.
Answer:
Ophthalmic, Maxillary and Mandibular.

Question 7.
Name the nerve which arises from ventral side of medulla and supplies the tongue.
Answer:
Hypoglossal.

Question 8.
Name of emergency hormones secreted by sympathetic nervous system.
Answer:
Adrenaline and nor-adrenaline are the emergency hormones secreted by sympathetic nervous system.

Question 9.
Name the disorders caused by hyposecretion of thyroxine in children and adults.
Answer:

  1. Hyposecretion of thyroxine in children : Cretinism.
  2. Hyposecretion of thyroxine in adults : Myoxedema.

Question 10.
Name the dual exocrine as well as endocrine gland. Name the hormones secreted by it.
Answer:
Pancreas is the dual gland, exocrine as well as endocrine, it secretes hormones like insulin, glucagon and somatostatin.

Question 11.
Name the four peptide hormones secreted by endocrine cells of alimentary canal.
Answer:
Gastrin, secretin, cholecystokinin and GIPT or Gastric inhibitory peptide.

Question 12.
Name the disorder caused by the under secretion of thyroxine in children.
Answer:
Cretinism is the disorder seen in children due to under secretion of thyroxine.

Give functions of the following

Question 1.
Meninges and CSF.
Answer:
Functions of meninges:

  1. Meninges give protection to the brain and the spinal cord.
  2. They are also nutritive in function.
  3. Cerebrospinal fluid acts as a shock absorber. It protects the brain from mechanical injuries and from desiccation.
  4. It also maintains constant pressure inside and outside the CNS and regulates the temperature.

Functions of CSF:

  1. CSF helps in exchange of nutrients and wastes between the blood and the brain tissue.
  2. CSF supplies oxygen to the brain.

Question 2.
The functions of forebrain.
Answer:
(A) Functions of cerebrum:

  1. The cerebrum controls the voluntary activities.
  2. The cerebrum perceives various sensory stimuli received through vision, taste, smell, sound, touch, speech, etc.
  3. It is the centre of memory, will-power, intelligence, reasoning and learning.
  4. The cerebrum is the centre for emotions, thoughts and feelings, pain, pleasure, fear, fatigue, pressure, temperature, etc.
  5. It is also the centre for micturition, defecation, weeping, laughing, etc

(B) Function of olfactory lobes: Sensation of smell.

(C) Functions of diencephalon:

  1. Diencephalon acts as a relay centre for motor and sensory impulses between spinal cord, brainstem and various areas of cerebral cortex.
  2. Diencephalon consists of epithalamus, thalami and hypothalamus. Therefore it acts as a centre for homeostasis and higher centre of autonomous nervous system.
  3. Hypothalamic nuclei secrete neurohormones which influence the pituitary gland.
  4. Diencephalon regulates heartbeats, blood pressure and water balance.
  5. Anterior choroid plexus which is located in the diencephalon secretes cerebrospinal fluid.
  6. Hypothalmic regions control many involuntary functions such as hunger, thirst, thermo-regulation, fear, anger, sleep, sexual desire, etc.

Question 3.
Write various functions of hindbrain.
Answer:
Functions of hindbrain:
(i) Cerebellum:

  1. Cerebellum is a primary centre for the control of equilibrium, posture, balancing and orientation.
  2. Neuromuscular activities are regulated by the cerebellum.
  3. Coordination of walking, running, speaking, etc. is under the control of hindbrain.

(ii) Pons:

  1. Activities of two cerebellar hemispheres are coordinated by pons.
  2. Nerve fibres cross over in this area and thus the right side of the brain controls the left part of the body and vice versa.
  3. Pons controls the consciousness of the brain.
  4. Breathing centre is located in pons along with medulla.

(iii) Medulla oblongata:

  1. Medulla oblongata controls all the involuntary activities such as heartbeats, respiration, vasomotor activities.
  2. Peristalsis and reflex actions such as coughing, sneezing, swallowing, etc. are also under the control of medulla oblongata.
  3. Medulla oblongata is essential for all the vital functions of the body.

Question 4.
Spinal cord.
Answer:
Functions of spinal cord:

  1. Spinal cord is the main pathway for conduction of sensory and motor nerve impulses.
  2. The sensory impulses travel from the body
    to the brain and the motor impulses travel from the brain to the body.
  3. Spinal reflexes are controlled by spinal cord.
  4. The spinal cord reduces the load on the brain by taking appropriate actions in a reflex way.

Question 5.
Pituitary gland.
Answer:
Functions of pituitary:

  1. Pituitary secretes seven main hormones viz. ACTH, TSH. GH or STH, LTH or Prolactin, MSH and gonadotropins such as FSH, LH or ICSH.
  2. These hormones are secreted upon receiving proper releasing factor from hypothalamus.
  3. These hormones bring about many coordinating functions in the body. Almost all endocrine glands are under the control of these hormones.
  4. The neurohypophysis part stores two hormones, viz. vasopressin and oxytocin which are secreted by hypothalamus.
  5. Important functions such as growth and reproductive processes, pregnancy, childbirth, lactation, etc. are under the control of pituitary.
  6. Neurohypophysis acts as a neurohaemal organ and stores the hormones for some time.

Question 6.
Functions of hormones secreted by the thyroid gland.
Answer:

  1. Thyroxine is the main metabolic hormone in the body.
  2. Thyroxine maintains basal metabolic rate (BMR) by increasing glucose oxidation. It brings about calorigenic effect by energy production.
  3. It also controls normal protein synthesis.
  4. The physical growth, development of gonads and development of mental faculties is under the control of thyroxine.
  5. It controls tissue differentiation during metamorphosis particularly in amphibia.
  6. Body weight, respiration rate, heart rate, blood pressure, temperature, digestion, etc. is regulated by thyroxine.
  7. Another hormone of thyroid, i.e. calcitonin regulates calcium metabolism of the body.

Question 7.
Give significance of relaxin and inhibin.
Answer:
1. Relaxin : Relaxin relaxes the cervix of the pregnant female and ligaments of pelvic girdle during parturition.
2. Inhibin : Inhibin inhibits the FSH and GnRH production.

Question 8.
Enlist hormones secreted by GI tract and state their role.
Answer:
Gastrointestinal tract:
In the gastrointestinal mucosa, certain ells are endocrine in function. These cells produce hormones which play vital role in digestive processes and flow of digestive juices.

  1. Gastrin : This hormone stimulates gastric glands to produce gastric juice.
  2. Secretin : This hormone is responsible for secretion of pancreatic juice and bile from pancreas and liver.
  3. Cholecystokinin CCK/Pancreozymin PZ : This hormone stimulates gall bladder to release bile and stimulates the pancreas to release its enzymes.
  4. Entero-gastrone/Gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP) : It slows gastric contractions and inhibits the secretion of gastric juice.

Distinguish between the following

Question 1.
Electrical and chemical synapses:
Answer:

Electrical synapse Chemical synapse
1. The gap between the successive neurons in electrical synapse is very less [3.8 nm], 1. The gap between two successive neurons in chemical synapse is larger than electrical synapse [10-20 nm].
2. Transmission across the gap is faster in electrical synapse. 2. Transmission across the gap in chemical synapse is relatively slower than electrical synapse.
3. Electrical synapse is less common. 3. Chemical synapse is more common.
4. Electrical synapse is found in those places of the body requiring instant response. 4. Chemical synapse is found almost everywhere and connects neuron to neuron, muscles or glands.

Question 2.
Sympathetic and parasympathetic nervous system.
Answer:

Sympathetic nervous system Parasympathetic nervous system
1. Sympathetic nervous system is formed by 22 pairs of sympathetic ganglia, 2 sympathetic cords which run parallel to vertebral column. 1. Parasympathetic nervous system has nerve fibres which run along with cranial and spinal nerves.
2. Sympathetic nervous system works through neurotransmitter, adrenaline. 2. Parasympathetic nervous system works through release of acetylcholine.
3. Sympathetic nervous system enhances all the involuntary functions. 3. Parasympathetic nervous system retards all the involuntary functions.
4. It brings about fight, fright and flight responses. 4. It brings about relaxation, comfort, pleasure, etc.
5. The pre-ganglionic nerve fibres are short and the post-ganglionic nerve fibres are long in sympathetic nervous system. 5. The pre-ganglionic nerve fibres are long and the post-ganglionic nerve fibres are short in parasympathetic nervous system.

Question 3.
Unconditional reflexes and Conditional reflexes
Answer:

Unconditional reflexes Conditional reflexes
1. Unconditional reflexes are inborn. 1. Conditional reflexes are not inborn, they require training.
2. Unconditional reflexes are permanent. 2. Conditional reflexes are temporary.
3. They never disappear and need no previous experience. 3. They may disappear after sometime and need proper training for developing it.
4. Unconditional reflexes are heritable. 4. Conditional reflexes are non-heritable.
5. Sneezing, coughing, blinking of eye, etc. are unconditional reflexes. 5. Cycling, driving, playing games, etc. are due to conditional reflexes.

Question 4.
Epithalamus and hypothalamus.
Answer:

Epithalamus hypothalamus
1. Epithalamus is the roof of diencephalon. 1. Hypothalamus is the floor of diencephalon.
2. Epithalamus shows pineal stalk to which pineal gland is attached. 2. Hypothalamus shows infundibulum to which pituitary gland is attached.
3. Epithalamus is non-nervous in nature. 3. Hypothalamus is the higher centre of autonomous nervous system.
4. Epithalamus has anterior choroid plexus which secretes cerebrospinal fluid. 4. Hypothalamus has neurons which secrete two endocrine hormones.
5. Epithalamus controls biological rhythm. 5. Hypothalamus controls homeostasis of the body.

Question 5.
Dura mater and pia mater.
Answer:

Dura mater pia mater
1. Dura mater is the outermost meninx. 1. Pia mater is the innermost meninx.
2. Dura mater lies on the innermost side of skull or cranium. 2. Pia mater lies on outermost side of the brain.
3. Dura mater is tough, thick and fibrous. 3. Pia mater is thin and highly vascular.
4. Dura mater is mainly protective in function. 4. Pia mater is mainly nourishing in nature.
5. Below dura mater is subdural space. 5. Above pia mater is sub-arachnoidal space.

Question 6.
Cerebrum and cerebellum
Answer:

Cerebrum Cerebellum
1. The cerebrum is the larger part forming 85% of the brain. It has four lobes. 1. The cerebellum is the smaller part forming 11%. of the brain. It has three lobes.
2. The cerebrum coordinates the functions of the sensory and motor areas. 2. The cerebellum coordinates the equilibrium of muscular movements during walking and running.
3. The cerebrum plays an important role in receiving the sensory impulses such as touch, pain, heat, cold, etc. 3. The cerebellum plays an important role in maintaining the posture and balance of the body.
4. The cerebrum is concerned with higher mental faculties such as memory, will and intelligence. 4. The cerebellum is concerned with muscular mechanism.

Question 7.
Cranial nerves and Spinal nerves
Answer:

Cranial nerves Spinal nerves
1. Nerves arising from the brain are cranial nerves. 1. Nerves arising from the spinal cord are spinal nerves.
2. There are 12 pairs of cranial nerves. 2. There are 31 pairs of spinal nerves.
3. Cranial nerves are of three types, viz sensory, mixed and motor. 3. All spinal nerves are of mixed type.
4. Cranial nerves are responsible for cerebral reflexes. 4. Spinal nerves are responsible for spinal reflexes.

Question 8.
Extero and entero receptors.
Answer:

Exteroceptors Interoceptors
1. Receptors receiving stimuli from outer environment of the body are called exteroceptors. 1. Receptors receiving stimuli from inside the body are called interoceptors.
2. These are somatic receptors. 2. These are visceral receptors.
3. Exteroceptors keep the body informed about . changes in the environment like temperature, pressure, touch, etc. 3. Interoceptors keep the homeostasis in the body by receiving stimuli from inside the body.
4. Mechanoreceptors, thermoreceptors, chemical receptors, photoreceptors and statoacoustic receptors are the different types of exteroceptors. 4. Propioceptors, enteroceptors, baroceptors are the different types of interoceptors.

Question 9.
Adenohypophysis and neurohypophysis.
Answer:

Adenohypophysis Neurohypophysis
1. Adenohypophysis is the anterior lobe of pituitary. 1. Neurohypophysis is the posterior lobe of pituitary.
2. There is portal system between adenohypo-physis and hypothalamus which has blood sinusoids. 2. There is axonal knobs and blood vessels that connect neurohypophysis and hypothalamus.
3. Adenohypophysis forms 75% of pituitary. 3. Neurohypophysis forms 25% of pituitary.
4. Adenohypophysis has three parts, pars tuberalis, pars distalis and pars intermedia. 4. Neurohypophysis has three parts, median eminence, infundibulum and pars nervosa
5. Adenohypophysis has chromophil (acidophil and basophil) and chromophobe cells. 5. Neurohypophysis has axonic fibres and pituicytes.
6. Adenohypophysis secretes seven different hormones after receiving an appropriate message from hypothalamus through releasing factors. 6. Neurohypophysis does not produce hormones on its own. It is a neurohaemal organ as it receives and stores two hormones from hypothalamus.

Question 10.
FSH and LH
Answer:

FSH LH
1. FSH is follicle stimulating hormone essential for the development of ovary. 1. LH is luteinizing hormone responsible for ovulation in females.
2. FSH stimulates ovary (follicular cells) to produce estrogen. 2. LH stimulates ovary (corpus luteum) to produce progesterone.
3. FSH in males is responsible for the spermatogenesis. 3. LH in females is responsible for the development of corpus luteum.
4. Negative feedback mechanism exists between amounts of FSH and estrogen in females. 4. Negative feedback mechanism exists between amounts of LH and progesterone in females.
5. FSH is indirectly responsible for the development of secondary sexual characters in females. 5. LH is indirectly responsible for maintenance of pregnancy in females.

Question 11.
Glucocorticoids and mineralcorticoids
Answer:

Glucocorticoids Mineralocorticoids
1. Glucocorticoids control carbohydrate metabolism. 1. Mineralocorticoids regulate mineral concentration.
2. These are secreted by the cells of zona fasciculata. 2. These are secreted by the cells of zona glomerulosa.
3. These also regulate protein and fat metabolism. 3. These regulate salt-water balance.
4. Cortisol is the main glucocorticoid. 4. Aldosterone is the main mineralocorticoid.

Give scientific reasons

Question 1.
Number of gyri is related to the degree of intelligence.
Answer:

  1. Gyri are the ridges in the folds present on the cerebral cortex.
  2. The number of folds increase the surface area of the cerebral cortex.
  3. Cerebral cortex has sensory and motor areas such as Wernicke’s area, Broca’s area, etc. If the surface area is greater, the neurons in these areas are also more in number.
  4. Greater the number of neurons greater is the intelligence.
  5. The number of gyri therefore is said to be related to the degree of intelligence.

Question 2.
A drunken person cannot maintain balance of the body.
Answer:

  1. Cerebellum is the primary centre for controlling equilibrium and balance of the body.
  2. Alcohol has an adverse effect on the neurons of cerebellum.
  3. Consciousness of brain is also controlled by cerebellum.
  4. When a person is drunk, the alcohol in his or her blood affects the activities of cerebellum and hence the person cannot maintain the balance of the body.

Question 3.
We are able to understand the smell of the first showers of rain or the sudden changes in the climate.
Answer:

  1. We are able to understand any smell because of our olfactory mucosa and olfactory lobes of the brain.
  2. Volatile substances are received by the olfacto-receptors in the nose.
  3. Nerve impulse generated are carried by olfactory nerve and transmitted to brain where the impulse is interpreted.
  4. The characteristic earthy smell is due to a compound ‘geosmin’.
  5. Geosmin is produced by some species of Streptomyces [ gram positive soil bacterium],
  6. Similarly, sudden change in the climate is easily noticed in the form of temperature change in the surrounding.
  7. This change is detected by caloreceptors of the skin. From these receptors the signal is transmitted to CNS where the change is perceived.

Question 4.
We are able to hear the chirping of the birds and recognize the sound of the bird.
Answer:

  1. The phonoreceptors of the body receive the sound waves and transfer the nerve impulses to the auditory areas of the brain.
  2. The interpretation, of the sound is a combined effort of sensory and association areas [auditory areas] of temporal lobes of the brain.
  3. This is how we are able to hear the chirping of the birds and recognize the sound of the bird.

Question 5.
We can see and enjoy the beautiful colours of the nature after the sunrise.
Answer:

  1. The light receptor are present in the retina of eyes.
  2. These are photosensitive rod and cone cells. Cone cells are sensitive to bright light-and colours.
  3. On receiving the light rays, these cells convert them into nerve impulses.
  4. The cones are of three types, which contain their own characteristic photo-pigments that respond to red, green and blue lights.
  5. Various combinations of these cones and their photo pigments produce sensation of different colours.
  6. These impulses are carried to the visual cortex of the occipital lobe where the image is interpreted.
  7. In this manner, we can see and enjoy the beautiful colours of the nature after the sunrise.

Question 6.
Cerebellum is well developed in humans.
Answer:

  1. Our posture is upright and mode of locomotion is bipedal.
  2. While standing, walking and running, our body has to be in a state of balance.
  3. Cerebellum controls balancing, posture, body equilibrium and orientation.
  4. Thus to control static as well as dynamic equilibrium of the body, cerebellum is well developed.

Question 7.
Mr. Sharma suffered from a stroke and the right side of his body was paralysed. However his response was normal for knee jerk reflex with either leg. Explain how and why?
Answer:

  1. Stroke is damage to the brain due to interruption of its blood supply.
  2. Due to this brain functions and cerebral reflexes are severely affected.
  3. However, spinal reflexes remain largely unaffected.
  4. In the above case. Mr. Sharma suffered from a stroke and developed paralysis. But his response to the knee jerk was normal as it is controlled by spinal cord.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 8.
The word hormone is a misnomer.
Answer:

  1. Hormone is adapted from the Greek word ‘hormein’ means to excite.
  2. But the hormones secreted by the endocrine glands and cells carry out two fold functions, viz. excitatory and inhibitory.
  3. The word hormone is therefore a misnomer.

Question 9.
Pituitary may be considered as the coordinator of endocrine orchestra but not master endocrine gland.
Answer:

  1. The pituitary gland was formerly considered as a master endocrine gland, because all other endocrine glands are under the control of pituitary hormones.
  2. But now it is known that the pituitary gland itself is under the control of hypothalamus through hypo thalamo – hypophysial axis.
  3. Through various releasing factors and release inhibiting factors, the secretions of pituitary are regulated by hypothalamus.
  4. Pituitary in turn controls growth, secretion and maintenance of glands such as adrenal cortex, thyroid and gonads.

Question 10.
Pituitary gland plays an important role in pregnancy and childbirth.
Answer:
Pituitary gland plays an important role in pregnancy and childbirth for the following reasons:

  1. Luteinizing hormone secreted by the pituitary gland stimulates ovulation, formation of corpus luteum and the synthesis of progesterone which are necessary for pregnancy.
  2. Lactogenic hormone secreted by the pituitary gland promotes breast development during pregnancy and stimulates the secretion of milk after childbirth.
  3. Oxytocin secreted by hypothalamus and sent by pituitary gland stimulates the contraction of the uterus during childbirth.

Question 11.
Fall and rise in blood calcium stimulates secretion of parathyroid.
Answer:

  1. Normal calcium level in the blood is called calcemia.
  2. Increase in the blood calcium is called hypercalcemia while decrease in the level is called hypocalcemia.
  3. Decrease in the blood calcium, stimulates the parathyroid glands to secrete PTH.
  4. PTH stimulates osteoclasts of bone to start bone resorption. This will help to cause increase in the blood calcium level.
  5. Increase in the blood calcium above normal will retard the secretion of PTH. Hence further increase in the blood calcium is stopped.

Question 12.
Pancreas is both exocrine as well as endocrine gland.
Answer:

  1. Pancreas is heterocrine gland i.e. both exocrine and endocrine gland.
  2. The exocrine part is pancreatic acini. The cells of acini secrete pancreatic juice containing digestive enzymes like trypsinogen, chymotrypsinogen, etc.
  3. Endocrine part of pancreas is made up of groups of cells called Islets of Langerhans. There are four kinds of cells in islets of Langerhans which secrete hormones.

Alpha (α) cells (20%) secrete glucagon.
Beta (β)) cells (70%) secrete insulin.
Delta (δ) cell (5%) secrete somatostatin. PP cells or F cells (5%) secrete pancreatic polypeptide (PP).
Hence, pancreas is said to be exocrine as well as endocrine gland.

Question 13.
Patient suffering from hypothyroidism shows increased level of TSH. Why?
Answer:

  1. Hypothyroidism means decrease in the secretion of T3 and T4
  2. Decrease in T4, i.e. thyroxine in the blood triggers negative feedback mechanism.
  3. The hormone receptors in hypothalamus detect this change and secrete TRE
  4. TRF stimulates the pituitary to secrete TSH
  5. Thus, Patient suffering from hypothyroidism shows increased level of TSH due to negative feedback control.

Question 14.
We are advised to use iodized salt.
OR
Why do we use iodized salt?
Answer:

  1. Iodine is needed for synthesis of thyroid hormone.
  2. If there is deficiency of iodine in the diet, it causes enlargement of thyroid gland leading to simple goitre.
  3. This disease is common in hilly areas hence it is also called endemic goitre.
  4. Addition of iodine to table salt prevents this disease.
  5. Therefore we must use iodised salt.

Write short notes on the following

Question 1.
Nervous system of Hydra.
Answer:

  1. Hydra, a cnidarian shows the diffused nervous system in the form of nerve net.
  2. It is the most primitive nervous system.
  3. There are two nerve nets in the mesoglea-one connected towards the epidermis and second towards the gastro-dermis.
  4. Hydra lacks sensory organs, but the sensory cells scattered in the body wall.
  5. The nerve impulse shows no polarity or direction. As all neurons are interconnected the response is seen throughout the body.

Question 2.
Nervous system of Planaria.
Answer:

  1. Planaria is a flatworm and belongs to the phylum Platyhelminthes.
  2. It is the most primitive animal with a Central Nervous System (CNS) located on the ventral side of body.
  3. Nervous system consists of a mass of cerebral or cephalic ganglion appearing like an inverted U-shaped brain.
  4. Ventrally from below the ganglia arise a pair of Ventral Nerve Cords (VNC) or long nerve cords. These are interconnected to each other by transfer nerve or commissure in a ladder like manner.
  5. The PNS include sensory cells arranged in lateral cords in the body.

Question 3.
Resting potential of a nerve fibre.
Answer:

  1. The neurons have a property of excitability.
  2. The transmission of the nerve impulse along the long nerve fibre is a result of electrical changes across the neuronal membrane during conduction of an excitation.
  3. The plasma membrane separates the outer [extra cellular fluid] and inner solutions [intra cellular fluid/cytoplasm] of different chemical compounds.
  4. The external tissue fluid has both Na+ and K+
  5. On the inside there is an excess of K+ along with large amount of negatively charged protein molecules and nucleic acid.
  6. This condition of a resting nerve is also called a polarised state and it is established by maintaining an excess of Na+ on the outer side.

Question 4.
Electrical synapse.
Answer:

  1. In this type of synapse gap between the neighbouring neurons is very narrow.
  2. This electrical link is formed between the pre-and post-synaptic neurons.
  3. At the gap junction, the two cells are within almost 3.8 nm distance of each other.
  4. Transmission across the gap is faster.
  5. Electrical synapses are found in those places of the body requiring fastest response as in the defence reflexes.

Question 5.
Velocity of nerve impulse.
Answer:

  1. The rate of transmission of impulse is higher in long and thick nerves.
  2. It is higher in warm blooded animals [homeotherms] than in cold blooded animal [poikilotherms].
  3. The velocity of transmission is higher in voluntary fibres (100- 120 m/second in man) as opposed to autonomic or involuntary nerves (10-20 m/second).
  4. It is faster in medullated nerve fibre [up to 150 m/s], as the impulse has to jump from one node of Ranvier to the next as compared with non-medullated nerve fibre [10-25 m/s]

Question 6.
Meninges of CNS.
Answer:

  1. Meninges are the connective tissue membranes that cover the brain and the spinal cord. There are three meninges, viz. dura mater, arachnoid mater and pia mater that cover the Central nervous system.
  2. The outermost tough, thick and fibrous meninx is dura mater. It is protective in function as it is attached to the inner side of the cranium.
  3. The middle, thin and vascular membrane formed of reticular connective tissue is called arachnoid mater. It carries out nutritive function and also gives protection to the brain.
  4. The innermost highly vascular and thin membrane is pia mater. It lies in contact with CNS. It is nutritive in function.
  5. There is subdural space between the dura mater and arachnoid mater. It is filled with serous fluid.
  6. Besides, there is a sub-arachnoidal space lying between arachnoid mater and pia mater. It is filled with cerebrospinal fluid.

Question 7.
Ventricles in human brain.
Answer:

  1. Ventricles are the cavities present in different parts of the brain.
  2. There are four ventricles in the human brain. All the ventricles are connected with each other.
  3. They are filled with cerebrospinal fluid.
  4. Paracoel or lateral ventricles-I and-II are present inside the cerebral hemispheres.
  5. The diencephalon has ventricle-III.
  6. Ventricle-III is in connection with lateral ventricles by foramen of Monro.

Question 8.
Sympathetic nervous system.
Answer:

  1. Sympathetic Nervous System is formed by 22 pairs of sympathetic ganglia. These ganglia are linearly arranged on two sympathetic cords. Sympathetic nerve cords run on either side of the vertebral column.
  2. Sympathetic nerve cords are connected to CNS by rami communicans of spinal nerve fibres.
  3. This system works during stress, pain, anger, fear or emergency. It is supposed to bring about fight, flight or fright reactions.
  4. Action of sympathetic nervous system is dependent on adrenaline or noradrenaline. This neurotransmitter is secreted by sympathetic nervous system as an emergency hormone.

Question 9.
Parasympathetic nervous system.
Answer:

  1. Parasympathetic nervous system consists of nerve fibres of some cranial nerves, sacral nerves and parasympathetic ganglia.
  2. These parasympathetic ganglia are present on the sides of visceral organs like heart, lungs, stomach, kidney, etc.
  3. Parasympathetic ganglia gives out parasympathetic fibres which innervates these involuntary organs.
  4. Parasympathetic nervous system works through release of acetylcholine which acts as neurotransmitter. It is an inhibiting neurotransmitter which affects visceral organs.
  5. This system works during rest and brings about relaxation, comfort, pleasure, etc.

Question 10.
Parkinson’s disease.
Answer:

  1. Degeneration of dopamine-producing neurons in the CNS causes Parkinson’s disease.
  2. Symptoms develop gradually over the years.
  3. Symptoms are tremors, stiffness, difficulty in walking, balance and coordination.
  4. Seen in old age and is incurable.

Question 11.
Alzheimer’s disease.
Answer:

  1. Alzheimer’s disease is the most common form of dementia.
  2. Its incidence increases with the age.
  3. Symptoms include the loss of cognitive functioning, thinking, remembering, reasoning and behavioural abilities. It interferes with the person’s daily life and activities.
  4. It occurs due to loss of cholinergic and other neurons in the CNS and accumulation of amyloid proteins.
  5. There is no cure for Alzheimer’s, but treatment slows down the progression of the disease and may improve the quality of life.

Question 12.
Types of reflex actions.
Answer:

  1. The reflex actions are of two types, viz. cerebral and spinal.
  2. Cerebral reflex actions are controlled by the brain.
  3. Spinal reflex actions are controlled by the spinal cord.
  4. In man, most of the reflex actions are controlled by the spinal cord.

Question 13.
Pavlov’s experiment about conditional reflex.
Answer:

  1. Conditional reflex was demonstrated by Pavlov while performing experiments with dogs.
  2. Pavlov offered some food to dog and noticed that the dog starts salivating after smelling and seeing the food.
  3. Simultaneously he rang the bell so that the dog associated the food with the sound of bell. This experiment was repeated many a times by him.
  4. Later he only rang the bell and did not give any food to the dog. But still the dog salivated.
  5. This shows that the dog was conditioned to the sound of bell. The dog learnt that there is a relation between food and sound of bell. This is called conditional response.

Question 14.
Mechanism of vision.
Answer:

  1. The light rays of visible wavelength pass through the cornea and the lens and are focused on the retina of the eye.
  2. The sight is possible due to conjugated proteins present in the rods and the cones.
  3. These are photo pigments which are composed of opsin (a protein) and retinal (Vitamin A derivative).
  4. The light induces dissociation of retinal from the opsin, which causes a change in the structure of the opsin.
  5. This causes the change in the permeability of the retinal cells.
  6. It generates action potential which is carried via bipolar cells and ganglion cells and further conducted by the optic nerves to the visual cortex (vision centre) of the brain.
  7. The neural impulses are analyzed and the image formed on the retina is thus recognized.

Question 15.
Mechanism of hearing.
Answer:

  1. The external ear receives the sound waves and sends to the tympanic membrane. The tympanum vibrates transmitting the vibrations to the chain of three ossicles and then to the oval window.
  2. The vibrations are further passed on to the fluid of cochlea.
  3. The waves in the perilymph and endolymph induces movements in the basilar membrane.
  4. The hair cells of organ of Corti bend and are pressed against the tectorial membrane.
  5. Due to this pressure, the nerve impulses are generated and are sent to the afferent nerve fibres.
  6. The impulses are carried by the auditory nerves to the auditory centre of the brain, where the impulses are analyzed and the sound is perceived.

Question 16.
Types of endocrine systems.
Answer:
There are 3 types of endocrine systems.

  1. Discrete endocrine system : The glands exclusively endocrine in function are called discrete endocrine glands.
  2. Mixed endocrine system : The glands endocrine as well as exocrine in function are called mixed endocrine glands.
  3. Diffused endocrine system : Some endocrine cells scattered in a particular region/gland form diffused endocrine system.

Question 17.
Thymus.
OR
Functions of Thymosin.
Answer:

  1. Thymus is located on the dorsal side of the heart and the aorta.
  2. It consists of many lobules.
  3. The thymus plays major role in the development of the immune system.
  4. Thymus secretes thymosin which plays an important role in the differentiation of T-lymphocytes. These cells built cell mediated immunity.
  5. The thymosin also promotes the production of antibodies providing humoral immunity.
  6. The degeneration of thymus gland occur in old individuals leading to decreased production of thymosin thereby weakening of immune response.

Question 18.
The role of heart and kidney in hormone secretion.
Answer:
(I) Kidney:

  1. Kidney produces renin, erythropoietin and calcitriol (calcitriol is the active form of vitamin cholecalciferol (D3).
  2. Renin along with angiotensin helps in maintaining the blood pressure in the renal artery by vasoconstriction.
  3. Erythropoietin stimulates erythropoiesis.
  4. Calcitriol helps in absorbing calcium from the stomach.

(II) Heart:

  1. Heart walls secrete Atrial natriuretic hormone /ANE
  2. ANF increases sodium excretion [natriuresis] along with water.
  3. It acts along with kidneys and reduces blood pressure by lowering blood volume.

Question 19.
Hormones secreted by adrenal gland.
Answer:

  1. The adrenal cortex secretes corticoids. Corticoids is a group of several hormones that control several vital body functions.
  2. Corticoids are of two types, viz. mineralocorticoids and glucocorticoids.
  3. Small amounts of androgenic steroids are also secreted by the adrenal cortex which have the role in the growth of axial and pubic hairs and facial hairs during puberty.
  4. The mineralocorticoids regulate the electrolyte balance while the glucocorticoids are involved in carbohydrate metabolism.
  5. Adrenal medulla secretes adrenaline or epinephrine and noradrenaline or norepinephrine.

Question 20.
Role of mineralocorticoids.
Answer:

  1. The mineralocorticoids regulate ionic and osmotic balance, by regulating the amounts of electrolyte and water.
  2. Aldosterone is the main mineralocorticoid that acts on the renal tubules.
  3. Aldosterone stimulates the re-absorption of Na+ and water and excretion of K+ and phosphate ions.
  4. The aldosterone helps in the maintenance of electrolytes, body fluid volume, osmotic pressure and blood pressure.

Question 21.
Secretions of adrenal medulla and their role.
Answer:

  1. The adrenal medulla secretes two catecholamine hormones, viz. adrenaline (epinephrine) and noradrenaline (nor-epinephrine).
  2. Adrenaline and noradrenaline increase alertness, dilation of pupils, piloerection, sweating, etc.
  3. Both the hormones increase the rate of heartbeat, strength of heart contraction and rate of respiration.
  4. These hormones also stimulate the breakdown of glycogen, lipids and proteins thereby increasing blood glucose level.
  5. All the above reactions are useful for survival during emergency situations and in stress condition. Therefore, they are called emergency hormones or 3 F hormones of fright, fight or flight.

Question 22.
Cortisols and their role.
Answer:
I. Cortisol : Cortisol is the main glucocorticoid hormone.

II. Role of cortisol:

  1. Cortisol stimulates many metabolic reactions such as gluconeogenesis, lipolysis and proteinolysis.
  2. It inhibits cellular uptake and utilization of amino acids.
  3. Cortisol also plays an important role in maintaining the cardiovascular system and kidney functions.
  4. It is also involved in anti-inflammatory reactions and suppresses the immune response.
  5. Cortisol stimulates the RBC production.

Question 23.
Disorders of adrenal cortical hormones.
Answer:

  1. Disorders of adrenal cortical secretions are of two types, viz. hyposecretion and hypersecretion.
  2. Hyposecretion of corticosteroids causes Addison’s disease.
  3. The symptoms of Addison’s disease are general weakness, weight loss, low body temperature, feeble heart action, low BR acidosis, excessive loss of Na+ and Cl in urine, impaired kidney functioning and kidney failure, etc.
  4. Hypersecretion of corticoids causes Cushing’s disease.
  5. The symptoms of Cushing’s disease are alkalosis, enhancement of total quantity of electrolytes in extracellular fluid, polydipsia, increased BR muscle paralysis, etc.

Question 24.
Hormones of adenohypophysis.
Answer:
I. Somatotropic Hormone (STH) or Growth Hormone (GH):

  1. The secretion of GH is under dual control of hypothalamus through GHRF (Growth hormone releasing factor) and GHIF (Growth hormone inhibiting factor).
  2. The GH brings about general growth of the body.
  3. The principal actions of GH Eire promotion of linear growth in the skeleton, increase in the size of the muscles and connective tissue.
  4. GH enhances the protein synthesis. The lipolysis in adipose tissue to release more fatty acids is also stimulated by GH.
  5. The growth of bones by absorption of calcium takes place due to GH.

II. Thyroid Stimulating Hormone (TSH) or Thyrotropin:

  1. TSH is regulated by TRF (Thyrotropin releasing factor) from hypothalamus’
  2. For inhibition there is a negative feedback between thyroxine level in the blood and secretion of TSH.
  3. TSH stimulates thyroid glands to increase uptake of iodine for synthesis of thyroxine. It brings breakdown of colloid to release thyroxine.

III. Adrenocorticotropic Hormone (ACTH) Corticotropin :

  1. ACTH stimulates growth of adrenal cortex Eind stimulates it to secrete glucocorticoids Eind mineralocorticoids.
  2. The regulation of ACTH secretion is under the control of hypothalamic CRF (Corticotropin releasing factor) and the negative feedback mechanism between plasma level of cortisol and ACTH.

IV. Prolactin (PRL) or Luteotropic hormone (LTH):
1. Secretion of prolactin is under duad control by hypothalamus by two factors such as PRF (Prolactin releasing factor) and PIF (Prolactin inhibiting factor) of hypothalamus.

2. Prolactin performs many functions therefore it has many terms as follows :

  • Development of mammary glands (Mammo tropin).
  • Milk secretion by mammary glands (Lactogenic hormone).
  • Maintenance of corpus luteum so that- it keeps on secreting progesterone during pregnancy (Luteotropin).

3. It may be inhibiting the chances of pregnancy during lactation period.

V. Gonadotropic Hormones (GTH) or Gonadotropins:
1. There are two types of gonadotropins, viz. FSH and LH or ICSH.

2. The secretions of gonadotropin are regulated by gonadotropin releasing factor (GHRF) of hypothalamus.

(3) They are regulated by negative feedback by sex hormones such as testosterone and estrogen.
(a) Follicle Stimulating Hormone (FSH):

  • FSH in female stimulates development of Graafian follicles. It helps in the formation of ovum by stimulating oogenesis.
  • It also stimulates ovarian follicular cells for secretion of female sex hormones, estrogen.
  • Under influence of estrogen, development of secondary sexual characters occurs in female.
  • In males, FSH stimulates germinal epithelium of seminiferous tubules for spermatogenesis and helps in the production and maturation of sperms.
  • Deficiency of FSH leads to infertility in both the sexes.

(b) Luteinizing hormone (LH) in females and Interstitial cell stimulating hormone (ICSH) in males:

  • LH brings about ovulation, i.e. rupture and release of ovum from the mature Graafian follicle. The empty Graafian follicle is transformed into corpus luteum.
  • Corpus luteum is a secondary endocrine source which secretes gestational hormone progesterone. Progesterone is a pregnancy stabilizing hormone.
  • In males, ICSH stimulates interstitial cells of Leydig which in turn secretes male sex hormone, the testosterone.
  • Testosterone develops secondary sexual characters in males.
  • High level of progesterone in female signals negative feedback, to pituitary to stop secretion of LH.
  • In males, high level of testosterone in blood gives negative feedback signal to Inhibit the secretion of FSH.

Short answers questions

Question 1.
Give one point of distinction between nervous coordination and hormonal coordination.
Answer:

  1. The activity of nervous coordination is quick, immediate and fast as it sends the electrical signals.
  2. Hormonal coordination is slow and long lasting as it takes place through the action of hormones.

Question 2.
Write about types of nerves.
Answer:
Nerve is a group of neurons enclosed in a connective tissue sheath epineurium. It is classified as:

  1. Sensory nerve : A nerve having all sensory neurons is called sensory nerve. It carries information from sense organs to CNS. It is also called afferent nerve.
  2. Motor nerve : A nerve having all motor neurons is called motor nerve. It carries information from CNS to effector organs. It is also called efferent nerve.
  3. Mixed nerve : A nerve having with both sensory and motor neurons is called a mixed nerve. Sensory neurons in it carry nerve impulses from sense organs to CNS while motor neurons carry nerve impulses from CNS to effector organs.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 3.
What is the composition of neural tissue?
Answer:
Neural tissue is derived from embryonic ectoderm. It consists of two types of cells.

  1. Neurons or nerve fibres : These are structural and functional units of nervous tissue. They conduct nerve impulses and coordinate various body activities.
  2. Neuroglial cells : These are supportive cells which protect neurons throughout CNS and PNS. They perform other functions like secretion of myelin sheath, phagocytosis, production of CSF, etc. e.g Schwann cells, astrocytes, satellite cells, etc.

Question 4.
Explain the structure of cyton.
Answer:

  1. Cyton is the main body of a neuron or nerve fibre.
  2. The cyton has a distinct central nucleus with a nucleolus and neuroplasm.
  3. Cytoplasm surrounds the nucleus around which there are neurofibrils, Nissl’s granules and other cell organelles.
  4. Nissl’s granules are rich in ribosomes and proteins.
  5. Neurofibrils play an important role in transmission of nerve impulse.
  6. The cytons are generally found inside the brain, spinal cord (CNS) and in the ganglia.
  7. Cytons within CNS form ‘nuclei’ while those present outside CNS in nerves form ‘ganglia’.

Question 5.
Enlist the various connective tissue layers in a nerve along with their location.
Answer:
Connective tissue layers in a nerve are:

  1. Endoneurium : Covers each nerve fibre.
  2. Perineurium : Covers each nerve bundle having a number of neurons.
  3. Epineurium : Covers many nerve bundles to form a peripheral nerve.

Question 6.
What is a synapse?
Answer:

  1. Synapse is a microscopic functional gap between two successive neurons.
  2. In this telodendrites of pre-synaptic neuron are in close proximity with dendrites of post-synaptic neuron.
  3. This gap is also called synaptic cleft.
  4. During transmission of nerve impulse, the synapse get filled with neurotransmitters like acetyl choline.

Question 7.
What are the three divisions of nervous system? What are their chief functions?
Answer:

  1. The three divisions of nervous system are central nervous system, peripheral nervous system and autonomous nervous system.
  2. The central nervous system (CNS) consists of brain and spinal cord. The brain and spinal cord are the coordinators for all nervous functions.
  3. The peripheral nervous system (PNS) is constituted by several nerves given by the central nervous system to all the body parts. All these nerves carry impulses to the CNS and bring back the responses from them. They are divided into cranial nerves and spinal nerves.
  4. The autonomous nervous system controls all the internal organs and is not under voluntary control.

Question 8.
Does this CSF remain enclosed inside the ventricles? What can be the outcome of such a situation?
Answer:

  1. CSF is present within the CNS as well as around it.
  2. This fluid communicates with each other on the roof of medulla oblongata through 3 apertures, viz. Foramina of Luschka and foramen of Magendie.
  3. This communication ensures constant pressure of CSF within as well as outside the CNS.
  4. In the absence of this communication, there would be a pressure difference within as well as outside the CNS which will result in disturbances in the activities of CNS. Moreover, intercranial pressure would rise.

Question 9.
Enlist the different parts of the brain.
Answer:

  1. There are three divisions of the brain, viz. forebrain (prosencephalon), midbrain mesencephalon) and hindbrain (rhombencephalon).
  2. Forebrain is divided into cerebrum (telencephalon) and diencephalon (thalamencephalon). Underdeveloped of factory lobes (rhinencephalon) can also be seen in the anterior region.
  3. Midbrain consists of corpora quadrigemina and crura cerebri.
  4. Hindbrain has cerebellum (metencephalon) and brain stem. It is divided into pons varolii and medulla oblongata (myelencephalon).

Question 10.
Describe functional areas of cerebral cortex.
Answer:
Functional areas of cerebrum:

  1. There are three functional areas in cerebrum viz., sensory, association and motor area.
  2. In sensory area, sensory receptors bring the sensory inputs. These inputs are analysed in sensory area.
  3. The sensory speech area is located in parietal lobe. It is called Wernicke’s area.
  4. Association area forms the major portion of the cerebrum. It processes, analyses and stores the information given by the inputs. Power of reasoning, will, understanding, memory, etc. are the faculties present in the cerebral cortex.
  5. Motor area is present in the frontal lobe lying anterior to the premotor area. In the lower part of the motor area just above the lateral sulcus lies the Broca’s area or motor speech area. The Broca’s area controls the movements necessary for speech.

Question 11.
Explain in detail the regions associated with the diencephalon.
Answer:
Diencephalon is a part present between forebrain and midbrain. It has three regions epithalamus, thalami and hypothalamus.
(1) Epithalamus : Epithalamus is the roof of diencephalon. It is highly vascular and non- nervous. It forms anterior choroid plexus that secretes cerebrospinal fluid. Pineal body is attached to epithalamus with the help of pineal stalk. Pineal body secretes serotonin and melatonin.

(2) Thalami : The lateral parts of diencephalon which are interconnected with the habencular commissure are called thalami. From thalami all sensory impulses (except olfactory impulses) pass on to the cerebrum.

3. Hypothalamus : Hypothalamus is the floor of the brain. Pituitary gland is attached to this floor by an infundibular stalk. Hypothalamus has many hypothalamic nuclei which are scattered in the white matter.

Question 12.
What is EBG? What information can be obtained from the EEG?
Answer:

  1. EEG stands for electroencephalography.
  2. It refers to the recordings of the brain’s spontaneous electrical activities in certain period of time.
  3. These are recorded using multiple electrodes.
  4. EEG is non-invasive method and measures voltage fluctuations resulting from ionic current within the neurons.
  5. The basic concepts involved in this are similar to ECG.
  6. It is used to diagnose conditions like epilepsy, sleep disorders, encephalopathies, coma, etc.

Question 13.
Find out how different functional areas of the brain can be mapped?
Answer:
Functional areas and status of the brain can be mapped by several imaging techniques available such as-

  1. MRI : Magnetic Resonance Imaging
  2. CT : Computed Tomography
  3. PET : Positron Emission Tomography

Question 14.
Which are silent areas of the brain?
Answer:

  1. Silent areas of the brain refer to association areas of the brain.
  2. One such area is in the prefrontal cortex of brain.
  3. These are the areas of the brain in which pathogenic conditions may occur without producing symptoms.
  4. Injury to these areas is not accompanied by symptoms related to sensory and motor functions.

Question 15.
Is nervous tissue without lymphatic vessels?
Answer:

  1. CSF is the lymph of CNS.
  2. CSF is continuously generated by the ependymal cells lining the ventricles and central canal and simultaneously drained out of the brain into the blood stream.
  3. There are no lymphatic vessels in the nervous system.
  4. But the CSF is drained into peripheral blood circulation with the help of lymph vessels associated with meninges mainly the dura mater.

Question 16.
Explain the structure of spinal cord.
Answer:
Structure of spinal cord:

  1. Spinal cord is a 42 to 45 cm long, 2 cm thick and hollow tube, extending from medulla oblongata to lumbar region.
  2. It lies in the neural canal of vertebral column.
  3. At the other end, it tapers down and is called conus medullaris. The posterior most end is called filum terminale which appears as a thread-like structure.
  4. Beyond the second lumbar vertebra, it forms a horse tail-like structure called cauda equina. Cauda equina is a bunch of dorsal and ventral roots of last pair of spinal nerves.
  5. There are two swellings on the spinal cord. The upper is cervical swelling and lower is lumbar swelling. Accordingly there are two plexuses, the cervical plexus supplying nerves to hands and the lumbar plexus supplying nerves to legs.
  6. 31 pairs of spinal nerves arise from spinal cord.

Question 17.
What is the significance of reflex action?
Answer:
Significance of reflex action :

  1. Reflex action helps the animals to adjust quickly to the changing environment.
  2. Reflex action is for quick actions necessary for survival. The life may have been in danger in the absence of reflex action.
  3. Most of the reflexes are spinal reflexes, i.e. reflexes controlled by spinal cord. Thus the brain is not involved in these actions. This prevents overloading of the brain and brain fatigue.
  4. Some reflexes are inborn and hence training or learning is not required for these.

Question 18.
During extraction of a tooth, the dentist gives an injection of Anaesthesia to the patient before extraction. Is the action potential generated? How does the local anaesthesia work? What is the effect of pain killer on the nervous system?
Answer:

  1. Teeth are innervated by branches of trigeminal nerve [Vth cranial nerve]
  2. Extraction of tooth stimulates this nerve which then carries the impulse [action potential) to the pain centre of the brain where the pain is perceived.
  3. To avoid this, dentists give anaesthesia, to numb the nerve.
  4. Action potential is not generated due to anaesthesia.
  5. Hence the pain is not perceived.
  6. Similarly, some common pain killers act on the nerve endings and pain centres of the brain, preventing generation of action potential.

Question 19.
Give a list of psychological disorders.
Answer:

  1. Autism spectrum disorder.
  2. Bipolar disorder.
  3. Depression.
  4. Anxiety disorder.
  5. ADHD (Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder).
  6. Stress related disorders.

Question 20.
What are endocrine glands?
Answer:

  1. Endocrine glands are ductless glands which are capable of secreting hormones.
  2. The hormones are poured directly into the bloodstream as the endocrine glands do not have duct.
  3. Hormones regulate the function of target tissue or organ.
  4. They either have excitatory effect or have an inhibitory effect.

Question 21.
What are the main endocrine glands in human body?
Answer:
The main endocrine glands in human body are as follows:

  1. Pituitary or hypophysis
  2. Hypothalamus
  3. Thyroid
  4. Parathyroid
  5. Adrenal or suprarenal
  6. Islets of Langerhans in pancreas
  7. Endocrine parts of gonads, i.e. testis and ovary.
  8. Pineal gland and thymus are also endocrine glands of less importance.

Question 22.
What are the common properties of hormones?
OR
State properties of hormones.
Answer:

  1. Hormones are specifically produced in response to a certain stimulus.
  2. Depending on nature and intensity of the stimulus, the rate of secretion of a hormone varies from low to very high.
  3. Hormones are produced in one organ and show their effect on distant ‘target’ organ. The source and the target region may be distantly located.
  4. Hormones are directly poured in blood circulation and always carried through blood.
  5. Hormones are always bound to specific carrier proteins while being transported through the blood.
  6. Hormones have a high degree of target specificity.
  7. Every hormone acts basically by modifying some aspect of cellular metabolism.
  8. The excessive secretions or deficiencies- of hormones may lead to serious disorders. Such disorders are called hyper – and hypo- disorders, respectively.

Question 23.
What are the disorders caused due to hyposecretion and hypersecretion of GH or STH?
Answer:
(1) Hypersecretion is excessive secretion. In children, the hypersecretion of GH causes gigantism. In adults, it causes Acromegaly.

(2) Hyposecretion, i.e. lesser secretion of GH in children cause dwarfism. The person is also referred to as midget. There are two types of dwarfs, viz. Frohlic dwarf who are mentally abnormal and Lorain dwarf who are mentally normal.

(3) Hyposecretion of GH in adults cause Simmond’s disease.

Question 24.
What are the disorders caused due to hyposecretion and hypersecretion of ACTH?
Answer:

  1. Hyposecretion of ACTH leads to Addison’s disease, i.e. adrenal failure. This results in affected carbohydrate metabolism leading to weakness and fatigue.
  2. The hypersecretion leads to excessive growth of adrenal cortex. This causes Cushing’s disease.

Question 25.
Write an account of hormones secreted by the thyroid gland.
Answer:

  1. Thyroid secretes triiodothyronine or T3, tetraiodothyronine or thyroxine or T4 and thyr ocalcitonin.
  2. The thyroid gland synthesize, store and discharge these hormones.
  3. T3 and T4 are iodinated derivatives of amino acid tyrosine which are secreted by thyroid follicular cells and stored in follicles. They have similar function. The secretion of T3 and T4 are regulated by Thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH) or thyrotropin of pituitary gland in negative feedback manner. T3 is more active and T4 is more potent hormone.
  4. Thyrocalcitonin is secreted by the parafollicular cells.
  5. Thyrocalcitonin regulates blood calcium level. It stimulates bones to take up Ca++ from the blood and deposit it in the form of calcium phosphates in the bones, thereby decreasing blood Ca++ level. Increased calcium level of blood stimulates ‘C’ cells to secrete thyrocalcitonin and vice versa.

Question 26.
Describe adrenal glands with respect to morphology, histology and secretions.
Answer:

  1. A pair of adrenal or suprarenal glands are located just on the upper border of kidneys.
  2. The adrenal gland shows two distinct regions, viz. thicker outer cortex and thinner inner medulla.
  3. The adrenal cortex consists of three distinct regions. The outer zona glomerulosa, the middle zona fasciculata and inner zona reticularis.
  4. Adrenal cortex produces corticoids. Corticoids is a collective term for many hormones, such as glucocorticoids, mineralocorticoids and steroid sex hormones.
  5. Adrenal medulla secretes adrenaline or epinephrine and noradrenaline or norepinephrine.

Question 27.
Why are reproductive organs called dual in function?
Answer:

  1. A pair of testes in males and a pair of ovaries in female both secrete hormones which are essential for sexual characters and function.
  2. Besides this, they also produce male and female gametes respectively. Therefore they are said to be dual in function.

Question 28.
What are male hormones? What is their source and functions?
OR
Write a short note on the functions of androgens.
Answer:

  1. Androgens are male hormones. The most significant androgen is the testosterone.
  2. Interstitial cells of Leydig present in the testis of mature man produce androgen. Androgens are steroid in chemical nature.
  3. Androgens regulate and stimulate the development, maturation and functions of the male reproductive organs like seminiferous tubules, epididymis, vas deferens, seminal vesicles, prostate glands and urethra.
  4. Androgens are made sex hormones. They produce secondary sexual characteristics. Low pitch of voice is produced due to changes in the vocal cords which take place due to testosterone, etc. They stimulate muscular growth and growth of facial and axillary hairs.
  5. The mental make up of a man like aggressiveness is due to testosterone.
  6. They stimulate seminiferous tubules for the process of spermatogenesis.

Question 29.
What are female sex hormones? What role do they play?
Answer:
(1) The ovaries secrete two steroid hormones viz., estrogen and progesterone.

(2) The estrogen is secreted by the developing ovarian follicles. It has many roles in stimulation of female reproductive functions and growth of ovaries, fallopian tubes, uterus and vagina.

(3) It also controls female secondary sexual characteristics like high pitch of voice, development of mammary glands, broadening of pelvis, growth of pubic hairs and deposition of subcutaneous fats to produce feminine stature.

(4) The estrogen also regulates female sexual behaviour.

(5) The empty Graafian follicle after ovulation is converted into a structure called corpus luteum which secretes a hormone known as progesterone. Progesterone is a gestational hormone which is essential for maintaining the pregnancy. It also acts on the mammary glands and stimulates them for lactation, milk synthesis and ejection.

Question 30.
Why is pancreas called a dual gland?
Answer:

  1. Pancreas is called a dual gland because it is exocrine as well as endocrine in nature.
  2. The exocrine pancreas secretes digestive enzymes through acini.
  3. The endocrine pancreas secretes hormones through its endocrine cells called Islets of Langerhans.

Question 31.
What are the hormones of pancreas? Describe the functions of pancreatic hormones.
OR
Pancreas plays an important role in controlling diabetes mellitus. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Islets of Langerhans consists of three types of cells known as a-cells, β-cells and δ-cells.
  2. α-cells secrete glucagon while β-cells secrete insulin. δ-cells secrete somatostatin.
  3. The glucagon is a hyperglycemic hormone. It is a peptide hormone which acts mainly on the liver cells. Here it stimulates hepatocytes for glycogenolysis (i.e. breakdown of glycogen) leading to increased level of blood glucose (i.e. hyperglycemia).
  4. It also stimulates gluconeogenesis (i.e. formation of glucose from non-carbohydrate sources). This in turn brings rise in blood glucose level or hyperglycemia.
  5. Glucagon reduces the cellular glucose uptake and utilisation.
  6. Insulin is also a peptide hormone, which plays a major role in maintenance of blood glucose level.
  7. Insulin stimulates hepatocytes and adipocytes for cellular glucose uptake and utilization.

Therefore glucose from the blood decreases causing hypoglycemia. This hormone helps in the conversion of glucose to glycogen (i.e. glycogenesis) that occurs in target cells.

Question 32.
How is blood glucose level maintained?
Answer:
The blood glucose level is maintained by the joint but antagonistic action of insulin and glucagon.
Insulin is hypoglycemic hormone while glucagon is hyper/glycemic hormone.

When there is excess sugar in the blood, more insulin is secreted by the pancreatic islets. This causes the conversion of blood glucose into glycogen. This process is known as glycogenesis. This causes decline in the level of glucose in the blood.

When there is less blood glucose level then the glucagon is secreted. It causes stored glycogen to be converted into glucose. This process is called glycogenolysis.

Question 33.
What happens when there is insufficiency or deficiency of insulin in the body?
Answer:

  1. Due to insufficiency, of insulin level there is prolonged hyperglycemia. This leads to diabetes mellitus.
  2. In this diabetic condition cells are unable to utilize glucose. Therefore, in a diabetic person blood glucose levels are high. The glucose is excreted in urine.
  3. The harmful compounds like ketone bodies are formed leading to ketosis.
  4. Diabetes can be treated by taking insulin injections or tablets (insulin therapy) or with hypoglycemic drugs.

Question 34.
Where are parathyroid glands located? What are their functions?
OR
Write a short note on the functions of Parathyroid hormone (PTH).
Answer:

  1. Parathyroid glands are located on the back side of the thyroid gland.
  2. There are two pairs of parathyroid glands. One pair of parathyroid is in each lobe of thyroid.
  3. Parathyroid glands secrete a peptide hormone known as parathromone or parathyroid hormone (PTH).
  4. The level of Ca++ in the blood regulates the secretion of PTH.
  5. PTH is hypercalcemic hormone, it increases blood calcium level. Thus the calcium balance is maintained by TCT and PTH.

Question 35.
What are the gastrointestinal hormones? Explain the function of each.
Answer:

  1. There are scattered endocrine cells in different parts of alimentary canal.
  2. These cells secrete four peptide hormones which are gastrin, secretin, cholecystokinin (CCK) and gastric inhibitory peptide (GIP).
  3. Gastrin stimulates gastric glands for the secretion of hydrochloric acid and pepsinogen.
  4. The secretin acts on exocrine pancreas and stimulates secretion of water and bicarbonate ions to form pancreatic juice.
  5. CCK acts on pancreas and gall bladder and stimulates the secretion of pancreatic enzymes and bile juice respectively.
  6. GIP inhibit gastric secretion and motility.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 36.
Name the hormone secreted by the heart. What is its function?
Answer:

  1. The atrial wall of the heart secrete a peptide hormone known as atrial natriuretic factor (ANF).
  2. When the blood pressure increases, ANF hormone is secreted.
  3. It causes dilation of the blood vessels.
  4. Blood then can easily flow with lesser resistance and hence BP decreases.

Question 37.
What are the hormones of kidney? What function do they carry out ?
Answer:

  1. The juxtaglomerular cells of the kidney produce a peptide hormone known as erythropoietin.
  2. Erythropoiesis stimulates bone marrow for the production of RBCs. It thus stimulates the process of erythropoiesis.
  3. Hormone calcitriol from kidney helps in the formation of bones.

Question 38.
Give importance of hypothalamus.
Answer:

  1. Hypothalamus is the controlling centre for hypophysis.
  2. Hypothalamus secretes releasing factors and inhibiting factors and hence regulate the secretions of hypophysis. E.g. Adrenocorticotropin hormone releasing factor or CRF; Thyrotropin releasing factor or TSHRF; GHRF and GHRIE i.e. Growth hormone releasing and release inhibiting factor, etc.
  3. Hypothalamus forms the hypothalamo- hypophyseal axis through which transportation of neurohormones take place.
  4. Hormones like vasopressin and oxytocin are secreted by neurosecretory cells of hypothalamus.
  5. Hypothalamus can register the internal changes in the body as it is a part of diencephalon and thus it accordingly brings about coordination in the body through endocrine system.

Question 39.
Write a brief account of releasing factors secreted by hypothalamus.
Answer:
(1) In the hypothalamus, there are several groups of neurosecretory cells which form different nuclei.

(2) These hypothalamic nuclei are supraoptic, paraventricular, dorso-median and ventromedian nuclei. These neurosecretory cells produce releasing and inhibiting factors.

(3) The hypothalamic neurohormones regulating the release of pituitary hormones are called releasing factors. The following are some of J the important releasing factors:

  • CRF or corticotropin releasing factor or ACTH releasing factor releases secretion of Adrenocorticotropin hormone (ACTH).
  • TRF or TSHRF (Thyroid stimulating hormone releasing factor) stimulates release of TSH.
  • FSH RF (Follicle stimulating hormone ; releasing factor) stimulates release of FSH.
  • GHRF (Growth hormone releasing factor) GHRIF (Growth hormone release inhibiting factor) act on release and regulation of growth hormone.
  • PRF (Prolactin releasing factor) and PRIF ; (Prolactin release inhibiting factor) act on release and regulation of prolactin.
  • MSHRF (Melanocyte stimulating hormone releasing factor) and MSH RIF (Melanocyte stimulating hormone release inhibiting factor) act on release and regulation of MSH.

Question 40.
Hormones are called chemical messengers and regulators. Explain.
Answer:

  1. Hormones bring about coordination in the body with the help of nervous system.
  2. Endocrine system and nervous system together form neuro-endocrine system.
  3. This system works in tune with the external and internal environmental changes.
  4. The hormones are either excitatory or inhibitory. They bring about the actions accordingly to keep the body in homeostasis or equilibrium.
  5. Almost all endocrine glands are controlled by negative feedback inhibition. Some glands are auto-regulatory. Therefore, the concentration of hormones cannot be in excess or in deficiency.
  6. Almost all the functions such as metabolism, growth, reproduction, etc. are under the control of hormones. Therefore hormones are called regulators and messengers.

Chart based/Table based questions

Question 1.
Draw a flow chart of – steps in generation and conduction of a nerve impulse.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 1

Question 2.
Enlist the names of following cranial nerves: I, II, VII, XII
Answer:

Number NAME NATURE
I Olfactory Sensory
II Optic Sensory
VII Facial Mixed
XII hypoglossal Motor

Question 3.
Enlist the names of following cranial nerves : III, W VI, XI
Answer:

Number NAME NATURE
III Occulomotor Motor
IV Trochlear/Pathetic Motor
VI Abducens Motor
XI Spinal accessory Motor

Question 4.
Complete the table.

Number Type No. of Pairs Region
———— Cervical ————- —————
T1 – T12 ————- 12 pairs ————-
L1 – L5 ————- 5 pairs Lower back
————- Sacral ————- Pelvic
————– Coccygeal ————— Tall region

Answer:

Number Type No. of Pairs Region
C1 – C8 Cervical 8 pairs Neck
T1-T12 Thoracic 12 pairs Thorax / Upper back
L1 -L5 Lumber 5 pairs Lower back
S – S5 Sacral 5 pairs Pelvic
Co1 Coccygeal 1 pair Tall region

Question 5.
Write types of neuroglial cells of CNS and PNS in tabular form.
Answer:

CNS – glial cells PNS – glial cells Functions
Oligodendrocytes [cells with few branches] Schwann cells Secrete myelin sheath
Astrocytes [star-shaped and most abundant glial cells in CNS] Satellite cells Protect, cushion and supply nutrients to nearby neurons. Help in maintaining blood-brain barrier.
Microglia

[small cells with few branches]

Macrophages Phagocytosis
Ependymal cells lining the ventricles of brain [mostly columnar] Ependymal cells lining central canal of spinal cord Secrete cerebrospinal fluid

Question 6.
Enlist the various receptors found at various location in the body.
Answer:

Receptors Types locations
Mechanoreceptors Thermoreceptors Skin
Tango [touch and pressure] receptors Skin
Tactile [light touch] receptors Skin
Chemoreceptors Gustato receptors tongue
Olfacto receptors Olfactory mucosa
Photoreceptors Rod and cone cells Retina of eye
Phonoreceptors Organ of Corti Cochlea of internal ear
Stato receptors Cristae and maculae Semicircular canals, utricle, saccule of internal ear

Question 7.
Sketch the concept maps for mechanism of vision and mechanism of hearing.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 3

Question 8.
Complete the table given below by putting a tick (✓) in the boxes where applicable.

Action Reflex Voluntary
1. Touching a hot object ———- ———–
2. Releasing saliva on smelling food ———– ————
3. Applying a car’s brakes in an emergency ———— ————–
4. Blinking of eyes when a small insect touches the eye ———– ————

Answer:

Action Reflex Voluntary
1. Touching a hot object
2. Releasing saliva on smelling food
3. Applying a car’s brakes in an emergency can be a conditioned feclex too.
4. Blinking of eyes when a small insect touches the eye ————

Question 9.
Complete the following table

Action Reflex Voluntary
1. Optic nerve ———– ———–
2. Facial ———– ————
3. Hypoglossal ———— ————–
4. Trigeminal ———– ————
5. Auditory
6. Glosso-pharyngeal

Answer:

Action Reflex Voluntary
1. Optic nerve Sensory Sense of vision and light
2. Facial Mixed Facial expression, movement of neck, tongue, etc. and saliva secretion
3. Hypoglossal Motor Movement of tongue
4. Trigeminal Mixed Sensation of touch, taste and jaw movements
5. Auditory Sensory Hearing and equilibrium
6. Glosso-pharyngeal Mixed Taste, pharyngeal contractions ‘and saliva secretion

Diagram based questions

Question 1.
Sketch and label – nerve net of Hydra.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 4

Question 2.
Sketch and label – nervous system of Planaria
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 5

Question 3.
Sketch and label – depolarization and repolarization along nerve.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 6

Question 4.
Sketch and label ultrastructure of synapse.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 7

Question 5.
Sketch and label – lateral view of brain.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 8

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 6.
Sketch and label – functional areas of Brain?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 9

Question 7.
Sketch and label – ventral view of human brain.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 10

Question 8.
Sketch and label – ventricles of brain.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 11

Question 9.
Sketch and label T.S. of spinal cord.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 12

Question 10.
Sketch and label – formation of spinal nerve.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 13

Question 11.
Sketch and label – mechanism of hormone action.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 14
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 15

Question 12.
Sketch and label – V.S. of pituitary.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 16

Question 13.
Sketch and label – morphology of thyroid
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 17

Question 14.
Sketch and label – histology of thyroid
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 18

Question 15.
Sketch and label – parathyroid glands
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 19

Question 16.
Sketch and label thymus.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 20

Question 17.
Sketch and label – adrenal gland.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 21

Long answer questions

Question 1.
Explain transmission of nerve impulse across a synapse.
OR
Explain how is impulse transmitted through a synapse?
Answer:

  1. The nerve impulse travels along the axon of the pre-synaptic neuron to the axon terminal.
  2. Pre-synaptic neurons or axons have several synaptic knobs at their ends or terminals.
  3. These knobs have membranous sacs, called synaptic vesicles having neurotransmitter molecules.
  4. When an impulse reaches a synaptic knob, voltage sensitive Ca++ channels open and calcium ions (Ca++) diffuse inward from the extracellular fluid.
  5. The increased calcium concentration inside the cells, initiates a series of events that help to fuse the synaptic vesicles with the cell membrane of pre-synaptic neuron, where they release their neurotransmitters by exocytosis.
  6. The neurotransmitters bind to the receptors of the post-synaptic cell,
  7. This action is either excitatory (stimulating) or inhibitory (slowing down/stopping).
  8. Once the impulse has been transferred across the synapse, the enzyme like acetyl cholinesterase destroys the
  9. neurotransmitter and the synapse is ready to receive a new impulse.

Question 2.
Explain transmission of nerve impulse along the axon.
OR
Describe the conduction of a nerve impulse in the neuron.
Answer:
1. Before conduction of nerve impulse, the cell membrane is in the polarized state.

2. When a stimulus is applied at a site on the polarised membrane, the membrane at that site becomes freely permeable to Na+.

3. This leads to a rapid influx of Na+ followed by the reversal of the polarity at that site, i.e., the outer surface of the membrane becomes negatively charged and the inner side becomes positively charged.

4. The polarity of the membrane at that site [site A] is thus reversed and hence depolarised. The electrical potential difference across the plasma membrane at the site of stimulation is called the action potential, which is in fact termed as a nerve impulse.

5. At sites immediately ahead [site B], the axon membrane has a positive charge on the outer surface and a negative charge on its inner surface. As a result, a current flows on the inner surface from site A to site B.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 22

6. On the outer surface current flows from site B to site A to complete the circuit of current flow. Hence, the polarity at the site is reversed, and an action potential is generated at site B. Thus, the impulse (action potential) generated at site A arrives at site B.

7. The sequence is repeated along the length of the axon and consequently the impulse is conducted.

8. The rise in the stimulus-induced permeability to Na+ is extremely short-lived. It is quickly followed by a rise in permeability to K+.

9. Within a fraction of a second, K+ diffuses outside the membrane and restores the resting potential of the membrane at the site of excitation and the fibre becomes once more responsive to further stimulation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 3.
Explain the structure of cerebrum. Structure of cerebrum
Answer:
Answer: Structure of cerebrum:

  1. Cerebrum is the largest part of the brain. It forms 80-85% volume of the brain.
  2. A median longitudinal fissure divides the cerebrum into two cerebral hemispheres. These hemispheres are interconnected by a thick band of transverse nerve fibres called corpus callosum.
  3. The outer part of cerebrum is called cerebral cortex while the inner part is called cerebral medulla.
  4. The roof of cerebrum is called pallium. Pallium is highly folded forming sulci and gyri. Sulci are depressions while gyrl are ridges. The gyri increase the surface area of cerebral cortex.
  5. The ventro-lateral walls of cerebrum are thickened and are called corpora striata.
  6. The cerebral cortex has three deep sulci, the central, lateral and parieto-occipital.
  7. These sulci divide the cerebral hemisphere into four lobes. These are frontal, parietal, occipital and temporal lobes. A fifth median lobe called insula or insular cortex is folded deep within the lateral sulcus.
  8. The central sulcus separates frontal and parietal lobes, the lateral sulcus separates parietal and temporal lobes and the parieto¬occipital sulcus separates parietal and occipital lobe.

Question 4.
Describe the structure and function of midbrain.
Answer:
1. Structure of midbrain:

  • Midbrain is the middle part of the brain situated between the forebrain and the hindbrain. It is present between the pons varolii and diencephalon.
  • It has two distinct regions : Corpora quadrigemina and crura cerebri.
  • Corpora quadrigemina consists of two pairs of lobes, viz., superior colliculi and inferior colliculi. These are located in the thick wall of midbrain.
  • Crura cerebri are thick bands of longitudinal nerve fibres, present on the floor of midbrain.

2. Functions of midbrain:

  • Inferior colliculi control and coordinate auditory reflexes.
  • Superior colliculi control head and eye movements.
  • Crura cerebri connect the cerebrum to cerebellum and spinal cord.

Question 5.
Give an account of structure of hindbrain.
Answer:
Structure of hindbrain:

  1. Hindbrain includes cerebellum, pons varolii and medulla oblongata.
  2. Cerebellum is 11% of the total brain and is the second largest part of the brain.
  3. It has three lobes, median vermis and lateral two cerebral hemispheres. It has outer grey and inner white matter.
  4. Cerebral cortex shows sulci and gyri. The inner white matter of cerebellar medulla shows arbor vitae or branching tree-like processes.
  5. Pons is the part that connects the two cerebral hemispheres. It has outer white and inner grey matter. Pons is made up of nerve fibres which form bridges between cerebrum and medulla oblongata.
  6. Medulla oblongata is the last part of the hindbrain which continues further as a spinal cord. It has outer white and inner grey matter.
  7. Its roof shows has posterior choroid plexus.
  8. Eight pairs of cranial nerves arise from medulla oblongata.

Question 6.
Describe T.S. of spinal cord.
Answer:

  1. Externally there are three meninges covering spinal cord Duramater, arachnoid membrane and pia mater.
  2. Dorsoventrally there are two fissures, the shallow dorsal or posterior fissure and the deeper ventral or anterior fissure.
  3. From dorsal fissure a dorsal septum extends inside.
  4. Neurocoel or central canal is situated in the centre of spinal cord.
  5. The central canal is filled with cerebro¬spinal fluid and is lined by cuboidal epithelial cells called layer of ependyma.
  6. There is inner grey and outer white matter in the spinal cord. This grey matter is in the shape of ‘H’ with two dorsolateral horns and two ventro-lateral horns.
  7. Dorsal horns form dorsal roots and ventral horns form ventral roots.
  8. White matter is divided into three columns, viz., the dorsal funiculi, ventral funiculi and lateral funiculi on either side.
  9. Ascending and descending tracts of nerve fibres arise from dorsal and ventral roots of the spinal cord. Ascending tracts are sensory while descending tracts are motor in nature.

Question 7.
What are the different types of reflexes?
Answer:
1. Based on the location of their action : Thereflexes are divided into somatic reflexes and visceral reflexes.

  • When effector is located in body structures such as skeletal muscles, it is called a somatic reflex.
  • When the effector is located in the visceral organs such as glands or smooth muscles then it is called a visceral reflex.

2. Based on the basis of number of neurons : Reflexes are of two types, viz. monosynaptic reflexes and polysynaptic reflexes.

  • Simple or monosynaptic reflexes are those in which one sensory and one motor neuron are involved in the reflex action.
  • Polysynaptic or complex reflexes are those when more than two neurons are involved in the reflex action.

3. Based on inheritance and experience of learning : The reflexes are subdivided into unconditional or inborn and conditional or acquired.

  • Unconditional or inborn reflexes are inborn or hereditary. They are permanent, never disappear and need no previous experience, e.g. blinking of eyes, suckling, swallowing, knee jerk, sneezing, coughing, etc.
  • Conditional or acquired reflexes are acquired during life by experience or learning. They are based on individual learning or experience. These are not heritable, temporary and may disappear or reappear, e.g. driving, cycling, etc.

Question 8.
Explain the mechanism of reflex action.
Answer:

  1. Mechanism of reflex action: There are series of sequential events in which reflex action is completed:
  2. Stimulus is picked up by any receptors, e.g. pricking of a needle in the hand, causes skin to be a receptor.
  3. Sensory impulse is formed in grey matter of spinal cord. It receives sensory impulse, interprets it and generates motor impulse.
  4. The cyton of motor neuron present in the ventral horn of grey matter and axon conducts motor impulse from spinal cord to effector organ. This is further carried by dendrites innervating the skin.
  5. Impulse is carried to the association neuron by axon of sensory neuron, when impulse reaches the end of the axon there is a synapse.
  6. Transmission takes place by releasing acetylcholine from the synaptic buttons at the end of the axon.
  7. It fills the synaptic gap and helps in chemical transmission of the impulse from axon of one neuron to dendron of the other neuron. Once the impulse reaches the dendrites of association neuron; axonic button releases an enzyme, acetylcholine esterase which neutralizes the acetylcholine and again a synaptic gap is formed. This mechanism helps to receive new impulse or avoid the mixing of different impulses.
  8. The association neuron receives sensory impulse, interprets it, analyses it and generates motor impulse. Motor impulse again travels through synapse between association neuron and motor neuron.
  9. Impulse travels through motor neuron and reaches the effector organ like skeletal muscles or the gland. The effector organ gives a proper response like contraction of the muscles or secretion by the gland.

Question 9.
Define receptors. Enlist different types of receptors.
Answer:
1. Receptors : Receptors are specialized cells, tissues or organs present in the body which receive different stimuli.

2. Types of receptors:

  • Receptors are of two types, viz. exteroceptors and interoceptors.-
  • Exteroceptors receive stimuli directly from the external environment. They are somatic in nature.
  • Interoceptors are located inside the body and are visceral in nature. They respond to internal changes in the body.
  • The various types of exteroceptors and interoceptors, their location and functions have been summarized in the table given below:
    Types of Exteroceptors Location Function
    1. Mechanoreceptors Touch corpuscles in skin Tangoreceptors Pressure Tactile receptors- Touch
    2. Thermoreceptors Skin Frigido receptors (cold) Heat receptors (warmth)
    3. Chemoreceptors Tongue, nasal mucosa Gustatoreceptors – Taste Olfactoreceptors- Smell
    4. Statoacoustic receptors Internal ear Cochlea – Hearing Semicircular canals-Balance and equilibrium
    5. Photoreceptors Retina of the eye Rods and cones interpret images Rods-black and white image. Sensitive to dim light. Cones – Coloured image. Sensitive to bright light.

Question 10.
Describe the different parts of human eye.
OR
Describe briefly the structure of eye.
Answer:

  1. Human eyes are a pair of organs located in sockets of the skull called orbits.
  2. Eyeball is spherical and has three layers.
  3. Sclera is the outer layer of dense connective tissue with anterior transparent cornea.
  4. Choroid is the middle layer. It is bluish in colour containing many blood vessels. The anterior region is thick and forms the ciliary body. Posterior 2/3rd region is thinner.
  5. Iris is the forward segment of the ciliary body which is pigmented and opaque. This part is the visible coloured portion of the eye.
  6. Lens is present anteriorly inside the iris and is held in position by the ligaments of ciliary body.
  7. The aperture surrounded by the iris in front of the lens is known as pupil. The movement of the pupil is regulated by the muscle fibres of iris.
  8. The innermost layer of the eye is the retina having three sub-layers formed by ganglion cells, bipolar cells and photoreceptor cells, which are sensitive to light.
  9. There are two types of photoreceptor cells, viz. rods and cones containing light sensitive proteins. They are termed as photo pigments, rhodopsin which is a derivative of vitamin A (in rods) and iodopsin (in cones).
  10. The cones are responsible for daylight or photopic vision and colour vision. The rods function in dim light giving scotopic vision.
  11. The cones are of three types, each containing its own characteristic photopigments that respond to red, green and blue lights.
  12. The optic nerve leaves the eye at a point slightly away from the median posterior pole of the eyeball. In this region, the rods and cones are absent therefore this region is known as blind spot. Macula lutea, a yellowish pigmented spot is present lateral to the blind spot.
  13. Fovea is a central pit present beside it. Fovea is a thinned out portion of the retina where only the cones are densely packed and therefore have greatest visual acuity (resolution).
  14. A space between the cornea and the lens is called aqueous chamber. It contains a thin watery fluid known as aqueous humor.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 24

Question 11.
Describe the internal structure of human ear.
OR
Ear is one of the important sense organs known for its role in hearing and balancing. Describe those structures present in the internal ear which helps in these functions.
Answer:

  1. The ears are the auditory sensory organs, also involved in maintaining equilibrium of the body.
  2. The ear is composed of three divisions namely the outer ear, middle ear and internal ear.
  3. The external ear consists of the pinna and external auditory meatus (canal). The pinna is for the collection of sound waves coming from the environment. The external auditory canal is the circular tube leading inside up to the eardrum or tympanic membrane.
  4. The tympanic membrane or eardrum is formed of connective tissues having outer skin cover and inner mucus membrane.
  5. The middle ear consists of chain of three ossicles called malleus, incus and stapes, The malleus is attached to the tympanic membrane and the stapes is connected to the oval window of the internal ear. They help in the transmission of sound waves from external auditory canal to internal ear.
  6. Connecting middle ear with the pharynx is eustachian tube which helps in equalizing the air pressure on either side of the tympanic membrane.
  7. The internal ear is fluid filled structure called labyrinth. It has two parts, bony and the membranous labyrinth.
  8. The outer bony labyrinth is formed by the series of channels in which the membranous abyrinth containing endolymph fluid is present.
  9. The membranes consist of coiled cochlea, the reissner’s membrane and basilar membranes. These membranes divide the surrounding perilymph filled bony labyrinth into an upper scala vestibule and a lower scala tympani.
  10. The space within cochlea which is known as scala media is filled with endolymph. The scala vestibule ends at the oval window at the base of cochlea.
  11. The scala tympani terminates at the round window which opens to the middle ear. The organ of corti is located on the basilar membrane. It contains the hair cells which act as auditory receptors.
  12. The hair cells are columnar cells present in rows. The basal ends of the hair cells are in close contact with the afferent nerve fibres while their apical end contains numerous cilia. A thin elastic membrane projects above the rows of the hair cells called tectorial membrane.
  13. Above the cochlea, the internal ear also contains vestibular apparatus. It consists of three semicircular canals and the otolith organ formed of the sacculus and utriculus. The semicircular canals lie in different plane at right angles to each other and are suspended in the perilymph.
  14. The bases of canals are swollen and are called ampullae, which contain a projecting ridge known as crista ampullaris which contain hair cells.
  15. The sacculus and utriculus also have projecting ridge called macula. The crista and macula are the specific receptors of vestibular apparatus. They are responsible for maintenance of body posture and the balance.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination 25

Question 12.
Write an account of position and structure of pituitary gland.
Answer:
Pituitary gland (Hypophysis):
I. Position : Pituitary or Hypophysis is located on the ventral side of brain below the hypothalamus. Infundibulum or hypophyseal stalk attaches pituitary to hypothalamus just behind the optic chiasma. It is well protected in sella turcica which is a depression of the sphenoid bone of the skull.

II. Morphological structure of pituitary- gland: The pituitary gland shows two distinct regions : Anterior lobe or adenohypophysis and posteriorlobe or neuro-hypophysis.
(1) Adenohypophysis or Anterior lobe : It is the largest lobe of the gland and forms about 75% of pituitary gland. It develops as an outgrowth called Rathke’s pouch from the roof of embryonic buccal cavity. It has three divisions, viz. pars tuberalis, pars distalis and pars intermedia.

(i) Pars tuberalis : Tubular region present below the hypothalamus is known as pars tuberalis. It is like a collar around the infundibulum. It is non-secretory in nature.
(ii) Pars distalis : The largest anterior region which is secretory in nature is called pars distalis. It is made up of loose cords of epitheloid secretory cells which are separated by reticular connective tissue containing blood sinusoids. It is connected to the hypothalamus by portal system formed by blood sinusoids.
(iii) Pars intermedia : The narrow cleft between the pars distalis and pars nervosa of neuro – hypophysis is called the intermediate part or pars intermedia. It is reduced, less developed and non-functional in human being.

(2) Neuro-hypophysis or Posterior lobe : The posterior lobe of the pituitary which is attached to hypothalamus by infundibular stalk is called neuro-hypophysis. It is smaller and constitute 25% of pituitary. It has the following three parts:

  1. Median eminence : The swollen median part of the hypothalamus where infundibulum gets attached is called median eminence.
  2. Infundibulum : Infundibulum is the hypophyseal stalk that helps in attachment of pituitary gland to the hypothalamus. It contains mainly the axonic fibres of neurosecretory cells present in hypothalamus. It forms the major connection of hypothalamo-hypophysis axis.
  3. Pars nervosa : The lowermost, larger region of neuro-hypophysis that contains axons is called pars nervosa. It acts as a neurohaerhal organ and contains specialized cells called pituicytes.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 9 Control and Co-ordination

Question 13.
In a person, Pars distalis part of the Pituitary gland is not producing hormones in sufficient quantity. Explain the effects it will produce with respect to the different hormones.
OR
Give names and functions of hormones secreted by adenohypophysis.
Answer:
Pars distalis of the pituitary gland produces following hormones:
GH, ACTH, TSH, FSH, LH/ICSH, LTH and MSH. If these hormones are produced in deficient quantities, following disorders are seen.
1. GH:
(a) Hyposecretion of GH in childhood leads to dwarfism. Frohlich dwarf or Lorain dwarf may be produced based on mental capacity. Hyposecretion in adulthood causes Simmonds’s disease.
(b) Hypersecretion of GH in childhood causes gigantism and in adulthood it causes acromegaly.

2. TSH :
(a) Hyposecretion of TSH leads to thyroid atrophy.
(b) Hypersecretion of TSH causes excessive functioning of thyroid gland.

3. ACTH :
(a) Hyposecretion of ACTH causes Addisons’ disease, in which adrenal gland shows failure of functions.
(b) Hypersecretion of ACTH causes Cushing’s disease, in which the adrenal cortex undergoes excessive growth.

4. FSH : Hyposecretion of FSH leads to infertility in both the sexes. Hypersecretion of FSH in females cause disturbances in menstrual cycle.

5. LH/ICSH : Hyposecretion of LH in females will cause lack of ovulation. Hyposecretion of ICSH in males cause reduction in masculinity. Sperm production may be affected. Hypersecretion of LH/ICSH can cause disturbances in reproductive cycles.

6. LTH : Corpus luteum is not maintained due to lesser amount of LTH. Lactogenesis will also hamper if there is hyposecretion of LTH.

Question 14.
Describe the hormones of neuro¬hypophysis.
Answer:
Hormones of neuro-hypophysis : Neuro-hypophysis does not secrete any hormone itself but stores the hormones which are secreted by hypothalamic neurons. It stores and releases the following hormones, viz. ADH, Oxytocin and coherin.
1. Anti Diuretic Hormone (ADH) or Vasopressin:

  • ADH brings about anti-diuretic action and also increases blood pressure.
  • It is a regulatory hormone which plays a major role in osmoregulation.
  • It increases the permeability of distal convoluted tubule or collecting tubules of uriniferous tubules of kidney.
  • Higher ADH levels decrease the urine output and helps for water conservation. It helps in the absorption of water from the ultrafiltrate thus regulates the water balance of body fluids.
  • ADH also controls constriction of arterioles and increases blood pressure in kidney which facilitates ultra filtration. Therefore it is also called vasopressin.
  • ADH is regulated by increase or decrease of osmotic pressure of blood in a feedback manner.
  • The osmotic pressure is detected by osmoreceptors in the hypothalamus.

2. Oxytocin (Birth hormone):

  • Oxytocin helps in parturition.
  • It is a powerful stimulant of contraction of uterine myometrium at the end of gestation due to which the labour is initiated.
  • It also stimulates myoepithelial cells of mammary glands for milk ejection during lactation.
  • It also helps in fertilization by powerful contractions of the uterine musculature to drive the sperms upward towards fallopian tubes.
  • Oxytocin also excites musculature of gallbladder, ureters, urinary bladder, intestine, etc. for proper functioning of these organs.

3. Coherin : Coherin induces prolonged, rhythmic integrated contractions of the jejunum.

Question 15.
Describe the morphology of thyroid gland.
Or
With the help of a suitable diagram describe the structure of thyroid gland.
Answer:
Morphology of thyroid gland:

  1. Thyroid is the largest endocrine gland in the body.
  2. It weighs about 25 to 30 g and measures about 5 cm in length and 3 cm in width.
  3. It is located in the neck region anteriorly just below the larynx and situated ventrolaterally to the trachea.
  4. The thyroid is derived from the endoderm of the embryo.
  5. The thyroid can vary in size as per age, sex and diet.
  6. It is reddish brown, bilobed and highly vascular
  7. The two lobes are joined by connective tissue called isthmus which is located at 2nd to 4th tracheal cartilage.
  8. Therefore, the right and left lobe of thyroid are seen on both sides of the trachea.
  9. The gland is H-shaped having butterfly-like appearance.
  10. The structural and functional units of thyroid gland are the thyroid follicles.
  11. From the outer surface there lies a connective tissue capsule. A number of septa arise from the connective tissue which are called trabeculae. They divide the gland into lobules. Each lobule has follicles which store hormone. The number of follicles are about three million.

Question 16.
Describe neurohormonal regulation of pituitary and thyroid gland.
Answer:
Pituitary gland is directly under the influence of neurohormones of hypothalamus while thyroid is indirectly influenced.
I. Neurohormonal regulation of pituitary:

  1. Hypothalamus secretes releasing factors and inhibiting factors and hence regulate the secretions of pituitary (hypophysis).
  2. Hypothalamus forms the hypothalamohypophysial axis through which transportation of neuro-hormones take place.
  3. Pituitary secretes a variety of hormones which influence other endocrine glands of the body. E.g. GH, PRL, TSH, ACTH, Gonadotropins

II. Neurohormonal regulation of thyroid :

  1. Hypothalamus secretes TRF [Thyrotropin releasing factor] which influences the anterior pituitary to release TSH.
  2. TSH in turn stimulates thyroid follicles to produce and release two thyroid hormones – T3 and T4. (Thyroxin)
  3. Increase in T3 and T4 triggers negative feedback mechanism that stops the secretion of TRF.

(4) As the pituitary does not get the signal in the form of TRF TSH secretion is stopped.

Question 17.
Name the hormones secreted by the adrenal cortex and state their role.
Answer:
Adrenal cortex secretes 3 types of corticoids – mineralocorticoids, glucocorticoids and sex corticoids.
I. Mineralocorticoids:

  1. The mineralocorticoids regulate ionic and osmotic balance, by regulating the amounts of electrolyte and water.
  2. Aldosterone is the main mineralocorticoid that acts on the renal tubules.
  3. Aldosterone stimulates the re-absorption of Na+ and water and excretion of K+ and phosphate ions.
  4. The aldosterone helps in the maintenance of electrolytes, body fluid volume, osmotic pressure and blood pressure.

II. Glucocorticoids:

  1. Cortisol is the main glucocorticoid. Cortisol stimulates many metabolic reactions such as gluconeogenesis, lipolysis and proteinolysis.
  2. It inhibits cellular uptake and utilization of amino acids.
  3. Cortisol also plays an important role in maintaining the cardiovascular system and kidney functions.
  4. It is also involved in anti-inflammatory reactions and suppresses the immune response.
  5. Cortisol stimulates the RBC production.

III. Sex corticoids (Gonadocorticoids).

  1. Sex corticoids, Androgens and estradiols are produced by the adrenal cortex.
  2. In males, they have a role in development and maintenance of external sex characters.
  3. Excess sex corticoids in female causes adrenal virilism and hirsutism (excess hair on face)
  4. Excess sex corticoids in males causes gynaecomastia i.e. enlarged breast.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation

Question 1.
Mention some main characteristics of gravitational force.
Answer:
Characteristics of gravitational force:

  1. Every massive object in the universe experiences gravitational force.
  2. It is the force of mutual attraction between any two objects by virtue of their masses.
  3. It is always an attractive force with infinite range.
  4. It does not depend upon the intervening medium.
  5. It is much weaker than other fundamental forces. Gravitational force is 10 times weaker than strong nuclear force.

Question 2.
State and explain Kepler’s law of orbits.
Answer:
Statement:
All planets move in elliptical orbits around the Sun with the Sun at one of the foci of the ellipse.
Explanation:

  1. The figure M shows the orbit of a around the planet P Sun.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 1
  2. Here, S and S’ are the foci of the ellipse and the Sun is situated at S.
  3. P is the closest point along the orbit from S and is called perihelion.
  4. A is the farthest point from S and is called aphelion.
  5. PA is the major axis whose length is 2a. PO and AO are the semimajor axes with lengths ‘a’ each.
    MN is the minor axis whose length is 2b. MO and ON are the semiminor axes with lengths ‘b’ each.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 3.
State and prove Kepler’s law of equal areas.
Answer:
Statement:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 2
The line that joins a planet and the Sun sweeps equal areas in equal intervals of time.
Explanation:
i)Kepler observed that planets move faster when they are nearer to the Sun while they move slower when they are farther from the Sun.

ii) Suppose the Sun is at the origin. The position of planet is denoted by \(\vec{r}\) and its momentum is denoted by \(\vec{p}\) (component ⊥ \(\vec{r}\)).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 35
vi) For central force the angular momentum is conserved. Hence, from equations (4) and (5),
\(\frac{\overrightarrow{\Delta \mathrm{A}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = constant
This proves the law of areas.

Question 4.
What is a central force?
Answer:
A central force on an object is a force which is always directed along the line joining the position of object and a fired point usually taken to the origin of the coordinate system.

Question 5.
State and explain Kepler’s law of periods.
Answer:
Statement:
The square of the time period of revolution of a planet around the Sun is proportional to the cube of the semimajor axis of the ellipse traced by the planet.
Explanation:
If r is length of semi major axis then, this law states that.
T2 × r3 or \(\frac{\mathrm{T}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{3}}\) = constant

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Solved Examples

Question 6.
What would be the average duration of year if the distance between the Sun and the Earth becomes
i) thrice the present distance.
ii) twice the present distance.
Solution:
i) Consider r1 be the present distance between the Earth and Sun
We know, T1 = 365 days.
When the distance is made thrice, r2 = 3r1
According to Kepler’s law of period,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 3
i) The duration of the year would be 1897 days when distance is made thrice.
ii) The duration of the year would be 1032 days when distance is made twice.

Question 7.
What would have been the duration of the year if the distance between the Earth and the Sun were half the present distance?
Solution:
Given: r2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{1}}{2}\)
∴ \(\frac{r_{2}}{r_{1}}=\frac{1}{2}\)
To find. Time period (T2)
Formula: \(\left(\frac{T_{2}}{T_{1}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{r_{2}}{r_{1}}\right)^{3}\)
Calculation: We know. T1 = 365 days
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 36
= 365 × 0.3536
= 129.1
T2 = 129.1 days
The duration of the year would be 129.1 days.

Question 8.
Calculate the period of revolution of Jupiter around the Sun. The ratio of the radius of Jupiter’s orbit to that of the Earth’s orbit is 5.
(Period of revolution of the Earth is 1 year.)
Solution:
Given: \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{J}}}{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{E}}}=\frac{5}{\mathrm{l}}\), TE = 1 year
To find: Period of revolution of Jupiter (TJ)
Formula: T2 ∝ r3
Calculation: From formula,
\(\left(\frac{T_{J}}{T_{E}}\right)^{2}=\left(\frac{r_{J}}{r_{E}}\right)^{3}\)
∴ TJ = 53/2
= 5 x \(\sqrt {5}\)
= 11.18 years.
Period of revolution of Jupiter around the Sun is 11.18 years.

Question 9.
A Saturn sear is 29.5 times the Earth’s year. How far is the Saturn from the Sun if the Earth is 1.50 × 108 km away from the Sun?
Solution:
Given: TS = 29.5 TE,
rE = 1.50 × 108 km
To find: Distance of Saturn form the Sun (rS)
Formula: T2 ∝ r3
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 37
∴ rS = 14.32 × 108 km
Saturn is 14.32 × 108 km away from the Sun.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 10.
The distances of two planets from the Sun are 1013 m and 1012 m respectively. Find the ratio of time periods of the two planets.
Solution:
Given: r1 = 1013 m, r2 = 1012 m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 4

Question 11.
Heavy and light objects are released from same height near the Earth’s surface. What can we conclude about their acceleration?
Answer:
Heavy and light objects, when released from the same height, fall towards the Earth at the same speed., i.e., they have the same acceleration.

Question 12.
Explain how Newton concluded that gravitational force F ∝ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Answer:
Before generalising and stating universal law of gravitation, Newton first studied the motion of moon around the Earth.

  1. The known facts about the moon were,
    • the time period of revolution of moon around the Earth (T) = 27.3 days.
    • distance between the Earth and the moon (r) = 3.85 × 105 km.
    • the moon revolves around the Earth in almost circular orbit with constant angular velocity ω.
  2. Thus, the centripetal force experienced by moon (directed towards the centre of the Earth) is given by,
    F = mrω2 …………… (1)
    Where, m = mass of the moon
  3. From Newton’s laws of motion,
    F = ma
    ∴ a = rω2 ……………… (2)
  4. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 5
  5. This is the acceleration of the moon directed towards the centre of the Earth.
  6. This acceleration is much smaller than the acceleration felt by bodies near the surface of the Earth (while falling on Earth).
  7. The value of acceleration due to Earth’s gravity at the surface is 9.8 m/s2.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 6
  8. Newton therefore concluded that the acceleration of an object towards the Earth is inversely proportional to the square of distance of object from the centre of the Earth.
    ∴ a ∝ \(\frac{1}{r^{2}}\)
    x. As, F = ma
    Therefore, the force exerted by the Earth on an object of mass m at a distance r from it is
    F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    Similarly, an object also exerts a force on the Earth which is
    FE ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    Where M is the mass of the Earth. .
  9. According to Newton’s third law of motion, F = FE. Thus, F is also proportional to the mass of the Earth. From these observations, Newton concluded that the gravitational force between the Earth and an object of mass m is F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Question 13.
Discuss the vector form of gravitational force between two masses with the help of diagram.
Answer:

  1. Consider two point masses m1 and m2 having position vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\) from origin O respectively as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 7
  2. The position vector of mass m2 with respect to m1 is given by, \(\vec{r}_{2}-\vec{r}_{1}=\vec{r}_{21}\)
  3. Similarly, position vector of mass m1 with respect to m2 is, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{1}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{12}}\)
  4. Let \(\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{12}}\right|=\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{21}}\right|\) Then, the force acting on mass m2 due to mass m1 will be given as,
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{21}}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\right)\)
    where, \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is the unit vector from m1 to m2.
    The force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{21}}\) is directed from m2 to m1.
  5. Similarly, force experienced by m1 due to m2 is given as, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\left(-\hat{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\right)\)
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{12}=-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\)
    [Note: As \(\hat{\mathbf{r}}_{21}\) is defined as unit vector from m1 to m2, conceptually force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{21}\) is directed from m2 lo m1.]

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 14.
Why Is the law of gravitation known as universal law of gravitation?
Answer:
The law of gravitation is applicable to all material objects in the universe. Hence it is known as the universal law of gravitation.

Question 15.
Give formula for the gravitational force due to a collection of masses and represent it diagrammatically.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 8
For a collection of point masses, the force on any one of them is the vector sum of the gravitational forces exerted by all the other point masses.
For n particles, force on ith mass \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{i}}=\sum_{\mathrm{j}=1 \atop \mathrm{j} \neq \mathrm{i}}^{n} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{ij}}\)
where, \(\vec{F}_{\mathrm{ij}}\) is the force on ith particle due to jth particle.

Question 16.
Discuss qualitative idea for the gravitational force of attraction due to a hollow, thin spherical shell of uniform density on a point mass situated inside it.
Answer:

  1. Let us consider the case when the point mass A, is at the centre of the hollow thin shell.
  2. In this case as every point on the shell is equidistant from A, all points exert force of equal magnitude on A but the directions of these forces are different.
  3. Consider the forces on A due to two diametrically opposite points on the shell.
  4. The forces on A due to them will be of equal magnitude but will be in opposite directions and will cancel each other.
  5. Thus, forces due to all pairs of points diametrically opposite to each other will cancel and there will be no net force on A due to the shell.
  6. When the point object is situated elsewhere inside the shell, the situation is not symmetric. However, gravitational force varies directly with mass and inversely with square of the distance.
  7. When the point object is situated elsewhere inside the shell, the situation is not symmetric. However, gravitational force varies directly with mass and inversely with square of the distance.
  8. Thus, some part of the shell may be closer to point A, but its mass is less. Remaining part will then have larger mass but its centre of mass is away from A.
  9. In this way, mathematically it can be shown that the net gravitational force on A is still zero, so long as it is inside the shell.
  10. Hence, the gravitational force at any point inside any hollow closed object of any shape is zero.

Question 17.
Discuss qualitative idea for the gravitational force of attraction between a hollow spherical shell or solid sphere of uniform density and a point mass situated outside the shell / sphere.
Answer:

  • Gravitational force caused by different regions of shell can be resolved into components along the line joining the point mass to the centre and along a direction perpendicular to this line.
  • The components perpendicular to this line cancel each other and the resultant force remains along the line joining the point to the centre.
  • Mathematical calculations show that, this resultant force on this point equals the force that would get exerted by the shell whose entire mass is situated at its centre.

Solved Problems

Question 18.
The gravitational force between two bodies is 1 N. If distance between them is doubled, what will be the gravitational force between them?
Solution:
Let m1 and m2 be masses of the given two bodies. If they are r distance apart initially, then the force between them will be,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 9
The force between two bodies reduces to 0.25 N.

Question 19.
Calculate the force of attraction between two metal spheres each of mass 90 kg, if the distance between their centres is 40 cm. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m1 = 90 kg, m2 = 90 kg,
r = 40 cm = 40 × 10-2 m.
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Force of attraction (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gm}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Calculation.
From formula,
F = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 90 \times 90}{\left(40 \times 10^{-2}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{6.67 \times 8100}{1600} \times 10^{-7}\)
∴ F = 3.377 × 10-6 N
The force of attraction between the two metal spheres is 3.377 × 10-6 N.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 20.
Three particles A, B, and C each having mass m are kept along a straight line with AB = BC = 1. A fourth particle D is kept on the perpendicular bisector of AC at a distance ¡ from B. Determine the gravitational force on D.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 10
From figure,
distance of particle D, from particles A and C is.
ADCD = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{AB}^{2}+\mathrm{BD}^{2}}\)
= \(\sqrt{(l)^{2}+(l)^{2}}=l \sqrt{2}\)
Gravitational force on particle D is the vector sum of forces due to particles A, B, and C. Gravitational force due to A,
FA = \(\frac{\mathrm{Gmm}}{(l \sqrt{2})^{2}}=\frac{\mathrm{Gm}^{2}}{2 l^{2}}\) = along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{DA}}\)
This force can he resolved into horizontal and vertical components using rectangular unit vectors as shown in figure.
From figure,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 11
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 12
Negative sign indicates net force is acting along DB.
The net force acting on particle D is \(\frac{\mathbf{G m}^{2}}{l^{2}}\left(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}+1\right)\) directed along \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{D B}}\).

[Note: When force, in given case is resolved into its components, its horizontal component contains cos argument while vertical component contains sine argument.]

Question 21.
Three balls of masses 5 kg each are kept at points P(1, 2, 0) Q(2, 3, 0) and R(2, 2, 0). Find the gravitational force exerted on the ball at point R.
Solution:
The net force acting on ball placed at R will be vector sum of forces acting due to balls at P and Q.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 13
= 2.358 × 10-9 N
The net force acting on the ball at point R will be 2.358 × 10-9 N.

Question 22.
For what purpose Cavendish balance is used?
Answer:
Cavendish balance is used to find the magnitude of the gravitational constant G.

Question 23.
Describe the construction of Cavendish balance with the help of neat labelled diagram.
Answer:

  1. The Cavendish balance consists of a light rigid rod. It is supported at the centre by a fine vertical metallic fibre about 100 cm long.
  2. Two small spheres, s1 and s2 of lead having equal mass m and diameter about 5 cm are mounted at the ends of the rod and a small mirror M is fastened to the metallic fibre as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 14
  3. The mirror can be used to reflect a beam of light onto a scale and thereby measure the angel through which the wire will be twisted.
  4. Two large lead spheres L1 and L2 of equal mass M and diameter of about 20 cm are kept close to the small spheres on opposite side as shown in figure.

Question 24.
Describe the working of the experiment performed to measure the value of gravitational constant.
Answer:

  1. In the experiment performed to find the magnitude of gravitational constant (G), Cavendish balance is used.
  2. The large spheres in the balance attract the nearby smaller spheres by equal and opposite force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\). Hence, a torque is generated without exerting any net force on the bar.
  3. Due to the torque the bar turns and the suspension wire gets twisted till the restoring torque due to the elastic property of the wire becomes equal to the gravitational torque.
  4. If r is the initial distance of separation between the centres of the large and the neighbouring small sphere, then the magnitude of the force between them is, F = G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
  5. If length of the rod is L, then the magnitude of the torque arising out of these forces is
    τ = FL = G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)L
  6. At equilibrium, it is equal and opposite to the restoring torque.
    ∴ G\(\frac{\mathrm{mM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)L = Kθ
    Where, K is the restoring torque per unit angle and θ is the angle of twist.
  7. By knowing the values of torque τ1 it and corresponding angle of twist a, the restoring torque per unit twist can be determined as K = τ1/α.
  8. Thus, in actual experiment measuring θ and knowing values of τ, m, M and r, the value of G can be calculated from equation (2).

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 25.
Derive the expression for the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. The Earth is an extended object and can be assumed to be a uniform sphere.
  2. If the mass of the Earth is M and that of any point object is m, the distance of the point object from the centre of the Earth is r then the force of attraction between them is given by,
    F = \(\text { G } \frac{M m}{r^{2}}\) …. (1)
  3. If the point object is not acted upon by any other force, it will be accelerated towards the centre of the Earth under the action of this force. Its acceleration can be calculated by using Newton’s second law,
    F = ma … (2)
  4. From equations (1) and (2),
    ma = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    ∴ Acceleration due to the gravity of the Earth
    \(=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \times \frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}}=\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
    This is denoted by g.
  5. If the object is close to the surface of the Earth, r ≈ R, then,
    gEarth’s surface = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)

Question 26.
Explain why the Earth doesn’t appear to move even though the object of mass m (m << M) kept on the Earth exerts equal and opposite gravitational force on it.
Answer:

  1. An object of mass m (much smaller than the mass of the Earth) is attracted towards the Earth and falls on it.
  2. At the same time, the Earth is also attracted by the equal and opposite force towards the mass m.
  3. However, its acceleration towards m will be,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 38
  4. As m << M, aEarth << g and is nearly zero. As, a result, practically only the mass m moves towards the Earth and the Earth doesn’t appear to move.

Solved Examples

Question 27.
Calculate mass of the Earth from given data, Acceleration due to gravity g = 9.81 m/s2, Radius of the Earth RE = 6.37 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
Solution:
Given: g = 9.81 m/s2, RE = 6.37 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Mass of the Earth (ME)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}_{\mathrm{E}}}{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 39
= antilog {0.9912 + 0.8041 + 0.8041 – 0.8241) × 1023
= antilog {1.7753} × 1023
= 59.61 × 1023
= 5.961 × 1024 kg
Mass of the Earth is 5.961 × 1024 kg.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 28.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth from the given data. (Mass of the Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, Radius of the Earth = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given. M = 6 × 1024 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
Tofind. Acceleration due to gravity (g)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 40
The acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the Earth is 9.77 m/s2.

Question 29.
Calculate the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon if mass of the moon is 1/80 times that of the Earth and diameter of the moon is 1/4 times that of the Earth (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: Mm = \(\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{E}}}{80}\), Rm = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}_{\mathrm{E}}}{4}\), g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on the surface of moon (gm)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: For moon, from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 41
Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet is 0.245 m/s2.

Question 30.
Find the acceleration due to gravity on a planet that is 10 times as massive as the Earth and with radius 20 times of the radius of the Earth (g = 9.8 m/s2).
Solution:
Given: MP = 10 × Mass of the Earth = 10 ME,
RP = 20 × radius of the Earth = 20 RE, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet (gP)
Formula: g = \(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{R}^{2}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 42
Acceleration due to gravity on surface of the planet is 0.245 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 31.
Acceleration due to gravity on the Earth is g. A planet has mass and radius half that of the Earth. How much will be percentage change in the acceleration due to gravity on the planet?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 43
The percentage change in acceleration due to gravity between the planet and the Earth will be 100%.

Question 32.
Explain the graph showing variation of acceleration due to gravity with altitude and depth.
Answer:
The value of acceleration due to gravity is calculated to be maximum at the surface of the Earth. The value goes on decreasing with
i) increase in depth below the Earth’s surface. [varies linearly with (R – d) = r]

ii) increase in height above the Earth’s surface. [varies inversely with (R + h)2 = r2].
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 44
Graph of g, as a function of r, the distance from the centre of the Earth, is plotted as shown in figure.
For r< R,
gd = g\(\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
if r = R – d,
g(r) = g\(\left(\frac{r}{R}\right) \Rightarrow g(r) \propto r\)
Hence, the graph shows a straight line passing through origin and having slope \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{\mathrm{R}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 45
which is represented in the graph.

Question 33.
Why does the weight of a body of a finite mass m is zero at the centre of the Earth?
Answer:
Acceleration at depth d due to gravity is given
by,
gd = g\(\left(1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right)\)
As, at centre of the Earth d = R ⇒ gd = 0.
Hence, the weight of a body of a finite mass m is zero at the centre of the Earth.

Question 34.
Discuss the variation of acceleration due to gravity at poles and equator due to latitude of the Earth.
Answer:

  1. Effective acceleration due to gravity at P is given as,
    g’ = g – Rω2cos2θ.
  2. As the value of θ increases, cos θ decreases. Therefore g’ will increase as we move away from equator towards any pole due to the rotation of the Earth.
  3. At equator θ = 0°
    ∴ cos θ = 1
    ∴ g’e = g – Rω2
    The effective acceleration due to gravity (g’e) is minimum at equator, as here it is reduced by Rω2
  4. At poles θ = 90° cos θ = 0
    ∴ g’p = g – Rω2 cos θ
    = g – 0
    = g
    There is no reduction in acceleration due to gravity at poles, due to the rotation of the Earth as the poles are lying on the axis of rotation and do not revolve.

Question 35.
If g = 9.8 m/s2 on the surface of the Earth, find its value at h = \(\frac{\mathbf{R}}{\mathbf{2}}\) from the surface of the Earth.
Solution:
Given: g = 9.8 m/s2, h = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
To find: Acceleration due to gravity (gh)
Formula: \(\frac{\mathrm{g}_{\mathrm{h}}}{\mathrm{g}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}^{2}}{(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})^{2}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 46
At h = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\) from the surface of the Earth, the value of g is 4.35 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 36.
At what distance above the surface of Earth the acceleration due to gravity decreases by 10% of its value at the surface? (Radius of Earth = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given: gh = 90% of g i.e., \(\frac{g_{h}}{g}\) = 0.9,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Distance above the surface of the Earth (h)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 47

Question 37.
Find the altitude at which the acceleration due to gravity is 25% of that at the surface of the Earth.
(Radius of the Earth = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given: gh = 25% of g = \(\frac{25}{100} \times \mathrm{g}=\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4}\), R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Height (h)
Formula: gh = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
Calculation: From formula,
\(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{4}\) = g\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)^{2}\)
(R + h)2 = 4R2
R + h = 2R
∴ h = 2R – R
∴ h = R
∴ h = 6400 km

Question 38.
A hole is drilled half way to the centre of the Earth. A body is dropped into the hole. How much will it weigh at the bottom of the hole if the weight of the body on the Earth’s surface is 350 N?
Solution:
Given: W = mg = 350 N, d = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{2}\)
To find: Weight at certain depth (Wd)
Formula: gd = \(\mathrm{g}\left[1-\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\right]\)
Calculation: Since Wd = mgd,
from formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 48

Question 39.
Assuming the Earth to be a homogeneous sphere, determine the density of the Earth from following data. (g = 9.8 m/s2, G = 6.673 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km)
Solution:
Given g = 9.8 m/s2,
G = 6.673 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Density (ρ)
Formula: g = \(\frac{4}{3} \pi \mathrm{R} \rho \mathrm{G}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 49

Question 40.
If the Earth were a perfect sphere of radius 6.4 × 106 m rotating about its axis with the period of one day (8.64 × 104 s), what is the difference in acceleration due to gravity from poles to equator?
Solution:
Given: R = 6.4 × 106 m, T = 8.64 × 104 s
To find: Difference in acceleration due to gravity (gP – gE)
Formula: g’ = g – Rω2 cos2θ
Calculation: Since ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}\)
∴ ω = \(\frac{2 \times 3.14}{8.64 \times 10^{4}}\) = \(\frac{6.28}{8.64 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 0.7268 × 10-4
ω = 7.268 × 10-5 rad/s
At poles, θ = 90°
From formula,
gP = g – Rω2cos2 (90°)
= g – 0 ….(∵ cos 90° = 0)
∴ gP = g …. (i)
At equator, θ = 0°,
∴ gE = g – Rω2cos2
gE = g – Rω2 …. (ii)
Subtracting equation (ii) from equation (i), we have,
gP – gE = g – (g – Rω2)
∴ gP – gE = Rω2
= 6.4 × 106 × (7.268 × 10-5)2
= 6.4 × 106 × 52.82 × 10-10
= 338 × 10-4
∴ gP – gE = 3.38 × 10-2 m/s2

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 41.
The Earth is rotating with angular velocity ω about its own axis. R is the radius of the Earth. If Rω2 = 0.03386 m/s2, calculate the weight of a body of mass 100 gram at latitude 25°. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: Rω2 = 0.03386 m/s2, θ = 25°,
m = 0.1 kg, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Weight (W)

Formulae:
i) g’ = g – Rω2 cos2 θ
ii) W = mg

Calculation:
From formula (i),
g’ = 9.8 – [0.03386 – cos2 (25°)]
∴ g’ = 9.8 – [0.03386 × (0.9063)2]
∴ g’ = 9.8 – 0.02781
∴ g’ = 9.772 m/s2
From formula (ii),
W = 0.1 × 9.772
∴ W = 0.9772 N

Question 42.
If the angular speed of the Earth is 7.26 × 10-5 rad/s and radius of the Earth is 6,400 km, calculate the change in weight of 1 kg of mass taken from equator to pole.
Solution:
Given: R = 6.4 × 106 m, ω = 7.26 × 10-5 rad/s
To find: Change in weight (∆W)
Formulae:
i) ∆g = gp – geq = Rω2
ii) ∆W = m∆g

Calculation: From formula (i) and (ii),
∆W = m(Rω2)
= 1 × 6.4 × 106 × (7.26 × 10-5)2
= 3373 × 10-5 N

Question 43.
Define potential energy.
Answer:
Potential energy is the work done against conservative force (or forces) in achieving a certain position or configuration of a given system.

Question 44.
Explain with examples the universal law which states that “Every system always configures itself in order to have minimum potential energy or every system tries to minimize its potential energy”.
Answer:
Example 1:

  1. A spring in its natural state, possesses minimum potential energy. Whenever we stretch it or compress it, we perform work against the conservative force.
  2. Due to this work, the relative distances between the particles of the system change i.e., configuration changes and potential energy of the spring increases.
  3. The spring finally regains its original configuration of minimum potential energy on removal of the applied force.
    This explains that the spring always try to rearrange itself in order to attain minimum potential energy.

Example 2:

  1. When an object is lying on the surface of the Earth, the system of that object and the Earth has minimum potential energy.
  2. This is the gravitational potential energy of the system as these two are bound by the gravitational force. While lifting the object to some height, we do work against the conservative gravitational force.
  3. In its new position, the object is at rest due to balanced forces. However, now, the object has a capacity to acquire kinetic energy, when allowed to fall.
  4. This increase in the capacity is the potential energy gained by the system. The object falls on the Earth to achieve the configuration of minimum potential energy on dropping it from the new position.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 45.
Obtain an expression for change in gravitational potential energy of any object displaced from one point to another.
Answer:
i) Work done against gravitational force in displacing an object through a small displacement, stored in the system in the form of increased potential energy of the system.
∴ dU = –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{g}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{dr}}\)
Negative sign appears because dU is the work done against the gravitational force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}}\).

ii) For displacement of the object from an initial position \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{i}}}\) to the final position \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{\mathrm{f}}}\), the change in potential energy ∆U, can be obtained by integrating dU.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 50

 

iii) Gravitational force of the Earth, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{g}}\) = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}} \hat{\mathrm{r}}\) where \(\hat{r}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).
Negative sign appears here because \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{g}}}\) is directed towards centre of the Earth and opposite to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\).

iv) For Earth and mass system,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 51
Hence, change in potential energy corresponds to the work done against conservative forces.

Question 46.
Using expression for change in potential energy, show that gravitational potential energy of the system of object of mass m and the Earth with separation of r is, –\(\frac{\text { GMm }}{\text { r }}\)
Answer:

  1. Change in P.E. for a system of Earth and mass is given by,
    ∆U = GMm\(\left(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{f}}\right)\)
  2. For gravitational force, point of zero potential energy is taken to be at r = ∞.
  3. Hence, U(ri) = 0 at ri = ∞
    Final point rf is the point where the potential energy of the system is to be determined.
  4. At rf = r
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 52
    This is gravitational potential energy of the system of object of mass m and Earth of mass M having separation r (between their centres of mass).

Question 47.
Derive the formula for increase in gravitational potential energy of a Earth – mass system when the mass is lifted to a height h provided h << R.
Answer:

  1. If the object is on the surface of Earth, r = R
    U1 = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
    If the object is lifted to height h above the surface of Earth, the potential energy becomes _ GMm 12 ~~ R+h
    U2 = –\(\frac{G M m}{R+h}\)
  2. Increase in the potential energy is given by
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 53
  3. If g is acceleration due to gravity on the surface of Earth. GM = gR2
    ∴ ∆U = mgh\(\left(\frac{R}{R+h}\right)\) … (1)
  4. Equation (1) gives the work to be done to raise an object of mass rn to a height h, above the surface of the Earth.
  5. If h << R, we can use R + h ≈ R.
    ∴ ∆U = mgh
    Thus, mgh is increase in the gravitational potential energy of the Earth – mass system if an object of mass m is lifted to a height h, provided h << R.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 48.
Write a short note on gravitational potential.
Answer:
The gravitational potential energy of the system of Earth and any mass m at a distance r from the centre of the Earth is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 54
The factor –\(\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = (VE)r is defined as the
gravitational potential of Earth at distance r from its centre.

As the potential depends only upon mass of the Earth and location of the object, it is same for any mass m bound to the Earth.

Question 49.
Explain the relation between the gravitational potential energy and the gravitational potential.
Answer:

  1. In terms of potential, we can write the potential energy of the Earth-mass system as, Gravitational potential energy (U) = Gravitational potential (Vr) × mass (m)
  2. Thus, gravitational potential is gravitational potential energy per unit mass.
    ∴ Vr = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
  3. For any conservative force field, the concept of potential can be defined on similar lines.
  4. Gravitational potential difference between any two points in gravitational field can be written as,
    V2 – V1 = \(\frac{U_{2}-U_{1}}{m}\)
    = \(\frac{\mathrm{dW}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
    This is the work done (or change in potential energy) per unit mass.
  5. Therefore, in general, for a system of any two masses m1 and m2, separated by distance r, we can write,
    U = –\(\frac{\mathrm{G} \mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
    = (V1)m2
    = (V2)m1
    Here V1 and V2 are gravitational potentials at r due to m1 and m2 respectively.

Solved Exmaples

Question 50.
What will be the change in potential energy of a body of mass m when it is raised from height RE above the Earth’s surface to 5/2 RE above the Earth’s surface? RE and ME are the radius and mass of the Earth respectively.
Solution:
Change in potential energy (P.E.) of a body of mass m is given by,
∆U = GMEm\(\left(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{f}}\right)\)
Here, ri = RE + RE = 2 RE
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 55
[Note: Answer calculated above is in accordance with textual methods of calculation.]

Question 51.
What will be the change in potential energy of a body of mass m when it is placed on the surface of the Earth from height R above the Earth’s surface?
Solution:
Change in potential energy (P.E.) of a body of mass m is given by,
∆U = GMEm\(\frac{1}{r_{i}}-\frac{1}{r_{r}}\)
Here, ri = R + R = 2R
Similarly, rf = R
∴ ∆U = GMEm \(\left[\frac{1}{2 R}-\frac{1}{R}\right]\) = GMEm\(\left(-\frac{1}{2 R}\right)\)
∴ ∆U = –\(\frac{\mathbf{G} \mathbf{M} \mathbf{m}}{\mathbf{2 R}}\)
Negative sign indicates that potential energy is decreasing.

Question 52.
Determine the gravitational potential of a body of mass 80 kg whose gravitational potential energy is 5 × 109 J on the surface of the Earth.
Solution:
Given: m = 80 kg, U = 5 × 109 J
To find: Gravitational potential (V)
Formula: V = \(\frac{\mathrm{U}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
V = \(\frac{5 \times 10^{9}}{80}=\frac{25}{4}\) × 107
= 6.25 × 107 J kg-1
Potential of the body at the surface of the Earth is 6.25 × 107 J kg-1.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 53.
Calculate the escape velocity of a body from the surface of the Earth.
(Average density of Earth = 5.5 × 103 kg/m3, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, radius of Earth R = 6.4 × 106 m)
Solution:
Given: ρ = 5.5 × 103 kg/m3, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Escape velocity (ve)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 27
= 2 × 6.4 × 106 × 8.759 × 10-4
∴ ve = 11.21 × 103 m/s = 11.21 km/s
The escape velocity of a body is 11.21 km/s.

Question 54.
What is a satellite?
Answer:
An object which revolves in an orbit around a planet is called as satellite.
Example:

  • Moon is a natural satellite of the Earth.
  • INSAT is an artificial satellite of the Earth.

Question 55.
Write a short note on Polar satellites.
Answer:

  1. Polar Satellites are placed in lower polar orbits.
  2. They are at low altitude 500 km to 800 km.
  3. Period of revolution of polar satellite is nearly 85 minutes, so it can orbit the Earth 16 time per day.
  4. They go around the poles of the Earth in a north-south direction while the Earth rotates in an east-west direction about its own axis.
  5. The polar satellites have cameras fixed on them. The camera can view small stipes of the Earth in one orbit. In entire day the whole Earth can be viewed strip by strip.
  6. Polar region and equatorial regions close to it can be viewed by these satellites.
  7. Polar satellites are used for weather forecasting and meteorological purpose. They are also used for astronomical observations and study of Solar radiations.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 56.
Derive the expression for the critical velocity of a satellite revolving close to the surface of the Earth in terms of acceleration due to gravity.
Answer:

  1. When the satellite is revolving close to the surface of the Earth, the height is very small as compared to the radius of the Earth.
  2. Hence the height can be neglected and radius of the orbit is nearly equal to R, i.e., R + h ≈ R
  3. The critical speed of the satellite then becomes,
    vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R}}\)
  4. G is related to acceleration due to gravity by the relation,
    g = \(\frac{G M}{R^{2}}\)
    ∴ GM = gR2
  5. Thus, critical speed in terms of acceleration due to gravity, neglecting the air resistance, can be obtained as,
    vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{gR}^{2}}{\mathrm{R}}}=\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}\)

Question 57.
From an inertial frame of reference, explain the apparent weight for a person standing in a lift having zero acceleration.
Answer:

  1. A passenger inside a lift experiences only two forces:
    • Gravitational force mg directed vertically downwards and
    • normal reaction force N directed vertically upwards, exerted by the floor of the lift.
  2. As these forces are oppositely directed, the net force in the downward direction will be F = ma – N.
  3. Though the weight of a passenger is the gravitational force acting upon it, the person experiences his weight only due to the normal reaction force N exerted by the floor.
  4. A lift has zero acceleration when the lift is at rest or is moving upwards or downwards with constant velocity.
  5. Thus, a net force acting on the passenger inside the lift will be,
    F = 0 = mg – N
    ∴ mg = N
    Hence, in this case the passenger feels his normal weight mg.

Question 58.
What happens to the apparent weight of the person inside the lift moving with net upward acceleration?
Answer:

  1. The lift is said to be moving with net upward acceleration in two possible conditions:
    • when the lift just starts moving upwards or
    • is about to stop at a lower floor during its downward motion.
  2. As the net acceleration is upwards, the upward force must be greater.
    ∴ F = ma = N – mg
    ∴ N = mg + ma
    ∴ N > mg
  3. Thus, for a passenger inside this lift, his apparent weight is more than his actual weight when the lift was not accelerated.

Question 59.
Why does a passenger feel lighter when the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion?
Answer:

  1. When the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion it has a net downward acceleration.
  2. As the net acceleration is downwards, the downward force must be greater.
    ∴ F = ma = mg – N
    ∴ N = mg – ma
    i.e., N < mg
    Hence, a passenger feels lighter when the lift is about to stop at a higher floor during its upward motion.

Question 60.
When does a weighing machine will record zero for a passenger in a lift?
Answer:
If the cables of the lift are cut, the downward acceleration of the lift, ad = g. In this case, we get,
N = mg – mad = 0
Thus, there will not be any feeling of weight and the weighing machine will record zero.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 61.
Define time period of a satellite.
Obtain an expression for the period of a satellite in a circular orbit round the Earth. Show that the square of the period of revolution of a satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the orbital radius.
Answer:
Definition:
The time taken by a satellite to complete one revolution around the Earth is called its time period.
Expression for time period:
i) Consider, m = mass of satellite, h = altitude of satellite. Thus, r = R + h = radius of orbit of the satellite.
ii) In one revolution, distance traced by satellite is equal to circumference of its circular orbit.
iii) If T is the time period of satellite, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 28
Since π2, G and M are constant,
∴ T2 ∝ r3
Hence, square of the period of revolution of a satellite is directly proportional to the cube of the radius of its orbit.

vi) Taking square roots on both the sides of equation (4), we get,
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{r}^{3}}{\mathrm{GM}}}\)
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{(R+h)^{3}}{G M}}\)
This is the required expression for period of satellite orbiting around the Earth in circular path.

Question 62.
For an orbiting satellite very close to surface of the Earth, show that T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{g}}}\).
Answer:

  1. Time period of an orbiting satellite at certain height is given by, T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{(R+h)^{3}}{G M}}\)
  2. If satellite is orbiting very close to the Earth’s surface, then h ≈ 0
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 29

Solved Examples

Question 63.
Show that the critical velocity of a body revolving in a circular orbit very close to the surface of a planet of radius R and
mean density ρ is 2R\(\sqrt{\frac{G \pi \rho}{3}}\).
Solution:
Since the body is revolving very close to the surface of a planet,
∴ h << R
R = radius of planet
ρ = mean density of planet
Critical velocity of a body very close to Earth is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 30

Question 64.
Find the orbital speed of the satellite w hen satellite is revolving round the Earth in circular orbit at a distance 9 × 106 m from its centre. (Given: Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: r = 9 × 106 m, M = 6 × 1024kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find: Orbital speed (vc)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{GM}}{\mathrm{r}}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 31
∴ vc = 6.668 × 103 m/s
The orbital speed of the satellite is 6.668 × 103 m/s.

Question 65.
Taking radius of the Earth as 6400 km and g at the Earth’s surface as 9.8 m/s2, calculate the speed of revolution of a satellite orbiting close to the Earth’s surface.
Solution:
Given: R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Critical velocity (vc)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{gR}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
vc = \(\sqrt{9.8 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= \(\sqrt{98 \times 64 \times 10^{4}}\)
= 7\(\sqrt{2}\) × 8 ×102
= 7.92 × 103 m/s
The speed of revolution of the satellite orbiting close to the Earth’s surface is 7.92 × 103 m/s.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 66.
The critical velocity of a satellite revolving around the Earth is 10 km/s at a height where gh = 8 m/s 2. Calculate the height of the satellite from the surface of the Earth. (R = 6.4 × 106 m)
Solution:
Given: vc = 10 km/s = 10 × 103 m/s,
gh = 8 m/s3, R = 6.4 × 106 m
To find: Height of the satellite (h)
Formula: vc = \(\sqrt{g_{\mathrm{h}}(R+h)}\)
Calculation: From formula,
10 × 103 = \(\sqrt{8 \times(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
Squaring both the sides, we get,
100 × 106 = 8(R + h)
∴ 8(R + h) = 100 × 106
∴ R + h = \(\frac{100}{8}\) × 106
∴ h = 12.5 × 106 – R
= 12.5 × 106 – 6.4 × 106
= 6.1 × 106m
∴ h = 6100 km
The height of the satellite from the surface of the Earth is 6100 km.

Question 67.
An artificial satellite revolves around a planet in circular orbit close to its surface. Obtain the formula for period of the satellite in terms of density p and radius R of planet.
Solution:
Time period of a satellite revolving around the planet at certain height is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 15

Question 68.
Calculate the period of revolution of a polar satellite orbiting close to the surface of the Earth. Given R = 6400 km, g = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: For satellite close to Earth surface,
R + h ≈ R
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Time period of satellite (T)
Formula: T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{R}{g}}\)
Calculation: From Formula,
T = 2 × 3.14 × \(\sqrt{\frac{6.4 \times 10^{6}}{9.8}}\)
= 6.28 × 8.081 × 102
= 5.075 × 103 sec
≈ 85 min
The time period of satellite very close to the Earth’s surface is nearly 85 minute.

Question 69.
A satellite orbits around the Earth at a height equal to R of the Earth. Find its period. (R = 6.4 × 106 m, g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: h = R = 6.4 × 106m, g = 9.8 m/s2
To find: Time period (T)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 33
The time period of the satellite is 1.435 × 104 s.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 70.
Calculate the height of the communication satellite. (Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, M = 6 × 1024 kg, R = 6400 km)
Solution:
For communication satellite, T = 24 × 60 × 60 s,
Given: M = 6 × 1024 kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m
To find: Height (h)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation 34
The height of the communication satellite is 35910 km.

Question 71.
How will you ‘weigh the Sun’, that is estimate its mass? The mean orbital radius of the Earth around the Sun is 1.5 × 108 km.
Solution:
Given: r = 1.5 × 108 × 103m,
T = 365 days = 365 × 24 × 60 × 60 s
To find: Mass (M)
Formula: T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{r^{3}}{G M}}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
M = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} r^{3}}{G T^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{4 \times(3.14)^{2}\left(1.5 \times 10^{11}\right)^{3}}{\left(6.67 \times 10^{-11}\right)(365 \times 24 \times 60 \times 60)^{2}}\)
∴ M = 2.01 × 1030kg
The mass of the Sun is 2.01 × 1030 kg.
[Trick: To ‘weigh the Sun’, i.e., estimate its mass, one needs to know the period of one of its planets and the radius of the planetary orbit.]

Question 72.
Calculate the B.E. of a satellite of mass 2000 kg moving in an orbit very close to the surface of the Earth. (G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m = 2 × 103 kg, R = 6.4 × 106 m,
R = 6.4 × 106 m, M = 6 × 1024kg,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
M = 6 × 1024 kg
To find: Binding Energy (B.E.)
Formula: For satellite very close to Earth,
B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 2 \times 10^{3}}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
∴ B.E. = 6.25 × 1010 joule
The binding energy of the satellite is 6.25 × 1010 joule.

Question 73.
Find the binding energy of a body of mass 50 kg at rest on the surface of the Earth. (Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km, M = 6 × 1024 kg)
Solution:
Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m,
M = 6 × 1024 kg, m = 50 kg
To find: Binding energy (B.E.)
Formula: B.E. = \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
B.E. = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 50}{6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
= \(\frac{2001}{6.4}\) × 107
∴ B.E. = 3.127 × 109 J
The binding energy of the body 3.127 × 109 J.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 74.
Find the total energy and binding energy of an artificial satellite of mass 1000 kg orbiting at height of 1600 km above the Earth’s surface.
(Given: G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2, R = 6400 km, M = 6 × 1024 kg)
Solution:
Given: h = 1600 km = 1.6 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2,
R = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106m,
m = 1000 kg, M = 6 × 1024kg
To find:
i) Total Energy (T.E.)
ii) Binding Energy (B.E.)
Formulae: i. T.E. = –\(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{2(\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h})}\)
ii. B.E. = -T.E.

Calculation: From formula (i),
T.E = – \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 1000}{2(6.4+1.6) \times 10^{6}}\)
= –\(\frac{40020 \times 10^{7}}{2 \times 8}\)
∴ T.E. = -2.501 × 1010J
From formula (ii),
B.E. = 2.501 × 1010 J
i) The total energy of the artificial satellite is -2.501 × 1010 J.
ii) The binding energy of the artificial satellite is 2.501 × 1010 J.

Question 75.
Determine the binding energy of satellite of mass 1000 kg revolving in a circular orbit around the Earth when it is close to the surface of Earth. Hence find kinetic energy and potential energy of the satellite. (Mass of Earth = 6 × 1024 kg, radius of Earth = 6400 km; gravitational constant G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2)
Solution:
Given: m = 1000 kg, M = 6 × 1024 kg,
R = 6400 km, G = 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
To find:
i) Binding Energy (B.E.)
ii)Kinetic Energy (K.E.)
iii) Potential Energy (P.E.)

Formulae: For satellite very close to Earth,
i) B.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \times \frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
ii) K.E.= B.E.
iii) P.E. = -2 K.E.

Calculation: From formula (i),
B.E. = \(\frac{6.67 \times 10^{-11} \times 6 \times 10^{24} \times 1000}{2 \times 6.4 \times 10^{6}}\)
∴ B.E. = 3.1265 × 1010 J
From formula (ii),
K.E. = 3.1265 × 1010
∴ K.E. = 3.1265 × 1010 J
From formula (iii),
P.E. = -2(3.1265 × 1010)
∴ P.E. = -6.2530 × l010J
i) The binding energy of the satellite is 3.1265 × 1010 J.
ii) The kinetic energy of the satellite is 3.1265 × 1010 J.
iii) The potential energy of the satellite is -6.2530 × 1010J.

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 76.
How are Kepler’s law of periods and Newton’s law of gravitation related?
Answer:
Consider a planet of mass m revolving around the Sun of mass M in a circular orbit.
Let,
r = radius of the circular orbit of the planet.
T = Time period of revolution of planet around the Sun.
ω = angular velocity of planet.
F = Centripetal force exerted by the Sun on the planet.
Centripetal force is given by,
F = mrω2;
But ω = \(\frac{2 \pi}{T}\)
∴ F = mr (\(\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}\))2
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} \mathrm{mr}}{\mathrm{T}^{2}}\) …(i)
According to Kepler’s third law,
T2 ∝ r3
T2 = Kr3 ……….. (where, K = constant) (ii)
Substituting equation (ii) in equation (i),
F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2} \mathrm{mr}}{\mathrm{Kr}^{3}}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{4 \pi^{2}}{\mathrm{~K}} \frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) ….(∵ \(\frac{4 \pi^{2}}{\mathrm{~K}}\) is a constant quantity)
Since, the gravitational attraction between the Sun and the planet is mutual, force exerted by the planet on the Sun will be proportional to the mass M of the Sun.
∴ F ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{Mm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
∴ F = \(\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
The above equation represents Newton’s law of gravitation. In this manner, Newton’s law of gravitation is derived from Kepler’s law of periods.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 77.
Represent graphically the variation of total energy, kinetic energy and potential energy of a satellite with its distance from the centre of the Earth.
Answer:
For a satellite,
Potential energy (U) = \(\)
Kinetic energy (K) = \(\) and
Total energy (E) = \(\), where, r = R + h
Also, U and E remain negative whereas K remains positive.
Hence, the graph will be:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 1.1

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
Kepler’s law of equal areas is an outcome of
(A) conservation of energy
(B) conservation of linear momentum
(C) conservation of angular momentum
(D) conservation of mass
Answer:
(C) conservation of angular momentum

Question 2.
Amongst given statements, choose the correct statement.
(I) Kepler derived the laws of planetary motion.
(II) Newton provided the reason behind the laws of planetary motion.
(A) (I) is correct.
(B) (II) is correct.
(C) Both (I) and (II) are correct.
(D) Neither (I) nor (II) is correct.
Answer:
(B) (II) is correct.

Question 3.
The figure shows the motion of a planet satellite in terms of mean density of Earth. around the Sun in an elliptical orbit with Sun at the focus. The shaded areas A and B are also shown in the figure which can be assumed to be equal. If t1 and t2 represent the time for the planet to move from a to b and d to c respectively, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 16
(A) t1 < t2
(B) t1 >t2
(C) t1 = t2
(D) t1 ≤ t2
Answer:
(C) t1 = t2

Question 4.
A planet is revolving around a star in a circular orbit of radius R with a period T. If the gravitational force between the planet and the star is proportional to R-3/2, then
(A) T2 ∝ R5/2
(B) T2 ∝ R-7/2
(C) T2 ∝ R3/2
(D) T2 ∝ R4
Answer:
(A) T2 ∝ R5/2

Question 5.
Time period of revolution of a satellite around a planet of radius R is T. Period of revolution around another planet whose radius is 3R is
(A) T
(B) 9T
(C) 3T
(D) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) T
Answer:
(D) 3\(\sqrt{3}\) T

Question 6.
Newton’s law of gravitation is called universal law because
(A) force is always attractive.
(B) it is applicable to lighter and heavier bodies.
(C) it is applicable at all times,
(D) it is applicable at all places of universe for all distances between all particles.
Answer:
(D) it is applicable at all places of universe for all distances between all particles.

Question 7.
If the mass of a body is M on the surface of the Earth, the mass of the same body on the surface of the moon is
M
(A) 6M
(B) \(\frac{M}{6}\)
(C) M
(D) Zero
Answer:
(C) M

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 8.
Which of the following statements about the gravitational constant is true?
(A) It has no units.
(B) It has same value in all systems of units.
(C) It is a force.
(D) It does not depend upon the nature of medium in which the bodies lie.
Answer:
(D) It does not depend upon the nature of medium in which the bodies lie.

Question 9.
The gravitational force between two bodies is ______
(A) attractive at large distance only
(B) attractive at small distance only
(C) repulsive at small distance only
(D) attractive at all distances large or small
Answer:
(D) attractive at all distances large or small

Question 10.
Mass of a particle at the centre of the Earth is
(A) infinite.
(B) zero.
(C) same as at other places.
(D) greater than at the poles.
Answer:
(C) same as at other places.

Question 11.
Which of the following is not a property of gravitational force?
(A) It is an attractive force.
(B) It acts along the line joining the two bodies.
(C) The forces exerted by two bodies on each other form an action-reaction pair.
(D) It has a very finite range of action.
Answer:
(D) It has a very finite range of action.

Question 12.
If the distance between Sun and Earth is made two third times of the present value, then gravitational force between them will become
(A) \(\frac{4}{9}\)times
(B) \(\frac{2}{3}\)times
(C) \(\frac{1}{3}\)times
(D) \(\frac{9}{4}\) times
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{9}{4}\) times

Question 13.
The gravitational constant G is equal to 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2 in vacuum. Its value in a dense matter of density 1010 g/cm3 will be
(A) 6.67 × 10-1 N m2/kg2
(B) 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2
(C) 6.67 × 10-10 N m2/kg2
(D) 6.67 × 10-21 N m2/kg2
Answer:
(B) 6.67 × 10-11 N m2/kg2

Question 14.
Acceleration due to gravity above the Earth’s surface at a height equal to the radius of the Earth is ______
(A) 2.5 m/s2
(B) 5 m/s2
(C) 9.8 m/s2
(D) 10 m/s2
Answer:
(A) 2.5 m/s2

Question 15.
If R is the radius of the Earth and g is the acceleration due to gravity on the Earth’s surface, the mean density of the Earth is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 2
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{3 \mathrm{~g}}{4 \pi \mathrm{RG}}\)

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 16.
Variation of acceleration due to gravity (g) with distance x from the centre of the Earth is best represented by (R → Radius of the Earth)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 3
Answer:
(D)

Question 17.
Which of the following statements is not correct for the decrease in the value of acceleration due to gravity?
(A) As we go down from the surtce of the Earth towards its centre.
(B) As we go up from the surface of the Earth.
(C) As we go from equator to the poles on the surface on the Earth.
(D) As the rotational velocity of the Earth is increased.
Answer:
(C) As we go from equator to the poles on the surface on the Earth.

Question 18.
Calculate angular velocity of Earth so that acceleration due to gravity at 60° latitude becomes zero. (Radius of Earth = 6400 km, gravitational acceleration at poles = 10 m/s2, cos60° = 0.5)
(A) 7.8 × 10-2 rad/s
(B) 0.5 × 10-3 radis
(C) 1 × 10-3 radis
(D) 2.5 × 10-3 rad/s
Answer:
(D) 2.5 × 10-3 rad/s

Question 19.
The gravitational potential energy per unit mass at a point gives ________ at that point.
(A) gravitational field
(B) gravitational potential
(C) gravitational potential energy
(D) gravitational force
Answer:
(B) gravitational potential

Question 20.
A satellite is orbiting around a planet at a constant height in a circular orbit. If the mass of the planet is reduced to half, the satellite would
(A) fall on the planet.
(B) go to an orbit of smaller radius.
(C) go to an orbit of higher radius,
(D) escape from the planet.
Answer:
(D) escape from the planet.

Question 21.
How does the escape velocity of a particle depend on its mass?
(A) m2
(B) m
(C) m0
(D) m-1
Answer:
(C) m0

Question 22.
Escape velocity on a planet is ve. If radius of the planet remains same and mass becomes 4 times, the escape velocity becomes
(A) 4ve
(B) 2ve
(C) ve
(D) 0.5 ve
Answer:
(B) 2ve

Question 23.
If the escape velocity of a body on Earth is 11.2 km/s, the escape velocity of the body thrown at an angle 45° with the horizontal will be
(A) 11.2 km/s
(B) 22.4 km/s
(C) \(\frac{11.2}{\sqrt{2}}\)km/s
(D) 11.2 \(\sqrt{2}\) km/s
Answer:
(A) 11.2 km/s

Question 24.
Potential energy of a body in the gravitational field of planet is zero. The body must be
(A) at centre of planet.
(B) on the surface of planet.
(C) at infinity.
(D) at distance equal to radius of Earth.
Answer:
(C) at infinity.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 25.
If gravitational force of Earth disappears, what will happen to the satellite revolving round the Earth?
(A) Satellite will come back to Earth.
(B) Satellite will continue to revolve.
(C) Satellite will escape in tangential path.
(D) Satellite will start falling towards centre.
Answer:
(C) Satellite will escape in tangential path.

Question 26.
If ve and vo represent the escape velocity and orbital velocity of a satellite corresponding to a circular orbit of radius R respectively, then
(A) ve = vo
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)vo = ve
(C) ve = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)vo
(D) ve and vo are not related
Answer:
(B) \(\sqrt{2}\)vo = ve

Question 27.
If the kinetic energy of a satellite is 2 × 104 J, then its potential energy will be
(A) – 2 × 104 J
(B) 4 × 104 J
(C) -4 × 104 J
(D) -104J
Answer:
(C) -4 × 104 J

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
A body weighs 200 N on the surface of the Earth. How much will it weigh half way down to the centre of the Earth?
(A) 250 N
(B) 100 N
(C) 150 N
(D) 200 N
Answer:
(B) 100 N
Hint:
Acceleration due to gravity at depth d,
gd = g (1 – \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{R}}\))
= g(1 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)) …(∵ d = \(\frac{1}{2}\))
∴ gd = \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\)
Weight of the body at depth d = R/2,
Wd = mgd = m × g/2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 200
∴ Wd = 100 N

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 2.
The work done to raise a mass m from the surface of the Earth to a height h, which is equal to the radius of the Earth, is:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR
(B) \(\frac{3}{2}\) mgR
(C) mgR
(D) 2mgR
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR
Hint:
Initial potential energy on Earth’s surface,
Ui = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Final potential energy at height h = R
Uf = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{2 \mathrm{R}}\)
Work done, W = Uf – Ui
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 4
∴ W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mgR

Question 3.
The time period of a geostationary satellite is 24 h, at a height 6RE (RE is radius of Earth) from surface of Earth. The time period of another satellite whose height is 2.5 RE from surface will be,
(A) \(\frac{12}{2.5}\)h
(B) 6\(\sqrt{2}\) h
(C) 12\(\sqrt{2}\) h
(D) \(\frac{24}{2.5}\)h
Answer:
(B) 6\(\sqrt{2}\) h
Hint:
By Kepler’s third law,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 5
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 6

Question 4.
Assuming that the gravitational potential energy of an object at infinity is zero, the change in potential energy (final – initial) of an object of mass m, when taken to a height h from the surface of Earth (of radius R), is given by,
(A) \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{R+h}\)
(B) – \(\frac{\text { GMm }}{R+h}\)
(C) \(\frac{\text { GMmh }}{R(R+h)}\)
(D) mgh
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\text { GMmh }}{R(R+h)}\)
Hint:
Potential energy of object of mass m on the surface of Earth,
P.E = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}}\)
Potential energy of object of mass m at a height h from the surface of the Earth,
P.E.’ = \(\frac{-\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{R}+\mathrm{h}}\)
∴ Change in potential energy
= P.E.’ – P.E.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 7

Question 5.
A body mass ‘m’ is dropped from height \(\), from Earth’s surface, where ‘R’ is the radius of Earth. Its speed when it will hit the Earth’s surface is (ve = escape velocity from Earth’s surface)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 8
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathbf{v}_{\mathrm{e}}}{\sqrt{3}}\)
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 9
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 10

Question 6.
According to Kepler’s Law, the areal velocity of the radius vector drawn from the Sun to any planet always
(A) decreases.
(B) first increases and then decreases.
(C) remains constant.
(D) increases.
Answer:
(C) remains constant.

Maharashtra Board Solutions

Question 7.
A body is thrown from the surface of the Earth with velocity ‘u’ m/s. The maximum height in m above the surface of the Earth upto which it will reach is (R = radius of Earth, g = acceleration due to gravity)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 11
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{u^{2} R}{2 g R-u^{2}}\)
Hint:
(T.E.) on surface = (T.E.) at height ‘h’
∴ (K.E.)1 + (P.E.)1 = (K.E.)2 + (P.E.)2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 12
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 13

Question 8.
A satellite is revolving in a circular orbit at a height ‘h’ above the surface of the Earth of radius ‘R’. The speed of the satellite in its orbit is one-fourth the escape velocity from the surface of the Earth. The relation between ‘h’ and ‘R’ is
(A) h = 2R
(B) h = 3R
(C) h = 5R
(D) h = 7R
Answer:
(D) h = 7R
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 5 Gravitation q 14

Question 9.
Two astronauts are floating in gravitational free space after having lost contact with their spaceship. The two will:
(A) keep floating at the same distance between them.
(B) move towards each other.
(C) move away from each other.
(D) will become stationary.
Answer:
(B) move towards each other.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 1.
‘Rest and motion are relative concepts.’ Explain the statement with an example.
Answer:

  1. A body can be described to be at rest or in motion with respect to a system of co¬ordinate axes known as the frame of reference.
  2. A body is in motion if it changes its position with respect to a fixed reference point in a frame of reference. On the other hand, a body is at rest if it does not change its position with respect to a fixed reference point in a frame of reference.
  3. An object can be said to be at rest with respect to a frame of reference while the same object can be said to be in motion with respect to a different frame of reference.
    Example: In a running train, all the travellers in the train are in a state of rest if the train is taken as the frame of reference. On the other hand, all the travellers in the train are in a state of motion if ground (or platform) is taken as the frame of reference.
  4. Thus, motion and rest always need a frame of reference to be described. Hence, rest and motion are relative concepts.

Question 2.
Explain how acceleration and initial velocity decides trajectory of a motion.
Answer:

  1. The resultant motion is linear if:
    • initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) = 0 (starting from rest) and acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) is in any direction.
    • initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) ≠ 0 and acceleration a is in line with the initial velocity (same or opposite direction).
  2. The resultant motion is circular if initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) ≠ 0 and acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) is perpendicular to the velocity throughout.
  3. The resultant motion is parabolic if the initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}\) is not in line with the acceleration \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\) = constant.
    e.g., trajectory of a projectile motion.
  4. Similarly, various other combinations of initial velocity and acceleration will result into more complicated motions.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 3.
State Newton’s first law of motion.
Answer:
Statement: Every inanimate object continues to be in a state of rest or of uniform unaccelerated motion along a straight line, unless it is acted upon by an external, unbalanced force.

Question 4.
An astronaut accidentally gets separated out of his small spaceship accelerating in inter stellar space at a constant rate of 100 m s-2. What is the acceleration of the astronaut the instant after he is outside the spaceship? (Assume that there are no nearby stars to exert gravitational force on him.) (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. Assuming absence of stars in the vicinity, the only gravitational force exerted on astronaut is by the spaceship.
  2. But this force is negligible.
  3. Hence, once astronaut is out of the spaceship net external force acting on him can be taken as zero.
  4. From the first law of motion, the acceleration of astronaut is zero.

Question 5.
Give the magnitude and direction of the net force acting on:

  1. a drop of rain falling down with a constant speed.
  2. a cork of mass 10 g floating on water.
  3. a kite skilfully held stationary in the sky.
  4. a car moving with a constant velocity of 30 kmh-1 on a rough road.
  5. a high speed electron in space far from all gravitating objects, and free of electric and magnetic fields. (NCERT)

Answer:

  1. The drop of rain falls down with a constant speed, hence according to the first law of motion, the net force on the drop of rain is zero.
  2. Since the 10 g cork is floating on water, its weight is balanced by the up thrust due to water. Therefore, net force on the cork is zero.
  3. As the kite is skilfully held stationary in the sky, in accordance with first law of motion, the net force on the kite is zero.
  4. As the car is moving with a constant velocity of 30 km/h on a road, the net force on the car is zero.
  5. As the high-speed electron in space is far from all material objects, and free of electric and magnetic fields, it doesn’t accelerate and moves with constant velocity. Hence, net force acting on the electron is zero.

Question 6.
State Newton’s second law of motion and its importance.
Answer:
Statement: The rate of change of linear momentum of a rigid body is directly proportional to the applied (external unbalanced) force and takes place in the direction of force.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
Where, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = Force applied
p = m\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = linear momentum

Importance of Newton’s second law:

  1. It gives mathematical formulation for quantitative measure of force as rate of change of linear momentum.
  2. It defines momentum instead of velocity as the fundamental quantity related to motion.
  3. It takes into consideration the resultant unbalanced force on a body which is used to overcome Aristotle’s fallacy.

Question 7.
Explain why a cricketer moves his hands backwards while holding a catch. (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. In the act of catching the ball, by drawing hands backward, cricketer allows longer time for his hands to stop the ball.
  2. By Newton’s second law of motion, force applied depends on the rate of change of momentum.
  3. Taking longer time to stop the ball ensures smaller rate of change of momentum.
  4. Due to this the cricketer can stop the ball by applying smaller amount of force and thereby not hurting his hands.

Question 8.
Large force always produces large change in momentum on a body than a small force. Is this correct?
Answer:
No. From Newton’s second law, we have.
\(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{F}\) …. (i)
dP = Fdt …. (ii)
From equation (ii), we can infer that a small force acting for a longer time can produce same change in momentum of a body as a large force acting in the same direction for a short time. Hence, the given statement is incorrect.

Question 9.
Newton’s first law is contained in the second law. Prove it.
Answer:

  1. From Newton’s second law of motion, we have, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{dt}}(\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}})\)
  2. For a given body, mass m is constant.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}\)
  3. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = zero, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) is constant. Hence if there is no force, velocity will not change. This is nothing but Newton’s first law of motion.

Question 10.
State Newton’s third law of motion
Answer:
Statement: To every action (force) there is always an equal and opposite reaction force).

Question 11.
State the importance of Newton’s third law of motion.
Answer:

  1. Newton’s third law of motion defines action and reaction as a pair of equal and opposite forces acting along the same line.
  2. Action and reaction forces always act on different objects.

Question 12.
State the consequences of Newton’s third law of motion.
Answer:

  1. Two interacting bodies exert forces which are always equal in magnitude, have the same line of action and are opposite in direction, upon each other. Thus, forces always occur in pairs.
  2. If a body A exerts an action force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{BA}}\) on body B, then body B also exerts an equal and opposite reaction force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{AB}}\) on body A, simultaneously.
  3. Body A experiences the force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{AB}}\) only and
    body B experiences the force \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{BA}} only.
  4. Both the forces, action and reaction act at the same instant.
  5. Both the forces always act on different bodies. Hence, they never cancel each other.
  6. Both the forces do not necessarily arise due to contact i.e., they can be non-contact forces. Example: Repulsive forces between two magnets.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 13.
If a constant force of 800 N produces an acceleration of 5 m/s2 in a body, what is its mass? If the body starts from rest, how much distance will it travel in 10 s?
Solution:
Given: F = 800 N, a = 5 m/s2, u = 0, t = 10 s
To find: mass (m), distance travelled (s)
Formulae:

i. F = ma
ii. s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{at}^{2}\)

Calculation:
From formula (i),
∴ m = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{a}}=\frac{800}{5}\) = 160 kg
From formula (ii),
s = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 5 × (10)2 [∵ u = 0]
∴ s = 250 m
Answer:
Mass of the body is 160 kg and the distance travelled by the body is 250 m.

Question 14.
A constant force acting on a body of mass 3 kg changes its speed from 2 m s-1 to 3.5 m/s in 25 s. The direction of motion of the body remains unchanged. What is the magnitude and direction of the force? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: u = 2 ms-1, m = 3 kg,
v = 3.5 m s-1, t = 25s
To find: Force (F)
Formula: F = ma
Calculation: Since, v = u + at
∴ 3.5 = 2 + a × 25
a = \(\frac{3.5-2}{25}\) = 0.06 m s-2
From formula,
F = 3 × 0.06 = 0.18 N
Since, the applied force increases the speed of the body, it acts in the direction of the motion.
Answer:
The applied force is 0.18 N along the direction of motion.

Question 15.
A constant retarding force of 50 N is applied to a body of mass 20 kg moving initially with a speed of 15 ms-1. How long does the body take to stop? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m = 20 kg, u = 15ms-1, v = 0,
F = – 50 N (retarding force)
To find: Time (t)
Formula: v = u + at
Calculation: Since, F = ma
∴ a = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{m}}=\frac{-50}{20}\) = -2.5 m s-2
From formula,
0 = 15 + (-2.5) × t
∴ t = 6s
Answer:
Time taken to stop the body is 6 s.

Question 16.
A hose pipe used for gardening is ejecting water horizontally at the rate of 0.5 m/s. Area of the bore of the pipe is 10 cm2. Calculate the force to be applied by the gardener to hold the pipe horizontally stationary.
Solution:
Let ejecting water horizontally be considered as the action force on the water, then the water exerts a backward force (called recoil force) on the pipe as the reaction force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 1
Where, V = volume of water ejected
A = area of cross section of bore = 10 cm2
ρ = density of water = 1 g/cc
l = length of the water ejected in time t
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} l}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = v = velocity of water ejected
= 0.5 m/s = 50 cm/s
F = \(\frac{\mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{dt}} \mathrm{v}\)
= (Aρv) v
= Aρv2
= 10 × 1 × 502
∴ F = 25000 dyne = 0.25 N
Answer:
The gardener must apply an equal and opposite force of 0.25 N.

Question 17.
What does the term frame of reference mean?
Answer:
A system of co-ordinate axes with reference to which the position or motion of an object is described is called a frame of reference.

Question 18.
Explain the terms inertial and non-inertial frame of reference.
Answer:

  1. Inertial frame of reference:
    • A frame of reference in which Newton ‘s first law of motion is applicable is called inertia/frame of reference.
    • A body moves with a constant velocity (which can be zero) in the absence of a net force. The body does not accelerate.
    • Example: A rocket in inter-galactic space (gravity free space between galaxies) with all its engine shut.
  2. Non-inertial frame of reference:
    • A frame of reference in which an object suffers acceleration in absence of net force is called non-inertial frame of reference.
    • The body undergoes acceleration.
    • Example: If a car just start its motion from rest, then during the time of acceleration the car will be in a non-inertial frame of reference.

Question 19.
State the limitations of Newton’s laws of motion.
Answer:

  1. Newton’s laws of motion are not applicable in a non-inertial (accelerated) frame of reference.
  2. Newton’s laws are only applicable to point objects.
  3. Newton’s laws are only applicable to rigid bodies.
  4. Results obtained by applying Newton’s laws of motion for objects moving with speeds comparable to that of light do not match with the experimental results and Einstein special theory of relativity has to be used.
  5. Newton’s laws of motion fail to explain the behaviour and interaction of objects having atomic or molecular sizes, and quantum mechanics has to be used.

Question 20.
Name the different types of fundamental forces in nature.
Answer:
Fundamental forces in nature are classified into four types:

  1. Gravitational force
  2. Electromagnetic force
  3. Strong nuclear force
  4. Weak nuclear force

Question 21.
Define gravitational force. Give its examples.
Answer:
Force of attraction between two (point) masses separated by a distance is called as gravitational force.
F = \(\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{~m}_{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
where ‘G’ is constant called the universal gravitational constant = 6.67 × 10-11 Nm2/kg2

Examples:

  1. The motion of moon, artificial satellites around the earth and motion of planets around the sun is due to gravitational force of attraction.
  2. The concept of weight of a body in the earth’s gravitational field is due to gravitational force exerted by the earth on a body.

Question 22.
Write down the main characteristics of gravitational force.
Answer:
Characteristics of gravitational force:

  1. It is always attractive.
  2. It is the weakest of the four basic forces in nature.
  3. Its range is infinite.
  4. Structure of the universe is governed by this force.

Question 23.
Write a note on electromagnetic (EM) force.
Answer:
Electromagnetic force:

  1. The attractive and repulsive force between electrically charged particles is called electromagnetic force.
  2. It can be attractive or repulsive.
  3. It is stronger than the gravitational force.
  4. Example: force of friction, normal reaction, tension in strings, collision forces, elastic forces, fluid friction etc. are electromagnetic in nature.
  5. Reaction forces are a result of the action of electromagnetic forces.
  6. Since majority of forces are electromagnetic in nature, our life is practically governed by these forces.

Question 24.
Write a note on strong and weak nuclear force.
Answer:

  1. Strong nuclear force: The strong force which binds protons and neutrons (nucleons) together in the nucleus of an atom is called strong nuclear force.
    Characteristics of strong nuclear force:

    • It is a very strong attractive force.
    • It is a short range force of the order of 10-14 m.
    • it is charge independent.
  2. Weak nuclear force: The force of interaction between subatomic particles which results in the radioactive decay of atoms is called weak nuclear force.

Characteristics of weak nuclear force:

  • It acts between any two elementary particles (pair of subatomic particles).
  • It is a stronger force than gravitational force.
  • It is much weaker than electromagnetic force or strong nuclear force.
  • It is a short range force of the order of 10-16m.

Question 25.
Three identical point masses are fixed symmetrically on the periphery of a circle. Obtain the resultant gravitational force on any point mass M at the centre of the circle. Extend this idea to more than three identical masses symmetrically located on the periphery. How far can you extend this concept?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 2
i. Consider three identical points A, B and C of mass m on the periphery of a circle of radius r. Mass M is at the centre of the circle.
Gravitational forces on M due to these masses are attractive and are given as,
In magnitude, \(\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MA}}=\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MB}}=\mathrm{F}_{\mathrm{MC}}=\frac{\mathrm{GMm}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

ii. Forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MB}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MC}}\) are resolved along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) and perpendicular to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\). Components perpendicular to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) cancel each other. Components along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{\mathrm{MA}}\) are,
FMB cos 60° = FMC cos 60° = \(\frac{1}{2} F_{M A}\) each.

Magnitude of their resultant is FMA and its direction is opposite to that of FMA. Thus, the
resultant force on mass M is zero. For any even number of equal masses, the force due to any mass m is balanced (cancelled) by diametrically opposite mass. For any odd number of masses, the components perpendicular to one of them cancel each other while the components parallel to one of these add up in such a way that the resultant is zero for any number of identical masses m located symmetrically on the periphery.

As the number of masses tends to infinity, their collective shape approaches circumference of the circle, which is nothing but a ring. Thus, the gravitational force exerted by a ring mass on any other mass at its centre is zero.

iii. This concept can be further extended to three-dimensions by imagining a uniform hollow sphere to be made up of infinite number of such rings with a common diameter. Thus, the gravitational force for any mass kept at the centre of a hollow sphere is zero.

Question 26.
A car of mass 1.5 ton is running at 72 kmph on a straight horizontal road. On turning the engine off, it stops in 20 seconds. While running at the same speed, on the same road, the driver observes an accident 50 m in front of him. He immediately applies the brakes and just manages to stop the car at the accident spot. Calculate the braking force.
Solution:
Given: m = 1.5 ton = 1500 kg,
u = 72 kmph = 72 × \(\frac{5}{18} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}\)m/s = 20 m
s-1 (on turning engine off),
v = 0, t = 20 s, s = 50 m
To find: Braking force (F)

Formula:

i. v = u + at
ii. v2 – u2 = 2as
iii. F = ma

Calculation:
On turning the engine off,
From formula (i),
a = \(\frac{0-20}{20}\) = -1 m s-2
This is frictional retardation (negative acceleration).
After seeing the accident,
From formula (ii),
a1 = \(\frac{0^{2}-20^{2}}{2(50)}\) = -4 m s-2
This retardation is the combined effect of braking and friction
∴ braking retardation =4 – 1 = 3 m s-2
From formula (iii), the braking force, F = 1500 × 3 = 4500 N
Answer:
The braking force is 4500 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 27.
A body constrained to move along the z-axis of a coordinate system is subject to a constant force F given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}})\) N where \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are unit vectors along the x, y and z axis of the system respectively. What is the work done by this force in moving the body a distance of 4 m along the z-axis? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}})\) N, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
To find: work done (W)

Formula: W = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = \((-\hat{\mathrm{i}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}) \cdot(4 \hat{\mathrm{k}})\)
= \(12 \hat{\mathrm{k}} \cdot \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) = 12 J
Answer:
The work done by the force is in moving the body 12 J.

Question 28.
Over a given region, a force (in newton) varies as F = 3x2 – 2x + 1. In this region, an object is displaced from x1 = 20 cm to x2 = 40 cm by the given force. Calculate the amount of work done.
Solution:
Given: F = 3x2 – 2x + 1, x1 = 20 cm = 0.2 m,
x2 = 40 cm = 0.4 m.
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)
Calculation:
From formula,
W = \(\int_{x_{1}}^{x_{2}} F \cdot d x=\int_{0.2}^{0.4}\left(3 x^{2}-2 x+1\right) d x\)
= [x3 – x2 + x]0.4
= [0.43 – 0.42 + 0.4] – [0.23 – 0.22 + 0.2]
= 0.304 – 0.168 = 0.136 J
The work done is 0.136 J.

Question 29.
A position dependent force f = 7 – 2x + 3x2 newton acts on a small body of mass 2 kg and displaces from x = 0 m to x = 5 m, calculate the work done.
Solution:
Given: F = 7 – 2x + 3x2, x = 0 at A and x = 5 at B.
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overrightarrow{d s}\)
Calculation: From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 3
∴ W = 135 J
Answer:
The work done is 135 J.

Question 30.
State the principle of work-energy theorem in case of a conservative force and explain.
OR
Show that work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy
Answer:
Principle: Decrease in the potential energy due to work done by a conservative force is entirely converted into kinetic energy. Vice versa, for an object moving against a conservative force, its kinetic energy decreases by an amount equal to the work done against the force.

Work-energy theorem in case of a conservative force:

  1. Consider an object of mass m moving with velocity u experiencing a constant opposing force F which slows it down to v during displacement s.
  2. The equation of motion can be written as, v2 – u2 = -2as (negative acceleration for
    opposing force.)
    Multiplying throughout by \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2}\), we get,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2 = (ma)s …. (1)
  3. According to Newton’s second law of motion,
    F = ma … (2)
  4. From equations (1) and (2), we get,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 – \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2 = F.s
  5. But, \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mv2= Kf = final K.E of the body,
    \(\frac{\mathrm{1}}{2}\)mu2 = Ki = initial K.E of the body. and, work done by the force = F.s
    ∴ work done by the force = kf – ki
    = decrease in K.E of the body.
  6. Thus, work done on a body by a conservative force is equal to the change in its kinetic energy.

Question 31.
Explain the work-energy theorem in case of an accelerating conservative force along with a retarding non-conservative force.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object dropped from some point at height h.
  2. While coming down its potential energy decreases.
    ∴ Work done = decrease in P.E of the body.
  3. But, in this case, some part of the energy is used in overcoming the air resistance. This part of energy appears in some other forms such as heat, sound, etc. Thus, the work is not entirely converted into kinetic energy. In this case, the work-energy theorem can mathematically be written as,
    ∴ ∆ PE = ∆ K.E. + Wair resistance
    ∴ Decrease in the gravitational P.E. = Increase in the kinetic energy + work done against non-conservative forces.

Question 32.
A liquid drop of 1.00 g falls from height of cliff 1.00 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50 m s-1. What is the work done by the unknown force? (Take g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: m = 1.0 g = 1.0 × 10-3 kg,
h = 1 km = 103 m, v = 50 ms-1
To find: Work done (Wf)
Formula: Wf = ∆ K.E – Wg

Calculation:

i. The change in kinetic energy of the drop
∆ K.E = (K.E.)final (K.E.)initial
∴ ∆ K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}-0\)
= \(\frac{1}{2} \times 1.0 \times 10^{-3} \times(50)^{2}\)
∴ ∆ K.E.= 1.25 J

ii. Work done by the gravitational force is,
Wg = mgh = 1.0 × 10-3 × 9.8 × 103 = 9.8 J
∴ Wg = 9.8J
From formula,
Wf = ∆K.E. – Wg = 1.25 – 9.8
Wf = -8.55 J
Answer:
Work done by the unknown force is – 8.55 J.

Question 33.
A body of mass 0.5 kg travels in a straight line with velocity y = ax3/2, where a = 5 m1/2s-1. What is the work done by the net force during its displacement from x = 0 to x = 2m? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: M = 0.5 kg, y = ax3/2,
where a = 5 m-1/2s-1
Let v1 and v2 be the velocities of the body, when x = 0 and x = 2 m respectively. Then,
v1 = 5 × 03/2 = 0, v2 = 5 × 23/2 = \(10 \sqrt{2}\) m
To find: Work done (W)
Formula: Work done = Increase in kinetic energy
W = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{M}\left(\mathrm{v}_{2}^{2}-\mathrm{v}_{1}^{2}\right)\)
Calculation: From formula,
W = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 0.5 × [latex](10 \sqrt{2})^{2}-0^{2}[/latex]
∴ W = 50J
Answer:
Work done by the net force on the body is 50 J.

Question 34.
A particle of mass 12 kg is acted upon by a force f = (100 – 2x2) where f is in newton and ‘x’ is in metre. Calculate the work done by this force in moving the particle x = 0 to x = -10 m. What will be the speed at x = 10 m if it starts from rest?
Solution:
Given: F = 100 – 2x2
at A, x = 0 and at B, x = -10 m
To find: Work done (W), speed (v)

Formulae:

i. W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot d s\)
ii. W = K.E. = \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\)

Calculation:
From formula (i),
W = \(\int_{A}^{B} \vec{F} \cdot \overline{d s}=\int_{x=0}^{x=-10} F d x\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 4
Answer:

  1. Work done by the force on the particle is 333.3 J.
  2. The speed of the particle at x = 10 will be 7.45 m/s.

Question 35.
Define free body diagram. In the figure given below, draw the free body diagrams for mass of 2 kg, 4 kg and 5 kg and hence state their force equations.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 5
Answer:
i. The diagram showing the forces acting on only one body at a time along-with its acceleration is called a free body diagram.

ii. The free body diagram for the mass of 2 kg is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 6
Free body diagram for 2 kg mass
The force equation is given as,
2a = T3 – 2g

iii. The free body diagram for the mass of 4 kg is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 7
The force equation is given as, 4a = T1 + 4g – T2

iv. The free body diagram for the mass of 5kg is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 8

The force equation for the mass of 5 kg is given as,
N + F sin 60° = 5g, along the vertical direction.
T1 + 10 = F cos 60°, along the horizontal direction (Considering the mass is in equilibrium).

Question 36.
Figure shows a fixed pulley. A massless inextensible string with masses m1 and m2 > m1 attached to its two ends is passing over the pulley. Such an arrangement is called an Atwood machine. Calculate accelerations of the masses and force due to the tension along the string assuming axle of the pulley to be frictionless.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 9
Solution:
Method I: As m2 > m1, mass m2 is moving downwards and mass m1 is moving upwards.
Net downward force = F = (m2) g – (m1) g
= (m2 – m1)g
the string being inextensible, both the masses travel the same distance in the same time. Thus, their accelerations are equal in magnitude (one upward, other downward). Let it be a.
Total mass in motion, M = m2 + m1
∴ a = \(\frac{F}{M}=\left(\frac{m_{2}-m_{1}}{m_{2}+m_{1}}\right) g\) …. (i)

For mass m1, the upward force is the force due to tension T and downward force is mg. It has upward acceleration a. Thus, T – m1g = m1a
∴ T = m1(g + a)
Using equation (i), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 10
From the free body equation for the first body,
T – m1g = m1a .. (i)

From the free body equation for the second body,
m2g – T = m2a … (ii)
Adding (i) and (ii), we get,
a = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{2}-\mathbf{m}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}+\mathrm{m}_{1}}\right) \mathbf{g}\) ….(iii)
Solving equations. (ii) and (iii) for T, we get,
T = m2(g – a) = \(\left(\frac{2 m_{1} m_{2}}{m_{1}+m_{2}}\right) g\)

Question 37.
Write a note on elastic collision.
Answer:

  1. Collision between two bodies in which kinetic energy of the entire system is conserved along with the linear momentum is called as elastic collision.
  2. In an elastic collision,
    \(\mathrm{m}_{1} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}=\mathrm{m}_{1} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{1}}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\)
  3. In an elastic collision,
    \(\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {‘initial }}=\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {. final }}\)
  4. An elastic collision is impossible in daily life.
  5. However, in many situations, the interatomic and intermolecular collisions are considered to be elastic.

Question 38.
Write a note on inelastic collision.
Answer:

  1. A collision is said to be inelastic if there is a loss in the kinetic energy during collision, but linear momentum is conserved.
  2. In an inelastic collision, m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2.
  3. In an inelastic collision,
    \(\sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {.initial }} \neq \sum \mathrm{K} \cdot \mathrm{E}_{\text {.final }}\)
  4. The loss in kinetic energy is either due to internal friction or vibrational motion of atoms causing heating effect.

Question 39.
Define perfectly inelastic collision. Give an example of it.
Answer:

  1. Collision in which the colliding bodies stick together after collision and move with a common velocity is called perfectly inelastic collision.
  2. The loss in kinetic energy is maximum in perfectly elastic collision.
  3. Example: Lump of mud thrown on a wall sticks to the wall due to the loss of kinetic energy.

Question 40.
In case of an elastic head on collision between two bodies, derive an expression for the final velocities of the bodies in terms of their masses and velocities before collision.
Answer:
Head on elastic collision of two spheres:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 11

i. Consider two rotating smooth bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 respectively moving
along the same straight line.

ii. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) = initial velocity of the sphere A before collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\) = initial velocity of the sphere B before collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{1}\) = velocity of the sphere A after collision.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\) = velocity of the sphere B after collision.

iii. After the elastic collision, the spheres separate and move along the same straight line without rotation.

iv. According to the law of conservation of momentum,
m1\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) + m2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\) = m1\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{1}\) + m2\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{2}\) ….(i)
According to the law of conservation of energy (as kinetic energy is conserved during elastic collision),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 12

v. Since kinetic energy is a scalar quantity, the terms involved in the above equations are scalars.

vi. The equation (1) can be written in scalar form as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 13

vii. Also the equation (2) can be written as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 14

viii. Now dividing equation (4) by (3) we get,
(u1 + v1) = (u2 + v2)
∴ u1 + v1 = u2 + v2
∴ v2 = u1 – u2 + v1 … (5)

ix. Comparing equation (3) and (5),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 15
Equations, (6) and (7), represent the final velocities of two spheres after collision.

Question 41.
Are you aware of elasticity of materials? Is there any connection between elasticity of materials and elastic collisions?
Answer:
(Students should answer the question as per their understanding).

Question 42.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. State an expression for their final velocities in terms
of their masses, initial velocities and coefficient of restitution.
Answer:
If e is the coefficient of restitution, the final velocities after an inelastic, head on collision are given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 16

Question 43.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. State an expression for the loss in the kinetic energy.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 17
ii. As e < 1, (1 – e2) is always positive. Thus, there is always a loss of kinetic energy in an inelastic collision.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 44.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, inelastic, head-on collision. Obtain an expression for the magnitude of impulse.
Answer:
i. When two bodies undergo collision, the linear momentum delivered by the first body to the second body must be equal to the change in momentum or impulse of the second body and vice versa.
∴ Impulse,
|J| = |∆p1| = |∆p2|
= |m1v1 – m1u1| = |m2v2 – m2u2| ….(1)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 18
In equation (1) and solving, we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 19

Question 45.
Two bodies undergo one-dimensional, perfectly inelastic, head-on collision. Derive an expression for the loss in the kinetic energy.
Answer:
i. Let two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2 move with initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{1}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}_{2}\), respectively such that particle A collides head on with particle B i.e., u1 > u2.

ii. If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the particles stick together and move with a common velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) after the collision along the same straight line.
loss in kinetic energy = total initial kinetic energy – total final kinetic energy.

iii. By the law of conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = (m1 + m2)v
∴ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{u}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2} \mathrm{u}_{2}}{\mathrm{~m}_{1}+\mathrm{m}_{2}}\)

iv. Loss of Kinetic energy,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 20

iv. Both the masses and the term (u1 – u2)2 are positive. Hence, there is always a loss in a perfectly inelastic collision. For a perfectly inelastic collision, as e = 0, the loss is maximum.

Question 46.
Distinguish between elastic and inelastic collision.
Answer:

No. Elastic Collision Inelastic Collision
i. In an elastic collision, both momentum and kinetic energy are conserved. In an inelastic collision, momentum is conserved but kinetic energy is not conserved.
ii. The total kinetic energy after collision is equal to the total kinetic energy before collision. The total kinetic energy after the collision is not equal to the total kinetic energy before collision.
iii. Coefficient of restitution (e) is equal to one. Coefficient of restitution (e) is less than one. For a perfectly inelastic collision coefficient of restitution is equal to zero.
iv. Bodies do not stick together in elastic collision. Bodies stick together in a perfectly inelastic collision.
v. Sound, heat and light are not produced. Sound or light or heat or all of these may be produced.

Question 47.
Explain elastic collision in two dimensions.
Answer:
i. Suppose a particle of mass mi moving with initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{1}}\), undergoes a non head-on collide with another particle of mass m2 and initial velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}_{2}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 21

ii. Let us consider two mutually perpendicular directions; Common tangent at the point of impact, along which there is no force (or no change of momentum).
Line of impact which is perpendicular to the common tangent through the point of impact, in the two-dimensional plane of initial and final velocities.

iii. Applying the law of conservation of linear momentum along the line of impact, we have, m1u1 cos α1 + m2u2 cos α2 = m1v1 cos β1 + m2v2 cos β2
As there is no force along the common tangent,
m1u1 sin α1 = m1u1 sin β1 and m2u2 sin α2 = m2v2 sin β2
iv. Coefficient of restitution (e) along the line of impact is given as
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 22

Question 48.
Two bodies undergo a two-dimensional collision. State an expression for the magnitude of impulse along the line of impact and the loss in kinetic energy.
Answer:
i. For two bodies undergoing a two-dimensional collision, the magnitude of impulse along the line of impact is given as, Magnitude of the impulse, along the line of impact,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 23

ii. The loss in the kinetic energy is given as Loss in the kinetic energy = ∆ (K.E.)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 24

Question 49.
0ne marble collides head-on with another identical marble at rest. If the collision is partially inelastic, determine the ratio of their final velocities in terms of coefficient of restitution e.
Solution:
According to conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
As m1 = m2, we get, u1 + u2 = v1 + v2
∴ If u2 = 0, we get, v1 + v2 = u1 ….. (i)
Coefficient of restitution,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 25

Question 50.
A 10 kg mass moving at 5 m/s collides head- on with a 4 kg mass moving at 2 m/s in the same direction. If e = \(\frac{1}{2}\), find their velocity after impact.
Solution:
Given: m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 4 kg
u1 = 5 m/s, u2 = 2 m/s, e = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
To find: Velocity after impact (v1 and v2)

Formulae:

i. m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
ii. e = \(\left(\frac{v_{2}-v_{1}}{u_{1}-u_{2}}\right)\)

Calculation:

From formula (i),
10 × 5 + 4 × 2 = 10v1 + 4v2
∴ 5v1 + 2v2 = 29 … (1)

From formula (ii),
v2 – v1 = e(u1 – u2) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (5 – 2) = \(\frac{3}{2}\)
∴ 2v2 – 2v1 = 3 … (2)
Solving (1) and (2), we have
∴ v1 = \(\frac{26}{7}\) m/s and v2 = \(\frac{73}{14}\) m/s
Answer:
The respective velocities of the two masses are \(\frac{26}{7}\) m/s and \(\frac{73}{14}\) m/s.

Question 51.
A metal ball falls from a height 1 m on a steel plate and jumps upto a height of 0.81 m. Find the coefficient of restitution.
Solution:
As the ball falls to the steel plate P.E changes to kinetic energy.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 26
As ground is stationary, both its initial and final velocities are zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 27

Question 52.
Two bodies of masses 5 kg and 3 kg moving in the same direction along the same straight line with velocities 5 m s-1 and 3 m s-1 respectively suffer one-dimensional elastic collision. Find their velocities after the collision.
Solution:
Given: m1 = 5kg, u1 = 5ms-1, m2 = 3kg, u2 = 3 m s-1
To find: velocities after collision (v1 and v2)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 281
Answer:
The velocities of the two bodies after collision are 3.5 m/s and 5.5 m/s.

Question 53.
A 20 g bullet leaves a machine gun with a velocity of 200 m/s. If the mass of the gun is 20 kg, find its recoil velocity. If the gun fires 20 bullets per second, what force is to be applied to the gun to prevent recoil?
Solution:
Given: m1 = 20g = 0.02 kg, m2 = 20 kg, v1 = 200 m/s, t = \(\frac{1}{20}\) s,
To find: Recoil velocity (v2), applied force (F)

Formulae:

i. v2 = \(-\frac{\mathrm{m}_{1} \mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{~m}_{2}}\)
ii. F = ma

Calculation: From formula (i),
∴ v2 = \(-\frac{0.02}{20} \times 200\)
= -0.2 m/s

Negative sign shows that the machine gun moves in a direction opposite to that of the bullet.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 29
From formula (ii),
∴ F = m2 × a = 20 × 4 = 80N
Answer:
The recoil velocity of gun is 0.2 m/s and the required force to prevent recoil is 80 N.

Question 54.
A shell of mass 3 kg is dropped from some height. After falling freely for 2 seconds, it explodes into two fragments of masses 2 kg and 1 kg. Kinetic energy provided by the explosion is 300 J. Using g = 10 m/s2, calculate velocities of the fragments. Justify your answer if you have more than one options.
Solution:
Total mass = m1 + m2 = 3 kg
Initially, when the shell falls freely for 2 seconds, v = u+ at = 0 + 10(2) = 20 ms-1 = u1 = u2
According to conservation of linear momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 30
There are two possible answers since the positions of two fragments can be different as explained below.
Case 1: v1 = 30 m s-1 and v2 = 0 with the lighter fragment 2 above.
Case 2: v1 = 10 m s-1 and v2 = 40 m s-1 with the lighter fragment 2 below, both moving downwards.

Question 55.
Bullets of mass 40 g each, are fired from a machine gun at a rate of 5 per second towards a firmly fixed hard surface of area 10 cm2. Each bullet hits normal to the surface at 400 m/s and rebounds in such a way that the coefficient of restitution for the collision between bullet and the surface is 0.75. Calculate average force and average pressure experienced by the surface due to this firing.
Solution:
For the collision,
u1 = 400 m s-1, e = 0.75
For the firmly fixed hard surface, u2 = v2 = 0
e = 0.75 = \(\frac{v_{1}-v_{2}}{u_{2}-u_{1}}=\frac{v_{1}-0}{0-400}\)
∴ v1 = -300 m/s.
Negative sign indicates that the bullet rebounds in exactly opposite direction.
Change in momentum of each bullet = m(v1 – u1)
The same momentum is transferred to the surface per collision in opposite direction.
∴ Momentum transferred to the surface, per collision,
p = m (u1 – v1) = 0.04(400 – [-300]) = 28 Ns
The rate of collision is same as rate of firing.
∴ Momentum received by the surface per second, \(\frac{\mathrm{dp}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = average force experienced by the surface = 28 × 5 = 140 N

This is the average force experienced by the surface of area A = 10 cm2 = 10-3 m2
∴ Average pressure experienced,
P = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{\mathrm{A}}=\frac{140}{10^{-3}}\) = 1.4 × 105 N m-2
∴ P ≈ 1.4 times the atmospheric pressure.
Answer:
The average force and average pressure experienced by the surface due to the firing is 140 N and 1.4 × 105 N m-2 respectively.

Question 56.
A shell of mass 0.020 kg is fired by a gun of mass 100 kg. If the muzzle speed of the shell is 80 m s-1, what is the recoil speed of the gun? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m1 = 0.02 kg, m2 = 100 kg, v1 = 80 m s-1
To find: Recoil speed (v2)
Formula: m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
Calculation: Initially gun and shell are at rest.
∴ m1u1 + m2u2 = 0
Final momentum = m1v1 – m2v2
Using formula,
0 = 0.02 (80) – 100(v2)
∴ v2 = \(\frac{0.02 \times 80}{100}\) = 0.016 ms-1
Answer:
The recoil speed of the gun is 0.016 m s-1.

Question 57.
Two billiard balls each of mass 0.05 kg moving in opposite directions with speed 6 m s-1 collide and rebound with the same speed. What is the impulse imparted to each bail due to the other? (NCERT)
Solution:
Given: m = 0.05 kg. u = 6 m/s, v = -6 m/s
To find: Impulse (J)
Formula: J = m (v – u)
calculation: From formula,
J = 0.05 (-6 – 6) = -0.6 kg m s-1
Answer:
Impulse received by each ball is -0.6 kg m s-1.

Question 58.
A bullet of mass 0.1 kg moving horizontally with a velocity of 20 m/s strikes a target and brought to rest in 0.1 s. Find the impulse and average force of impact.
Solution:
Given: m = 0.1 kg, u = 20 m/s, t = 0.1 s
To find: Impulse (J), Average force (F)

Formulae:

i. J = mv – mu
ii. F = \(m \frac{(v-u)}{t}\)

Calculation:

From formula (i).
J = m(v – u) = 0.1 (0 – 20) = -2 Ns
From formula (ii),
F = \(\frac{m(v-u)}{t}=\frac{2}{0.1}=20 N\)
Answer:
Magnitude of impulse is 2 Ns, average force of impact is 20 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 59.
A batsman deflects a ball by an angle of 45° without changing its initial speed which is equal to 54 km/h. What is the impulse imparted to the ball? (Mass of the ball is 0.15 kg) (NCERT)
Answer:
Let the point B represents the position of bat. The ball strikes the bat with velocity v along the path AB and gets deflected with same velocity along BC. such that ∠ABC = 45°
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 31
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 32
Thus, impulse imparted to the ball is 4.157 kg ms-1

Question 60.
A cricket ball of mass 150 g moving with a velocity of 12 m/s is turned back with a velocity of 20 m/s on hitting the bat. The force of the ball lasts for 0.01 s. Find the average force exerted on the ball by the bat.
Solution:
m = 0.150 kg, v = 20 m/s,
u = -12 m/s and t = 0.01 s
To find: Average force (F)
Formula: F = \(\frac{m(v-u)}{t}\)
Calculation: From formula,
F = \(\frac{0.150[20-(-12)]}{0.01}\) = 480 N
Answer:
The average force exerted on the ball by the bat is 480 N.

Question 61.
Mass of an Oxygen molecule is 5.35 × 10-26 kg and that of a Nitrogen molecule is 4.65 × 10-26 kg. During their Brownian motion (random motion) in air, an Oxygen molecule travelling with a velocity of 400 m/s collides elastically with a nitrogen molecule travelling with a velocity of 500 m/s in the exactly opposite direction. Calculate the impulse received by each of them during collision. Assuming that the collision lasts for
1 ms, how much is the average force experienced by each molecule?
Solution:
Let, m1 = mO = 5.35 × 10-26 kg,
m2 = mN = 4.65 × 10-26 kg,
∴ u1 = 400 ms-1 and u2 = -500 ms-1 taking direction of motion of oxygen molecule as the positive direction.
For an elastic collision,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 34
Hence, the net impulse or net change in momentum is zero.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 35
Answer:
The average force experienced by the nitrogen molecule and the oxygen molecule are
-4.478 × 10-20 N and 4.478 × 10-20 N.

Question 62.
Explain rotational analogue of the force. On what factors does it depend? Represent it in vector form.
Answer:

  1. Rotational analogue of the force is called as moment of force or torque.
  2. It depends on the mass of the object, the point of application of the force and the angle between direction of force and the line joining the axis of rotation with the point of application.
  3. In its mathematical form, torque or moment of a force is given by
    \(\vec{\tau}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)
    where \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is the applied force and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) is the position vector of the point of application of the force from the axis of rotation.

Question 63.
Illustrate with an example how direction of the torque acting on any object is determined.
Answer:
i. Consider a laminar object with axis of rotation perpendicular to it and passing through it as shown in figure (a).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 36

ii. Figure (b) indicates the top view of the object when the rotation is in anticlockwise direction
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 37

iii. Figure (c) shows the view from the top, if rotation is in clockwise direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 38

iv. The applied force \(\vec{F}\) and position vector \(\vec{r}\) of the point of application of the force are in the plane of these figures.

v. Direction of the torque is always perpendicular to the plane containing the vectors \(\vec{r}\) and \(\vec{F}\) and can be obtained from the rule of cross product or by using the right-hand thumb rule.

vi. In Figure (b), it is perpendicular to the plane of the figure and outwards while in the figure (c), it is inwards.

Question 64.
State the equation for magnitude of torque and explain various cases of angle between the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\).
Answer:
Magnitude of torque, \(\tau\) = r F sin θ
where θ is the smaller angle between the directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\).

Special cases:

  1. If θ = 90°, \(\tau\) = \(\tau\)max = rF. Thus, the force should be applied along normal direction for easy rotation.
  2. If θ = 0° or 180°, \(\tau\) = \(\tau\)min = 0. Thus, if the force is applied parallel or anti-parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\), there is no rotation.
  3. Moment of a force depends not only on the magnitude and direction of the force, but also on the point where the force acts with respect to the axis of rotation. Same force can have different torque as per its point of application.

Question 65.
A force \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}=\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{4} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) is applied at a point (3, 4, -2). Find its torque about the point (-1, 2, 4).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 39

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 66.
Define couple. Show that moment of couple is independent of the points of application of forces.
Answer:
A pair of forces consisting of two forces of equal magnitude acting in opposite directions along different lines of action is called a couple.

  1. Figure shows a couple consisting of two forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) of equal magnitudes and opposite directions acting along different lines of action separated by a distance r.
  2. Position vector of any point on the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) from the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{12}\). Similarly, the position vector of any point on the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\) from the line of action of force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\) is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{21}\).
  3. Torque or moment of the couple is then given mathematically as
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 40
  4. From the figure, it is clear that r12 sinα = r21 sin β = r.
  5. If \(\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{1}\right|=\left|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}_{2}\right|\) = F, the magnitude of torque is given by
    \(\tau=\mathrm{r}_{12} \mathrm{~F}_{1} \sin \alpha\) = \(r_{21} F_{2} \sin \beta=r F\)
  6. It clearly shows that the torque corresponding to a given couple, i.e., the moment of a given couple is constant, i.e., it is independent of the points of application of forces.

Question 67.
The figure below shows three situations of a ball at rest under the action of balanced forces. Is the bail in mechanical equilibrium? Explain how the three situations differ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 41
Answer:

  1. In all these cases, as the ball is at rest under the action of balanced forces i.e, there is no net force acting on it. Hence, it is in mechanical equilibrium.
    However, potential energy-wise, the three situations show the different states of mechanical equilibrium.
  2. Stable equilibrium: In situation (a), potential energy of the system is at its local minimum. If it is disturbed slightly from its equilibrium position and released, it tends to recover its position. In this situation, the ball is most stable and is said to be in stable equilibrium.
  3. Unstable equilibrium: In situation (b), potential energy of the system is at its local maximum. If it is slightly disturbed from its equilibrium position, it moves farther from that position. This happens because initially, if disturbed, it tries to achieve the configuration of minimum potential energy. In this situation, the ball is said to be in unstable equilibrium.
  4. Neutral equilibrium: in situation (e), potential energy of the system is constant over a plane and remains same at any position. Thus, even if the ball is disturbed, it still remains in equilibrium, practically at any position. In this situation, the ball is in neutral equilibrium.

Question 68.
Two weights 5 kg and 8 kg are suspended from a uniform rod of length 10 m and weighing 3 kg. The distances of the weights from one end are 2 m and 7 m. Find the point at which the rod balances.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 42
Let the rod balance at a point P, x m from the end A of the rod AB. The suspended weight and the centre of gravity of the rod G is shown in the figure.
P = 5 + 3 + 8 = 16kg
Taking moments about A,
16 × x = 5 × 2 + 3 × 5 + 8 × 7
16x = 10 + 15 + 56 = 81
∴ x = \(\frac{81}{16}\) = 5.1 m
Answer:
The rod balances at 5.1 m from end A.

Question69.
A metre stick is balanced on a knife edge at its centre. When two coins, each of mass 5 g are put one on top of the other at the 12.0 cm mark, the stick is found to be balanced at 45.0 cm. What is the mass of the metre stick? (NCERT)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 43
Consider the metre scale AB. Let its mass be concentrated at C at 50 cm. mark. Upon placing coins, balancing point of the scale and the coins system is shifted to C’ at 45 cm mark.
For equilibrium about C’
10(45 – 12) = m (50 – 45)
m = \(\frac{10 \times 33}{5}\) = 66g
Answer:
The mass of the metre scale is 66 g.

Question 70.
The diagram shows a uniform beam of length 10 m, used as a balance. The beam is pivoted at its centre. A 5.0 N weight is attached to one end of the beam and an empty pan weighing 0.25 N Is attached to the other end of the beam.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 44
i. What is the moment of couple at pivot?
ii. If pivot is shifted 2 ni towards left, then what will be moment of couple at new position?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 45
Answer:

  1. The moment of couple at center is 23.75 N-m.
  2. The moment of couple at new position is 13.25 N-m.
    ∴ For equilibrium,
    40 × x = 20 × 0.5
    ∴ x = \(\frac{1}{4}\) = 0.25 m

Hence, the total distance walked by the person is 1.25 m.

Ans
The person can walk 1.25 m before the plank topples.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 71.
Define centre of mass.
Answer:
Centre of mass of a body is a point about which the summation of moments of masses in the system is zero.

Question 72.
Derive an expression for the position of centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
System of n particles;
i. Consider a system of n particles of masses m1, m2, …, mn having position vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{1}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{2}}\),….., \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}_{n}}\) from the origin O.
The total mass of the system is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 46
Centre of mass for n particles

ii. Position vector \(\vec{r}\) of their centre of mass from the same origin is then given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 47

iii. If the origin is at the centre of mass, \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) = 0
∴ \(\sum_{1}^{\mathrm{n}} \mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{i}} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}_{\mathrm{i}}\) = 0,

iv. In this case, \(\sum_{1}^{n} m_{i} \vec{r}_{i}\) gives the moment of masses (similar to moment of force) about the centre of mass.

v. If (x1, x2, …… xn), (y1, y2, …..yn), (z1, z2, …. zn) are the respective x, y and z – coordinates of (r1, r2,…….. rn) then x,y and z – coordinates of the centre of mass are given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 48

vi. Continuous mass distribution: For a continuous mass distribution with uniform density, the position vector of the centre of mass is given by,
r = \(\frac{\int \vec{r} d m}{\int d m}=\frac{\int \vec{r} d m}{M}\)
Where \(\int \mathrm{dm}=\mathrm{M}\) is the total mass of the object.

vii. The Cartesian coordinates of centre of mass are
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 49

Question 73.
State the expression for velocity of the centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
Let v1, v2,…..vn be the velocities of a system of point masses m1, m2, … mn. Velocity of the centre of mass of the system is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 50
x, y and z components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}\) can be obtained similarly.
For continuous distribution, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = \(\frac{\int \vec{v} \mathrm{dm}}{\mathrm{M}}\)

Question 74.
State the expression for acceleration of the centre of mass of a system of n particles and for continuous mass distribution.
Answer:
Let a1, a2,…. an be the accelerations of a system of point masses m1, m2 … mn.
Acceleration of the centre of mass of the system is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 51
x, y and z components of can be obtained similarly.
For continuous distribution, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{cm}}\) = \(\frac{\int \vec{a} d m}{\mathrm{M}}\)

Question 75.
State the characteristics of centre of mass.
Answer:

  1. Centre of mass is a hypothetical point at which entire mass of the body can be assumed to he concentrated.
  2. Centre of mass is a location, not a physical quantity.
  3. Centre of mass is particle equivalent of a given object for applying laws of motion.
  4. Centre of mass is the point at which applied force causes only linear acceleration and not angular acceleration.
  5. Centre of mass is located at the centroid, for a rigid body of uniform density.
  6. Centre of mass is located at the geometrical centre, for a symmetric rigid body of uniform density.
  7. Location of centre of mass can be changed only by an external unbalanced force.
  8. Internal forces (like during collision or explosion) never change the location of centre of mass.
  9. Position of the centre of mass depends only upon the distribution of mass, however, to describe its location we may use a coordinate system with a suitable origin.
  10. For a system of particles, the centre of mass need not coincide with any of the particles.
  11. While balancing an object on a pivot, the line of action of weight must pass through the centre of mass and the pivot. Quite often, this is an unstable equilibrium.
  12. Centre of mass of a system of only two particles divides the distance between the particles in an inverse ratio of their masses, i.e., it is closer to the heavier mass.
  13. Centre of mass is a point about which the summation of moments of masses in the system is zero.
  14. If there is an axial symmetry for a given object, the centre of mass lies on the axis of symmetry.
  15. If there are multiple axes of symmetry for a given object, the centre of mass is at their point of intersection.
  16. Centre of mass need not be within the body.
    Example: jumper doing fosbury flop.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 76.
The mass of moon is 0.0 123 times the mass of the earth and separation between them is 3.84 × 108 m. Determine the location of C.M as measured from the centre of the earth.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 52
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 53
Answer:
The location of centre of mass as measured from the center of the earth is 4.67 × 106 m.

Question 77.
Three particles of masses 3 g, 5 g and 8 g are situated at point (2, 2, 2), (-3, 1, 4) and (-1, 3, -2) respectively. Find the position vector of their centre of mass.
Solution:
m1 = 3 g, m2 = 5 g, m3 = 8 g, x1 = 2, y1 = 2, z1 = 2
x2 = -3, y2 = 1, z2 = 4,
x3 = -1, y3 = 3, z3 = -2
Let (X, Y, Z) be co-ordinates of C.M., then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 54
The co-ordinates of the C.M. are \(\left(-\frac{17}{16}, \frac{35}{16}, \frac{5}{8}\right)\)
Answer:
The position vector of the C.M. is \(-\frac{17}{16} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\frac{35}{16} \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\frac{5}{8} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

Question 78.
In the HCl molecule, the separation between the nuclei of the two atoms is about 1.27 Å (1 Å = 10-10 m). Find the approximate location of the CM of the molecule, given that a chlorine atom is about 35.5 times as massive as a hydrogen atom and nearly all the mass of an atom is concentrated in its nucleus. (NCERT)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 55
Claculation: From formula
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 56
Answer:
The location of centre of mass from the nucleus of hydrogen atom is 1.235 A.

Question 79.
Three thin walled uniform hollow spheres of radii 1 cm, 2 cm and 3 cm are so located that their centres are on the three vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC having each side 10 cm. Determine centre of mass of the system.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 57
Solution:
Mass of a thin walled uniform hollow sphere is proportional to its surface area. (as density is constant) hence proportional to r2.

Thus, if mass of the sphere at A is mA = m, then mB = 4m and mC = 9m. By symmetry of the spherical surface, their centres of mass are at their respective centres, i.e., at A, B and C. Let us choose the origin to be at C, where the largest mass 9m is located and the point B with mass 4m on the positive x-axis. With this, the co-ordinates of C are (0, 0) and that of B are (10, 0). If A of mass m is taken in the first quadrant, its co-ordinates will be \([5,5 \sqrt{3}]\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 58

Question 80.
Locate the centre of mass of three particles of mass m1 = 1 kg, m2 = 2 kg and m3 = 3 kg at the corner of an equilateral triangle of each side of 1 m.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 59
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 60
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 61
Answer:
The centre of mass of the system of three particles lies at \(\left(\frac{2}{3} m, \frac{\sqrt{3}}{6} m\right)\) with respect to the particle of mass 1 kg as the origin.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 81.
A letter ‘E’ is prepared from a uniform cardboard with shape and dimensions as shown in the figure. Locate its centre of mass.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 62
Solution:
As the sheet is uniform, each square can be taken to be equivalent to mass m concentrated at its respective centre. These masses will then be at the points labelled with numbers 1 to 10, as shown in figure. Let us select the origin to be at the left central mass m5, as shown and all the co-ordinates to be in cm.

By symmetry, the centre of mass of m1, m2 and m3 will be at m2 (1, 2) having effective mass 3m. Similarly, effective mass 3m due to m8, m9 and m10 will be at m9 (1, -2). Again, by symmetry, the centre of mass of these two (3m each) will have co-ordinates (1, 0). Mass m6 is also having co-ordinates (1, 0). Thus, the
effective mass at (1, 0) is 7m.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 63
Using symmetry for m4, m5 and m7, there will be effective mass 3m at the origin (0, 0). Thus, effectively, 3m and 7m are separated by 1 cm along X-direction. Y-coordinate is not required.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 64

Question 82.
A hole of radius r is cut from a uniform disc of radius 2r. Centre of the hole is at a distance r from centre of the disc. Locate centre of mass of the remaining part of the disc.
Solution:
Before cutting the hole, c.în. of the full disc was at its centre. Let this be our origin O. Centre of mass of the cut portion is at its centre D. Thus, it is at a distance x1 = r form the origin. Let C be the centre of mass of the
remaining disc, which will he on the extension of the line DO at a distance x2 = x from the origin. As the disc is uniform, mass of any of its part is proportional to the area of that part.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 65
Thus, if m is the mass of the cut disc, mass of the entire disc must be 4m and mass of the remaining disc will be 3m.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 66

Alternate method: (Using negative mass):

Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) be the position vector of the centre of mass of the uniform disc of mass M. Mass m is with centre of mass at position vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) from the centre of the disc be cut out from the complete disc. Position vector of the centre of mass of the remaining disc is then given by
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 67

Question 83.
Define centre of gravity of a body. Under what conditions the centre of gravity and centre of mass coincide?
Answer:

  1. centre of gravity of a body is the point around which the resultant torque due to force of gravity on the body is zero.
  2. The centre of mass coincides with centre of gravity when the body is in a uniform gravitational field.

Question 84.
Explain how to find the location of centre of mass or centre of gravity of a laminar object.
Answer:

  1. A laminar object is suspended from a rigid support at two orientations.
  2. Lines are drawn on the object parallel to the plumb line as shown in the figure.
  3. Plumb line is always vertical, i.e., parallel to the line of action of gravitational force.
  4. Intersection of the lines drawn is then the point through which line of action of the gravitational force passes for any orientation. Thus, it gives the location of the c.g. or c.m.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 68

Question 85.
Why do cricketers wear helmet and pads while playing? Is it related with physics?
Answer:
Helmet and pads used by cricketers protects the head, using principles of physics.

  1. The framing between the interior of the helmet and pads increases the time over which the impulse acts on the head resulting into reduction of force.
    (Impulse = force × time = constant)
  2. The pads spread the force applied by the ball over a wider area reducing pressure at a point.

Question 86.
The diagram shows four objects placed on a flat surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 69
The centre of mass of each object is marked M. Which object is likely to fall over?
Answer:
Object C will fall because its centre of mass is not exactly at centre, in turn applying more force on one side of the object resulting in to unbalance force. Whereas, in other objects center of mass is exactly at center resulting into zero rotational or translational motion maintaining their equilibrium.

Question 87.
A boy is about to close a large door by applying force at A and B as shown. State with a reason, which of the two positions, A or B, will enable him to close the door with least force.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 70
Answer:
Boy has to apply more force at point B as compared to point A, because point B is at least distance from the hinge of the door while point A is at maximum distance from hinge of the door. Opening of door applies a moment, which is. given by,
M = F × perpendicular distance
F ∝ \(\frac{1}{\text { distance }}\)
More is the distance from the axis of rotation less will be the force.

Question 88.
How is a seat belt useful for safety?
Answer:
When car hits another car or an object with high speed it applies a high impulse on the driver and due to inertia driver tends to move in forward direction towards the steering. Seat belts spreads the force over large area of the body and holds the driver and protects him from crashing at the steering.

Question 89.
According to Newton’s third law of motion for every action there is equal and opposite reaction, why two equal and opposite forces don’t cancel each other?
Answer:
Forces of action and reaction always act on different bodies, hence they never cancel each other.

Question 90.
Linear momentum depends on frame of reference, but principle of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of reference. Why?
Answer:
Observers in different frame find different values of linear momentum of a system, hence linear momentum depends upon frame of reference, but each would observe that the value of linear momentum does not change with time (provided the system is isolated), hence principle of conservation of linear momentum is independent of frame of reference.

Question 91.
Multiple choice Questions

Question 1.
A body of mass 2 kg moving on a horizontal surface with initial velocity of 4 m s-1 comes to rest after two seconds. If one wants to keep this body moving on the same surface with a velocity of 4 m s-1, the force required is
(A) 2 N
(B) 4 N
(C) 0
(D) 8 N
Answer:
(B) 4 N

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 2.
What force will change the velocity of a body of mass 1 kg from 20 m s-1 to 30 m s-1 in two seconds?
(A) 1N
(B) 5 N
(C) 10 N
(D) 25 N
Answer:
(B) 5 N

Question 3.
A force of 5 newton acts on a body of weight 9.80 newton. What is the acceleration produced in m/s2?
(A) 0.51
(B) 1.96
(C) 5.00
(D) 49.00
Answer:
(C) 5.00

Question 4.
A body of mass m strikes a wall with velocity v and rebounds with the same speed. Its change in momentum is
(A) 2 mv
(B) mv/2
(C) – mv
(D) Zero
Answer:
(A) 2 mv

Question 5.
A force of 6 N acts on a body of mass 1 kg initially at rest and during this time, the body attains a velocity of 30 m/s. The time for which the force acts on a body is
(A) 10 second
(B) 8 second
(C) 7 second
(D) 5 second
Answer:
(D) 5 second

Question 6.
A bullet of mass 10 g is fired from a gun of mass 1 kg with recoil velocity of gun = 5 m/s. The muzzle velocity will be
(A) 30 km/min
(B) 60 km/min
(C) 30 m/s
(D) 500 m/s
Answer:
(D) 500 m/s

Question 7.
The velocity of rocket with respect to ground is v1 and velocity of gases ejecting from rocket with respect to ground is v2 Then velocity of gases with respect to rocket is given by
(A) v2
(B) v1 + v2
(C) v1 × v2
(D) v1
Answer:
(B) v1 + v2

Question 8.
Two bodies A and B of masses 1 kg and 2 kg moving towards each other with velocities 4 m/s and 1 m/s suffers a head on collision and stick together. The combined mass will
(A) move in direction of motion of lighter mass.
(B) move in direction of motion of heavier mass.
(C) not move.
(D) move in direction perpendicular to the line of motion of two bodies.
Answer:
(A) move in direction of motion of lighter mass.

Question 9.
Which of the following has maximum momentum?
(A) A 100 kg vehicle moving at 0.02 m s-1.
(B) A 4 g weight moving at 1000 cm s-1’.
(C) A 200 g weight moving with kinetic energy of 10-6 J
(D) A 200 g weight after falling through one kilometre.
Answer:
(D) A 200 g weight after falling through one kilometre.

Question 10.
A bullet hits and gets embedded in a solid block resting on a horizontal frictionless table. What is conserved?
(A) Momentum alone.
(B) K.E. alone.
(C) Momentum and K.E. both.
(D) P.E. alone.
Answer:
(A) Momentum alone.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 11.
The force exerted by the floor of an elevator on the foot of a person standing there, is more than his weight, if the elevator is
(A) going down and slowing down.
(B) going up and speeding up.
(C) going up and slowing down.
(D) either (A) and (B).
Answer:
(D) either (A) and (B).

Question 12.
If E, G and N represents the magnitudes of electromagnetic, gravitational and nuclear forces between two electrons at a given separation, then,
(A) N = E = G
(B) E < N < G (C) N > G < E (D) E > G > N
Answer:
(D) E > G > N

Qestion 13.
For an inelastic collision, the value of e is
(A) greater than 1
(B) less than 1
(C) equal to 1
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) less than 1

Question 14.
A perfect inelastic body collides head on with a wall with velocity y. The change in momentum is
(A) mv
(B) 2mv
(C) zero
(D) none of these.
Answer:
(A) mv

Question 15.
Two masses ma and rnb moving with velocitics va and vb in opposite direction collide
elastically and after the collision ma and mb move with velocities vb and va respectively. Then the ratio mamb is
(A) \(\frac{v_{a}-v_{b}}{v_{a}+v_{b}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{a}}+\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{b}}}{\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{a}}}\)
(C) 1
(D) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) 1

Question 16.
The frictional force acts _____.
(A) in direction of motion
(B) against the direction of motion
(C) perpendicular to the direction of motion
(D) at any angle to the direction of motion
Answer:
(B) against the direction of motion

Question 17.
A marble of mass X collides with a block of mass Z, with a velocity Y. and sticks to it. The final velocity of the system is
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{Y}}{\mathrm{X}+\mathrm{Y}} \mathrm{Y}\)
(B) \(\frac{X}{X+Z} Y\)
(C) \(\frac{X+Y}{Z}\)
(D) \(\frac{X+Z}{X}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{X}{X+Z} Y\)

Question 18.
Two balls lying on the same plane collide. Which of the following will be always conserved?
(A) heat
(B) velocity
(C) kinetic energy
(D) linear momentum.
Answer:
(D) linear momentum.

Question 19.
A body is moving with uniform velocity of 50 km h-1, the force required to keep the body in motion in SI unit is
(A) zero
(B) 10
(C) 25
(D) 50
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 20.
A coolie holding a suitcase on his head of 20 kg and travels on a platform. then work done in joule by the coolie is
(A) 198
(B) 98
(C) 49
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 21.
Out of the following forces, which force is non-conservative?
(A) gravitational
(B) electrostatic
(C) frictional
(D) magnetic
Answer:
(C) frictional

Question 22.
The work done in conservative force is ____.
(A) negative
(B) zero
(C) positive
(D) infinite
Answer:
(B) zero

Question 23.
The angle between the line of action of force and displacement when no work done (in degree) is
(A) zero
(B) 45
(C) 90
(D) 120
Answer:
(C) 90

Question 24.
If the momentum of a body is doubled, its KE. increases by
(A) 50%
(B) 300%
(C) 100%
(L)) 400%
Answer:
(B) 300%

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 25.
In perfectly inelastic collision, which is conserved?
(A) P.E. only
(B) K.E. only
(C) momentum only
(D) K.E. and momentum
Answer:
(C) momentum only

Question 26.
In case of elaine collision, which s
(A) Momentum and K.E. is conserved.
(B) Momentum conserved and K.E. not conserved,
(C) Momentum not conserved and K.E. conserved.
(D) Momentum and K.E. both not conserved,
Answer:
(A) Momentum and K.E. is conserved.

Question 27.
Pseudo force is true only in
(A) frame of reference which is at rest
(B) inertial frame of reference.
(C) frame of reference moving with constant velocity.
(D) non-inertial frame of reference
Answer:
(D) non-inertial frame of reference

Question 28.
A men weighing 90kg carries a stone of 20 kg to the top of the building 30m high. The work done by hint is (g = 9.8 m/s2)
(A) 80 J
(B) 100 J
(C) 980 J
(D) 29,400 J
Answer:
(D) 29,400 J

Question 29.
A weight lifter is holding a weight of 100 kg on his shoulders for 45 s, the amount of work done by him in joules is
(A) 4500
(B) 100
(C) 45
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 30.
If m is the mass of a body and E its K.E..then its linear momentum is
(A) \(\mathrm{m} \sqrt{\mathrm{E}}\)
(B) \(2 \sqrt{\mathrm{m}} \mathrm{E}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{m} E\)
(D) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mE}}\)

Question 31.
Torque applied is masimum when the angle between the directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) is
(A) 90°
(B) 180°
(C) 0°
(D) 45°
Answer:
(A) 90°

Question 92.
A particle moving with velocity \(\vec{v}\) is acted by three forces shown by the vector triangle PQR. The velocity of the particle will:
(A) remain constant
(B) change according to the smallest force \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{QR}}\)
(C) increase
(D) decrease
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 71
Hint: As the three forces acting on a particle represents a triangle (i.e., a closed loop)
∴ Fnet = 0
∴ m \(\vec{a}\) = 0
∴ m\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
∴ v remains constant
Answer:
(A) remain constant

Question 93.
A force F = 20 + 10y acts on a particle in y-direction where F is in newton and y in meter. Work done by this force to move the particle from y = 0 to y = 1 m is:
(A) 25J
(B) 20J
(C) 30J
(D) SJ
Hint: Work done by variable force, W = \(\int_{y_{\text {initial }}}^{y_{\text {final }}} \mathrm{Fdy}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 72
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 73
Answer:
(A) 25J

Question 94.
Body A of mass 4m moving with speed u collides with another body B of mass 2m, at rest. The collision is head on and elastic in nature. After the collision the fraction of energy lost by the colliding body A is:
(A) \(\frac{4}{9}\)
(B) \(\frac{5}{9}\)
(C) \(\frac{1}{9}\)
(D) \(\frac{8}{9}\)
Hint:
Fractional loss of K.E. of colliding bodies,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 74
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{8}{9}\)

Question 95.
An object of mass 500 g, initially at rest, is acted upon by a variable force whose X-component varies with X in the manner shown. The velocities of the object at the points X = 8 m and X = 12 m, would have the respective values of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 75
(A) 18m/s and 20.6 m/s
(B) 18 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(C) 23 m/s and 24.4 m/s
(D) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s
Hint: From work-energy theorem
∆ K.E. = work = area under F-x graph
From x = 0 to x = 8m
\(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\) = (5 × 20) + (3 × 10)
∴ \(\frac{1}{2} \mathrm{mv}^{2}\) = 100 + 30
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 76
Answer:
(D) 23 m/s and 20.6 m/s

Question 96.
The centre of mass of two particles system lies
(A) at the midpoint on the line joining the two particles.
(B) at one end of line joining the two particles.
(C) on the line perpendicular in the line joining two particles.
(D) on the line joining the Iwo particles.
Answer:
(D) on the line joining the two particles.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion

Question 97.
A block of mass m is placed on a smooth inclined wedge ABC of inclination θ as shown in the figure. The wedge is given an acceleration ‘a’ towards the right. The relation between a and θ for the block to remain stationary on the wedge is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 77
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 78
The mass of block is given to be m. It will remain stationary if forces acting on it are in equilibrium i.e., ma cos θ = mg sin θ
Here, ma = Pseudo force on block.
∴ a = g tan θ
Answer:
a = g tan θ

Question 98.
A moving block having mass m, collides with another stationary block having mass 4m. The lighter block comes to rest after collision, When the initial velocity of the lighter block is v, then the value of coefficient of restitution
(e) will
(A) 0.5
(B) 0.25
(C) 0.8
(D) 0.4
Hint:
Given: m1 = m, m2 = 4m, u1 = v, u2 = 0, v1 = 0 According to law of conservation of momentum,
m1u1 + m2u2 = m1v1 + m2v2
mv + 4m × 0 = m × 0 + 4mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 79
Answer:
(B) 0.25

Question 99.
In a collinear collision, a particle with an initial speed v0 strikes a stationary particle of the same mass. If the final total kinetic energy is 50% greater than the original kinetic energy, the magnitude of the relative velocity between the two particles, after collision, is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 80
Hint:
According to law of conservation of momentum,
mv0 = mv1 + mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 81
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{2} \mathbf{v}_{0}\)

Question 100.
The mass of a hydrogen molecule is 3.32 × 10-27 kg. If 1023 hydrogen molecules strike, per second, a fixed wall of area 2 cm2 at an angle of 45° to the normal and rebound elastically with a speed of 103 m/s, then the pressure on the wall is nearly:
(A) 2.35 × 102 N/m2
(B) 4.70 × 102 N/m2
(C) 2.35 × 103 N/m2
(D) 4.70 × 103 N/m2
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 82
Answer:
(C) 2.35 × 103 N/m2

Question 101.
A bomb at rest explodes into 3 parts of same mass. The momentum of two parts is -3P\(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) and 2P\(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) respectively. The magnitude of momentum of the third part is
(A) P
(B) \(\sqrt{5} \mathrm{P}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{11} \mathrm{P}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{13} \mathrm{P}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 83
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{13} \mathrm{P}\)

Question 102.
A sphere of mass ‘m’ moving with velocity V collides head-on on another sphere of same mass which is at rest. The ratio of final velocity of second sphere to the initial velocity of the first sphere is (e is coefficient of restitution and collision is inelastic)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 84
Hint:
Initial momentum = mv
Final momentum = mv1 + mv2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 85
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathrm{e}+1}{2}\)

Question 103.
Two blocks A and B of masses 3m and m respectively are connected by a massless and inextensible string. The whole system is suspended by a massless spring as shown in figure. The magnitudes of acceleration of A and B immediately after the string is cut, are respectively:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 86
Hint:
Tension in spring before cutting the strip,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 87
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{3}\), g

Question 104.
A time dependent force F = 6t acts on a particle of mass 1 kg. If the particle starts from rest, the work done by the force during the first 1 sec. will be
(A) 9 J
(B) 18 J
(C) 4.5 J
(D) 22 J
Hint:
F = 6t
m = 1 kg
∴ a = 6t
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 88
Answer:
(C) 4.5 J

Question 105.
Consider a drop of rain water having mass Ig falling from a height of 1 km. It hits the ground with a speed of 50 m/s. Take ‘g’ constant with a value 10 m/s2. The work done by the
(i) gravitational force and the
(ii) resistive force of air is:
(A) (i) -10 J
(ii) -8.25 J
(B) (i) 1.25 J
(ii) -8.25 J
(C) (i) 100 J
(ii) 8.75 J
(D) (i) 10 J
(ii) -8.75 J
Hint: Work done by gravitation force is given by (Wg)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 4 Laws of Motion 89
Answer:
(D) (i) 10 J
(ii) -8.75 J

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 1.
Explain representation of a vector graphically and symbolically.
Answer:

  1. Graphical representation:
    A vector is graphically represented by a directed line segment or an arrow.
    eg.: displacement of a body from P to Q is represented as P → Q.
  2. Symbolic representation:
    Symbolically a vector is represented by a single letter with an arrow above it, such as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\). The magnitude of the vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is denoted as |A| or | \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) | or A.

Question 2.
A vector has both magnitude and direction. Does it mean that anything that has magnitude and direction is necessarily a vector?
Answer:

  1. For a physical quantity, only having magnitude and direction is not a sufficient condition to be a vector.
  2. A physical quantity also has to obey vectors law of addition to be termed as vector.
  3. Hence, anything that has magnitude and direction is not necessarily a vector.
    Example: Though current has definite magnitude and direction, it is not a vector.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 3.
Define and explain the following terms:
i. Zero vector (Null vector)
ii. Resultant vector
iii. Negative vectors
iv. Equal vectors
v. Position vector
Answer:
i. Zero vector (Null vector):
A vector having zero magnitude and arbitrary direction is called zero vector. It is denoted as \(\overrightarrow{0}\).
Example: Velocity vector of stationary particle, acceleration vector of a body moving with uniform velocity.

ii. Resultant vector:
The resultant of two or more vectors is defined as that single vector, which produces the same effect as produced by all the vectors together.

iii. Negative vectors:
A negative vector of a given vector is a vector of the same magnitude but opposite in direction to that of the given vector.
Negative vectors are antiparallel vectors.
In figure, \(\vec{b}\) = – \(\vec{a}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 1

iv. Equal vectors:
Two vectors A and B representing same physical quantity are said to be equal if and only if they have the same magnitude and direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 2
In the given figure |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\)|

v. Position vector:
A vector which gives the position of a particle at a point with respect to the origin of chosen co-ordinate system is called position vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 3
In the given figure \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OP}}\) represents position vector of \(\vec{P}\) with respect to O.

Question 4.
Whether the resultant of two vectors of unequal magnitude be zero?
Answer:
The resultant of two vectors of different magnitude cannot give zero resultant.

Question 5.
Define unit vector and give its physical significance.
Answer:
Unit vector: A vector having unit magnitude in a given direction is called a unit vector in that direction.
If \(\vec{p}\) is a non zero vector (P ≠ 0) then the unit vector \(\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{p}}\) in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) is given by,
\(\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{p}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}}{\mathrm{P}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\hat{u}_{p} P\)

Significance of unit vector:

i. The unit vector gives the direction of a given vector.

ii. Unit vector along X, Y and Z direction of a rectangular (three dimensional) coordinate is represented by \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) respectively Such that \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{x}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\), \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{y}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{u}}_{z}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
This gives \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{X}}}{\mathrm{X}}\), \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Y}}}{\mathrm{X}}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) = \(\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Z}}}{\mathrm{Z}}\)

Question 6.
Explain multiplication of a vector by a scalar.
Answer:

  1. When a vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is multiplied by a scalar ‘s’, it becomes ‘s\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}’ whose magnitude is s times the magnitude of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\).
  2. The unit of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is different from the unit of ‘s \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)’.
    For example,
    If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = 10 newton and s = 5 second, then s\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = 10 newton × 5 second = 50 Ns.

Question 7.
Explain addition of vectors.
Answer:

  1. The addition of two or more vectors of same type gives rise to a single vector such that the effect of this single vector is the same as the net effect of the original vectors.
  2. It is important to note that only the vectors of the same type (physical quantity) can be added.
  3. For example, if two vectors, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 unit and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4 unit are acting along the same line, then they can be added as, |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| + |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)|
    |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = 3 + 4 = 7
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 4
    [Note: When vectors are not in the same direction, then they can be added using triangle law of vector addition.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 8.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
It is possible to add two vectors representing physical quantities having different dimensions.
Answer:
False.
It is not possible to add two vectors representing physical quantities having different dimensions.

Question 9.
Explain subtraction of vectors.
Answer:

  1. When two vectors are anti-parallel (in the opposite direction) to each other, the magnitude
  2. It is important to note that only vectors of the same type (physical quantity) can be subtracted.
  3. For example, if two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = 3 unit and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = 4 unit are acting in opposite direction, they are subtracted as, |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)| = ||\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)| – |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)||
    = |3 – 4| = 1 unit, directed along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 5

Question 10.
How can resultant of two vectors of a type inclined with each other be determined?
Answer:
When two vectors of a type are inclined with each other, their resultant can be determined by using triangle law of vector addition.

Question 11.
What is triangle law of vector addition?
Answer:
Triangle law of vector addition:
If two vectors describing the same physical quantity are represented in magnitude and direction, by the two sides of a triangle taken in order, then their resultant is represented in magnitude and direction by the third side of the triangle drawn in the opposite sense, i.e., from the starting point (tail) of the first vector to the end point (head) of the second vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 6
Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be the two vectors of same type taken in same order as shown in figure.
∴ Resultant vector will be given by third side taken in opposite order, i.e., \(\overline{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{OB}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)

Question 12.
Using triangle law of vector addition, explain the process of adding two vectors which are not lying in a straight line.
Answer:
i. Two vectors in magnitude and direction are drawn in a plane as shown in figure (a)
Let these vectors be \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 7

ii. Join the tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) to head of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) in the given direction. The resultant vector will be the line which is obtained by joining tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) to head of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (b).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 8

iii. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) is the resultant vector of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) then using triangle law of vector addition, we have, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 13.
Is it possible to add two velocities using triangle law?
Answer:
Yes, it is possible to add two velocities using triangle law.

Question 14.
Explain, how two vectors are subtracted. Find their resultant by using triangle law of vector addition.
Answer:

  1. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be the two vectors in a plane as shown in figure (a).
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 10
  2. To subtract \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) from \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\), vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is reversed so that we get the vector –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (b).
  3. The resultant vector is obtained by –\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) joining tail of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) to head of – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in figure (c).
  4. From triangle law of vector addition, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (-\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 15.
Prove that: Vector addition is commutative.
Answer:
Commutative property of vector addition:
According to commutative property, for two
vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\)

Proof:

i. Let two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be represented in magnitude and direction by two sides \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 11

ii. Complete a parallelogramOABC such that
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{CB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) then join OB.

iii. In △OAB, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\)
(By triangle law of vector addition)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) … (1)
In △OCB, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{CB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\)
(By triangle law of vector addition)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) … (2)

iv. From equation (1) and (2),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\)
Hence, addition of two vectors obeys commutative law.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 16.
Prove that: Vector addition is associative.
Answer:
Associative property of vector addition:
According to associative property, for three vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\),
(\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\))
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 12
Proof:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 13
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 14
On comparing, equation (2) and (4), we get,
(\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\))
Hence, associative law is proved.

Question 17.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite.
The subtraction of given vectors is neither commutative nor associative.
Answer:
True.

Question 18.
State and prove parallelogram law of vector addition and determine magnitude and direction of resultant vector.
Answer:

i. Parallelogram law of vector add addition;
If two vectors of same type starting from the same point (tails cit the same point), are represented in magnitude and direction by the two adjacent sides of a parallelogram then, their resultant vector is given in magnitude and direction, by the diagonal of the parallelogram starting from the same point.

ii. Proof:

a. Consider two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) of the same type, with their tails at the point O’ and θ’ is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as shown in the figure below.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 15
b. Join BC and AC to complete the parallelogram OACB, with \(\overline{\mathrm{OA}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) as the adjacent sides. We have to prove that diagonal \(\overline{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\), the resultant of sum of the two given vectors.

c. By the triangle law of vector addition, we have,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) … (1)
As \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) is parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\)
Substituting \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) in equation (1) we have,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\)
Hence proved.

iii. Magnitude of resultant vector:

a. To find the magnitude of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\), draw a perpendicular from C to meet OA extended at S.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 16

c. Using Pythagoras theorem in right angled triangle, OSC
(OC)2 = (OS)2 + (SC)2
= (OA + AS)2 + (SC)2
∴ (OC)2 = (OA)2 + 2(OA).(AS) + (AS2) + (SC)2 . . . .(4)

d. From right angle trianle ASC,
(AS)2 + (SC)2 = (AC)2 …. (5)

e. From equation (4) and (5), we get
(OC)2 = (OA)2 + 2(OA) (AS) + (AC)2
… .(6)

f. Using (2) and (6), we get
(OC)2 = (OA)2 + (AC)2 + 2(OA)(AC) cos θ
∴ R2 = P2 + Q2 + 2 PQ cos θ
∴ R = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{P}^{2}+\mathrm{Q}^{2}+2 \mathrm{PQ} \cos \theta}\) ….(7)
Equation (7) gives the magnitude of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\).

iv. Direction of resultant vector:
To find the direction of resultant vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\), let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) make an angle α with \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 17
Equation (9) represents direction of resultant vector.
[Note: If β is the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\), it can be similarly derived that
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 18

Question 19.
Complete the table for two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) inclined at angle θ.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 19
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 20

Question 20.
The diagonal of the parallelogram made by two vectors as adjacent sides is not passing through common point of two vectors. What does it represent?
Answer:
The diagonal of the parallelogram made by two vectors as adjacent sides not passing through common point of two vectors represents triangle law of vector addition.

Question 21.
If | \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) | = | \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) | then what can be the
angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) ?
Answer:
Let θ be the angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\), then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 21

Thus, if |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)| = |\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) |, then vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) must be at right angles to each other.

Question 22.
Express vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) in terms of vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\) shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 22
Solution:
Using the triangle law of addition of vectors,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\)
∴\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A C}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A B}}\) – \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{C B}}\)

Question 23.
From the following figure, determine the resultant of four forces \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{1}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{2}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{3}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}_{4}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 23
Solution:
Join \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) to complete ∆OAB as shown in figure below
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 24
Now, using triangle law of vector addition,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{1}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{2}\)
Join \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) to complete triangle OBC as shown figure below
Similarly, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{BC}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{1}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{2}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}_{3}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 25
Answer:
\(\overrightarrow{O D}\) is the resultant of the four vectors.

Question 24.
Find the vector that should be added to the sum of (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) and (4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 7\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) to give a unit vector along the X-axis.
Solution:
Let vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\) be added to get unit vector (\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\)) along X-axis.
Sum of given vectors is given as,
(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) ) + (4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 7\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
According to given condition, (6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) + \(\hat{\mathbf{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\)
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – (6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) = -5\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Answer:
The required vector is -5\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).

Question 25.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).Find
i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) – 2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
Solution:
Given \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
To find:

i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)
ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) – 2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\)

Calculation:

i. \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – k) + (2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2k)
= (2 + 2)\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + (3 – 5)\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + (-1 + 2)\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
= 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)

ii. 3\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 3(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 3\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 6\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 9\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 3\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
2\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2(2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)) = 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 10\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 26

Question 26.
Find unit vector parallel to the resultant of the vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – 2\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = 3\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – 5\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\).
Solution:
The resultant of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 27
Answer:
The required unit vector is \(\frac{1}{3 \sqrt{2}}\)(4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\))

Question 27.
Two forces, F1 and F2, each of magnitude 5 N are inclined to each other at 60°. Find the magnitude and direction of their resultant force.
Solution:
Given: F1 = 5 N, F2 = 5 N, θ = 60°
To find: Magnitude of resultant force (R),
Direction of resultant force (α)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 28
Answer:
i. The magnitude of resultant force is 8.662 N.

ii. The direction of resultant force is 30° w.r.t. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}_{1}}\).

Question 28.
Water is flowing in a stream with velocity 5 km/hr in an easterly direction relative to the shore. Speed of a boat relative to still water is 20 km/hr. If the boat enters the stream heading north, with what velocity will the boat actually travel?
Answer:
The resultant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) of the boat can be obtained by adding the two velocities using ∆ OAB shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 29
The direction ot the resultant velocity is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 30
Answer: The velocity of the boat is 20.616 km/hr in a direction 14.04° east of north. .
[Note: tan-1 (0.25) ≈ 14.04° which equals 14°2]

Question 29.
Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 35 m/s. Wind starts blowing at a speed of 12 m/s in east to west direction. In which direction should a boy waiting at a bus stop hold his umbrella? (NCERT)
Solution:
Let the velocity of rain and wind be \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}_{\mathrm{R}}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{V}_{\mathrm{W}}}\), then resultant velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) has magnitude of
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 31
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) makes an angle θ with vertical then, from the figure
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 32
Answer: The boy should hold his umbrella in vertical plane at an angle of about 19° with vertical towards the east.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 30.
What are components of a vector?
Answer:

  1. The given vector can be written as sum of two or more vectors along certain fixed directions. The vectors into which the given single vector is splitted are called components of the vector.
  2. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(\mathrm{A}_{1} \hat{\alpha}\) + \(\mathrm{A}_{2} \hat{\beta}\) + \(\mathrm{A}_{3} \hat{\gamma}\) where, \(\hat{\alpha}\), \(\hat{\beta}\) and \(\hat{\gamma}\) are unit vectors along chosen directions. Then, A1, A2 and A3 are known as components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) along three directions \(\hat{\alpha}\), \(\hat{\beta}\) and \(\hat{\gamma}\).
  3. It two vectors are equal then, their corresponding components are also equal and vice-versa.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 33

[Note: The magnitude of a vector is a scalar while each component of a vector is always a vector.]

Question 31.
What is meant by resolution of vector?
Answer:

  1. The process of splitting a given vector into its components is called resolution of the vector.
  2. Resolution of vector is equal to replacing the original vector with the sum of the component vectors.

Question 32.
That are rectangular components of vectors? Explain their uses.
Answer:
i. Rectangular components of a vector:
If components of a given vector are mutually perpendicular to each other then they are called rectangular components of that vector.

ii. Consider a vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OC}}
\) originating from the origin O’ of a rectangular co-ordinate system as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 34

iii. Draw CA ⊥ OX and CB ⊥ OY.
Let component of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along X-axis \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{x}}
\) and component of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along Y-axis = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{y}}
\)
By parallelogram law of vectors,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 35
where, \(
\hat{i}
\) and \(
\hat{j}
\) are unit vectors along positive direction of X and Y axes respectively.

iv. If θ is angle made by \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) with X-axis, then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 36

v. Squaring and adding equation (1) and (2) we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 37
Equation (3) gives the magnitude of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\).

vi. Direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) can be found out by dividing equation (2) by (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 38
Equation (4) gives direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\)

vii. When vectors are noncoplanar, it becomes necessary to use the third dimension. If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{x}}
\), \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{y}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}_{\mathrm{z}}
\) are three rectangular components of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) along X, Y and Z axes of a three dimensional rectangular cartesian co-ordinate system then.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 39
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 40

Question 33.
Find a unit vector in the direction of the vector 3\(
\hat{i}
\) + 4\(
\hat{j}
\).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 41

Question 34.
Given \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{a}}
\) = \(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + 2\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{b}}
\) = 2\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + \(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\), what are the magnitudes of the two vectors? Are these two vectors equal?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 42
The magnitudes of \(
\vec{a}
\) and \(
\vec{b}
\) are equal. However, their corresponding components are not equal, i.e., ax ≠ bx and ay ≠ by. Hence, the two vectors are not equal.
Answer:
Magnitudes of two vectors are equal, but vectors are unequal.

Question 35.
Find the vector drawn from the point (-4, 10, 7) to the point (3, -2, 1). Also find its magnitude.
Solution:
If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) is a vector drawn from the point (x1, y1, z1) to the point (x2, y2, z2), then
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 43

Question 36.
In a cartesian co-ordinate system, the co-ordinates of two points P and Q are (2, 4, 4) and (-2, -3, 7) respectively, find \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P Q}}
\) and its magnitude.
Solution:
Given: Position vector of P = (2,4,4)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 44
∴ |\(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PQ}}
\)| = 8.6 units
Answer: Vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{PQ}}
\) is -4\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) – 7\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\) + 3\(
\hat{\mathbf{k}}
\) and its magnitude is 8.6 units.

Question 37.
If \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}
\) = 3\(
\hat{i}
\) + 4[/latex] = 3\(
\hat{j}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}
\) = 7\(
\hat{i}
\) + 24\(
\hat{j}
\), find a vector having the same magnitude as \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}
\) and parallel to \(
\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}
\).
Solution:
The magnitude of vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) is | \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) |
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 45
Answer: The required vector is 15\(
\hat{\mathbf{i}}
\) + 20\(
\hat{\mathbf{j}}
\).

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 38.
Complete the table.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 46
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 47

Question 39.
State with reasons, whether the following algebraic operations with scalar and vector physical quantities are meaningful.
i. Adding any two scalars,
ii. Adding a scalar to a vector of the same dimensions,
iii. Multiplying any vector by any scalar,
iv. Multiplying any two scalars,
v. Adding any two vectors. (NCERT)
Answer:

  1. Not any two scalars can be added. To add two scalars it is essential that they represent same physical quantity.
  2. This operation is meaningless. Only a vector can be added to another vector.
  3. This operation is possible. When a vector is multiplied with a dimensional scalar, the resultant vector will have different dimensions.
    eg.: acceleration vector is multiplied with mass (a dimensional scalar), the resultant vector has the dimensions of force.
    When a vector is multiplied with non – dimensional scalar, it will be a vector having dimensions as that of the given vector.
    eg.: \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
    \) × 3 = 3\(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
    \)
  4. This operation is possible. Multiplication of non-dimensional scalars is simply algebraic multiplication. Multiplication of non dimensional scalars will result into scalar with different dimensions.
    eg.: Volume × density = mass.
  5. Not any two vectors can be added. To add two vectors it is essential that they represent same physical quantity.

Question 40.
Explain scalar product of two vectors with the help of suitable examples.
Answer:
Scalar product of two vectors:

  1. The scalar product of two non-zero vectors is defined as the product of the magnitude of the two vectors and cosine of the angle θ between the two vectors.
  2. The dot sign is used between the two vectors to be multiplied therefore scalar product is also called dot product.
  3. The scalar product of two vectors \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) and \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \) is given by, \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) . \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \) = PQ cos θ
    where, p = magnitude of \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \), Q = magnitude of \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \)
    θ = angle between \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}
    \) and \(
    \overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}
    \)
  4. Examples of scalar product:
    1. Power (P) is a scalar product of force (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \)) and velocity (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}
      \))
      ∴ P = \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \) . \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}
      \)
    2. Work is a scalar product of force (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}
      \)) and displacement (\(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}
      \)).
      ∴ W = \(
      \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}
      \)

Question 41.
Discuss characteristics of scalar product of two vectors.
Answer:
Characteristics of the scalar product of two vectors:
i. The scalar product of two vectors is equivalent to the product of magnitude of one vector with component of the other in the direction of the first.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 48
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 50
vi. Scalar product of two vectors is expressed in terms of rectangular components as
\(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\) = Ax + Bx + AyBy + AzBz

vii. For \(
\vec{a} \neq 0, \vec{a} \cdot \vec{b}=\vec{a} \cdot \vec{c}
\) does not necessarily mean \(
\vec{b}
\) = \(
\vec{c}
\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 42.
Complete the table vector given below:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 51
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 52

Question 43.
Define and explain vector product of two vectors with suitable examples.
Answer:
i. The vector product of two vectors is a third vector whose magnitude is equal to the product of magnitude of the two vectors and sine of the smaller angle θ between the two vectors.

ii. Vector product is also called cross product of vectors because cross sign is used to represent vector product.

iii. Explanation:

a. The vector product of two vectors \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) and \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\), is a third vector \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) and is written as, \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\) = \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}
\) × \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}
\) = AB sin θ \(
\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{r}}
\) where, \(
\hat{\mathrm{u}}_{\mathrm{r}}
\) is unit vector in direction of \(
\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}
\), i.e., perpendicular to plane containing two vectors. It is given by right handed screw rule.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 53
c. Examples of vector product:

1. Force experienced by a charge q moving with velocity \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) in uniform magnetic field of induction (strength) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is given as \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\) = q\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)

2. Moment of a force or torque (\(\begin{aligned}
&\rightarrow\\
&\tau
\end{aligned}\)) is the vector product of the position vector (\(\vec{r}\)) and the force (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)).
i.e., \(\begin{aligned}
&\rightarrow\\
&\tau
\end{aligned}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}\)

3. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\)) of a rotating particle is equal to the cross product of its angular velocity (\(\vec{\omega}\)) and its position (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)) from axis of rotation.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) × \(\vec{\omega}\)

Question 44.
State right handed screw rule.
Answer:
Statement of Right handed screw rule: Hold a right handed screw with its axis perpendicular to the plane containing vectors and the screw rotated from first vector to second vector through a small angle, the direction in which the screw tip would advance is the direction of the vector product of two vectors.

Question 45.
State the characteristics of the vector product (cross product) of two vectors.
Answer:
Characteristics of the vector product (cross product):
i. The vector product of two vectors does not obey the commutative law of multiplication.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 54
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 55
vi. The magnitude of cross product of two vectors is numerically equal to the area of a parallelogram whose adjacent sides represent the two vectors.

Question 46.
Derive an expression for cross product of two vectors and express it in determinant form.
Answer:
Expression for cross product of two vectors:
i. Let two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) be represented in magnitude and direction by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 56
ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 57
iii. Determinant form of cross product of two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{R}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 58

Question 47.
Show that magnitude of vector product of two vectors is numerically equal to the area of a parallelogram formed by the two
vectors.
Answer:
Suppose OACB is a parallelogram of adjacent sides, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OB}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 59
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 60

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 48.
Distinguish between scalar product (dot product) and vector product (cross product).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 61

Question 49.
Given \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = 4\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 8\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = 2\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) – m\(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) + 4\(\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) find m if \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) have the same direction. Solution:
Since \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) have the same direction, their corresponding components must be in the same proportion, i.e.,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 62

Question 50.
Find the scalar product of the two vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}_{1}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}_{2}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 63
Answer: Scalar product of two given vectors is – 4.

Question 51.
A force \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{F}}\) = \(4 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+6 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) acting on a particle produces a displacement of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{S}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) where F is expressed in newton and s in metre. Find the work done by the force.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 64
Answer: The work done by the force is 41 J.

Question 52.
Find ‘a’ if \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(\mathbf{a} \hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are perpendicular to one another.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 65

Question 53.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(5 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+6 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+4 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) determine the angle between \(\) and \(\). Solution:
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 66

Question 54.
Find the angle between the vectors
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(-\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\mathbf{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\).
Solution:
Let angle between the vectors be θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 67
Answer: The angle between the vectors is 60°.

Question 55.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+7 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+3 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\vec{B}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+\mathbf{5} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\), find the component of \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) along \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\).
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 68

Question 56.
\(\hat{\mathbf{i}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively. What is the magnitude and direction of the vector \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}\) and \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}\)? What are the components of a vector
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{3} \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) along the directions of \((\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}})\) and \((\hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}})\)? (NCERT)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 69
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 70

Question 57.
The angular momentum \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{L}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\), where \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{r}}\) is a position vector and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{p}}\) is linear momentum of a body.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 71
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 72

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 58.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}=2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{j}}+\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}=\hat{\mathbf{i}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{j}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are two vectors, find \(|\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}|\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 73

Question 59.
Find unit vectors perpendicular to the plane of the vectors, \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\) and
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-\hat{\mathbf{k}}\)
Solution:
Let required unit vector be \(\hat{\mathrm{u}}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 74
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 75

Question 60.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\mathbf{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) = \(2 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-2 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) are two vectors, find the unit vector parallel to \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\). Also find the vector perpendicular to P and Q of magnitude 6 units.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 76

Question 61.
Find the area of a triangle formed by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{A}}\) = \(\hat{3} \hat{\mathbf{i}}-4 \hat{\mathbf{j}}+2 \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{B}}\) = \(\hat{\mathbf{i}}+\hat{\mathbf{j}}-\boldsymbol{2} \hat{\mathbf{k}}\) as adjacent sides measure in metre. Solution:
Given: Two adjacent sides of triangle,
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) = \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-4 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}-2 \hat{k}\)
To find: Area of triangle
Formula: Area of triangle =
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 77
Answer:
Area of the triangle is 6.1 m2.

Question 62.
Find the derivatives of the functions,
i. f(x) = x8
ii. f(x) = x3 + sin x
Solution:
i. Using \(\frac{\mathrm{dx}^{\mathrm{n}}}{\mathrm{dx}}\) = nxn-1,
\(\frac{d\left(x^{8}\right)}{d x}\) = 8x7

ii.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 78

Question 63.
Find derivatives of e2x – tan x
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 79

Question 64.
Find the derivatives of the functions.
f(x) = x3 sin x
Solution:
Using,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 80

Question 65.
Find derivatives of \(\frac{d}{d x}(x \times \ln x)\)
Solution:
Using,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 81

Question 66.
Evaluate the following integrals.

i. \(\int x^{8} d x\)
Solution:
Using formula \(\int x^{n} d x\) = \(\frac{x^{n+1}}{n+1}\),
\(\int x^{8} d x\) = \(\frac{x^{9}}{9}\)

ii. \(\int_{2}^{5} x^{2} d x\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 82

iii) \(\int(x+\sin x) d x\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 83

iv) \(\int\left(\frac{10}{x}+e^{x}\right) d x\)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 84

v) \(\int_{1}^{4}\left(x^{3}-x\right) d x\)
Answer:
Using,
f1(x) – f2(x) = \(\int f_{1}(x)-\int f_{2}(x)\)
Here,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 85

Question 67.
A man applies a force of 10 N on a garbage crate. If another man applies a force of 8 N on the same crate at an angle of 60° with respect to previous, then what will be the resultant force and direction of the crate, if crate is stationary.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 86
Answer:
A resultant force of 15.62 N is applied on a crate at an angle of 26.56°.

Question 68.
A lady dropped her wallet in the parking lot of a super market. A boy picked the wallet up and ran towards the lady. He set off at 60° to the verge, heading towards the lady with a speed of 10 m s-1, as shown in the diagram.
Find the component of velocity of boy directly across the parking strip.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 87
Answer:
The angle between velocity vector and the direction of path is 60°.
∴ Component of velocity across the parking strip
= v × cos 60°
= 10-1 × cos 60°
= 5 m s-1

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 69.
On an open ground, a biker follows a track that turns to his left by an angle of 60° after every 600 m. Starting from a given turn, specify the displacement of the biker at the third and sixth turn. Compare the magnitude of the displacement with the total path length covered by the motorist in each case.
Answer:
The path followed by the biker will be a closed hexagonal path. Suppose the motorist starts his journey from the point O.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 88
= 1200 m
= 1.2 km
∴ Total path length = \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{OA}}|+|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{AB}}|+|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{BC}}|\)
= 600 + 600 + 600
= 1800 m
= 1.8 km
The ratio of the magnitude of displacement to the total path-length = \(\frac{1.2}{1.8}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\) = 0.67

ii. The motorist will take the sixth turn at O.
Displacement is zero.
path-length is = 3600 m or 3.6 km.
Ration of magnitude of displacement and path-length is zero.

Question 70.
What is the resultant of vectors shown in the figure below?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods 89
Answer:
If number of vectors are represented by the various sides of a closed polygon taken in one order then, their resultant is always zero.

Question 71.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{P}}\) is moving away from a point and \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{Q}}\) is moving towards a point then, can their resultant be found using parallelogram law of vector addition?
Answer:
No. Resultant cannot be found by parallelogram law of vector addition because to apply law of parallelogram of vectors the two vectors and should either act towards a point or away from a point.

Question 72.
Which of the throwing is a vector?
(A) speed
(B) displacement
(C) mass
(D) time
Answer:
(B) displacement

Question 73.
The equation \(\vec{a}+\vec{a}=\vec{a}\) is
(A) meaningless
(B) always truc
(C) may he possible for limited values of a’
(D) true only when \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)
Answer:
(D) true only when \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=0\)

Question 74.
The minimum number of numerically equal vectors whose vector sum can be zero is
(A) 4
(B) 3
(C) 2
(D) 1
Answer:
(C) 2

Question 75.
If \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}=\vec{A}-\vec{B}\) then vector \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) must be
(A) zero vector
(B) unit vector
(C) Non zero vector
(D) equal to \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
Answer:
(A) zero vector

Question 76.
If \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}\) is the unit vector in the direction of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), then,
(A) \(\hat{n}=\frac{\vec{A}}{|\vec{A}|}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|\)
(C) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\frac{|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}|}{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}}\)
(D) \(\hat{\mathrm{n}}=\hat{\mathrm{n}} \times \overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\hat{n}=\frac{\vec{A}}{|\vec{A}|}\)

Question 77.
Two quantities of 5 and 12 unit when added gives a quantity 13 unit. This quantity is
(A) time
(B) mass
(C) linear momentum
(D) speed
Answer:
(C) linear momentum

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 78.
A force of 60 N acting perpendicular to a force of 80 N, magnitude of resultant force is
(A) 20N
(B) 70N
(C) 100 N
(D) 140 N
Answer:
(C) 100 N

Question 79.
A river is flowing at the rate of 6 km h-1. A man swims across it with a velocity of 9 km h-1. The resultant velocity of the man will be
(A) \(\sqrt{15} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(B) \(\sqrt{45} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(C) \(\sqrt{117} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
(D) \(\sqrt{225} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\sqrt{117} \mathrm{~km} \mathrm{~h}^{-1}\)

Question 80.
If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) and magnitudes of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) are 5, 4 and 3 unit respectively, then angle between \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is
(A) sin-1 (3/4)
(B) cos-1 (4/5)
(C) tan-1 (5/3)
(D) cos-1 (3/5)
Answer:
(B) cos-1 (4/5)

Question 81.
If \(\vec{A}=\hat{i}+2 \hat{j}+3 \hat{k}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\), then the area of parallelogram formed from these vectors as the adjacent sides will be
(A) 2\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(B) 4\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(C) 6\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
(D) 8\(\sqrt{3}\) square units
Answer:
(D) 8\(\sqrt{3}\) square units

Question 82.
A person moves from a point S and walks along the path which is a square of each side 50 m. He runs east, south, then west and finally north. Then the total displacement covered is
(A) 200m
(B) 100 m
(C) 50\(\sqrt{2}\) m
(D) zero
Answer:
(D) zero

Question 83.
The maximum value of magnitude of \((\vec{A}-\vec{B})\) is
(A) A – B
(B) A
(C) A + B
(D) \(\sqrt{\left(A^{2}+B^{2}\right)}\)
Answer:
(C) A + B

Question 84.
The magnitude of the X and Y components of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) are 7 and 6. Also the magnitudes of the X and Y components of \(\vec{A}+\vec{B}\) are 11 and 9 respectively. What is the magnitude of
(A) 5
(B) 6
(C) 8
(D)
Answer:
(A) 5

Question 85.
What is the maximum n Limber of components into which a force can be resolved?
(A) Two
(B) Three
(C) Four
(D) Any number
Answer:
(D) Any number

Question 86.
The resultant of two vectors of magnitude \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}|\) is also \(|\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}|\). They act at an angle
(A) 60°
(B) 90°
(C) 120°
(D) 180°
Answer:
(C) 120°

Question 87.
The vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) are such that \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) and A2 + B2 = C2. Angle θ between positive directions of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) is
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
(B) 0
(C) π
(D) \(\frac{2 \pi}{3}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 2 Mathematical Methods

Question 88.
The expression \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}})\) is a
(A) unit vector
(B) null vector
(C) vector of magnitude \(\sqrt{2}\)
(D) scalar
Answer:
(A) unit vector

Question 89.
What is the angle between \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}\) and \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}\)?
(A) 0°
(B) \(\frac{\pi}{6}\)
(C) \(\frac{\pi}{3}\)
(D) None of the above
Answer:
(D) None of the above

Question 90.
\((\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}})\) is a unit vector along X-axis. If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{P}}=\hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\) then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{Q}}\) is
(A) \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(C) \(\hat{i}+\hat{j}+\hat{k}\)
(D) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}-\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)

Question 91.
The magnitude of scalar product of the vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+4 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) is
(A) 20
(B) 22
(C) 26
(D) 29
Answer:
(C) 26

Question 92.
Three vectors \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) satisfy the relation \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) = 0 and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\). \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\) = 0, then \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is parallel to
(A) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\)
(B) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
(D) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) × \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{C}}\)

Question 93.
What vector must be added to the sum of two vectors \(2 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-\hat{\mathrm{j}}+3 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(3 \hat{\mathrm{i}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{j}}-2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\) so that the resultant is a unit vector along Z axis?
(A) \(5 \hat{\hat{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(-5 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\)
(C) \(3 \hat{j}+5 \hat{k}\)
(D) \(-3 \hat{\mathrm{j}}+2 \hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
Answer:
(B) \(-5 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j}\)

Question 94.
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}=5 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}-2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+3 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}=2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{i}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{j}}+2 \overrightarrow{\mathrm{k}}\), then component of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{B}}\) along \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{A}}\) is
(A) \(\frac{\sqrt{28}}{38}\)
(B) \(\frac{28}{\sqrt{38}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\sqrt{28}}{48}\)
(D) \(\frac{14}{\sqrt{38}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{14}{\sqrt{38}}\)

Question 95.
Choose the WRONG statement
(A) The division of vector by scalar is valid.
(B) The multiplication of vector by scalar is valid.
(C) The multiplication of vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.
(D) The division of a vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.
Answer:
(D) The division of a vector by another vector is valid by using vector algebra.

Question 96.
The resultant of two forces of 3 N and 4 N is 5 N, the angle between the forces is
(A) 30°
(B) 60°
(C) 90°
(D) 120°
Answer:
(C) 90°

Question 97.
The unit vector along \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) is
(A) \(\hat{\mathrm{k}}\)
(B) \(\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(D) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\hat{\mathrm{i}}+\hat{\mathrm{j}}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 1.
Explain the term: Displacement.
Answer:
Displacement:

  1. Displacement of a particle for a time interval is the difference between the position vectors of the object in that time interval.
  2. Let \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}_{1}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}_{2}}\) be the position vectors of a particle at time t1 and t2 respectively. Then the displacement \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{S}}\) in time ∆t = (t2 – t\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}) is given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{s}}=\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}\)
  3. Dimensions of displacement are equal to that of length i.e.. [L1M0T0].
  4. Displacement is a vector quantity.
  5. Example:
    • For an object has travelled through 1 m from time t1 to t2 along the positive X-direction, the magnitude of its displacement is I m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • On the other hand, for an object has travelled through I m from time t1 to t1 along the positive Y-direction, the magnitude of its displacement remains same i.e., I m but the direction of the displacement is along the positive Y-axis.

Question 2.
Explain the term: Path length.
Answer:

  1. Path length is the actual distance travelled by the particle during its motion.
  2. It is a scalar quantity.
  3. Dimensions of path length are equal to that of length i.e.. [L1M0T0]
  4. Example:
    • If an object travels along the X-axis from x = 3 m to x = 6 m then the distance travelled is 3 m. In this case the displacement is also 3 m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • However, if the object now comes back to x 5, then the distance through which the object has moved increases to 3 + I = 4 m. Its initial position was x 3 m and the final position is now x = 5 m and thus, its displacement is ∆x = 5 – 3 = 2 m, i.e., the magnitude of the displacement is 2 m and its direction is along the positive X-axis.
    • If the object now moves to x =1, then the distance travelled, i.e., the path length increases to 4 + 4 = 8 m while the magnitude of displacement becomes 3 – 1 = 2 m and its direction is along the negative X-axis.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
Explain the terms:
i. Average velocity
ii. Instantaneous velocity
iii. Average speed
iv. Instantaneous speed
Answer:
i) Average velocity:

  1. Average velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of an object is the displacement (\(\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\)) of the object during the time interval (∆t) over which average velocity is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average velocity = (\(\frac{\text { Displacement }}{\text { Time interval }}\))
    \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{av}}}=\frac{\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}-\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}_{2}-\mathrm{t}_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\)
  3. Average velocity is a vector quantity.
  4. Its SI unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0L1T-1]
  5. For example, if the positions of an object are x +4 m and x = +6 m at times t = O and t = 1 minute respectively, the magnitude of its average velocity during that time is Vav = (6 – 4)1(1 – 0) = 2 m per minute and its direction will be along the positive X-axis.
    ∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{av}}\) = 2 i m/min
    Where, i = unit vector along X-axis.

ii) Instantaneous velocity:

  1. The instantaneous velocity (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{V}}\)) is the limiting value of ¡he average velocity of the object over a small time interval (∆t) around t when the value of lime interval goes to zero.
  2. It is the velocity of an object at a given instant of time.
  3. \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
    where \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) derivative of \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}\) with respect to t.

iii) Average speed:

  1. Average speed of an object is the total path length (distance) travelled by the object during the time interval over which average speed is being calculated, divided by that time interval.
  2. Average speed = \(\frac{\text { Total path length }}{\text { Total time interval }}\)
  3. Average speed is a scalar quantity.
  4. Its S.I. unit is m/s and dimensions are [M0V1T-1].
  5. In rectilinear motion;
    • If the motion of the object is only in one direction, then the magnitude of displacement will be equal to the path length and hence the magnitude of average velocity will be equal to the average speed.
    • If the motion of the object reverses its direction, then the magnitude of displacement will be less then the path length and hence the magnitude of average velocity will be less than the average speed.

iv) Instantaneous speed:
The instantaneous speed is the limiting value of the average speed of the object over a small time interval ‘∆t’ around t when the value of time interval goes to zero.

Question 4.
Distinguish between uniform rectilinear motion and non-uniform rectilinear motion.
Answer:

No. Uniformly rectilinear motion Non-uniform rectilinear motion
i. The object is moving with constant velocity. The object is moving with variable velocity.
ii. The average and instantaneous velocities are same. The average and instantaneous velocities are different.
iii. The average and instantaneous speeds are the same. The average and instantaneous speeds are different.
iv. The average and instantaneous speeds are equal to the magnitude of the velocity. The average speed will be different from the magnitude of average velocity.

Question 5.
Explain the terms:

  1. Acceleration
  2. Average acceleration
  3. Instantaneous acceleration

Answer:

  1. Acceleration:
    • Acceleration is the rate of change of velocity with respect to time.
    • It is a vector quantity.
    • Dimension: [M0L1T-2]
    • If a particle moves with constant velocity, its acceleration is zero.
  2. Average acceleration:
    • Average acceleration is the change in velocity divided by the total time required for the change.
    • If \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{1}}}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{2}}}\) are the velocities of the T particle at time t1 and t2 respectively, then the change in velocity is \(\) and time required for this change is ∆t = t2 – t1
      ∴ \(\vec{a}_{a v}=\frac{\vec{v}_{2}-\vec{v}_{1}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}=\frac{\Delta \vec{v}}{\Delta t}\)
  3. Instantaneous acceleration:
    • The instantaneous acceleration a is the limiting value of the average acceleration of the object over a small time interval ‘∆t’ around t when the value of time interval goes to zero.
      \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\text {inst }}=\lim _{\Delta t \rightarrow 0} \frac{\Delta \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\frac{\mathrm{d} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}}{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{t}}\)
    • Instantaneous acceleration is the slope of the tangent to the velocity-time graph at a position corresponding to given instant of time.
      [Note: Generally, when the term acceleration is used, it is an instantaneous acceleration.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 6.
Draw and explain the position-time graph of:

  1. An object at rest.
  2. An object moving with uniform velocity along positive x-axis.
  3. An object moving with uniform velocity along negative x-axis.
  4. An object moving with non-uniform velocity.
  5. An object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed.

Answer:

  1. The position-time graph of an object at rest:
    • For an object at rest, the position-time graph is a horizontal straight line parallel to time axis.
    • The displacement of the object is zero as there is no change in the object’s position.
    • Slope of the graph is zero, which indicates that velocity of the particle is zero.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 1
  2. The position-time graph of an object moving with uniform velocity along positive x-axis:
    • When an object moves, the position of the particle changes with respect to time.
    • Since velocity is constant, displacement is proportional to elapsed time.
    • The graph is a straight line with positive slope, showing that the velocity is along the positive x-axis.
    • In this case, as the motion is uniform, the average velocity and instantaneous velocity are equal at all times.
    • Speed is equal to the magnitude of the velocity.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 2
  3. Position-time graph of an object moving with uniform velocity along negative x- axis:
    • The graph is a straight line with negative slope, showing that the velocity is along the negative x-axis.
    • Displacement decreases with increase in time.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 3
  4. Position-time graph of a particle moving with non-uniform velocity;
    • When the velocity of an object changes with time, slope of the graph is different at different points. Therefore, the average and instantaneous velocities are different.
    • Average velocity over time interval from t1 to t4 around time t0 = slope of line AB.
    • Average velocity over time interval from t2 to t3 = slope of line CD
    • On further reducing the time interval around t0, it can be deduced that, instantaneous interval at t0 = the slope of the tangent PQ at t0.
      Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 4
  5. Position-time graph of an object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed:
    For an object performing oscillatory motion with constant speed, the direction of velocity changes from positive to negative and vice versa over fixed intervals of time.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 5

Question 7.
Explain the velocity-tune graphs of an object:
i) Moving with zero acceleration.
ii) Moving with constant positive acceleration.
iii) Moving with constant negative acceleration.
iv) Moving with non-uniform acceleration.
Answer:
i) Object is moving with zero acceleration:

  1. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 6
  2. As the acceleration is zero, the graph will be a straight line parallel to time axis.
  3. Velocity of the particle is constant as the acceleration is zero.
  4. Magnitude of displacement of object from t1 to t2 = v0 × (t2 – t1) shaded area under velocity-time graph.

ii) Object is moving with constant positive acceleration:

  1. The velocity-time graph is linear.
  2. Velocity increases with increase in time. as acceleration is positive (along the direction of velocity).
  3. The area under the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement of the object during that time interval.
  4. Slope of the graph is \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) = positive acceleration
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 7

iii) Object is moving with constant negative acceleration:

  1. The velocity-time graph is linear.
  2. Velocity decreases with increase in time as acceleration is negative (opposite to the direction of velocities).
  3. The area tinder the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement 0f the object during that time interval.
  4. Slope of the graph is \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{v}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}\) negative acceleration
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 8

iv. Object is moving with non-uniform acceleration:

  1. Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 9
  2. Velocity-time graph is non-linear.
  3. The area under the velocity-time graph between two instants of time t1 and t2 gives the displacement of the object during that time interval area under the velocity-time curve =
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 10
    = x(t2) – x(t1)
    = displacement of the object from t1 to t2.

Question 8.
A ball thrown vertically upwards from a point P on earth reaches a point Q and returns back to earth striking at a point R. Draw speed-time graph to depict the motion of the ball (Neglect air resistance).
Answer:

  • Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 11
  • A ball which is thrown up with a certain initial speed goes up with decreasing speed to a certain height where its speed becomes zero.
  • Now, during its downward motion, the speed goes on increasing from zero and reaches its initial value when it strikes the ground.
  • The speed-time graph for the motion of a ball is as shown in the figure.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
Figure shows velocity-time graph for various situations. What does each graph indicate?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 12
Answer:

  1. Initial velocity, u > 0. Also, velocity is constant with time. Hence, acceleration is zero.
  2. As finite initial velocity is increasing with time, acceleration, a > 0 and is constant.
  3. Initial velocity, u = 0. Velocity is increasing with time so, acceleration a is positive. But it is decreasing in magnitude with time.
  4. Initial velocity, u = 0. Velocity is linearly increasing with time. Hence, starting from rest acceleration is constant.
  5. Initial velocity, u = 0. Acceleration and velocity is increasing with time.
  6. Initial velocity u > 0. Velocity decreases and ultimately comes to rest. Hence, acceleration a < 0.

Question 10.
‘The distances travelled by an object starting from rest and having a positive uniform acceleration in successive seconds are in the ratio 1:3:5:7….’ Prove it.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object under free fall, Initial velocity u = 0, acceleration a = g
  2. The distance travelled by the object in equal time intervals t0 can be given by the second law of motion as,
    s = ut0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
  3. Distance travelled in the first time interval to,
    s1 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt02 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
    Substituting \(\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2}\) = A, we have s1 = At02
  4. Distance travelled in the time interval 2t0 = A (2t0)2
    ∴ The distance travelled in the second t0 interval, s2 = A(4t02 – t02) = 3At0\frac{\mathrm{g}}{2} = 3s1
  5. Distance travelled in the time interval 3t0 = A(3t0)2
    ∴ The distance travelled in the third to interval,
    s3 = A (9t02 – 4t02) = 5 At02 = 5s1
  6. On continuing, it can be seen that the distances travelled, (s1 : s2 : s3 ….) are in the ratio (1 : 3 : 5 :….)

Question 11.
Explain the concept of relative velocity along a straight line with the help of an example.
Answer:

  1. Consider two trains A and B moving on two parallel tracks in the same direction.
  2. Case 1: Train B overtakes train A.
    For a passenger in train A, train B appears to be moving slower than train A. This happens because the passenger in train A perceives the velocity of train B with respect to him/her i.e., the difference in the velocities of the two trains which is much smaller than the velocity of train A.
  3. Case 2: Train A overtakes train B.
    For a passenger in train A, train B appears to be moving faster than train A. This happens because the passenger in train A perceives the velocity of the train B w.r.t. to him/her i.e., the difference in the velocities of the two trains which is larger than the velocity of train A.
  4. If \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{B}}\) be the velocities of two bodies then relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{A}-\vec{v}_{B}\).
  5. Similarly the velocity of B with respect to A is given by, \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{B}-\vec{v}_{A}\).
    Thus, relative velocity of an object w.r.t. another object is the difference in their velocities
  6. If two objects start form the same point at t = 0, with different velocities, distance between them increases with time in direct proportion to the relative velocity between them.

Solved Problems

Question 12.
A person walks from point P to point Q along a straight road ¡n 10 minutes, then turns back and returns to point R which ¡s midway between P and Q after further 4 minutes. If PQ is 1 km, find the average speed and velocity of the person in going from P to R.
Solution:
Given: time taken (t) = 10 + 4 = 14 minutes,
distance (s) = PQ + QR = 1 + 0.5 = 1.5 km,
displacement = PQ – QR = 1 – 0.5 = 0.5km
To find: Average speed, average velocity (v)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 13
The average speed and average velocity of the person is 6.42 km/hr and 2.142 km/hr respectively.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 13.
A car moves at a constant speed of 60 km/hr for 1 km and 40 km/hr for next 1 km. What ¡s the average speed of the car?
Solution:
Given. v1 = 60 km/hr, x1 = 1 km,
v2 = 40 km/hr, x2 = 1 km
To find: Average speed of car (Vav)
Formula: vav = \(\frac{\text { total path length }}{\text { total time interval }}\)
Calculation: From given data,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 14
∴ Average speed of car = 48 km/hr
The average speed of the car is 48 km/hr

Question 14.
A stone is thrown vertically upwards from the ground with a velocity 15 m/s. At the same instant a ball is dropped from a point directly above the stone from a height of 30 m. At what height from the ground will the stone and the ball meet and after how much time? (Use g = 10 m/s2 for ease of calculation).
Solution:
Let the stone and the ball meet after time t0. From second equation of motion, the distances travelled by the stone and the ball in that time is given as,
Sstone = 15 t0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
Sball = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02
When they meet. Sstone + Sball = 30
∴ 15t0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt02 = 30
t0 = \(\frac{30}{15}\) = 2 s
∴ Sstone = 15 (2) – \(\frac{1}{2}\) (10) (2)2 = 30 – 20 = 10 m
The stone and the ball meet at a height of 10 m after time 2s.

Question 15.
A ball is dropped from the top of a building 122.5 m high. How long will it take to reach the ground? What wilt be its velocity when it strikes the ground?
Solution:
Given: s = h = 122.5 m, u = 0,
a = g = 9.8 ms2
To find: i) Time taken to reach the ground (t)
ii) Velocity of ball when it strikes ground (v)

Formulae: i) s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\) at2
ii) v = u + gt
Calculation: From formula (i),
122.5 = 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 9.8 t2
t2 = \(\frac{122.5}{4.9}\) = 25
t = \(\sqrt {25}\) = 5 second
From formula (ii),
v = u + gt
v = 0 + 9.8 × 5 = 49 m/s

i) Time taken to reach the ground is 5 s.
ii) Velocity of the ball when it strikes the ground is 49 m/s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
The position vectors of three particles are given by
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{1}=(5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{m}\), \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{2}=(5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{j}}) \mathrm{m}\) and \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{x}}_{3}=\left(5 \mathrm{t} \hat{\mathrm{i}}+10 \mathrm{t}^{2} \hat{\mathrm{j}}\right) \mathrm{m}\) as a function of time t.
Determine the velocity and acceleration for each, in SI units.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 15
v2 = \(\sqrt{5^{2}+5^{2}}\) = 5\(\sqrt{2}\) m/s
tan θ = \(\frac{5}{5}\) = 1
∴ θ = 45°
Direction of v2 makes an angle of 45° to the horizontal.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 16
Thus, third particle is getting accelerated along the y-axis at 20 m/s2.

Question 17.
The initial velocity of an object is \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{u}}=5 \hat{\mathrm{i}}+10 \hat{\mathrm{j}} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}\). Its constant acceleration is \(\vec{a}=2 \hat{i}+3 \hat{j} \mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}^{2}\). Determine the velocity and the displacement after 5 s.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 17
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 18

Question 18.
An aeroplane A, is travelling in a straight line with a velocity of 300 km/hr with respect to Earth. Another aeroplane B, is travelling in the opposite direction with a velocity of 350 km/hr with respect to Earth. What is the relative velocity of A with respect to B? What should be the velocity of a third aeroplane C moving parallel to A, relative to the Earth if it has a relative velocity of 100 km/hr with respect to A?
Solution:
Given: vA = 300 km/hr, vB = 350 km/hr,
vCA = 100 km/hr
To find: i) Velocity of plane A relative to B (vA – vB)
ii) Velocity of aeroplane C (vC)

Formula: i) vAB = vA – vB
ii) vCA = vC – vA

Calculations: From formula (i),
vAB = vA – vB = 300 – (-350)
∴ vAB = 650 km/hr
From formula (ii),
vC = vCA + vA = 100 + 300 = 400 km/hr

i) The relative velocity of A with respect to B is 650 km/hr.
ii) The velocity of plane C relative to Earth is 400 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 19.
A car moving at a speed 10 m/s on a straight road is ahead of car B moving in the same direction at 6 m/s. Find the velocity of A relative to B and vice-versa.
Solution:
Given: vA = 10 m/s, vB = 6 m/s,
To find: i) Velocity of A relative to B (vA – vB)
ii) Velocity of B relative to A (vB – vA)

Formulae: i) vAB = vA – vB
ii) vBA = vB – vA

Calculation: From formula (i),
vAB = 10 – 6 = 4 m/s
From formula (ii),
vBA = 6 – 10 = -4 m/s
-ve sign indicates that driver of car A sees the car B lagging behind at the rate of 4 m/s.
∴ vAB = 4 m/s, vBA = -4 m/s

i) Velocity of A relative to B is 4 m/s.
ii) Velocity of B relative to A is -4 m/s.

Question 20.
Two trains 120 m and 80 m in length are running in opposite directions with velocities 42 km/h and 30 km/h respectively. In what time will they completely cross each other?
Solution:
Given: l1 = 120 m, l2 = 80 m,
vA = 42 km/h = 42 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{35}{3}\) m/s,
vB = -30km/h= -30 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = \(\frac{-25}{3}\) m/s
To find: Time taken by trains to cross each other (t)
Formula: Time = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { speed }}\)

Calculation :
Total distance to be travelled
= sum of lengths of two trains
= 120 + 80 = 200m
Relative velocity of A with respect to B is vAB,
vAB = vA – vB
= \(\frac{35}{3}\) – (\(\frac{-25}{3}\))
= \(\frac{60}{3}\)
∴ vAB = 20m/S
From formula,
∴ Time taken to cross each other (t) = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { speed }}\)
= \(\frac{200}{20}\)
= 10 s
Time taken by the two trains to cross each other is 10 s.

Question 21.
A jet aeroplane travelling at the speed of 500 km/hr ejects its products of combustion at speed of 1500 km/hr relative to jet plane. What is the relative velocity of the latter with respect to an observer on the ground?
Solution:
Let us consider the positive direction of motion towards the observer on the ground.
Suppose \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}\) be the velocities of the aeroplane and relative velocity of combustion products w.r.t. aeroplane respectively.

∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}\) = 1,500 km/hr (towards the observer on the ground) and \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) = 500 km/hr (away from the observer on the ground)
∴ – \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\) = -500 km/ hr (towards the observer on the ground)

Let \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}\) be the velocity of the combustion products towards the observer on ground then,
\(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c} j}=\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}-\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c} }=\vec{v}_{\mathrm{cj}}-\vec{v}_{\mathrm{a}}\)
= 1500 + (-500)
= 1000 km/hr
∴ \(\vec{v}_{\mathrm{c}}\) = 1000 km/hr
The relative velocity of the combustion products w.r.t. the observer is 1000 km/hr.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 22.
Derive the expression for average velocity and instantaneous velocity for the motion of an object in x-y plane.
Answer:
i) Consider an object to be at point A at time t1 in an x—y plane.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 19
ii) At time t1, the position vector of the object is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 20
vii) The instantaneous velocity of the object at point A along the trajectory is along the tangent to the curve at A. This is shown by the vector AB.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 21
Equation (3) is the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point at which we are calculating the instantaneous velocity.

Question 23.
Derive the expression for average acceleration and instantaneous acceleration for the motion of an object in x-y plane.
Answer:
i) Consider an object moving in an x-y plane.
Let the velocity of the particle be \(\vec{v}_{1}\) and \(\vec{v}_{2}\) at time t1 and t2 respectively.
ii) The average acceleration (\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}_{\mathrm{av}}\)) of the particle between t1 and t2 is given as,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 22
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 23
Equation (1) is the slope of the tangent to the curve at the point at which we are calculating the instantaneous acceleration.

Question 24.
Explain relative velocity between two objects moving in a plane.
Answer:

  1. If \(\vec{v}_{A}\) and \(\vec{v}_{B}\) be the velocities of two bodies then relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by, \(\vec{v}_{A B}=\vec{v}_{A}-\vec{v}_{B}\)
  2. Similarly, the velocity of B with respect to A is given by, \(\vec{v}_{\text {BA }}=\vec{v}_{\text {B }}-\overrightarrow{v_{A}}\)
  3. Thus, the magnitudes of the two relative velocities are equal and their directions are opposite.
  4. For a number of objects A, B, C, D—Y, Z, moving with respect to the other. The velocity of A relative to Z can be given as, \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{AZ}}=\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{AB}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{BC}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{CD}}+\ldots+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{XY}}+\overrightarrow{\mathrm{v}}_{\mathrm{YZ}}\)
    The order of subscripts is: A → B → C → D → Z

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 25.
Write a note on projectile motion.
Answer:

  1. An object in flight after being thrown with some velocity is called a projectile and its motion is called projectile motion.
  2. Example: A bullet fired from a gun, football kicked in air, a stone thrown obliquely in air etc.
  3. In projectile motion, the object is moving freely under the influence of Earth’s gravitational field.
  4. The projectile has two components of velocity, one in the horizontal i.e., along the x- direction and the other in the vertical i.e., along the y-direction.
  5. As acceleration due to gravity acts only along the vertically downward direction, the vertical component changes in accordance with the laws of motion with ax = 0 and ay = -g.
  6. As no force is acting in the horizontal direction, the horizontal component of velocity remains unchanged.
    [Note: Retarding forces like air resistance etc. are neglected in projectile motion unless otherwise stated.]

Question 26.
Obtain an expression for the time of flight of a projectile.
Answer:
Expression for time of flight:

  1. Consider a body projected with velocity \(\vec{u}\), at an angle θ of projection from point O in the co-ordinate system of the X-Y plane, as shown in figure.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 24
  2. The initial velocity \(\vec{u}\) can be resolved into two rectangular components:
    ux = u cos θ (Horizontal component)
    uy = u sin θ (Vertical component)
  3. Thus, the horizontal component remains constant throughout the motion due to the absence of any force acting in that direction, while the vertical component changes according to, vy = uy + ay t with ay = – g and uy = u sin θ
  4. The components of velocity of the projectile at time t are given by, vx = ux = u cos θ
    vy = uy – gt = u sin θ – gt ………….. (1)
  5. At maximum height.
    vy = 0, t = tA = time of ascent = time taken to reach maximum height.
    ∴ 0 = u sin θ – gtA ……..[From(l)]
    u sin θ = gtA
    tA = \(\frac{\mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………….. (2)
    This is time of ascent of projectile.
  6. The total time in air i.e., time of flight T is given as,
    T = 2tA ………… [From(2)]
    = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{u} \sin \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\) ………… (3)
    Equation (3) represents time of flight of projectile.

Question 27.
Define Horizontal range of projectile:
Answer:
The maximum horizontal distance travelled by the projectile is called the horizontal range (R) of the projectile.

Solved Examples

Question 28.
An aeroplane Is travelling northward with a velocity of 300 km/hr with respect to the Earth. Wind is blowing from east to west at a speed of 100 km/hr. What is the velocity of the aeroplane with respect to the wind?
Solution:
Given:
velocity of aeroplane w.r.t Earth,
\(\vec{v}_{A E}=300 \hat{j}\)
velocity of wind w.r.t Earth,
\(\vec{v}_{w E}=-100 \hat{i}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 25

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 29.
A hiker stands on the edge of a cliff 490 m above the ground and throws a stone horizontally with an initial speed of 15 ms-1. Neglecting air resistance, find the time taken by the stone to reach the ground, and the speed with which it hits the ground. Take = 9.8 m/s2.
Solution:
Given: h = 490m, ux = 15 ms-1, ay = 9.8 ms-1,
ax = 0
To find: i) Time taken (t)
ii) Velocity (v)

Formulae: i) t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
ii) v = \(\sqrt{v_{x}^{2}+v_{y}^{2}}\)

Calculation: t = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{~h}}{\mathrm{~g}}}=\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 490}{9.8}}\) = 10 s
vx = ux + axt= 15 + 0 × 10 = 15 m/s
uy = uy + ayt = 0 + 9.8 × 10 = 98 m/s
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{x}}^{2}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}}=\sqrt{15^{2}+98^{2}}\)
= 99.1 m/s
The stone taken 10 s to reach the ground and hits the ground with 99.1 m/s.

Question 30.
A body is projected with a velocity of 40 ms-1. After 2 s it crosses a vertical pole of height 20.4 m. Find the angle of projection and horizontal range of projectile, (g = 9.8 ms-2).
Solution:
Given: u = 40 ms-1, t = 2 s, y = 20.4 m,
ay = -9.8 m/s2

To find: i) Angle of projection (θ)
ii) Horizontal range of projectile (R)

Formulae: i) y = uy t + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ay t2
ii) R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)

Calculation: Taking vertical upward motion of the projectile from point of projection up to the top of vertical pole we have
uy = 40 sinθ,
From formula (i),
∴ 20.4 = 40 sinθ × 2 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) (-9.8) × 22
∴ 20.4 = 80 sinθ – 19.6
or sinθ = \(\frac{(20.4+19.6)}{80}=\frac{1}{2}\)
or θ = 30°.
From formula (ii),
Horizontal range = \(\frac{40^{2}}{9.8}\) sin 2 × 30°
= 141.4 m
The angle of projection is 30°. The horizontal range of projection is 141.4m

Question 31.
A stone is thrown with an initial velocity components of 20 m/s along the vertical, and 15 m/s along the horizontal direction. Determine the position and velocity of the stone after 3 s. Determine the maximum height that it will reach and the total distance travelled along the horizontal on reaching the ground. (Assume g = 10 m/s2)
Solution:
The initial velocity of the stone in x-direction = u cos θ = 15 m/s and in y-direction = u sin θ = 20 m/s
After 3 s, vx = u cos θ = 15 m/s
vy = u sin θ – gt
= 20 – 10(3)
= -10 m/s
10 m/s downwards.
∴ v = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{v}_{x}^{2}+\mathrm{v}_{\mathrm{y}}^{2}}=\sqrt{15^{2}+10^{2}}=\sqrt{225+100}=\sqrt{325}\)
∴ v = 18.03m/s
tan α = vy/vx = 10/15 = 2/3
∴ α = tan-1 (2/3) = 33° 41’ with the horizontal.
Sx = (u cos θ)t = 15 × 3 = 45m,
Sy = (u sin θ)t – \(\frac{1}{2}\)gt2 = 2o × 3 – 5(3)2
∴ Sy = 15m
The maximum vertical distance travelled is given by,
H = \(\frac{(\mathrm{u} \sin \theta)^{2}}{(2 \mathrm{~g})}=\frac{20^{2}}{(2 \times 10)}\)
∴ H = 20m
Maximum horizontal distance travelled
R = \(\frac{2 \cdot u_{x} \cdot u_{y}}{g}=\frac{2(15)(20)}{10}\) = 60 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 32.
A body is projected with a velocity of 30 ms-1 at an angle of 300 with the vertical.
Find
i) the maximum height
ii) time of flight and
iii) the horizontal range
Solution:
Given:
30 ms-1, θ = 90° – 30° = 60°

To find: i) The maximum height reached (H)
ii) Time of flight (T)
iii) The horizontal range (R)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 26
i) The maximum height reached by the body is 34.44 m.
ii) The time of flight of the body is 5.3 s.
iii) The horizontal range of the body is 79.53 m.

Question 33.
A projectile has a range of 50 m and reaches a maximum height of 10 m. What is the e1eation of the projectile?
Solution:
Given: R = 50m, H = 10 m
To find: Elevation of the projectile (θ)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 27
∴ θ = tan-1 (0.8)
∴ θ = 38.66°
The elevation of the projectile is 38.66°

Question 34.
A bullet fired at an angle of 300 with the horizontal hits the ground 3 km away. By adjusting the angle of projection, can one hope to hit a target 5 km away? Assume the muzzle speed to be fixed and neglect air resistance.
Solution:
R = 3km = 3000m, θ = 30°,
Distance of target R’ = 5km
Horizontal range, R = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{\mathrm{g}}\)
∴ 3000 = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin 60^{\circ}}{\mathrm{g}}\)
∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{~g}}=\frac{3000}{\sin 60^{\circ}}=\frac{3000 \times 2}{\sqrt{3}}\) = 2000\(\sqrt {3}\)
Maximum horizontal range,
Rmax = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{~g}}\) = 2000 \(\sqrt {3}\) m
= 2000 × 1.732 = 3464m = 3.46km
Since R’ > Rmax, Target cannot be hit.

Question 35.
Q.54. A ball is thrown at an angle θ and another ball ¡s thrown at an angle (90° – θ) with the horizontal direction from the same point with velocity 39.2 ms-1. The second ball reaches 50 m higher than the first balL find their individual heights. [Take g = 9.8 ms-2]
Solution:
For the first ball: Angle of projection = θ,
u = 39.2 ms-1
H = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}\)
H = \(\frac{(39.2)^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \times 9.8}\) …………… (i)
For the second ball: Angle of projection
= 90° – θ,
u = 39.2 ms-1,
maximum height reached = (H + 50) m
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 28
or 2H = 78.4 – 50 = 28.4
∴ H = 14.2 m
∴ Height of first ball = H = 14.2 m
Height of second ball = H + 50 = 14.2 + 50 = 64.2 m

i) Height reached by the first ball is 14.2 m.
ii) Height reached by the second ball is 64.2m.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 36.
A body is thrown with a velocity of 49 m/s at an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Find
i) the maximum height attained by it
ii) the time of flight and
iii) the horizontal range.
Solution:
Given: u = 49 m/s. θ = 30°
To find: i) The maximum height attained (H)
ii) The time of flight (T)
iii) The horizontal range (R)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 29
i) The maximum height attained by the body is 30.625 m
ii) The time of flight of the body is 5 s.
iii) The horizontal range of the body is 212.2 m.

Question 37.
A fighter plane flying horizontally at a altitude of 1.5 km with a speed of 720 km/h passes directly overhead an anti-aircraft gun. At what angle from the vertical should the gun be fired for the shell with a muzzle velocity of 600 m/s to hit the plane? At what minimum altitude should the pilot fly to avoid being hit? [Take g = 10 m /s2]
Solution:
Given: h = 1.5 km = 1500 m,
u = 600 m/s,
y = 720 km/h = 720 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 200 m/s

To find: i) Angle of firing (θ)
ii) Minimum altitude (H)

Formula: H = \(\frac{u^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 g}\)

Calculation:
Let the shell hit the plane t seconds after firing,
∴ 600 cos(90 – θ) × t = 200 t
∴ cos(90 – θ) = \(\frac{1}{6}\)
∴ 90° – θ = cos-1(\(\frac{1}{3}\))
cos -1(\(\frac{1}{3}\)) = 90° – θ
∴ 70°28’ = 90° – θ
∴ θ = 90° – cos-1 (\(\frac{1}{3}\))
∴ θ = 19°47’ with vertical
To avoid being hit, the plane must be at a minimum height, i.e., maximum height reached by the shell.
From formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 30
∴ H = 15.9 km

i) Angle made by gun with the vertical is 19°47′.
ii) Minimum altitude at which the pilot should fly is 15.9 km.

Question 38.
A both is thrown with a velocity of 40 m/s in a direction making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. Calculate
i) Horizontal range
ii) Maximum height and
iii) Time taken to reach the maximum height.
Solution:
Given: u = 40 m/s, θ = 30°
To find: i) Horizontal range (R)
ii) Maximum height (Hmax)
iii) Time to reach max. height (tA)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 31
i) Horizontal range of the body is 141.4 m.
ii) Maximum height reached by the body is 20.41 m.
iii) Time taken by the body to reach the maximum height is 2.041 s.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 39.
If a child launches paper plane with a velocity of 6 m/s2 at an angle θ with vertical.
i) What will be the maximum range of the projectile?
ii) What will be the maximum height of the projectile?
iii) Will the plane hit a lady standing at a distance of 6m?
Solution:
i) Range of projectile to given by.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 32
Hmax = 1.63 m
iii) As maximum range of projectile is 6.53 m and lady is standing 6m away, plane will hit the lady.

Question 40.
Explain the term uniform circular motion.
Answer:

  1. The motion of a body along the circumference of a circle with constant speed is called uniform circular motion.
  2. The magnitude of velocity remains constant and its direction is tangential to its circular path.
  3. The acceleration is of constant magnitude and it is perpendicular to the tangential velocity. It is always directed towards the centre of the circular path. This acceleration is called centripetal acceleration.
  4. The centripetal force provides the necessary centripetal acceleration.
  5. Examples of U.C.M:
    • Motion of the earth around the sun.
    • Motion of the moon around the earth.
    • Revolution of electron around the nucleus of atom.

Question 41.
What is meant by period of revolution of U.C.M. Obtain an expression for the period of revolution of a particle performing uniform circular motion.
Answer:
The time taken by a particle performing uniform circular motion to complete one revolution is called as period of revolution. It is denoted by T.

Expression for time period:
During period T, particle covers a distance equal to circumference 2πr of circle with uniform speed v.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 33

Question 42.
For a particle performing uniform circular motion, derive an expression for angular speed and state its unit.
Answer:

  1. Consider an object of mass m, moving with a uniform speed v, along a circle of radius r. Let T be the time period of revolution of the object, i.e., the time taken by the object to complete one revolution or to travel a distance of 2πr.
    Thus, T = 2πr/v
    ∴ Speed, v = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { Time }}=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\) …………….. (1)
  2. During circular motion of a point object, the position vector of the object from centre of the circle is the radius vector r. Its magnitude is radius r and it is directed away from the centre to the particle, i.e., away from the centre of the circle.
  3. As the particle performs UCM, this radius vector describes equal angles in equal intervals of time.
  4. The angular speed gives the angle described by the radius vector.
  5. During one complete revolution, the angle described is 2π and the time taken is period T. Hence, the angular speed ω is given as, ….[From (1)]
    ω = \(\frac{\text { Angle }}{\text { time }}=\frac{2 \pi}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{\left(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{T}}\right)}{\mathrm{r}}\) …………….. [From (1)]
    = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
  6. The unit of angular speed is radian/second.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 43.
Derive an expression for centripetal acceleration of a particle performing uniform circular motion.
Answer:
Expression for centripetal acceleration by calculus method:
i) Suppose a particle is performing U.C.M in anticlockwise direction.
The co-ordinate axes are chosen as shown in the figure.
Let,
A = initial position of the particle which lies on positive X-axis
P = instantaneous position after time t
θ = angle made by radius vector
ω = constant angular speed
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) = instantaneous position vector at time t

ii) From the figure,
\(\vec{r}=\hat{i} x+\hat{j} y\)
where, \(\hat{i}\) and \(\hat{j}\) are unit vectors along X-axis and Y-axis respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 34
iii) Also, x = r cos θ and y = r sin θ
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 35

iv) Velocity of the particle is given as rate of change of position vector.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 36

vi) From equation (1) and (2),
\(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=-\omega^{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\) ……….. (3)
Negative sign shows that direction of acceleration is opposite to the direction of position vector. Equation (3) is the centripetal acceleration.

vii) Magnitude of centripetal acceleration is given by,
a = ω2r

viii) The force providing this acceleration should also be along the same direction, hence centripetal.
∴ \(\overrightarrow{\mathrm{F}}=\mathrm{m} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{a}}=-\mathrm{m} \omega^{2} \overrightarrow{\mathrm{r}}\)
This is the expression for the centripetal force on a particle undergoing uniform circular motion.

ix) Magnitude of F = mω2r = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = mωv

Question 44.
Discuss the factors on which time period of conical pendulum depends.
Answer:
Time period of conical pendulum is given by,
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{\cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}}\) …………. (i)
where, l = length of the string
g = acceleration due to gravity
θ = angle of inclination
From equation (i), it is observed that period of conical pendulum depends on following factors.
i) Length of pendulum (l): Time period of conical pendulum increases with increase in length of pendulum, i.e., T ∝ \(\sqrt {l}\)
ii) Acceleration due to gravity (g): Time period of conical pendulum decreases with increase in g. i.e., T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}\)
iii) Angle of inclination (θ): As θ increases, cos θ decreases, hence, time period of conical pendulum decreases with increase in θ. (For 0 < θ < π) i.e., T ∝ \(\sqrt{\cos \theta}\)

Question 45.
Is there any limitation on semi vertical angle in conical pendulum? Give reason.
Answer:
Yes.

  1. For a conical pendulum, Period T ∝ \(\sqrt{\cos \theta}\)
    ∴ Tension F ∝ \(\frac{1}{\cos \theta}\)
    Speed v ∝ \(\sqrt{\tan \theta}\)
    With increase in angle θ, cos θ decreases and tan θ increases. For θ = 90°, T = 0, F = ∞ and v = ∞ which cannot be possible.
  2. Also, θ depends upon breaking tension of string, and a body tied to a string cannot be resolved in a horizontal circle such that the string is horizontal. Hence, there is limitation of semi vertical angle in conical pendulum.

Solved Examples

Question 46.
An object of mass 50 g moves uniformly along a circular orbit with an angular speed of 5 rad/s. If the linear speed of the particle is 25 m/s, ¡s the radius of the circle? Calculate the centripetal force acting on the particle.
Solution:
Given: ω = 5 rad/s, v = 25 m/s,
m = 50 g = 0.05 kg
To find: radius (r), centipetal force (F)
Formula: i) v = ωr
ii) F = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)

Calculation: From formula (i),
r = v/ω = 25/5 m = 5 m.
From formula (ii),
F = \(\frac{0.05 \times 25^{2}}{5}\) = 6.25 N.

i) Radius of the circle is 5 m.
ii) Centripetal force acting on the particle is 6.25 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 47.
An object is travelling in a horizontal circle with uniform speed. At t = 0, the velocity is given by \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{u}}=20 \hat{\mathbf{i}}+35 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\) km/s. After one minute the velocity becomes \(\overrightarrow{\mathbf{v}}=-20 \hat{\mathbf{i}}-35 \hat{\mathbf{j}}\). What is the magnitude of the acceleration?
Solution:
Magnitude of initial and final velocities,
u= \(\sqrt{(20)^{2}+(35)^{2}}\) m/s
∴ u = \(\sqrt{1625}\) m/s
∴ u = 40.3 m/s
As the velocity reverses in 1 minute, the time period of revolution is 2 minutes.
T = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{u}}\), giving r = \(\frac{\text { uT }}{2 \pi}\)
Now,
a = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}=\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} 2 \pi}{\mathrm{uT}}=\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{u}}{\mathrm{T}}=\frac{2 \times 3.142 \times 40.3}{2 \times 60}\)
= {antilog[log(3.142) + log(40.3) – log(60)]}
= {antilog(0.4972 + 1.6053 – 1.7782)}
= {antilog(0.3243)}
= 2.110.
∴ a = 2.11 m/s2
The magnitude of acceleration is 2.11 m/s2.

Question 48.
A racing car completes 5 rounds of a circular track in 2 minutes. Find the radius of the track if the car has uniform centripetal acceleration of π2/s2.
Solution:
Given: 5 rounds = 2πr(5),
t = 2minutes = 120s
To find: Radius (r)
Formula: acp = ω2r
Calculation: From formula,
acp = ω2r
∴ π2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
But v = \(\frac{2 \pi r(5)}{t}=\frac{10 \pi r}{t}\)
∴ π2 = \(\frac{100 \pi^{2} \mathrm{r}^{2}}{\mathrm{rt}^{2}}\)
∴ r = \(\frac{120 \times 120}{100}\) =144m
The radius of the track is 144 m.

Question 49.
A car of mass 1500 kg rounds a curve of radius 250m at 90 km/hour. Calculate the centripetal force acting on it.
Solution:
Given: m= 1500 kg, r = 250m,
v = 90 km/h = 90 × \(\frac{5}{18}\) = 25m/s
To find: Centripetal force (FCP)
Formula: FCP = \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Calculation: From formula,
FCP = \(\frac{1500 \times(25)^{2}}{250}\)
∴ FCP = 3750 N
The centripetal force acting on the car is 3750 N.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 50.
A one kg mass tied at the end of the string 0.5 m long is whirled ¡n a horizontal circle, the other end of the string being fixed. The breaking tension in the string is 50 N. Find the greatest speed that can be given to the mass.
Solution:
Given: Breaking tension, F = 50 N,
m = 1 kg, r = 0.5m
To find: Maximum speed (vmax)
Formula: B.T (F) = max. C.F \(\frac{m v_{\max }^{2}}{r}\)
Calculation: From formula,
v2max = \(\frac{F \times r}{m}\)
∴ v2max = \(\frac{50 \times 0.5}{1}\)
∴ vmax = \(\sqrt{50 \times 0.5}\) = 5 m/s
The greatest speed that can be given to the mass is 5 m/s.

Question 51.
A mass of 5 kg is tied at the end of a string 1.2 m long revolving in a horizontal circle. If the breaking tension in the string is 300 N, find the maximum number of revolutions per minute the mass can make.
Solution:
Given: Length of the string, r = 1.2 m,
Mass attached. m = 5 kg,
Breaking tension, T = 300 N
To find: Maximum number of revolutions per minute (nmax)
Formula: Tmax = Fmax = mrω2max
Calculation: From formula,
∴ 5 × 1.2 × (2πn)2 = 300
∴ 5 × 1.2 × 4π2n2 = 300
∴ n2max = \(\frac{300}{4 \times(3.142)^{2} \times 6.0}\) = 1.26618
∴nmax = \(\sqrt{1.26618}\) = 1.125 rev/s
∴ nmax = 1.125 × 60
∴ nmax = 67.5 rev/min
The maximum number of revolutions per minute made by the mass is 67.5 rev /min.

Question 52.
A coin placed on a revolving disc, with its centre at a distance of 6 cm from the axis of rotation just slips off when the speed of the revolving disc exceeds 45 r.p.m. What should be the maximum angular speed of the disc, so that when the coin is at a distance of 12 cm from the axis of rotation, it does not slip?
Solution:
Given. r1 = 6cm, r2 = 12cm, n1 = 45 r.p.m
To Find: Maximum angular speed (n2)
Formula: Max. C.F = mrω2
Calculation: Since, mr1ω12 mr2ω22 [As mass is constant]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 37
The maximum angular speed of the disc should be 31.8 r.p.m.

Question 53.
A stone of mass 0.25 kg tied to the end of a string is whirled in a circle of radius 1.5 m with a speed of 40 revolutions/min in a horizontal plane. What is the tension in the string? What is the maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around if the string can withstand a maximum tension of 200 N?
Solution:
Given: m = 0.25 kg, r.= 1.5 m, Tmax = 200 N,
n = 40 rev. min-1 = \(\frac{40}{60}\) rev s-1
To find: i) Tension (T)
ii) Maximum speed (vmax)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 38
i) The tension in the string is 6.55 N.
ii) The maximum speed with which the stone can be whirled around is 34.64 m s-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 54.
In a conical pendulum, a string of length 120 cm is fixed at rigid support and carries a mass of 150 g at its free end. If the mass is revolved in a horizontal circle of radius 0.2 m around a vertical axis, calculate tension in the string. (g = 9.8 m/s2)
Solution:
Given: l = 120 cm = 1.2rn, r = 0.2m,
m = 150 g = 0.15 kg
To find: Tension in the string (T)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 39
∴ Substituting in formula,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 40
Tension in the string is 1.491 N.

Question 55.
A conical pendulum has length 50 cm. Its bob of mass 100 g performs uniform circular motion in horizontal plane, so as to have radius of path 30 cm. Find
i) The angle made by the string with vertical
ii) The tension in the supporting thread and
iii) The speed of bob.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 41
Given: l = 150 cm = 0.5 m, r = 30 cm = 0.3 m,
m = 100 g = 100 × 10-3 kg = 0.1 kg
To find: i) Angle made by the string with vertical (θ)
ii) Tension in the supporting thread (T)
iii) Speed of bob (y)

Formulae: i) tan θ = –\(\frac{r}{\mathrm{~h}}\)
ii) tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}^{2}}{\mathrm{rg}}\)

Calculation: By Pythagoras theorem, l2 = r2 + h2
h2 = l2 – r2
h2 = 0.25 – 0.09 = 0.16
h = 0.4m
i) From formula (1),
tan θ = \(\frac{0.3}{0.4}\) = 0.75
∴ θ = tan-1 (0.75)
θ = 36°52’

ii) The weight of bob is balanced by vertical component of tension T
∴ T cos θ = mg
cos θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{l}=\frac{0.4}{0.5}\) = 0.8
∴ T = \(\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{\cos \theta}=\frac{0.1 \times 9.8}{0.8}\)
∴ T = 1.225 N

iii) From formula (2),
v2 = rg tan θ
∴ v2 = 0.3 × 9.8 × 0.75 = 2.205
∴ v = 1.485 m/s

i) Angle made by the string with vertical is 36°52′. ‘
ii) Tension in the supporting thread is 1.225 N.
iii) Speed of the bob is 1.485 m/s

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 56.
Explain the variation of acceleration, velocity and distance with time for an object under free fall.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 42
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 43

  1. For a free falling object, considering the downward direction as negative, the object is released from rest.
    ∴ initial velocity u = 0 and a = -g = -9.8 m/s2
    ∴ The kinematical equations become,
    v = u + at = 0 – gt = -gt = -9.8t
    s = ut + \(\frac{1}{2}\)at2 = o + \(\frac{1}{2}\)(-g)t2 = –\(\frac{1}{2}\) 9.8t2
    = -4.9t2
    v2 = u2 + 2as = 0 + 2(-g)s
    = -2gs = -2 × 9.8s
    = -19.6s
  2. These equations give the velocity and the distance travelled as a function of time and also the variation of velocity with distance.
  3. The variation of acceleration, velocity and distance with the time is as shown in figure a, b and c respectively.

Question 57.
The position-time (x – t) graphs for two children A and B returning from their school O to their homes P and Q respectively are shown in figure. Choose the correct entries in the brackets below.
i) (A/B) lives closer to the school than (B/A)
ii) (A/B) starts from the school earlier than (B/A)
iii) (A/B) walks faster than (B/A)
iv) A and B reach home at the (same/different) time
v) (A/B) overtakes (B/A) on the road (once/twice)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 44
Answer:

  1. A lives closer to the school than B. This is because, OQ > OP, hence B has to cover larger distance than A.
  2. A starts from the school earlier than B. This is because, A starts at t = 0 whereas B starts at some finite time greater than zero.
  3. As slope of B is greater than that of A, hence B walks faster than A. iv. A and B reach home at different times.
  4. This is because the value of ‘t’ corresponding to P and Q for A and B respectively is different.
  5. B overtakes A on the road once. This is because A and B meet each other only once on their way back home. As B starts from school later than A and walks faster than A, hence B overtakes A once on his way home.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 58.
A bowler throws the ball up to correct distance by controlling his velocity and angle of throw, as shown in the figure given below
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 45
i) What will be the range of the projectile?
ii) What will be the height of the projectile from ground?
Answer:

  1. Range of projectile is given by,
    R = \(\frac{u^{2} \sin 2 \theta}{g}=\frac{6^{2} \times \sin (2 \times 30)}{9.8}\)
    R = 3.18 m
  2. Height of projectile is given by,
    H = \(\frac{\mathrm{u}^{2} \sin ^{2} \theta}{2 \mathrm{~g}}=\frac{6^{2} \times \sin ^{2} 30}{2 \times 9.8}\) = 0.46m
    Height achieved by ball from ground is
    H = 0.46 + 1 = 1.46m

i) The range of the projectile is 3.18 m.
ii) The height of the projectile is 1.46 m.

Question 59.
A child takes reading of two cars running on highway, for his school project. He draws a position-time graph of the two cars as shown in the figure
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 46
i) What is the velocity of two cars when they meet together?
ii) What is the difference in velocities of the two cars when they cover their maximum distance?
iii) What will be acceleration of the two cars in first 20 s?
Solution:
i) According to graph, the velocity of two cars when they meet each other are,
x = 70m
t = 308
v = \(\frac{x}{t}=\frac{70}{30}\) = 2.33 m/s

ii) According to graph, for maximum distance.
For 1st car,
x1 = 120m
t1 = 50 s
v1 = \(\frac{x_{1}}{t_{1}}=\frac{120}{50}\)
v1 = 2.4 m/s

For 2nd car,
x2 = 90 m
t2 = 60 s
v2 = \(\frac{x_{2}}{t_{2}}=\frac{90}{60}\)
v2 = 1.5 m/s
Difference in velocities is given by,
v1 – v2 = 2.4 – 1.5 = 0.9 m/s

iii) According to graph,
Acceleration of 1st car in first 20 s
v1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
v1 = \(\frac{60}{20}\)
v1 = 3 m/s
a1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{3}{20}\)
a1 = 0.15 m/s2
Acceleration of 2nd car in first 20 s
v2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}}\)
v2 = \(\frac{40}{20}\)
v2 = 2 m/s
a2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}_{2}}{\mathrm{t}}=\frac{2}{20}\)
a2 = 0.1 m/s2
Now,
a1 – a2 = 0.15 – 0.1
= 0.05 m/s2

i) The velocity of two cars when they meet together is 2.33 m/s.
ii) The difference in velocities of two cars when they cover maximum distance is 0.9 m/s.
iii) The accelerator of two cars in 20 s is 0.05 m/s2.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 60.
The speed of a projectile u reduces by 50% on reaching maximum height. What is the range on the horizontal plane?
Solution:
If θ is the angle of projection, then velocity of projectile at height point = u cos θ
u cos θ = \(\frac{50}{100}\) u = \(\frac{1}{2}\) u
or cos θ = \(\frac{1}{2}\) cos 60°
or θ = 60°
Horizontal range,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 47

Question 61.
In projectile motion, vertical motion and horizontal motion are dependent of each other. Yes or No? Justify your answer.
Answer:
No. In projectile motion, the horizontal and vertical motion are independent of each other because both motions don’t affect each other.

Question 62.
In angular projection of a projectile, at highest point, what will be the components of horizontal and vertical velocities?
Answer:
At highest point of angular projection of a projectile, the horizontal component of its velocity is non zero and the vertical component of its velocity is momentarily zero.

Question 63.
What angle will be described between velocity and acceleration at highest point of projectile path?
Answer:
At highest point of projectile path, the angle between velocity and acceleration is 90°.

Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 48
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 49
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 50

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The velocity-time relation of a particle starting from rest is given by v = kt where k = 2 m/s2. The distance travelled in 3 sec is
(A) 9 m
(B) 16 m
(C) 27 m
(D) 36 m
Answer:
(A) 9 m

Question 2.
If the particle is at rest, then the x – t graph can be only
(A) parallel to position – axis
(B) parallel to time – axis
(C) inclined with acute angle
(D) inclined with obtuse angle
Answer:
(B) parallel to time – axis

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 3.
A body is thrown vertically upwards, maximum height is reached, then it will have
(A) zero velocity and zero acceleration.
(B) zero velocity and finite acceleration.
(C) finite velocity and zero acceleration.
(D) finite velocity and finite acceleration.
Answer:
(B) zero velocity and finite acceleration.

Question 4.
Which of the following is NOT a projectile?
(A) A bullet fired from gun.
(B) A shell fired from cannon.
(C) A hammer thrown by athlete.
(D) An aeroplane in flight.
Answer:
(D) An aeroplane in flight.

Question 5.
The range of projectile is 1 .5 km when it is projected at an angle of 15° with horizontal. What will be its range when it is projected at an angle of 45° with the horizontal?
(A) 0.75 km
(B) 1.5 km
(C) 3 km
(D) 6 km
Answer:
(C) 3 km

Question 6.
Which of the following remains constant for a projectile fired from the earth?
(A) Momentum
(B) Kinetic energy
(C) Vertical component of velocity
(D) Horizontal component of velocity
Answer:
(D) Horizontal component of velocity

Question 7.
In case of a projectile, what is the angle between the instantaneous velocity and acceleration at the highest point?
(A) 45°
(B) 1800
(C) 90°
(D) 0°
Answer:
(C) 90°

Question 8.
A player kicks up a ball at an angle θ with the horizontal. The horizontal range is maximum when θ is equal to
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 90°
Answer:
(B) 45°

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
The greatest height to which a man can throw a stone is h. The greatest distance to which he can throw it will be
(A) h/2
(B) 2h
(C) h
(D) 3h
Answer:
(B) 2h

Question 10.
Two balls are projected at an angle θ and (90° – θ) to the horizontal with the same speed. The ratio of their maximum vertical
heights is
(A) 1 : 1
(B) tan θ : 1
(C) 1 : tan θ
(D) tan2 θ : 1
Answer:
(D) tan2 θ : 1

Question 11.
When air resistance is taken into account while dealing with the motion of the projectile, to achieve maximum horizontal range, the angle of projection should be,
(A) equal to 45°
(B) less than 45°
(C) greater than 90°
(D) greater than 45°
Answer:
(D) greater than 45°

Question 12.
The maximum height attained by projectile is found to be equal to 0.433 of the horizontal range. The angle of projection of this projectile is
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 75°
Answer:
(C) 60°

Question 13.
A projectile is thrown with an initial velocity of 50 m/s. The maximum horizontal distance which this projectile can travel is
(A) 64m
(B) 128m
(C) 5m
(D) 255m
Answer:
(D) 255m

Question 14.
A jet airplane travelling at the speed of 500 kmh-1 ejects the burnt gases at the speed of 1400 kmh-1 relative to the jet airplane. The speed of burnt gases relative to stationary observer on the earth is
(A) 2.8 kmh-1
(B) 190 kmh-1
(C) 700 kmh-1
(D) 900 kmh-1
Answer:
(D) 900 kmh-1

Question 15.
A projectile projected with certain angle reaches ground with
(A) double angle
(B) same angle
(C) greater than 90°
(D) angle between 90° and 180°
Answer:
(B) same angle

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 16.
The time period of conical pendulum is _________.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 51
Answer:
(C) \(2 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{\mathrm{g}}}\)

Question 17.
A projectile projected with certain velocity reaches ground with (magnitude)
(A) zero velocity
(B) smaller velocity
(C) same velocity
(D) greater velocity
Answer:
(C) same velocity

Question 18.
The period of a conical pendulum in terms of its length (l), semivertical angle (θ) and acceleration due to gravity (g) is:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 52
Answer:
(C) \(4 \pi \sqrt{\frac{l \cos \theta}{4 \mathrm{~g}}}\)

Question 19.
Consider a simple pendulum of length 1 m. Its bob performs a circular motion in horizontal plane with its string making an angle 600 with the vertical. The period of rotation of the bob is(Take g = 10 m/s2)
(A) 2s
(B) 1.4s
(C) 1.98 s
(D) none of these
Answer:
(B) 1.4s

Question 20.
The period of a conical pendulum is
(A) equal to that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(B) more than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(C) less than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.
(D) independent of length of pendulum.
Answer:
(C) less than that of a simple pendulum of same length l.

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
Two particles A and B are moving in uniform circular motion in concentric circles of radii rA and rB with speed vA and vB respectively. Their time period of rotation is the same. The ratio of angular speed of A to that of B will be:
(A) rB : rA
(B) 1 : 1
(C) rA : rB
(D) vA : vB
Answer:
(B) 1 : 1
Hint:
Time period of rotation (A and B) is same
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 53

Question 2.
When an object is shot from the bottom of a long smooth inclined plane kept at an angle 60° with horizontal, it can travel a distance x1 along the plane. But when the inclination is decreased to 30° and the same object is shot with the same velocity, it can travel x2 distance. Then x1 : x2 will be:
(A) 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)
(B) 1 : 2\(\sqrt {3}\)
(C) 1 : \(\sqrt {2}\)
(D) \(\sqrt {3}\) : 1
Answer:
(A) 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)
Hint:
v2 = u2 + 2as
∴ v2 = u2 + 2 g sin θ x
sin θ. x = constant
∴ x ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta}\)
∴ \(\frac{x_{1}}{x_{2}}=\frac{\sin \theta_{2}}{\sin \theta_{1}}=\frac{1 / 2}{\sqrt{3} / 2}\) = 1 : \(\sqrt {3}\)

Question 3.
A person travelling in a straight line moves with a constant velocity v1 for certain distance x’ and with a constant velocity v2 for next equal distance. The average velocity y is given by the relation
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 54
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{2}{v}=\frac{1}{v_{1}}+\frac{1}{v_{2}}\)
Hint:
Let, t’ be the time taken to travel distance ‘x’ with constant velocity ‘v1
∴ t1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\)
Let ‘t2’ be the time taken to travel equal distance ‘x’ with constant velocity ‘v2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 55

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 4.
Two bullets are fired horizontally and simultaneously towards each other from roof tops of two buildings 100 m apart and of same height of 200 m, with the same velocity of 25 m/s. When and where will the two bullets collide? (g = 10 m/s2)
(A) They will not collide
(B) After 2 s at a height of 180 m
(C) After 2 s at a height of 20 m
(D) After 4 s at a height of 120 m
Answer:
(B) After 2 s at a height of 180 m
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 56
Let the bullets collide at time t
The horizontal displacement x1 and x2 is given by the equation
x1 = ut and x2 = ut
∴ x1 + x2 = 100
∴ 25t + 25t = 100
∴ t = 2s
Vertical displacement ‘y’ is given by
y = \(\frac{1}{2}\) gt2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 10 × 22 = 20m
∴ h = 200 – 20= 180m

Question 5.
A toy car with charge q moves on a frictionless horizontal plane surface under the influence of a uniform electric field \(\vec{E}\). Due to the force q\(\vec{E}\), its velocity increases from 0 to 6 m/s in one second duration. At that instant the direction of the field is reversed. The car continues to move for two more seconds under the influence of this field. The average velocity and the average speed of the toy car between 0 to 3 seconds are respectively
(A) 2 m/s, 4 m/s
(B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
(C) 1 m/s, 3.5 m/s
(D) 1.5 m/s, 3 m/s
Answer:
(B) 1 m/s, 3 m/s
Hint:
Car at rest attains velocity of 6 m/s in t1 = 1 s.
Now as direction of field is reversed, velocity of car will reduce to 0 m/s in next 1 s. i.e., at t2 = 2 s. But, it continues to move for next one second. This will give velocity of -6 m/s to car at t3 = 3 s.
Using this data, plot of velocity versus time will be
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 57

Question 6.
All the graphs below are intended to represent the same motion. One of them does it incorrectly. Pick it up.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 58
Answer:
(D)
Hint:
The graphs (A), (B) and (C) represent the uniformly retarded motion, i.e., velocity decreases uniformly. However, the slope of the curve in graph (D), indicates increasing velocity. Hence, graph (D) is incorrect.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 7.
A particle is moving with a uniform speed in a circular orbit of radius R in a central force inversely proportional to the nth power of R. If the period of rotation of the particle is T, then:
(A) T ∝ R(n+1)/2
(B) T ∝ Rn/2
(C) T ∝ R3/2 for any n
(D) T ∝ R\(\frac{n}{2}\)+1
Answer:
(A) T ∝ R(n+1)/2
Hint:
The centripetal force acting on the particle is provided by the central force,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 59

Question 8.
Preeti reached the metro station and found that the escalator was not working. She walked up the stationary escalator in time t1. On other days, if she remains stationary on the moving escalator, then the escalator takes her up in time t2. The time taken by her to walk up on the moving escalator will be:
(A) \(\frac{\mathrm{t}_{1}+\mathrm{t}_{2}}{2}\)
(B) \(\frac{t_{1} t_{2}}{t_{2}-t_{1}}\)
(C) \(\frac{\mathbf{t}_{1} t_{2}}{\mathbf{t}_{2}+t_{1}}\)
(D) t1 – t2
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{\mathbf{t}_{1} t_{2}}{\mathbf{t}_{2}+t_{1}}\)
Hint:
Let velocity of Preeti be v1, velocity of escalator be v2 and distance travelled be L.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 60

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane

Question 9.
A body is thrown vertically upwards. Which one of the following graphs correctly represent the velocity vs time?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 3 Motion in a Plane 61
Answer:
(A)
Hint:
If a body is projected in vertically upward direction, then its acceleration is constant and negative. If direction of motion is positive i.e.. vertically up) and initial position of body is taken as origin, then the velocity decreases uniformly. At highest point its velocity is equal to zero and then it accelerates uniformly downwards returning to its reference position.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 11th Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 1.
What is a measurement? How is measured quantity expressed?
Answer:

  1. A measurement is a comparison with internationally accepted standard measuring unit.
  2. The measured quantity (M) is expressed in terms of a number (n) followed by a corresponding unit (u) i.e., M = nu.

Example:
Length of a wire when expressed as 2 m, it means value of length is 2 in the unit of m (metre).

Question 2.
State true or false. If false correct the statement and rewrite. Different quantities are measured in different units.
Answer: True.
[Note: Choice of unit depends upon its suitability for measuring the magnitude of a physical quantity under consideration. Hence, we choose different scales for same physical quantity.]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 3.
Describe briefly different types of systems of units.
Answer:
System of units are classified mainly into four types:

  1. C.G.S. system:
    It stands for Centimetre-Gram-Second system. In this system, length, mass and time are measured in centimetre, gram and second respectively.
  2. M.K.S. system:
    It stands for Metre-Kilogram-Second system. In this system, length, mass and time are measured in metre, kilogram and second respectively.
  3. F.P.S. system:
    It stands for Foot-Pound-Second system. In this system, length, mass and time are measured in foot, pound and second respectively.
  4. S.I. system:
    It stands for System International. This system has replaced all other systems mentioned above. It has been internationally accepted and is being used all over world. As the SI units use decimal system, conversion within the system is very simple and convenient.

Question 4.
What are fundamental quantities? State two examples of fundamental quantities. Write their S.J. and C.G.S. units.
Answer:
Fundamental quantities:
The physical quantities which do not depend on any other physical quantity for their measurements i.e., they can be directly measured are called fundamental quantities.
Examples: mass, length etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 1

Question 5.
What are fundamental units? State the S.l. units of seven fundamental quantities.
Answer:
Fundamental units:
The units used to measure fundamental quantities are called fundamental units.
S.I. Units of fundamental quantities:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 2

Question 6.
State and describe the two supplementary units.
Answer:
The two supplementary units are:
i) Plane angle (dθ):
a. The ratio of kngth of arc (ds) of an circle to the radius (r) of the circle is called as Plane angle (dθ)
i.e., dθ = \(\frac{\mathrm{ds}}{\mathrm{r}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 3
b. Thus, dθ is angle subtended by the arc at the centre of the circle.
c. Unit: radian (rad)
d. Denoted as θc
e. Length of arc of circle = Circumference of circle = 2πr.
∴ plane angle subtended by entire circle at its centre is θ = \(\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{r}}{\mathrm{r}}\) = 2πc

ii) Solid angle (dΩ):
a. solid angle is 3-dimensional analogue of plane angle.
b. Solid angle is defined as area of a portion of surface of a sphere to the square of radius of the sphere.
i.e., dΩ = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 4
c. Unit: Steradian (sr)
d. Denoted as (Ω)
e. Surface area of sphere = 4πr2
∴ solid angle subtended by entire sphere at its centre is Ω = \(\frac{4 \pi r^{2}}{r^{2}}\) = 4π sr

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 7.
Derive the relation between radian and degree. Also find out 1” and 1’ in terms of their respective values in radian. (Take π = 3.1416)
Answer:
We know that, 2 πc = 360°
∴ πc = 180°
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 5

Question 8.
What are derived quantities and derived units? State two examples. State the corresponding S.L. and C.G.S. units of the examples.
Answer:

  1. Derived quantities: Physical qUantities other than fundamental quantities which depend on one or more fundamental quantities for their measurements are called derived quantities.
  2. Derived units: The units of derived quantities which are expressed in terms of fundamental units for their measurements are called derived units.
  3. Examples and units:
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 6

Question 9.
Classify the following quantities into fundamental and derived quantities: Length, Velocity, Area, Electric current, Acceleration, Time, Force, Momentum, Energy, Temperature, Mass, Pressure, Magnetic induction, Density.
Answer:
Fundamental Quantities: Length, Electric current, Time, Temperature, Mass.

Derived Quantities: Velocity, Area, Acceleration, Force, Momentum, Energy. Pressure, Magnetic induction, Density

Question 10.
Classify the following units into fundamental, supplementary and derived units:
newton, metre, candela, radian, hertz. square metre, tesla, ampere, kelvin, volt, mol, coulomb, farad, steradian.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 7

Question 11.
List the conventions followed while using SI units.
Answer:
Following conventions should be followed while writing S.I. units of physical quantities:

  1. Unit of every physical quantity should be represented by its symbol.
  2. Full name of a unit always starts with smaller letter even if it is named after a person, eg.: 1 newton, 1 joule, etc. But symbol for unit named after a person should be in capital letter, eg.: N after scientist Newton, J after scientist Joule, etc.
  3. Symbols for units do not take plural form.
  4. Symbols for units do not contain any full stops at the end of recommended letter.
  5. The units of physical quantities in numerator and denominator should be written as one ratio. For example the SI unit of acceleration is m/s2 or m s-2 but not m/s/s.
  6. Use of combination of units and symbols for units is avoided when physical quantity is expressed by combination of two. For example, The unit J/kg K is correct while joule/kg K is not correct.
  7. A prefix symbol is used before the symbol of the unit.
    • a. Prefix symbol and symbol of unit constitute a new symbol for the unit which can be raised to a positive or negative power of 10.
      For example,
      1 ms = 1 millisecond = 10-3 s
      1 μs = 1 microsecond = 10-6 s
      1 ns = 1 nanosecond = 10-9 s
    • b. Use of double prefixes is avoided when single prefix is available
      10-6 s = 1 μs and not 1 mms
      10-9 s = 1 ns and not 1 mμs
  8. Space or hyphen must be introduced while indicating multiplication of two units e.g., m/s should be written as m s-1 or m-s-1.

Solved Examples

Question 12.
What is the solid angle subtended by the moon at any point of the Earth, given the diameter of the moon is 3474 km and its distance from the Earth 3.84 × 108 m?
Solution:
Given: Diameter (D) = 3474 km
∴ Radius of moon (R) = 1737 km
= 1.737 × 106 m
Distance from Earth r = 3.84 × 108 m
To find: Solid angle (dΩ)
Formula: dΩ = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\)

Calculation:
From formula,
dΩ = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{R}^{2}}{\mathrm{r}^{2}}\) ……..( cross-sectional area of disc of moon = πR2)
dΩ = \(\frac{\pi \times\left(1.737 \times 10^{5}\right)^{2}}{\left(3.84 \times 10^{8}\right)^{2}}\)
= \(\frac{3.412 \times(1.737)^{2} \times 10^{10}}{(3.84)^{2} \times 10^{16}}\)
= antilog{log(3.142) + 2log(1.737) – 2log(3.84)} × 10-6
= antilog {0.4972 + 2(0.2397) – 2(0.5843)} × 10-6
= antilog{0.4972 + 0.4794 – 1.1686} × 10-6
= antilog{\(\overline{1}\) .8080} × 10-6
= 6.428 × 10-1 × 10-6
= 6.43 × 10-5 sr
Solid angle subtended by moon at Earth is 6.43 × 10-5 sr
[Note: Above answer is obtained substituting value of r as 3.142]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 13.
Pluto has mean diameter of 2,300 km and very eccentric orbit (oval shaped) around the Sun, with a perihelion (nearest) distance of 4.4 × 109 km and an aphelion (farthest) distance of 7.3 × 109 km. What are the respective solid angles subtended by Pluto from Earth’s perspective? Assume that distance from the Sun can be neglected.
Solution:
Given: Radius of Pluto. R = \(\frac{2300}{2}\) km
= 1150km
Perihelion distance rp = 4.4 × 109 km
Aphelion distance ra = 7.3 × 109 km
To find: Solid angles (dΩp and dΩa)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 8
Solid angle at perihelion distance is 2.146 × 10-13 sr and at aphelion distance is 7.798 × 10-14 sr.

Question 14.
Define a metre.
Answer:
The metre is the length of the path travelled by light in vacuum during a time interval of 1/299, 792, 458 of a second.
Answer:

Question 15.
What ¡s parallax?
Answer:

  1. Parallax is defined as the apparent change in position of an object due to a change in position of an observer.
  2. Explanation: When a pencil is held in front of our eyes and we look at it once with our left eye closed and then with our right eye closed, pencil appears to move against the background. This effect is called parallax effect.

Question 16.
What is parallax angle?
Answer:
i) Angle between the two directions along which a star or planet is viewed at the two points of observation is called parallax angle (parallactic angle).
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 9
ii) It is given by θ = \(\frac{b}{D}\)
where, b = Separation between two points of observation.
D = Distance of source from any point of observation.

Question 17.
Explain the method to determine distance of a planet from the Earth.
Answer:

  1. Parallax method is used to determine distance of different planets from the Earth.
  2. To measure the distance ‘D’ of a far distant planet S, select two different observatories (E1 and E2).
  3. The planet should be visible from E1 and E2 observatories simultaneously i.e. at the same time.
  4. E1 and E2 are separated by distance ‘b’ shown in figure.
    ∴ E1E3 = b
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 10
  5. The angle between the two directions along which the planet is viewed, can be measured. It is parallax angle, which in this case is L ∠E1E2 = θ
  6. The planet is far away from the (Earth) observers, hence
    b < <D
    ∴ \(\frac{b}{D}\) < < 1 and ‘θ’ is also very small.
    Hence, E1E2 can be considered as arc of length b of circle with S as centre and D as radius.
    :. E1S = E2S = D
    ∴ θ = \(\frac{b}{D}\) . . . .(θ is taken in radian)
    ∴ D = \(\frac{b}{\theta}\)
    Thus, the distance ‘D’ of a far away planet ‘S’ can be determined using the parallax method.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 18.
Explain how parallax method is used to measure distance of a star from Earth.
Answer:

  1. The parallax measured from two farthest distance points on Earth for stars will be too small and hence cannot be measured.
  2. Instead, parallax between two farthest points (i.e., 2 ΔU apart) along the orbit of Earth around the Sun (s) is measured.
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 11

Question 19.
Explain how size of a planet or star is measured.
Answer:

  1. To determine the diameter (d) of a planet or star, two diametrically opposite points of the planet are viewed from the same observatory.
  2. If d is diameter of planet or star, angle subtended by it at any single point on the Earth is called angular diameter of planet.
  3. Let angle α be angle between these two directions.
  4. If distance between the Earth and planet or star (D) is known, α = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{D}}\)
  5. This relation gives, d = α D
    Thus, diameter (d) of planet or star can be determined.

Question 20.
Name the devices used to measure very small distances such as atomic size.
Answer:
Devices used are:
Electron microscope, tunnelling electron microscope.

Question 21.
Just as large distances are measured in AU, parsec or light year, atomic or nuclear distances are measured with the help of microscopic units. Match the units given in column A with their corresponding SI unit given in column B.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 39
Answer:
i. – (b)
ii. – (a)

Solved Examples

Question 22.
A star is 5.5 light years away from the Earth. How much parallax in arcsec will it subtend when viewed from two opposite points along the orbit of the Earth?
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 12
Solution:
Two opposite points-A and B along the orbit of the Earth are 2 AU apart. The angle subtended by AB at the position of the star is
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 13
= antilog{log(2.992) – log(5.5) – log(9.46)} × 10-4
= antilog {0.4761 – 0.7404 – 0.9759} × 10-4
= antilog {\(\overline{2}\).7598} × 10-4
= 5.751 × 10-2 × 10-4
= 5.75 × 10-6
= 5.75 × 10-6 rad
= 5.75 × 10-6 × 57.297 × 60 × 60 arcsec
…. (converting radian into arcsecond)
= 1.186 arcsec
Parallax is 1.186 arcsec

Question 23.
The moon is at a distance of 3.84 × 108 m from the Earth. If viewed from two diametrically opposite points on the Earth, the angle subtended at the moon is 1° 54′. What is the diameter of the Earth?
Solution:
Given
Distance (D) = 3.84 × 108 m
Subtended angle (α)
= 1° 54′ = (60’+ 54′)= 114′
= 114 × 2.91 × 10-4 rad
= 3.317 × 10-2 rad
To find: Diameter of Earth (d)
Formula: d = αD
Calculation: From formula,
d = 3.317 × 10-2 × 3.84 × 108
= 1.274 × 107 m
Diameter of Earth is 1.274 × 107 m.

Question 24.
Explain the method to measure mass.
Answer:
Method for measurement of mass:

  1. Mass, until recently, was measured with a standard mass of the international prototype of the kilogram (a platinum-iridium alloy cylinder) kept at international Bureau of Weights and Measures, at Serves, near Paris, France.
  2. As platinum – iridium piece was seen to pick up microparticles and found to be affected by atmosphere, its mass could no longer be treated as constant.
  3. Hence, a new definition of mass was introduced in terms of electric current on 20th May 2019.
  4. Now, one kilogram mass is described in terms of amount of current which has to be passed through electromagnet to pull one side of extremely sensitive balance to balance the other side which holds one standard kg mass.
  5. To measure mass of small entities such as atoms and nucleus, atomic mass unit (amu) is used.
    It is defined as (\(\frac{1}{12}\))th mass of an unexcited atom of carbon -12(C12).
    1 amu ≈ 1.66 × 10-27 kg.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 25.
That can he the reason for choosing Carbon-12 to define atomic mass unit?
Answer:

  1. Unlike oxygen and hydrogen, which exhibit various isotopes in higher proportions, carbon- 12 is the single most abundant (98% of available carbon) isotope of carbon.
  2. it is also very stable.
    Hence, it makes more accurate unit of measuring mass and is used to define atomic mass unit.

Question 26.
Define mean solar day. Explain the method for measurement of time.
Answer:

  1. A mean solar day is the average time interval from one noon to the next noon.
    Method for measurement of time:
  2. The unit of time, the second, was considered to be \(\frac{1}{86400}\) of the mean solar day, where a mean solar day = 24 hours
    = 24 × 60 × 60
    = 86400 s
  3. However, this definition proved to be unsatisfactory to define the unit of time precisely because solar day varies gradually due to gradual slowing down of the Earth’s rotation. Hence, the definition of second was replaced by one based on atomic standard of time.
  4. Atomic standard of time is now used for the measurement of time. In atomic standard of time, periodic vibrations of caesium atom is used.
  5. One second is time required for 9,192.631,770 vibrations of the radiation corresponding to transition between two hyperfine energy states of caesium-133 (Cs- 133) atom.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 27.
Define dimensions and dimensional formula of physical quantities. Give few examples of dimensional formula.
Answer:

  1. Dimensions:
    The dimensions of a physical quantity are the powers to which the fundamental units must be raised in order to obtain the unit of a given physical quantity.
  2. Dimensional formula:
    When any derived quantity is represented with appropriate powers of symbols of the fundamental quantities, SUCh an expression is called dimensional formula.
    It is expressed by square bracket with no comma in between the symbols.
  3. Examples of dimensional formula:
    a. Speed = \(\frac{\text { Distance }}{\text { time }}\)
    ∴ Dimensions of speed = \(\frac{[\mathrm{L}]}{[\mathrm{T}]}\) = [L1M0T-1]
    [Note: As power of M is zero, it can be omitted from dimensional formula. Therefore, dimensions of speed can be written as [L1T1]
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 14

Question 28.
A book with many printing errors contains four different formulae for the displacement y of a particle undergoing a certain periodic function:
i) y = a sin \(\frac{2 \pi t}{T}\)
ii) y = a sin v t
iii) y = \(\frac{\mathrm{a}}{\mathbf{T}} \sin \frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{a}}\)
iv) y = \(\frac{a}{\sqrt{2}}\left[\sin \frac{2 \pi t}{T}+\cos \frac{2 \pi t}{T}\right]\)
Here, a is maximum displacement of particle, y ¡s speed of particle, T is time period of motion. Rule out the wrong formulae on dimensional grounds.
Answer:
The argument of trigonometrical function, i.e., angle is dimensionless. Now,
i) The argument, \(\left[\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}\right]=\frac{[\mathrm{T}]}{[\mathrm{T}]}\) = 1 = [L0M0T0]
which is a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (i) is correct.

ii) The argument,
[vt] = [LT-1] [T] = [L] = [L1M0T0]
which is not a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (ii) is incorrect.

iii) The argument,
\(\left[\frac{\mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{a}}\right]=\frac{[\mathrm{T}]}{[\mathrm{L}]}\) = [L-1M0T1]
which is not a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (iii) is incorrect.

iv) The argument,
\(\left[\frac{2 \pi \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{T}}\right]=\frac{[\mathrm{T}]}{[\mathrm{T}]}\) = 1 = [L0M0T0]
which is a dimensionless quantity.
Hence, formula (iv) is correct.

Question 29.
State principle of homogeneity of dimensions.
Answer:
Principle of homogeneity of dimensions: The dimensions of all the terms on the two sides of a physical equation relating different physical quantities must be same.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 30.
State the uses of dimensional analysis.
Answer:
Uses of dimensional analysis:

To check the correctness of a physical equation.
Correctness of a physical equation by dimensional analysis:

  1. A physical equation is correct only if the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of that equations are the same.
  2. For example, consider the equation of motion.
    v = u + at ……………. (1)
  3. Writing the dimensional formula of every term, we get
    Dimensions of LH.S. [v] [L1M0T-1],
    Dimensions of R.H.S. = [u] + [at]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-2] [L1M0T-1]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-1]
    ⇒ [L.HS.] = [R.H.S.]
  4. As dimensions of both side of equation is same, physical equation is dimensionally correct.

To derive the relationship between related physical quantities.
Expression for time period of a simple pendulum by dimensional analysis:

  1. Time period (T) of a simple pendulum depends upon length (l) and acceleration due to gravity (g) as follows:
    T ∝ la gb
    i.e., T = k la gb ………… (1)
    where, k = proportionality constant, which is dimensionless.
  2. The dimensions of T = [L0M0T1)
    The dimensions of l = [L1M0T0]
    The dimensions of g = [L1M0T2]
    Taking dimensions on both sides of equation (1),
    [L0M0T1] = [L1M0T0]a [L1M0T-2]b
    [L0M0T1] = [La+bM0T-2b]
  3. Equating corresponding power of L, M and T on both sides, we get
    a + b = 0 …………. (2)
    and -2b = 1
    ∴ b = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)
  4. Substituting ‘b’ in equation (2), we get
    a = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
  5. Substituting values of a and b in equation (1),
    we have,
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 15
  6. Experimentally, it ¡s found that k = 2π
    ∴ T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
    This is the required expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

To find the conversion factor between the units of the same physical quantity in two different systems of units.
Conversion factor between units of same physical quantity:

  1. let ‘n’ be the conversion factor between the units of work.
    ∴ 1 J = n erg ………….. (1)
  2. Dimensions of work in S.l. system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{\prime} \mathrm{T}_{1}^{-2}\right]\) and in CGS system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
  3. From (1),
    \(1\left[\mathrm{~L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{1}^{-2}\right]=\mathrm{n}\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 16
    n= 104 × 103 × 1 = 107
    Hence, the conversion factor, n = 107
    There fore, from equation (1), we have,
    ∴ 1 J = 107 erg.

Question 31.
Explain the use of dimensional analysis to check the correctness of a physical equation.
Answer:
Correctness of a physical equation by dimensional analysis:

  1. A physical equation is correct only if the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of that equations are the same.
  2. For example, consider the equation of motion.
    v = u + at ……………. (1)
  3. Writing the dimensional formula of every term, we get
    Dimensions of LH.S. [v] [L1M0T-1],
    Dimensions of R.H.S. = [u] + [at]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-2] [L1M0T-1]
    = [L1M0T-1] + [L1M0T-1]
    ⇒ [L.HS.] = [R.H.S.]
  4. As dimensions of both side of equation is same, physical equation is dimensionally correct.

Question 32.
Time period of a simple pendulum depends upon the length of pendulum (l) and acceleration due to gravity (g). Using dimensional analysis, obtain an expression for time period of a simple pendulum.
Answer:
Expression for time period of a simple pendulum by dimensional analysis:
i) Time period (T) of a simple pendulum depends upon length (l) and acceleration due to gravity (g) as follows:
T ∝ la gb
i.e., T = k la gb ………… (1)
where, k = proportionality constant, which is dimensionless.

ii) The dimensions of T = [L0M0T1)
The dimensions of l = [L1M0T0]
The dimensions of g = [L1M0T2]
Taking dimensions on both sides of equation (1),
[L0M0T1] = [L1M0T0]a [L1M0T-2]b
[L0M0T1] = [La+bM0T-2b]

iii) Equating corresponding power of L, M and T
on both sides, we get
a + b = 0 …………. (2)
and -2b = 1
∴ b = –\(\frac{1}{2}\)

iv) Substituting ‘b’ in equation (2), we get
a = \(\frac{1}{2}\)

v) Substituting values of a and b in equation (1),
we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 15

vi) Experimentally, it ¡s found that k = 2π
∴ T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{\mathrm{~g}}}\)
This is the required expression for time period of a simple pendulum.

Question 33.
Find the conversion factor between the S.I. and the C.OES. units of work using dimensional analysis.
Answer:
Conversion factor between units of same physical quantity:

  1. let ‘n’ be the conversion factor between the units of work.
    ∴ 1 J = n erg ………….. (1)
  2. Dimensions of work in S.l. system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{\prime} \mathrm{T}_{1}^{-2}\right]\) and in CGS system are \(\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
  3. From (1),
    \(1\left[\mathrm{~L}_{1}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{1}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{1}^{-2}\right]=\mathrm{n}\left[\mathrm{L}_{2}^{2} \mathrm{M}_{2}^{1} \mathrm{~T}_{2}^{-2}\right]\)
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 16
    n= 104 × 103 × 1 = 107
    Hence, the conversion factor, n = 107
    There fore, from equation (1), we have,
    ∴ 1 J = 107 erg.

Question 34.
State the limitations of dimensional analysis.
Answer:
Limitations of dimensional analysis:

  • The value of dimensionless constant can be obtained with the help of experiments only.
  • Dimensional analysis cannot be used to derive relations involving trigonometric (sin θ, cos θ, etc.), exponential (ex, ex2, etc.), and logarithmic functions (log x, log x3, etc) as these quantities are dimensionless.
  • This method is not useful if constant of proportionality is not a dimensionless quantity.
  • If the correct equation contains some more terms of the same dimension, it is not possible to know about their presence using dimensional equation.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 35.
If two quantities have same dimensions, do they always represent the same physical content?
Answer:
When dimensions of two quantities are same, they do not always represent the same physical content.
Example:
Force and momentum both have same dimensions but they represent different physical content.

Question 36.
A dimensionally correct equation need not actually be a correct equation but dimensionally incorrect equation is necessarily wrong. Justify.
Answer:
i) To justify a dimensionally correct equation need not be actually a correct equation, consider equation, v2 = 2as
Dimensions of L.H.S. = [v2] = [L2M0T2]
Dimensions of R.H.S. = [as]= [L2M0T2]
⇒ [L.H.S.] = [R.H.S.]
This implies equation v2 = 2as is dimensionally correct.
But actual equation is, v2 = u2 + 2as
This confirms a dimensionally correct equation need not be actually a correct equation.

ii) To justify dimensionally incorrect equation is necessarily wrong, consider the formula,
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv = mgh
Dimensions of L.H.S. = [mv] = [L1M1T-1]
Dimensions of R.H.S. = [mgh] = [L2M1T-2]
Since the dimensions of R.H.S. and L.H.S. are not equal, the formula given by equation must be incorrect.
This confirms dimensionally incorrect equation is necessarily wrong.

Question 37.
State, whether all constants are dimensionless or unitless.
Answer:
All constants need not be dimensionless or unitless.
Planck’s constant, gravitational constant etc., possess dimensions and units. They are dimensional constants.

Solved Examples

Question 38.
If length ‘L’, force ‘F’ and time ‘T’ are taken as fundamental quantities, what would be the dimensional equation of mass and density?
Solution:
i) Force = Mass × Acceleration Force
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 17
∴ Dimensional equation of mass
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 18
= [F1L-4T2]

i) The dimensional equation of mass is [F1L-1T2].
ii) The dimensional equation of density is [F1L-4T2].

Question 39.
A calorie is a unit of heat and it equals 4.2 J, where 1 J = kg m2 s-2. A distant civilisation employs a system of units in which the units of mass, length and time are α kg, β m and δ s. Also J’ is their unit of energy. What will be the magnitude of calorie in their units?
Solution:
1 cal = 4.2 kg m2 s-2
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 19
New unit of energy is J’
Dimensional formula of energy is [L2M1T-2] According to the question,
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 20

Question 40.
Assume that the speed (v) of sound in air depends upon the pressure (P) and density (ρ) of air, then use dimensional analysis to obtain an expression for the speed of sound.
Solution:
It is given that speed (v) of sound in air depends upon the pressure (P) and density (ρ) of the air.
Hence, we can write, v = k Pa ρb ……….. (1)
where, k is a dimensionless constant and a and b are powers to be determined.
Dimensions of y = [L1M0T-1]
Dimensions of P = [L-1M1T-2]
Dimensions of ρ = [L-3M1T0]
Substituting the dimensions of the quantities on both sides of equation (1),
∴ [L1M0T-1] = [L-1M1T-2]a [L-3M1T0]b
∴ [L1M0T-1] = [L-aMaT-2a] [L-3bMbT0]
∴ [L1M0T-1] = [L-a-3bMa+bT-2a]
Comparing the powers of L, M and T on both sides, we get,
-2a = -1
∴ a = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Also, a + b = O
∴ \(\frac{1}{2}\) + b = 0 b = – \(\frac{1}{2}\)
Substituting values of a and b in equation (1), we get
y = k P\(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ–\(\frac{1}{2}\)
∴ v = k \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{p}}{\rho}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 41.
Density of oil is 0.8 g cm3 in C.G.S. unit. Find its value in S.I. units.
Solution:
Dimensions of density is [L-3M1T0]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 21
= 0.8 [10-3] [10-2]-3
= 0.8 [10-3] [10]6
n = 0.8 × 103
Substituting the value of ‘n’ in equation (1).
we get, 0.8 g cm3 = 0.8 × 103 kg m-3.
Density of oil in S.l unit is 0.8 × 103 kg m-3.

Question 42.
The value of G in C.G.S system is 6.67 × 10-8 dyne cm2 g-2. Calculate its value in S.l. system.
Solution:
Dimensional formula of gravitational constant
[L3M-1T-2]
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 22
n = 6.67 × 10-8 × 10-6 × 103
n = 6.67 × 10-11
From equation (1),
6.67 × 10-8 dyne cm2 g-2
= 6.67 × 10-11 N-m2 kg-2
Value ofG in S.l. system is 6.67 × 10-11 N-m2 kg-2.

Question 43.
What is accuracy?
Answer:
Accuracy is how close a measurement is to the actual value of that quantity.

Question 44.
What is precision?
Answer:
Precision is a measure of how consistently a device records nearly identical values i.e., reproducible results.

Question 45.
A scale in a lab measures the mass of object consistently more by 500 g than their actual mass. How would you describe the scale in terms of accuracy and precision?
Answer:
The scale is precise but not accurate.
Explanation: Precision measures how consistently a device records the same answer; even though it displays the wrong value. Hence, the scale is precise.

Accuracy is how well a device measures something against its accepted value. As scale in the lab is always off by 500 g, it is not accurate.
[Note: The goal of the observer should be to get accurate as well as precise measurements.]

Question 46.
List reasons that may introduce possible uncertainties in an observation.
Answer:
Possible uncertainties in an observation may arise due to following reasons:

  1. Quality of instrument used,
  2. Skill of the person doing the experiment,
  3. The method used for measurement,
  4. External or internal factors affecting the result of the experiment.

Question 47.
What is systematic error? Classify errors into different categories.
Answer:

  1. Systematic errors are errors that are not determined by chance but are introduced by an inaccuracy (involving either the observation or measurement process) inherent to the system.
  2. Classification of errors:
    Errors are classified into following two groups:
  3. Systematic errors:
    • Instrumental error (constant error),
    • Error due to imperfection in experimental technique,
    • Personal error (human error).
  4. Random error (accidental error)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 48.
What is instrumental (constant) error?
Answer:
Instrumental error:

  1. It arises due to defective calibration of an instrument.
  2. Example: If a thermometer is not graduated properly, i.e., one degree on the thermometer actually corresponds to 0.99°, the temperature measured by such a thermometer will differ from its value by a constant amount.

Question 49.
What is error due to imperfection in experimental technique?
Answer:
Error due to imperfection in experimental technique:

  • The errors which occur due to defective setting of an instrument is called error due to imperfection in experimental technique.
  • For example the measured volume of a liquid in a graduated tube will be inaccurate if the tube is not held vertical.

Question 50.
What is personal error?
Answer:
Personal error (Human error):

  • The errors introduced due to fault of an observer taking readings are called personal errors.
  • For example, while measuring the length of an object with a ruler, it is necessary to look at the ruler from directly above. If the observer looks at it from an angle, the measured length will be wrong due to parallax.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 51.
What is random error (accidental)?
Answer:

  1. Random error (accidental):
    The errors which are caused due to minute change in experimental conditions like temperature, pressure change in gas or fluctuation in voltage, while the experiment is being performed are called random errors.
  2. They can be positive or negative.
  3. Random error cannot be eliminated completely but can be minimized by taking multiple observations and calculating their mean.

Question 52.
State general methods to minimise effect of systematic errors.
Answer:
Methods to minimise effect of systematic errors:

  1. By using correct instrument.
  2. Following proper experimental procedure.
  3. Removing personal error.

Question 53.
Define the term:
Arithmetic mean
Answer:
Arithmetic mean:
a. The most probable value of a large number of readings of a quantity is called the arithmetic mean value of the quantity. This value can be considered to be true value of the quantity.

b. If a1, a2, a3, …………… an are ‘n’ number of readings taken for measurement of a quantity, then their mean value is given by,
amean = \(\frac{a_{1}+a_{2}+\ldots \ldots .+a_{n}}{n}\)
∴ amean = \(\frac{1}{n} \sum_{i=1}^{n} a_{i}\)

Question 54.
What does a = amean ± ∆amean signify?
Answer:
a = amean ± ∆ amean signifies that the actual value of a lies between (amean – ∆ amean) and (amean + ∆ amean).

Question 55.
What is meant by the term combination of errors?
Answer:
Derived quantities may get errors due to individual errors of fundamental quantities, such type of errors are called as combined errors.

Question 56.
Explain errors in sum and in difference of measured quantity.
Answer:
Errors in sum and in difference:
i) Suppose two physical quantities A and B have measured values A ± ∆A and B ± ∆B. respectively, where ∆A and ∆B are their mean absolute errors.

ii) Then, the absolute error ∆Z in their sum.
Z = A + B
Z ± ∆Z = (A ± ∆A) + (B ± ∆B)
= (A + B) ± ∆A ± ∆B
∴ ± ∆Z = ± ∆A ± ∆B.

iii) For difference. i.e.. if Z = A – B.
Z ± ∆Z = A ± ∆A) – (B ± ∆B)
= (A – B) ± ∆A ∓ ∆B
∴ ± ∆Z = ± ∆A ∓ ∆B,

iv) There are four possible values for ∆Z. namely (+∆A – ∆B), (+∆A + ∆B), (-∆A -∆B), (-∆A + ∆B). Hence, maximLim value of absolute error is ∆Z = (∆A+ ∆B) in both the cases.

v) Thus. when two quantities are added or subtracted, the absolute error in the final result is the sum of the absolute errors in the individual quantities.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 57.
Explain errors in product of measured quantity.
Answer:
Errors in product:
i) Suppose Z = AB and measured values of A and B are (A ± ∆A) and (B ± ∆B) then,
Z ± ∆Z = (A ± ∆A) (B ± ∆B)
= AB ± A∆B ± B∆A ± ∆A∆B
Dividing L.H.S by Z and R.H.S. by AB we get
\(\left(1 \pm \frac{\Delta Z}{Z}\right)=\left[1 \pm \frac{\Delta B}{B} \pm \frac{\Delta A}{A} \pm\left(\frac{\Delta A}{A}\right)\left(\frac{\Delta B}{B}\right)\right]\)
Since ∆A/A and ∆B/B are very small, product is neglected. Hence, maximum relative error in Z is \(\frac{\Delta Z}{Z}=\frac{\Delta A}{A}+\frac{\Delta B}{B}\)

ii) Thus, when two quantities are multiplied, the maximum relative error in the result is the sum of relative errors in each quantity.

Question 58.
Explain errors due to power (index) of measured quantity.
Answer:
Errors due to the power (index) of measured quantity:

  1. Suppose
    Z = A3 = A × A × A
    then, \(\)
  2. Hence the relative error in Z = A3 is three times the relative error in A.
  3. This means if Z = An
    Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 23
  4. This implies, the quantity in the formula which has large power is responsible for maximum error.

Question 59.
The radius of a sphere measured repeatedly yields values 5.63 m, 5.54 m, 5.44 m, 5.40 m and 5.35 m. Determine the most probable value of radius and the mean absolute, relative and percentage errors.
Solution:
Given: a1 = 5.63 m, a2 = 5.54 m, a3 = 5.44 m
a4 = 5.40 m, a5 = 5.35 m,
To find:
i) Most probable value (Mean value)
ii) Mean absolute error
iii) Relative error
iv) Percentage error
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 24
From formula (ii),
Absolute errors:
∆a1 = |amean – a1| = |5.472 – 5.63| = 0.158
∆a2 = |amean – a2| = |5.472 – 5.54| = 0.068
∆a3 = |amean – a3| = |5.472 – 5.44| = 0.032
∆a4 = |amean – a4| = |5.472 – 5.40| = 0.072
∆a5 = |amean – a5| = |5.472 – 5.35| = 0.122

From formula (ii),
∆amean = \(\frac{0.158+0.068+0.032+0.072+0.122}{5}\)
= \(\frac{0.452}{5}\)
= 0.0904 m
From formula (iii),
Relative error = \(\frac{0.0904}{5.472}\)
= 1.652 × 10-2
(after rounding off to correct significant digits)
= 1.66 × 10-2
= 0.0166
∴ Percentage error = 1.66 × 10-2 × 100 = 1.66%
i) The mean value is 5.472 m.
ii) The mean absolute error is 0.0904 m.
iii) The relative error is 0.0166.
iv) The percentage error is 1.66%
[Note: Answer to relative error is rounded off using rules of significant figures and of rounding off]

Question 60.
Lin an experiment to determine the volume of an object, mass and density are recorded as m = (5 ± 0.15) kg and p = (5 ± 0.2) kg m3 respectively. Calculate percentage error in the measurement of volume.
Solulion:
Given: M = 5kg, ∆M = 0.15 kg, ρ = 5 kg/m3,
∆ρ = 0.2 kg/m3
To find: Percentage error in volume (V)
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 25
The percentage error in the determination of volume is 7%.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 61.
The acceleration due to gravity is determined by using a simple pendulum of length l = (100 ± 0.1) cm. If its time period is T = (2 ± 0.01) s, find the maximum percentage error in the measurement of g.
Solution:
Given: ∆l = 0.1 cm, l = 100 cm, ∆T = 0.01 s,
T = 2s
To find: Percentage error
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 26
Percentage error in measurement of g is 1.1 %.

Question 62.
Find the number of significant figures in the following numbers,
i. 25.42
ii. 0.004567
iii. 35.320
iv. 91.000
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 27

Solved Examples

Question 63.
Add 7.21, 12.141 and 0.0028 and express the result to an appropriate number of significant figures.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 28
In the given problem, minimum number of digits after decimal is 2.
∴ Result will be rounded off upto two places of decimal.
Corrected rounded off sum is 19.35.

Question 64.
The mass of a box measured by a grocer’s balance is 2.3 kg. Two gold pieces of masses 20.15 g and 20.17 g are added to the box. What is (i) the total mass of the box? (ii) the difference in the masses of the pieces to correct significant figures?
Solution:
i) Total mass of the box
= (2.3+ 0.02017 + 0.02015) kg
= 2.34032 kg
Since, the last number of significant figure is 2, therefore, the total mass of the box = 2.3 kg

ii) Difference of mass = (20.17 – 20.15) = 0.02g Since, there are two significant figures so the difference in masses to the correct significant figures is 0.02 g.

i) The total mass of the box to correct significant figures is 2.3 kg.
ii) The difference in the masses to correct significant figures is 0.02 g.

Apply Your Knowledge

Question 65.
Write the dimensions of a and b in the relation
E = \(\frac{b-x^{2}}{a}\)
Where E is energy, x ¡s distance and t is time.
Answer:
The given relation is E = \(\frac{b-x^{2}}{a}\)
As x is subtracted from b,
∴ dimensions of b are x2;
i.e., b = [L2]
∴ We can write equation as E = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^{2}}{\mathrm{a}}\)
Or a = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}^{2}}{\mathrm{E}}=\frac{\mathrm{L}^{2}}{\left[\mathrm{~L}^{2} \mathrm{MT}^{-2}\right]}\) = [L0M-1T2]

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 66.
What is the difference between 6.0 and 6.00? which Is more accurate?
Answer:
6.0 indicates the measurement is correct up to first decimal place, whereas 6.00 indicates that the measurement is correct up to second decimal place. Thus, 6.00 is a more accurate value than 6.0.

Question 67.
A child walking on a footpath notices that the width of the footpath is uneven. He reported this to his school principal and the complaint was forwarded to the municipal officer.
i. What is the possible error encountered?
ii. What is the relative error in width of footpath if width of footpath in 10 m length are noted as 5 m, 5.5 m, 5 m, 6 m and 4.5 m?
Answer:
i) The error encountered is personal error.

ii) Mean value of widths
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 29
The relative error in width of footpath is 0.084.

Question 68.
A factory owner kept five identical spheres between two wooden blocks on a ruler as shown in figure. He called all his workers and told them to take reading, to check their efficiency and knowledge.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 30
i. What is the area of central sphere?
ii. What is the absolute error in reading of diameter of second sphere?
Answer:
i) From above diagram radius of central sphere is
r = 1 cm
∴ Area = πr2 = 3.142 × (1)2= 3.142 cm2
The area of central sphere is 3.142 cm2.

ii) Mean value of all reading of diameters
dmean = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}_{1}+\mathrm{d}_{2}+\mathrm{d}_{3}+\mathrm{d}_{4}+\mathrm{d}_{5}}{5}=\frac{2+2+2+2+2}{5}\)
= \(\frac{10}{5}\) = 2 cm
Absolute error in reading of second sphere.
∆d2 = |dmean – d2| = 2 – 2 = 0
The absolute error in reading of diameter of second sphere is zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 69.
A potential difference of V = 100 ± 2 volt, when applied across a resistance R gives a current of 10 ± 0.5 ampere. Calculate percentage error in R given by R V/I.
Answer:
Here. V = 100 ± 2 volt and I = 10 ± 0.5 ampere
Expressing limits of error as percentage error,
We have
V = 100 volt ± \(\frac{2}{100}\) × 100% = 10 volt ± 2%
and I = 10 ampere ± \(\frac{0.5}{10}\) × 100%
= 10 ampere ± 5%
∴ R = \(\frac{V}{I}\)
∴ %error in R = %error in V + %error in I
= 2% + 5% = 7%

Quick Review

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 31
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 32

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
A physical quantity may be defined as
(A) the one having dimension.
(B) that which is immeasurable.
(C) that which has weight.
(D) that which has mass.
Answer:
(A) the one having dimension.

Question 2.
Which of the following is the fundamental unit?
(A) Length, force, time
(B) Length, mass, time
(C) Mass, volume, height
(D) Mass, velocity, pressure
Answer:
(B) Length, mass, time

Question 3.
Which of the following is NOT a fundamental quantity?
(A) Temperature
(B) Electric charge
(C) Mass
(D) Electric current
Answer:
(B) Electric charge

Question 4.
The distance of the planet from the earth is measured by __________.
(A) direct method
(B) directly by metre scale
(C) spherometer method
(D) parallax method
Answer:
(D) parallax method

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
The two stars S1 and S2 are located at distances d1 and d2 respectively. Also if d1 > d22 then following statement is true.
(A) The parallax of S1 and S2 are same.
(B) The parallax of S1 is twice as that of S2
(C) The parallax of S1 is greater than parallax of S2
(D) The parallax of S2 is greater than parallax of S1
Answer:
(D) The parallax of S2 is greater than parallax of S1

Question 6.
Which of the following is NOT a unit of time?
(A) Hour
(B) Nano second
(C) Microsecond
(D) parsec
Answer:
(D) parsec

Question 7.
An atomic clock makes use of _________.
(A) cesium-133 atom
(B) cesium-132 atom
(C) cesium-123 atom
(D) cesium-131 atom
Answer:
(A) cesium-133 atom

Question 8.
S.I. unit of energy is joule and it is equivalent to
(A) 106 erg
(B) 10-7 erg
(C) 107 erg
(D) 105 erg
Answer:
(C) 107 erg

Question 9.
[L1M1T-1] is an expression for __________.
(A) force
(B) energy
(C) pressure
(D) momentum
Answer:
(D) momentum

Question 10.
Dimensions of sin θ is
(A) [L2]
(B) [M]
(C) [ML]
(D) [M0L0T0]
Answer:
(D) [M0L0T0]

Question 11.
Accuracy of measurement is determined by
(A) absolute error
(B) percentage error
(C) human error
(D) personal error
Answer:
(B) percentage error

Question 12.
Zero error of an instrument introduces .
(A) systematic error
(B) random error
(C) personal error
(D) decimal error
Answer:
(A) systematic error

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 13.
The diameter of the paper pin is measured accurately by using ________.
(A) Vernier callipers
(B) micrometer screw gauge
(C) metre scale
(D) a measuring tape
Answer:
(B) micrometer screw gauge

Question 14.
The number of significant figures in 11.118 × 10-6 is
(A) 3
(B) 4
(C) 5
(D) 6
Answer:
(C) 5

Question 15.
0.00849 contains ___________ significant figures.
(A) 6
(B) 5
(C) 3
(D) 2
Answer:
(C) 3

Question 16.
3.310 × 102 has ___________ significant figures.
(A) 6
(B) 4
(C) 2
(D) 1
Answer:
(B) 4

Question 17.
The Earth’s radius is 6371 km. The order of magnitude of the Earth’s radius is
(A) 103 m
(B) 109 m
(C) 107 m
(D) 102 m
Answer:
(C) 107 m

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 18.
__________ is the smallest measurement that can be made using the given instrument
(A) Significant number
(B) Least count
(C) Order of magnitude
(D) Relative error
Answer:
(B) Least count

Competitive Corner

Question 1.
In an experiment, the percentage of error occurred in the measurement of physical quantities A, B, C and D are 1%, 2%, 3% and 4% respectively. Then the maximum percentage of error in the measurement X,
where X = \(\frac{A^{2} \frac{1}{B^{2}}}{C^{\frac{1}{3}} D^{3}}\), will be:
(A) -10 %
(B) 10 %
(C) \(\left(\frac{3}{13}\right) \%\)
(D) 16 %
Answer:
(D) 16 %
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 33
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 34
∴ Percentage error in x is given as,
\(\frac{\Delta x}{x}\) × 100 – (error contributed by A) – (error contributed by B) + (error contributed by C) + (error contributed by D)
= 2% + 1% + 1% + 12%
= 16%

Question 2.
The main scale of a vernier callipers has n divisions/cm. n divisions of the vernier scale coincide with (n – 1) divisions of main scale. The least count of the vernier callipers is,
(A) \(\frac{1}{n(n+1)}\) cm
(B) \(\frac{1}{(n+1)(n-1)}\) cm
(C) \(\frac{1}{n}\) cm
(D) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) cm
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) cm
Hint:
1 V.S.D. = \(\frac{(n-1)}{n}\) M.S.D.
LC. = 1 M.S.D. – 1 V.S.D.
= 1 M.S.D. – \(\frac{(n-1)}{n}\) M.S.D.
= \(\frac{1}{n}\) M.S.D.
= \(\frac{1}{n}\) × \(\frac{1}{n}\) cm
∴ L.C. = \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\) cm

Question 3.
A student measures time for 20 oscillations of a simple pendulum as 30 s. 32 s, 35 s and 31 s. 1f the minimum division in the measuring clock is I s, then correct mean time in second is
(A) 32 ± 3
(B) 32 ± 1
(C) 32 ± 2
(D) 32 ± 5
Answer:
(C) 32 ± 2
Hint:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 35
Hence rounding off,
∆t = ± 2 s
∴ t ± ∆t = 32 ± 2 s

Question 4.
A student measured the diameter of a small steel ball using a screw gauge of least count 0.001 cm. The main scale reading is 5 mm and zero of circular scale division coincides with 25 divisions above the reference leveL If screw gauge has a zero error of— 0.004 cm, the correct diameter of the ball is
(A) 0.521 cm
(B) 0.525 cm
(C) 0.053 cm
(D) 0.29 cm
Answer:
(D) 0.29 cm

Hint:
Least count of screw gauge = 0.001 cm = 0.01mm
Main scale reading = 5 mm.
Zero error = – 0.004 cm = -0.04 mm
Zero correction = +0.04 mm
Observed reading = Mainscale reading + (Division × least count)
Observed reading = 5 + (25 × 0.01) = 5.25 mm
Corrected reading = Observed reading + Zero correction
Corrected reading = 5.25 + 0.04
= 5.29 mm = 0.529 cm

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 5.
The density of the material in the shape of a cube is determined by measuring three sides of the cube and its mass. 1f the relative errors in measuring the mass and length are respectively 1.5% and 1%, the maximum error in determining the density is:
(A) 4.5%
(B) 6%
(C) 2.5°
(D) 3.5%
Answer:
(A) 4.5%
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 36

Question 6.
Let x = \(\left[\frac{a^{2} b^{2}}{c}\right]\) be the physical quantity. If the percentage error in the measurement of physical quantities a, b and c is 2, 3 and 4 percent respectively then percentage en-or in the measurement of x is
(A) 7%
(B) 14%
(C) 21%
(D) 28%
Answer:
(B) 14%
Hint:
Given: x = \(\frac{a^{2} b^{2}}{c}\)
Percentage error is given by.
\(\frac{\Delta x}{x}=\frac{2 \Delta a}{a}+\frac{2 \Delta b}{b}+\frac{\Delta c}{c}\)
= (2 × 2) + (2 × 3) + 4
= 4 + 6 + 4 = 14
∴ \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{x}} \%\) = 14%

Question 7.
A physical quantity of the dimensions of length that can be formed out of c, G and \(\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\) is [c is velocity of light, G is universal constant of gravitation and e is charge]:
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 37
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{c}^{2}}\left[\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{1 / 2}\)

Hint:
Let the physical quantity formed of the dimensions of length be given as.
[L] = [c]x [G]y \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{z}\) …………….. (i)
Now,
Dimensions of velocity of light [c]x = [LT-1]x
Dimensions of universal gravitational constant
[G]y = [L3T2M-1]y
Dimensions of \(\left[\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{z}\) = [ML3T-2]z
Substitrning these in equation (i)
[L] [LT-1]x [M-1L3T-2]y [ML3T-2]z
= Lx+3y+3z M-y+z T-x-2y-2z
Solving for x, y, z
x + 3y + 3z = 1
-y + z = 0
x + 2y + 2z = O
Solving the above equation,
x = -2, y = \(\frac{1}{2}\), z = \(\frac{1}{2}\)
∴ L = \(\frac{1}{c^{2}}\left[\mathrm{G} \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\right]^{1 / 2}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements

Question 8.
The following observations were taken for determining surface tension T of water by capillary method:
diameter of capillary, D = 1.25 × 10-2 m
rise of water, h = 1.45 × 10-2 m
Using g = 9.80 m/s2 and the simplified relation
T = \(\frac{\mathrm{rhg}}{2}\) × 103 N/m, the possible error in surface tension is closest to:
(A) 0.15%
(B) 1.5%
(C) 2.4%
(D) 10%
Answer:
(B) 1.5%
Hint:
D = 1.25 × 10-2 m; h = 1.45 × 10-2 m
The maximum permissible error in D
= ∆D = 0.01 × 10-2 m
The maximum permissible error in h
= ∆h = 0.01 × 10-2 m
g is given as a constant and is errorless.
Maharashtra Board Class 11 Physics Important Questions Chapter 1 Units and Measurements 38

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Multiple-choice Questions

Question 1.
The nasal cavity is divided into right and left nasal chambers by a …………………..
(a) sphenoid
(b) palatine
(c) mesethmoid
(d) zygomatic
Answer:
(c) mesethmoid

Question 2.
The right lung is divided into …………………..
(a) 3 lobes
(b) 2 lobes
(c) 4 lobes
(d) 6 lobes
Answer:
(a) 3 lobes

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 3.
Carbon dioxide is carried in the blood mainly as …………………..
(a) sodium carbonate
(b) sodium bicarbonate
(c) carbaminohaemoglobin
(d) carbonic acid
Answer:
(b) sodium bicarbonate

Question 4.
Transport of oxygen is carried out by …………………..
(a) plasma
(b) lungs
(c) RBCs
(d) nostrils
Answer:
(c) RBCs

Question 5.
Respiration taking place at the alveoli of lungs is called …………………..
(a) internal respiration
(b) external respiration
(c) cellular respiration
(d) tissue respiration
Answer:
(b) external respiration

Question 6.
The volume of air inspired or expired during normal breathing is …………………..
(a) ERV
(b) IRV
(c) TV
(d) VC
Answer:
(c) TV

Question 7.
What is the partial pressure of oxygen and carbon dioxide respectively in the atmospheric air?
(a) PPO2 159 mmHg, PPCO22 0.3 mmHg
(b) PPO2 104 mmHg, PPCO2 40 mmHg
(c) PPO2 40 mmHg, PPCO2 45 mmHg
(d) PPO2 95 mmHg, PPCO2 40 mmHg
Answer:
(b) PPO2 104 mmHg, PPCO2 40 mmHg

Question 8.
The vital capacity of human lung is equal to …………………..
(a) 3500 ml
(b) 4600 ml
(c) 500 ml
(d) 1200 ml
Answer:
(b) 4600 ml

Question 9.
The exchange of gases between alveolar air and alveolar capillaries occurs by …………………..
(a) osmosis
(b) active transport
(c) absorption
(d) diffusion
Answer:
(d) diffusion

Question 10.
Oxygen dissociation curve will shift to right on the decrease of …………………..
(a) acidity
(b) carbon dioxide concentration
(c) temperature
(d) pH
Answer:
(d) pH

Question 11.
Respiratory organs in scorpion are …………………..
(a) gills
(b) book lungs
(c) skin
(d) book gills
Answer:
(b) book lungs

Question 12.
Breakdown of alveoli of lungs resulting in reducing surface area for gas exchange is known as …………………..
(a) emphysema
(b) sneezing
(c) pneumonia
(d) tuberculosis
Answer:
(a) emphysema

Question 13.
During inspiration, the diaphragm …………………..
(a) relaxes
(b) contracts
(c) expands
(d) shows no change
Answer:
(b) contracts

Question 14.
Over inflation of the lungs is prevented due to …………………..
(a) Bohr’s effect
(b) Conditioned reflex
(c) Hering-Breuer reflex
(d) Haldane effect
Answer:
(c) Hering-Breuer reflex

Question 15.
Which of the following prevents collapsing of trachea?
(a) Muscles
(b) Diaphragm
(c) Ribs
(d) Cartilaginous rings
Answer:
(d) cartilaginous rings

Question 16.
Which one of the following produces antibodies ?
(a) Monocytes
(b) Erythrocytes
(c) Lymphocytes
(d) Monocytes
Answer:
(c) Lymphocytes

Question 17.
Plasma protein which initiate blood coagulation is …………………..
(a) prothrombin
(b) fibrinogen
(c) thrombin
(d) fibrin
Answer:
(a) prothrombin

Question 18.
The covering of heart is …………………..
(a) perichondrium
(b) pericardium
(c) periosteum
(d) peritoneum
Answer:
(b) pericardium

Question 19.
Left atrioventricular aperture is guarded by …………………..
(a) tricuspid valve
(b) Eustachian valve
(c) bicuspid valve
(d) semilunar valve
Answer:
(c) bicuspid valve

Question 20.
The pulmonary trunk and systemic aorta are joined by …………………..
(a) chordae tendinae
(b) columnae carnae
(c) ligamentum arteriosum
(d) Purkinje fibres
Answer:
(c) ligamentum arteriosum

Question 21.
Atrioventricular node is located in …………………..
(a) left atrium
(b) right atrium
(c) left ventricle
(d) right ventricle
Answer:
(b) right atrium

Question 22.
…………………. is most commonly used to feel pulse.
(a) Radial vein
(b) Brachial artery
(c) Brachial vein
(d) Radial artery
Answer:
(d) Radial artery

Question 23.
QRS is related to …………………..
(a) atrial contraction
(b) ventricular contraction
(c) atrial relaxation
(d) ventricular relaxation
Answer:
(b) ventricular contraction

Question 24.
Blood is a fluid connective tissue derived from …………………..
(a) ectoderm
(b) mesoderm
(c) endoderm
(d) epithelium
Answer:
(b) mesoderm

Question 25.
What is the increase in number of RBCs called?
(a) Erythropoiesis
(b) Polycythaemia
(c) Erythrocytopenia
(d) Erythroblastosis
Answer:
(b) Polycythaemia

Question 26.
What is the increase in the number of WBCs called?
(a) Leucopoiesis
(b) Leukopenia
(c) Leucocytosis
(d) Leukaemia
Answer:
(c) Leucocytosis

Question 27.
In which of the following diseases there is uncontrolled increase in number of WBCs ?
(a) Leucopoiesis
(b) Leukopenia
(c) Leucocytosis
(d) Leukaemia
Answer:
(d) Leukaemia

Question 28.
What is the decrease in the number of WBCs called?
(a) Leucopoiesis
(b) Leukopenia
(c) Leucocytosis
(d) Leukaemia
Answer:
(b) Leukopenia

Question 29.
Which is the correct arrangement of types of WBCs with respect to their number in blood?
(Consider Neutrophil = N, Eosinophil = E, Basophil = B, Monocyte = M and Lymphocyte = L)
(a) NLMEB
(b) BEMLN
(c) NEBLM
(d) MEBLN
Answer:
(a) NLMEB

Question 30.
Which is the correct order in which the proteins participate in clotting of blood?
(a) Prothrombinase → Prothrombin → Thromboplastin → Thrombin
(b) Thromboplastin → Prothrombinase → Prothrombin → Thrombin
(c) Prothrombin → Thromboplastin → Thrombin → Prothrombinase
(d) Thrombin → Prothrombin → Thromboplastin → Prothrombinase
Answer:
(b) Thromboplastin → Prothrombinase → Prothrombin → Thrombin

Question 31.
Decrease in platelet count is called …………………..
(a) thrombocytopenia
(b) thrombocytosis
(c) thrombokinase
(d) thromboplastin
Answer:
(a) thrombocytopenia

Question 32.
Atrioventricular groove is also called a …………………..
(a) foramen ovale
(b) ligamentum arteriosum
(c) coronary sulcus
(d) ductus arteriosus
Answer:
(c) coronary sulcus

Question 33.
The coronary sinus opens into the …………………..
(a) left atrium
(b) right atrium
(c) left ventricle
(d) right ventricle
Answer:
(b) right atrium

Question 34.
Name the valve from the following that guards the opening of inferior vena cava.
(a) Tricuspid valve
(b) Semilunar valve
(c) Eustachian valve
(d) Thebesian valve
Answer:
(c) Eustachian valve

Question 35.
Name the valve from the following guarding the opening of coronary sinus …………………..
(a) Thebesian valve
(b) Eustachian valve
(c) Tricuspid valve
(d) Semilunar valve
Answer:
(a) Thebesian valve

Question 36.
What is an oval aperture in the interatrial septum of the foetus called?
(a) Fossa ovalis
(b) Foramen ovalis
(c) Ligamentum arteriosum
(d) Ductus arteriosus
Answer:
(b) Foramen ovalis

Question 37.
What is the meaning of stroke volume?
(a) Amount of blood in the body
(b) Pressure of contraction of heart
(c) Amount of blood put out of the ventricles in one minute
(d) Amount of blood put out of the ventricles in one beat
Answer:
(d) Amount of blood put out of the ventricles in one beat

Question 38.
How much amount of blood is put out of the heart during one minute?
(a) Equal to cardiac output
(b) Equal to stroke volume
(c) Equal to half of blood volume
(d) Equal to quarter of blood volume
Answer:
(a) Equal to cardiac output

Question 39.
What is the time taken for one cardiac cycle of normal human being?
(a) 0.1 second
(b) 0.3 second
(c) 0.4 second
(d) 0.8 second
Answer:
(d) 0 .8 second

Question 40.
Deposition of fatty substances in the lining of arteries results in …………………..
(a) arteriosclerosis
(b) atherosclerosis
(c) hyperglycemia
(d) hypotension
Answer:
(b) atherosclerosis

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 41.
Largest number of white blood corpuscles are …………………..
(a) eosinophils
(b) basophils
(c) neutrophils
(d) monocytes
Answer:
(c) neutrophils

Question 42.
Which of the following animal have open circulatory system?
(a) Earthworm
(b) Cockroach
(c) Frog
(d) Rabbit
Answer:
(b) Cockroach

Question 43.
Which of the following leucocytes have unlobed nucleus?
(a) lymphocyte
(b) eosinophils
(c) neutrophils
(d) basophils
Answer:
(a) lymphocyte

Question 44.
Carbonic anhydrase is found in …………………..
(a) WBC
(b) RBCs
(c) thrombocytes
(d) blood plasma
Answer:
(b) RBCs

Question 45.
The typical Lubb – Dup sounds heard in the heart of a healthy person are due to …………………..
(a) closing of cuspid valves followed by the closing of the semilunar valves
(b) closing of semilunar valves
(c) closing of tricuspid valves
(d) closing of bicuspid valves
Answer:
(a) closing of cuspid valves followed by the closing of the semilunar valves

Match the columns

Question 1.

Animal Respiratory organ
(1) Fishes (a) Trachea
(2) Birds/Reptiles (b) Moist cuticle
(3) Insects (c) Gills
(4) Earthworm (d) Lungs

Answer:

Animal Respiratory organ
(1) Fishes (c) Gills
(2) Birds/Reptiles (d) Lungs
(3) Insects (a) Trachea
(4) Earthworm (b) Moist cuticle

Question 2.

Respiratory organs Alternative name
(1) Larynx (a) Lid of larynx
(2) Trachea (b) Air sacs
(3) Alveoli (c) Sound box
(4) Epiglottis (d) Windpipe

Answer:

Respiratory organs Alternative name
(1) Larynx (c) Sound box
(2) Trachea (d) Windpipe
(3) Alveoli (b) Air sacs
(4) Epiglottis (a) Lid of larynx

Question 3.

Respiratory capacities Respiratory volumes
(1) Residual volume (RV) (a) 500 ml
(2) Vital capacity (VC) (b) 2000 – 3000 ml
(3) Tidal volume (TV) (c) 1100 – 1200 ml
(4) Inspiratory reserve volume (IRV) (d) 4100 – 4600 ml

Answer:

Respiratory capacities Respiratory volumes
(1) Residual volume (RV) (c) 1100 – 1200 ml
(2) Vital capacity (VC) (d) 4100 – 4600 ml
(3) Tidal volume (TV) (a) 500 ml
(4) Inspiratory reserve volume (IRV) (b) 2000 – 3000 ml

Question 4.

Disease Symptoms
(1) Asthma (a) Fully blown out alveoli
(2) Bronchitis (b) Inflammation of lungs with cough and fever
(3) Emphysema (c) Spasm of Bronchial muscles
(4) Pneumonia (d) Inflammation of bronchi

Answer:

Disease Symptoms
(1) Asthma (c) Spasm of Bronchial muscles
(2) Bronchitis (d) Inflammation of bronchi
(3) Emphysema (a) Fully blown out alveoli
(4) Pneumonia (b) Inflammation of lungs with cough and fever

Question 5.

Valves in heart Location
(1) Bicuspid/Mitral valve (a) Opening of inferior vena cava
(2) Tricuspid valve (b) Opening of coronary sinus
(3) Eustachian valve (c) Left atrioventricular aperture
(4) Thebesian valve (d) Right atrioventricular aperture

Answer:

Valves in heart Location
(1) Bicuspid/Mitral valve (c) Left atrioventricular aperture
(2) Tricuspid valve (d) Right atrioventricular aperture
(3) Eustachian valve (a) Opening of inferior vena cava
(4) Thebesian valve (b) Opening of coronary sinus

Question 6.

Blood vessel Functions
(1) Pulmonary aorta (a) Carries oxygenated blood to left atrium
(2) Superior vena cava (b) Carries oxygenated blood to all body parts
(3) Pulmonary vein (c) Carries deoxygenated blood from upper parts of body to right atrium
(4) Aorta (d) Carries deoxygenated blood to lungs

Answer:

Blood vessel Functions
(1) Pulmonary aorta (d) Carries deoxygenated blood to lungs
(2) Superior vena cava (c) Carries deoxygenated blood from upper parts of body to right atrium
(3) Pulmonary vein (a) Carries oxygenated blood to left atrium
(4) Aorta (b) Carries oxygenated blood to all body parts

Question 7.

Cells Functions
(1) T-lymphocytes (a) Phagocytic in function
(2) Neutrophils (b) Responsible for Humoral immunity
(3) Eosinophils/Acidophils (c) Responsible for cell-medicated immunity
(4) B-lymphocytes (d) Anti-allergic [Antihistamine] in function

Answer:

Cells Functions
(1) T-lymphocytes (c) Responsible for cell-medicated immunity
(2) Neutrophils (a) Phagocytic in function
(3) Eosinophils/Acidophils (d) Anti-allergic [Antihistamine] in function
(4) B-lymphocytes (b) Responsible for Humoral immunity

Question 8.

Waves recorded in ECG Heart activity
(1) P wave (a) Ventricular repolarization
(2) QRS complex (b) Atrial depolarization
(3) T wave (c) Isoelectric segment
(4) ST segment (d) Ventricular depolarization

Answer:

Waves recorded in ECG Heart activity
(1) P wave (b) Atrial depolarization
(2) QRS complex (d) Ventricular depolarization
(3) T wave (a) Ventricular repolarization
(4) ST segment (c) Isoelectric segment

Question 9.

Events in cardiac cycle Time duration
(1) Atrial systole (a) 0.3 second
(2) Atrial diastole (b) 0.5 second
(3) Ventricular systole (c) 0.1 second
(4) Ventricular diastole (d) 0.7 second

Answer:

Events in cardiac cycle Time duration
(1) Atrial systole (c) 0.1 second
(2) Atrial diastole (d) 0.7 second
(3) Ventricular systole (a) 0.3 second
(4) Ventricular diastole (b) 0.5 second

Classify the following to form Column B as per the category given in Column A

Question 1.
Classify the following composition of blood plasma given below as per Column ‘A’ and complete Column ‘B’. Select from the given options
(i) Serum albumin
(ii) Bicarbonates
(iii) Urea
(iv) Sulphates of sodium
(v) Fibrinogen
(vi) Uric acid

Column A Column B
(1) Plasma proteins ————
(2) Nitrogenous waste ————
(3) Inorganic salts ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Plasma proteins Serum albumin Fibrinogen
(2) Nitrogenous waste Urea, Uric acid
(3) Inorganic salts Bicarbonates, Sulphates of sodium

Question 2.
Classify the following animals having different respiratory organs given below as per Column ‘A’ and complete Column ‘B’.
Select from the given options:
(i) Scorpion
(ii) Reptiles
(iii) Amphibian tadpoles of frog
(iv) Spiders
(vi) Salamanders
(v) Birds

Column A Column B
(1) External gills ————
(2) Book lungs ————
(3) Lungs ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) External gills Amphibian tadpoles of frog, Salamanders
(2) Book lungs Scorpion, Spiders
(3) Lungs Reptiles, Birds

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 3.
Classify the following disorders of respiratory system given below as per Column A and complete Column ‘B’. Select from the given options:
(i) Pneumonia
(ii) Asbestosis
(iii) Emphysema
(iv) Laryngitis
(v) Chronic bronchitis
(vi) Silicosis

Column A Column B
(1) Occupational disorders ————
(2) Disorders due to smoking and air pollution ————
(3) Disorders due to viruses and bacteria ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Occupational disorders Asbestosis, Silicosis
(2) Disorders due to smoking and air pollution Emphysema, Chronic bronchitis
(3) Disorders due to viruses and bacteria Pneumonia, Laryngitis

Question 4.
Classify the following white blood corpuscles given below as per Column A and complete Column ‘B’. Select from the given options:
(i) Eosinophils
(ii) T-lymphocytes
(iii) Neutrophils
(iv) Basophils
(v) B-lymphocytes
(vi) Monocytes

Column A Column B
(1) Phagocytic cells ————
(2) Cells involved in giving immune response ————
(3) Cells that increase during allergic and anti-allergic responses ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Phagocytic cells Neutrophils Monocytes
(2) Cells involved in giving immune response T-lymphocytes-B-lymphocytes
(3) Cells that increase during allergic and anti-allergic responses Eosinophils, Basophils

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
How many molecules of ATP are formed when one molecule of glucose is oxidized?
Answer:
38 molecules of ATP are formed when one molecule of glucose is oxidized.

Question 2.
What are the three regions of nasal chamber?
Answer:
Vestibule, respiratory part and sensory part are the three regions of nasal chamber.

Question 3.
What is meant by respiratory cycle?
Answer:
Alternate inspiration and expiration together make one respiratory cycle.

Question 4.
Why is it dangerous to sleep in a garage where automobiles have running engines?
Answer:
It is dangerous to sleep in a garage where automobiles have running engines because it may cause carbon monoxide poisoning.

Question 5.
In which form major part of CO2 is transported in the blood?
Answer:
CO2 is transported in the blood in the form of sodium and potassium bicarbonates.

Question 6.
Which are the parts of plant that help in the process of gaseous exchange?
Answer:
The parts of plants that help in the process of gaseous exchange are stomata, lenticels, etc.

Question 7.
Which respiratory membranes help in gaseous exchange between the alveolar air and the blood?
Answer:
The layer of squamous epithelium lining the alveolus, basement membrane and a layer of squamous epithelium lining the capillary wall help in gaseous exchange between the alveolar air and the blood.

Question 8.
When will the oxygen dissociation curve shift towards the right?
Answer:
The oxygen dissociation curve will shift towards the right due to increase in H+ concentration, increase in PPCO2 rise in temperature and rise in DPG (2, 3 diphosphoglycerate), formed in RBCs during glycolysis.

Question 9.
What is the action of carbonic anhydrase in the RBCs of blood?
Answer:
In the RBCs, CO2 combines with water in the presence of a Zn containing enzyme, carbonic anhydrase to form carbonic acid. In the presence of carbonic anhydrase carbonic acid immediately dissociates into HCO3and H+ ions leading to large accumulation of HCO3 inside the RBCs.

Question 10.
How much energy is required for the formation of single molecule of ATP ?
Answer:
For the formation of a single molecule of ATP about 7.3 Kcal of energy is required.

Question 11.
What is Hamburger’s phenomena?
Answer:
The diffusion of Chloride ions into the RBCs to main the ionic balance between RBCs and the plasma is called Hamburger’s phenomena or chloride shift.

Question 12.
What is the role of Hering-Breuer reflex in respiration?
Answer:
The Hering-Breuer reflex controls the depth and rhythm of respiration. It also prevents the lungs from inflating to the point of bursting.

Question 13.
How much blood is present in the human body and from which embryonic germ layer is it derived?
Answer:
An average adult has about 4 to 6 litres of blood, which is red coloured fluid connective tissue derived from embryonic mesoderm.

Question 14.
What is the percentage of plasma in the blood and how much water does it contain?
Answer:
There is 55% of plasma in the blood and it contains 90 to 92% water.

Question 15.
What is the average life span of RBCs?
Answer:
RBCs have a life span of about 120 days.

Question 16.
What is normal RBC count and total WBC count?
Answer:
Average RBC count in adult human is 5.1 to 5.8 million per cubic mm and average total WBC count in adult human is 5000 to 9000 per cubic mm.

Question 17.
What is erythropoiesis?
Answer:
The process of formation of Red Blood Cells is called erythropoiesis.

Question 18.
What is increase in the RBC number called?
Answer:
The increase in the number of RBCs is called polycythemia.

Question 19.
What is leucopenia and erythrocytopenia ?
Answer:
The decrease in the number of white blood cells is called leucopenia whereas decrease in the number of red blood cells is called erythrocytopenia.

Question 20.
Where are Eustachian valve and Thebesian valve located?
Answer:
Eustachian valve is present at the opening of inferior vena cava while Thebesian valve is present near the opening of coronary sinus.

Question 21.
What is foramen ovale and how is it related to fossa ovalis?
Answer:
Foramen ovale is an oval opening in the interatrial septum of the foetal heart representing the fossa ovalis which lies as a depression on the right side of interatrial septum.

Question 22.
When is a person described as having hypertension?
Answer:
When the blood pressure values Eire more than 140 mm Hg systolic pressure and more than 90 mm Hg diastolic pressure, then the person is described as having hypertension.

Question 23.
What are the effects of excessive hypertension?
Answer:
Excessive hypertension of values about 220/120 mm Hg can cause blindness, nephritis, stroke or paralysis.

Question 24.
What is the difference between anemia and leukemia?
Answer:
Anemia is disorder caused due to the deficiency of heaemoglobin while leukemia is blood cancer in which there is abnormal increase in the number of white blood cells.

Question 25.
What is the difference between tachycardia and bradycardia?
Answer:
The faster heart rate over 100 beats per minute is called tachycardia, while the slower heart rate below 60 beats per minute is called bradycardia.

Question 26.
What is the difference between chordae tendinae and columnae carnae?
Answer:
Chordae tendinae are chords that connect bicuspid and tricuspid valves with the papillary muscles in ventricles while columnae carnae are series of irregular muscular ridges present on the inner surface of the ventricles.

Question 27.
Which valves prevent the backward flow of blood at the time of ventricular systole?
Answer:
Semilunar valves located at the base of pulmonary artery and systemic aorta prevent the backward flow of blood at the time of ventricular systole.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 28.
What are the time intervals for atrial systole, ventricular systole and joint diastole?
Answer:
Atrial systole is for 0.1 second, ventricular systole is for 0.3 second and joint diastole is for 0.4 second.

Question 29.
In the electrocardiogram shown below, which wave represents ventricular diastole?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 1
Answer:
‘T’ wave represents ventricular diastole.

Question 30.
Mention the role of pacemaker in human heart.
Answer:
Pacemaker can generate wave of contraction or cardiac impulse for rhythmic contraction of heart.

Question 31.
Which structure in the heart is called pacemaker?
Answer:
Sinuatrial node [S. A. node] in the heart wall is called a pacemaker.

Question 32.
What is electrocardiograph?
Answer:
The instrument which is used to record action potentials generated in the heart muscles is called an electrocardiograph or ECG machine.

Question 33.
What is angina pectoris?
Answer:
Angina pectoris is the pain in the chest caused due to reduction in blood supply to cardiac muscle caused due to narrowed and hardened coronary arteries.

Question 34.
What is pulse pressure?
Answer:
Difference between systolic and diastolic pressure is called pulse pressure which is normally 40 mm Hg.

Question 38.
What would happen if respiration takes place in one single step?
Answer:
If respiration takes place in one single step, then the chemical energy released at once during that step might result in a brief blast of light and heat and may lead to death of the cell. Hence respiration is a step-wise process.

Question 39.
Why do the veins have valves?
Answer:
The veins have valves at regular intervals to prevent backflow of blood as blood flows through veins with low pressure.

Question 40.
What is Bohr effect?
Answer:
Bohr effect is the shift of oxyhaemoglobin dissociation curve due to change in partial pressure of CO in blood.

Question 41.
What is Haldane effect?
Answer:
Decrease of pH of blood, due to increase in the number of H+ ions, HCO3 changes into H2O and CO2 by the presence of oxyhaemoglobin is called Haldane effect.

Give definitions of the following

Question 1.
Respiration
Answer:
It is a biochemical process of oxidation of organic compounds in an orderly manner for the liberation of chemical energy in the form of ATP.

Question 2.
Breathing
Answer:
It is a physical process by which gaseous exchange takes place between the atmosphere and the lungs. It involves inspiration and expiration.

Question 3.
Tidal Volume (TV)
Answer:
It is the volume of un¬ inspired or expired during normal breathing. It is 500 ml.

Question 4.
Inspiratory reserve volume (IRV)
Answer:
The maximum or the extra volume of air that is inspired during forced breathing in addition to TV (2000 to 3000 ml).

Question 5.
Expiratory reserve volume (ERV)
Answer:
The maximum volume of air that is expired during forced breathing after normal expiration. (1000 to 1100 ml).

Question 6.
Dead space (DS)
Answer:
The volume of air that is present in the respiratory tract (from nose to the terminal bronchioles), but not involved in gaseous exchange (150 ml).

Question 7.
Residual volume (RV)
Answer:
The volume of air that remains in the lungs and the dead space even after maximum expiration (1100 to 1200 ml).

Question 8.
Total lung capacity
Answer:
The maximum amount of air that the lungs can hold after a maximum forceful inspiration (5200 to 5900 ml).

Question 9.
Vital capacity (VC)
Answer:
The maximum amount of air that can be breathed out after of maximum inspiration. It is the sum total of TV, IRV and ERV and is 4100 to 4600 ml.

Question 10.
Oxygen dissociation curve
Answer:
The relationship between HbO2 saturation and oxygen tension (PPO2) is called oxygen dissociation curve.

Question 11.
Phosphorylation
Answer:
The process that involves trapping the heat energy in the form of high energy bond of ATP molecule is called phosphorylation.

Question 12.
Artificial ventilation
Answer:
It is the method of inducing breathing in a person when natural respiration has ceased or is faltering.

Question 13.
Ventilator
Answer:
A ventilator is a machine that supports breathing and is used during surgery, treatment for serious lung diseases or other conditions when normal breathing fails.

Question 14.
Cyclosis
Answer:
Cyclosis is the streaming movement of the cytoplasm shown by almost all living organisms. E.g. Paramoecium, Amoeba, etc.

Question 15.
Single circulation
Answer:
The movement of blood once through the heart during each circulation cycle is called single circulation.

Question 16.
Double circulation
Answer:
The movement of blood twice through the heart during one circulation cycle is called double circulation.

Question 17.
Erythropoiesis
Answer:
The process of formation of RBCs is called erythropoiesis.

Question 18.
Polycythemia
Answer:
The increase in the number of RBCs is called polycythemia.

Question 19.
Erythrocytopenia
Answer:
The decrease in the number of RBCs is called Erythrocytopenia.

Question 20.
Hematocrit
Answer:
The hematocrit is ratio of the volume of RBCs to total blood volume of blood.

Question 21.
Diapedesis
Answer:
Leucocytes perform amoeboid movement. Due to this kind of movement they can move out of the capillary walls. This is called diapedesis.

Question 22.
Leucocytosis
Answer:
Increase in the number of leucocytes or WBCs is called leucocytosis.

Question 23.
Leucopenia
Answer:
The decrease in the number of white blood cells is called leucopenia.

Question 24.
Leukaemia
Answer:
Pathological Increase in the number WBCs is called leukaemia or blood cancer.

Question 25.
Thrombocytopenia
Answer:
Decrease in the number of blood platelets is called thrombocytopenia.

Question 26.
Blood Coagulation
Answer:
Conversion of liquid blood into semisolid jelly is called blood coagulation or blood clotting.

Question 27.
Pericardium
Answer:
Double layered peritoneum that covers the heart from outside is called pericardium.

Question 28.
Pacemaker
Answer:
Pacemaker is the region that has power of generation of wave of contraction. In heart, sinoatrial node is called pacemaker.

Question 29.
Heartbeat
Answer:
The rhythmic contraction and relaxation of the heart is called heartbeat.

Question 30.
Pulse
Answer:
A pressure wave that travels through the arteries after each ventricular systole is called pulse.

Question 31.
Heart rate
Answer:
The rate with which the heart beats per minute is called the heart rate.

Question 32.
Stroke volume
Answer:
The amount of blood thrown out of the ventricles during one systole is called the stroke volume.

Question 33.
Cardiac output
Answer:
The amount of blood thrown out of the ventricles during one minute is called cardiac output.

Question 34.
Tachycardia
Answer:
Higher heart rate over 100 beats per minute is called tachycardia.

Question 35.
Bradycardia
Answer:
Lower heart rate which is lesser than 60 per minute is called bradycardia.

Question 36.
Myogenic
Answer:
When the initiation and further regulation of heartbeats take place in the muscles then such a heart is called myogenic.

Question 37.
Cardiac cycle
Answer:
Consecutive systole and diastole constitutes a single heartbeat or cardiac cycle.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 38.
Arterial blood pressure
Answer:
The pressure exerted by blood on the wall of artery is called arterial blood pressure.

Question 39.
Angiology
Answer:
Study of blood vessels is called angiology.

Question 40.
Angiography
Answer:
X-ray or imaging of the cardiac blood vessels to locate the position of blockages is called angiography.

Question 41.
Heart transplant
Answer:
Replacement of severely damaged heart by normal heart from brain- dead or recently dead donor is called heart transplant.

Question 42.
Silent Heart Attack
Answer:
Silent heart attack, also known as silent myocardial infarction, is a type of heart attack that lacks the general symptoms of classic heart attack like extreme chest pain, hypertension, shortness of breath, sweating and dizziness.

Question 43.
Electrocardiogram
Answer:
Graphical recording of electrical variations detected at the surface of body during their propagation through the wall of heart is electrocardiogram (ECG).

Question 44.
Lymph
Answer:
It is a fluid connective tissue with almost similar composition to the blood except RBCs, platelets and some proteins.

Give functions of the following

Question 1.
Epiglottis.
Answer:
The epiglottis prevents the entry of food into the trachea by closing the glottis temporarily.

Question 2.
Carbonic anhydrase.
Answer:
Carbonic anhydrase enzyme is found inside the RBCs only to accelerate the rate of formation of carbonic acid from CO2 and H2O.

Question 3.
Ventilators.
Answer:
Ventilators used in hospitals are part of life supporting system, which help in breathing by

  1. Pushing oxygen into the lungs
  2. Removing carbon dioxide from the lungs

Question 4.
Erythrocytes.
Answer:
Erythrocytes carry oxygen to all cells of the body from the lungs and bringing carbon dioxide from all the cells back to lungs.

Question 5.
Neutrophils.
Answer:
Neutrophils are responsible for destroying pathogens by the process of phagocytosis.

Question 6.
Thrombocytes/Platelets.
Answer:
Platelets secrete platelet factors which are essential in blood clotting. They also seal v the ruptured blood vessels by formation of platelet plug/thrombus. They secrete serotonin, a local vasoconstrictor.

Question 7.
Pericardial fluid.
Answer:
Pericardial fluid acts as a shock absorber and protects the heart from mechanical injuries. It also keeps the heart moist and acts as lubricant.

Question 8.
Heart walls.
Answer:
The epicardium and endocardium are protective in function whereas myocardium is responsible for contraction and relaxation of heart.

Question 9.
Valves in heart.
Answer:
Valves in the heart prevent the backflow of the blood at the time of systole and help in maintaining a unidirectional flow of blood.

Question 10.
Chordae tendinae.
Answer:
Chordae tendinae attach the bicuspid and tricuspid valves to the ventricular wall (papillary muscles) and regulate their opening and closing.

Question 11.
Semilunar valves.
Answer:
Semilunar valves prevent the backward flow of blood from pulmonary aorta and the aorta into the respective ventricles.

Question 12.
Sinoatrial node [SA] or Pacemaker.
Answer:
SA node acts as pacemaker of heart because it has the power of generating a new wave of contraction and making the pace of contraction.

Question 13.
Electrocardiogram (ECG).
Answer:
ECG helps to diagnose the abnormality in conducting pathway, enlargement of heart chambers, damage to cardiac muscles, reduced blood supply to cardiac muscles and causes of chest pain.

Question 14.
Blood.
Answer:
Functions of blood:

  1. Transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide
  2. Transport of food
  3. Transport of waste product
  4. Transport of hormones
  5. Maintenance of pH
  6. Water balance
  7. Transport of heat
  8. Defence against infection
  9. Temperature regulation
  10. Blood clotting/coagulation
  11. Helps in healing

Name the following

Question 1.
Name two animals in which moist skin acts as a respiratory surface.
Answer:
Earthworm, Frog

Question 2.
Name the respiratory organs in insects and fish.
Answer:
Insects – Tracheal tubes and spiracles
Fish – Internal gills

Question 3.
Name any two disorders of respiratory system.
Answer:
Asthma and pneumonia are the two disorders of respiratory system.

Question 4.
Name the structural and functional unit of lungs.
Answer:
Alveolus is the structural and functional unit of lungs.

Question 5.
Name the energy currency of cell.
Answer:
ATP is the energy currency of cell.

Question 6.
Name the site where actual exchange of O2 and CO2 takes place between air and blood in the body of man.
Answer:
Alveolus of lung.

Question 7.
Name any two respiratory centres required for regulation of breathing.
Answer:
Inspiratory centre, Expiratory centre, Pneumotaxic centre and Apneustic centre.

Question 8.
Name the muscles which move ribs up and down.
Answer:
External intercostal muscles.

Question 9.
Name two phyla where haemocoel is present.
Answer:
Phylum-Arthropoda and Phylum-Mollusca.

Question 10.
Name the animal-group which show single circulation.
Answer:
Fishes

Question 11.
Name the cells which produce thrombocytes.
Answer:
Megakaryocytes produce thrombocytes.

Question 12.
Name the process of formation of red blood corpuscles.
Answer:
Erythropoiesis

Question 13.
Name the space in which human heart is located.
Answer:
Mediastinum is the space in which human heart is located.

Question 14.
Name the types of lymphocytes depending upon functions.
Answer:
B-lymphocytes and T-lymphocytes.

Question 15.
Name the layers of peritoneum that surrounds the heart sequentially from outside to inside.
Answer:
Fibrous pericardium, parietal layer of serous pericardium and visceral layer of serous pericardium.

Question 16.
Name the connection between the pulmonary trunk and systemic aorta.
Answer:
Ligamentum arteriosum that represents remnant of ductus arteriosus of foetus.

Question 17.
Name the valve between left atrium and left ventricle and give its significance.
Answer:
Between left atrium and left ventricle is mitral or bicuspid valve which maintains the unidirectional flow of blood by preventing hs backflow.

Question 18.
Name the walls of an artery.
Answer:
Outer tunica externa, middle tunica media and inner tunica interna.

Question 19.
Name the instrument used to measure blood pressure.
Answer:
Sphygmomanometer is used to measure blood pressure.

Question 20.
Name the plasma proteins involved in the process of blood clotting.
Answer:
Prothrombin and fibrinogen.

Question 21.
Name the various components of conducting system of the heart.
Answer:
Conducting system of the heart consists of SA node, AV node, bundle of His and Purkinje fibers.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 22.
Name the neurotransmitters that decrease and increase the heart rate in human beings respectively.
Answer:
Acetylcholine decreases heart rate and adrenaline or epinephrine increases the heart rate in human.

Question 23.
Who discovered ECG?
Answer:
Willem Einthoven discovered ECG.

Distinguish between the following

Question 1.
Pharynx and Larynx.
Answer:

Pharynx Laryix
1. Pharynx is a short, vertical tube. 1. Larynx is a sound producing organ located at the end of pharynx.
2. Mouth leads to the pharynx. 2. Larynx leads to the oesophagus.
3. Vocal cords are absent. 3. Vocal cords are present.
4. Pharynx does not increase in size at the time of puberty. 4. Larynx increases in size at the time of puberty.
5. Pharynx does not show Adam’s apple. 5. Larynx shows Adam’s apple in adult males.

Question 2.
Inspiration and Expiration.
Answer:

Inspiration Expiration
1. Inspiration is an active process. 1. Expiration is a passive process.
2. During inspiration diaphragm contracts and becomes flattened. 2. During expiration diaphragm relaxes and becomes dome shaped.
3. During inspiration intercostal muscles contract. 3. During expiration intercostal muscles relax.
4. During inspiration ribs are pulled outwards and sternum is raised. 4. During expiration ribs are pulled inwards and sternum is lowered.
5. During inspiration the space in the thoracic cavity increases. 5. During expiration the space in the thoracic cavity decreases.
6. During inspiration pressure in the lungs decreases. 6. During expiration pressure in the lungs increases.
7. During inspiration the volume of the lungs increase. 7. During expiration the volume of the lungs decreases.
8. During inspiration air comes inside the body. 8. During expiration air goes out of the body.

Question 3.
External respiration and Internal respiration.
Answer:

External respiration Internal respiration
1. The respiratory processes occurring in lungs is called external respiration. 1. The respiratory processes that occur in tissues is called internal respiration.
2. During external respiration O2 from the lungs enters into the lung capillaries by diffusion. 2. During internal respiration O2 from the blood enters the tissue cells.
3. During external respiration CO2 from the lung capillaries diffuse into the lungs. 3. During internal respiration CO2 from the tissues enters into the blood.
4. During external respiration exchange of gases takes place between the air and the lungs. 4. During internal respiration exchange of gases take place between the blood and the tissue.
5. Formation of oxyhaemoglobin takes place during external respiration. 5. Oxyhaemoglobin dissociates into oxygen and haemoglobin during internal respiration.
6. During external respiration CO2 is released. 6. During internal respiration carbamino haemoglobin is formed which is carried to the lungs.

Question 4.
Transport of O2 and Transport of CO2.
Answer:

Transport of O2 Transport of CO2
1. Transport of O2 takes place from lungs to the tissues and cells. 1. Transport of CO2 takes place from tissues and cells to the lungs.
2. Oxygen is carried as oxyhaemoglobin to the tissues with the help of RBCs. 2. Carbon dioxide is carried as carbaminohaemoglobin from the tissues with the help of plasma and RBCs.
3. Oxygen does not form oxides or other products during its transport. 3. CO2 forms bicarbonates with sodium and potassium during its transport.
4. O2 does not form acids during its transport. 4. CO2 dissolves in water to form carbonic acid.

Question 5.
Vital Capacity of Lung and Total Lung Capacity.
Answer:

Vital Capacity of Lung Total Lung Capacity
1. It is the maximum amount of air a person can expire and inspire to their maximum extent. 1. It is the maximum amount of air that the lungs can hold after a maximum forceful inspiration.
2. It is the sum total of inspiratory reserve volume, tidal volume and expiratory reserve volume. 2. It is the sum total of vital capacity and residual volume.
3. It ranges from 4100 to 4600 ml. 3. It ranges from 5200 to 5800 ml.

Question 6.
Inspiratory Reserve Volume (IRV) and Expiratory Reserve Volume (ERV).
Answer:

Inspiratory Reserve Volume (IRV) Expiratory Reserve Volume (ERV).
1. It is the maximum volume of air, or the extra volume of air, that is inspired during forced breathing. 1. It is the maximum volume of air that is expired during forced breathing.
2. Its value is 2000/3000 ml. 2. Its value is 1000/1100 ml.

Question 7.
T. S. of artery and T.S. of vein.
Answer:

T. S. of artery T.S. of vein
1. Histologically in transverse section of artery there are three walls, tunica externa, tunica media and tunica interna or endothelium. 1. Histologically in transverse section of vein there are three walls, tunica externa, tunica media and tunica interna or endothelium.
2. Tunica media is thick and muscular. 2. Tunica media is thinner as compared to artery.
3. Lumen of artery is narrow. 3. Lumen of vein is broad.

Question 8.
Erythrocytes and Leucocytes.
Answer:

Erythrocytes Leucocytes
1. Erythrocytes have a definite shape which is elliptical or oval. 1. Leucocytes do not have definite shape as they are amoeboid.
2. They are enucleated. 2. They are nucleated.
3. Erythrocytes contain haemoglobin and hence appear red. 3. Leucocytes are devoid of any respiratory pigment and hence appear colourless.
4. The normal erythrocyte count is 4.3 to 5.8 million per cubic mm of blood. 4. The normal leucocyte count is 4000 to 11000 per cubic mm of blood.
5. The life span of erythrocytes is 100 to 120 days. 5. The life span of leucocytes is 3 to 4 days.
6. The diameter of erythrocytes is 7.2 m and thickness is about 2 to 2.2 m. 6. The size of leucocytes varies with its subtypes and is of average size of 8 to 15 m.
7. Erythrocytes are formed by the process of erythropoiesis in red bone marrow. 7. Leucocytes are formed by the process of leucopoiesis in bone marrow, tonsils, lymph nodes, spleen, thymus, etc.
8. Erythrocytes transport the respiratory gases. 8. Leucocytes help in the formation of antibodies besides fighting against foreign antigens by phagocytic activity.

Question 9.
Eosinophils and Basophils.
Answer:

Eosinophils Basophils
1. Cytoplasmic granules present in eosinophils are stained with acidic stains. 1. Cytoplasmic granules present in basophils are stained with basic stains.
2. Nucleus is bilobed. 2. Nucleus is twisted.
3. Eosinophils constitute 3% of total WBCs. 3. Basophils constitute 0.5% of total WBCs.

Question 10.
Neutrophils and Eosionophils.
Answer:

Neutrophils Eosinophils
1. Cytoplasmic granules present in neutrophils are stained with neutral stains. 1. Cytoplasmic granules present in eosinophils are stained with acidic stains.
2. Nucleus is three to five lobes showing polymorphic form. 2. Nucleus is bilobed.
3. Neutrophils constitute 62% of total WBCs. 3. Eosinophils constitute 3% of total WBCs.

Question 11.
Lymphocytes and Monocytes.
Answer:

Lymphocytes Monocytes
1. Large round nucleus but size of the cell is smaller. 1. Large kidney shaped nucleus and largest size among WBCs.
2. Lymphocytes form 25-33% of WBCs. 2. Monocytes form 3-9% of WBCs.

Question 12.
Granulocytes and Agranulocytes.
Answer:

Granulocytes Agranulocytes
1. WBCs with granular cytoplasm are called granulocytes. Thus, cytoplasmic granules are present. 1. WBCs with agranular cytoplasm are called agranulocytes. Thus, cytoplasmic granules are absent.
2. Nuclei of granulocytes are variously lobed. 2. Nuclei of agranulocytes are not lobed.

Question 13.
Single circulation and Double circulation.
Answer:

Single circulation Double circulation
1. Blood flows only once through the heart in a complete cycle. 1. Blood flows twice through the heart during one complete circulation. Systemic – to and fro ‘ from heart to body and pulmonary – to and fro from heart to lungs.
2. Heart pumps deoxygenated blood only. 2. Heart pumps both deoxygenated and oxygenated blood to lungs and body respectively.
3. Blood is oxygenated in gills. 3. Blood is oxygenated in lungs.
4. Occurs only in fishes. 4. Occurs in amphibians, reptiles, birds and mammals.

Question 14.
Systolic blood circulation and Diastolic blood circulation.
Answer:

Systolic blood circulation Diastolic blood circulation
1. Blood is passed from right ventricle to lungs by pulmonary artery during systolic circulation. Similarly, from left ventricle the oxygenated blood is given to the entire body through systemic aorta during systolic circulation. 1. Blood is passed to left atrium from lungs by pulmonary veins during diastolic circulation. Similarly, deoxygenated blood from entire body is brought back to heart through vena cava during diastolic circulation.
2. Systolic blood circulation is under maximum pressure as heart is forcing the blood to come out of heart. 2. Diastolic blood circulation is under minimum blood pressure as heart is relaxed during diastole.

Question 15.
Atria and Ventricles.
Answer:

Atria Ventricles
1. Atria are upper chambers of the heart. 1. Ventricles are lower chambers of the heart.
2. Atria are thin walled. 2. Ventricles are thick walled.
3. Atria are receiving chambers. 3. Ventricles are distributing chambers.
4. Interatrial septum divides the two auricles (atria). 4. Interventricular septum divides the two ventricles.
5. Right atrium is larger in size than left atrium. 5. Left ventricle is larger in size than the right ventricle.

Question 16.
S.A. Node and A.V. Node.
Answer:

S.A. Node A.V. Node
1. Sinoatrial node is present in the right ventricle near the opening near the opening of the superior vena cava. 1. Atrioventricular node is present in the right ventricle near the opening of the coronary sinus.
2. S.A. node is the pacemaker of the heart and it starts atrial systole. 2. A.V. node starts ventricular systole through bundles of His and Purkinje’s fibre system.

Question 17.
Pulmonary circulation and Systemic circulation.
Answer:

Pulmonary circulation Systemic circulation
1. The course of blood from the right ventricle to the left atrium of the heart through the lungs is called pulmonary circulation. 1. The course of blood from the left ventricle to the right atrium of the heart through the body is called systemic circulation.
2. Pulmonary circulation is mainly for sending the blood for oxygenation in the lungs from the heart and bringing it back to the heart after oxygenation. 2. Systemic circulation is for sending the deoxygenated blood from the body to the heart and sending oxygenated blood from the heart to the body.

Question 18.
Atrio ventricular valves and Semilunar valves.
Answer:

Atrio ventricular valves Semilunar valves
1. Atrio ventricular valves Eire present between the atria and ventricles. On the right side there is tricuspid valve whereas on the left side there is bicuspid valve. 1. Semilunar valves are present at the opening of pulmonary artery and systemic aorta.
2. Atrio ventricular valves prevent the back flow of blood from ventricles to atria at the time of systole. 2. Semilunar valves prevent the back flow of blood from pulmonary artery and systemic aorta back to the heart.

Question 19.
Hypertension and Hypotension.
Answer:

Hypertension Hypotension
1. Blood pressure values more than 140 mm Hg SP and 90 mm HG DP is called hypertension. 1. Blood pressure values less them 120 mm Hg SP and 70 mm HG DP is called hypotension.
2. Excessive hypertension can result into lethal complications such as stroke or paralysis. 2. Hypotension may not be lethal if immediate measures are taken to raise the blood pressure.

Give reasons

Question 1.
ATP is called energy currency of the cell.
Answer:

  1. During cellular respiration, the oxidation of food (glucose) takes place.
  2. This happens in the mitochondria using the oxygen present in the blood.
  3. ATP molecules are formed during this oxidation.
  4. ATP is used for various vital body processes and also for maintaining the body temperature to constancy.
  5. Since energy is stored in the form of ATP it is called an energy currency of the cell.

Question 2.
The vestibule of nasal chamber has fine hair.
Answer:

  1. Vestibule is the anterior most part of the nasal chamber.
  2. The hairs present in this region trap the dust particles and prevent them from entering into the interiors of the respiratory passage.
  3. Therefore, the vestibule of nasal chambers has fine hair.

Question 3.
Glottis is guarded by a flap called epiglottis.
Answer:

  1. The oesophagus and trachea lie side by side.
  2. There is possibility that food particles may enter respiratory passage at the time of gulping.
  3. However, the epiglottis prevents the entry of food into the respiratory passage by closing it temporarily.
  4. Thus, for preventing the entry of food particles into respiratory passage, the glottis is guarded by a flap called epiglottis.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 4.
Alveoli are very flexible.
Answer:

  1. Alveoli are made up of collagen and elastin fibres.
  2. They are very thin (0.0001 mm) and lined by non-ciliated squamous epithelium.
  3. All the above structural components make the alveoli very flexible.

Question 5.
Expiration is called a passive process.
Answer:

  1. During expiration, intercostal muscles relax. This results in pulling the ribs inwards.
  2. Diaphragm also relaxes and returns to its normal dome shape.
  3. The collective contraction of ribs and diaphragm results in the reduction of
    thoracic cavity and hence automatically air is pushed out of the lungs.
  4. Since the pressure on the lungs increase rushing the air to outside, expiration is called a passive process.

Question 6.
Pericardium acts as a defence wall for the heart.
Answer:

  1. Pericardium protects the heart. It is double layered peritoneum, having outer fibrous and inner serous pericardium layers.
  2. Fibrous pericardium being tough gives protection to the heart.
  3. Serous pericardium has two layers, parietal and visceral layer or epicardium.
  4. In between these two layers, there is pericardial fluid, which helps to absorb shocks and provide nourishment.
  5. In this way pericardium acts as a defence wall.

Question 7.
Valves are present in veins.
Answer:

  1. Veins carry blood to the heart.
  2. At that time the backward flow of the blood should be prevented.
  3. Therefore, valves are present in veins.

Question 8.
Atria are thin walled than ventricles.
Answer:

  1. Atria are receiving chambers, while ventricles are distributing chambers.
  2. The blood is driven out from ventricles.
  3. Ventricles are therefore, strong and with thicker walls.
  4. Atria are thin walled as compared to ventricles.

Question 9.
Heart is called a pump.
Answer:

  1. The heart acts as a pumping organ. It shows continuous pumping action.
  2. The rhythmic contraction or systole and relaxation or diastole of heart forms one heartbeat.
  3. Such heartbeats occur about 72 times per minute.
  4. The heart efficiently pumps about 5 litres of blood per minute. Therefore, the heart is called a pump.

Question 10.
In normal human heart, there is no mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood.
Answer:

  1. In normal human heart, there is completely formed atrioventricular septum.
  2. This septum keeps the deoxygenated and oxygenated blood separate.
  3. Hence there is no mixing of the two types of blood.

Question 11.
Blood pressure is inversely related to the elasticity of the blood vessels.
Answer:

  1. When the blood gushes through the blood vessels, the walls of blood vessels -can expand a little due to their elasticity.
  2. But as the age advances, the elasticity is reduced and then the blood vessels do not expand.
  3. Hence the flowing blood gets more resistance and the blood pressure can rise.
  4. Lesser the elasticity more will be the blood pressure, whereas more the elasticity of the vessel wall, then the pressure will not rise.
  5. In this way, the blood pressure is inversely related to the elasticity of the blood vessels.

Write short notes

Question 1.
Chloride shift or Hamburger’s phenomenon.
Answer:

  1. About 70% of CO2 is transported in the form of sodium bicarbonates/potassium bicarbonates from tissue cells to lungs.
  2. In the RBCs, CO2 combines with water in the presence of a Zn containing enzyme, carbonic anhydrase to form carbonic acid. This action is rapid in RBCs as compared to that in the plasma.
  3. Carbonic acid being unstable, immediately dissociates into HCO3 and H+in the presence of same enzyme, leading to large accumulation of HCO3 inside the RBCs. It thus moves out of RBCs. This can bring about imbalance of the charge inside the RBCs.
  4. To maintain the ionic balance between the RBCs and the plasma, Cl diffuses into the RBCs. This movement of chloride ions is known as chloride shift or Hamburger’s phenomenon.
  5. HCO3 that comes in the plasma joins to Na+/K+ forming NaHCO3/KHCO3 which can maintain pH of blood. The remaining H+ ions in the RBCs are buffered by haemoglobin by the formation of oxyhaemoglobin.
  6. At the level of lungs, due to the low partial pressure of carbon dioxide of the alveolar air, hydrogen ion and bicarbonate ions combine to form carbonic acid and under the influence of carbonic anhydrase again yields carbon dioxide and water.

Question 2.
Regulation of breathing.
Answer:
(1) Respiration is under dual control, i.e. nervous and chemical. Normal breathing is an involuntary process. Steady state of respiration is controlled by neurons located in the pons and medulla and are known as the respiratory centres. They regulate the rate and depth of breathing.

(2) These centres are divided into three groups : dorsal group of neurons in the medulla (inspiratory centre), ventro-lateral group of neurons in medulla (inspiratory and expiratory centre) and pneumotaxic centre located in the pons and apneustic centre which is antagonistic in action to pneumotaxic centre.

(3) During inspiration, when the lungs expand to a critical point, the stretch receptors are stimulated and impulses are sent along the vagus nerves to the expiratory centre. It then sends out inhibitory impulses to the inspiratory centre.

(4) The inspiratory muscles relax and expiration follows. As the air leaves but, the lungs are deflated and the stretch receptors are no longer stimulated. Thus, the inspiratory centre is no longer inhibited and a new respiration begins. These events are called the Hering – Breuer reflex. The Hering – Breuer reflex controls the depth and rhythm of respiration. It also prevents the lungs from inflating to the point of bursting.

(5) The respiratory centre has connections with the cerebral cortex that means we can voluntarily change our pattern of breathing. Voluntary control is protective because it enables us to prevent water or irritating gases from entering the lungs.

Question 3.
Carbon monoxide poisoning.
Answer:

  1. Carbon monoxide poisoning is caused when carbon monoxide is combined with haemoglobin.
  2. Haemoglobin is said to have 250 times more affinity for carbon monoxide than that for the oxygen.
  3. Therefore, haemoglobin with carbon monoxide forms a stable compound, the carboxyhemoglobin.
  4. Due to the formation of carboxyhaemoglobin, the haemoglobin no longer carries oxygen to the cells and tissues. Tissues then suffer from oxygen starvation. This leads to asphyxiation and in extreme cases it leads to death.
  5. Carbon monoxide poisoning occurs in closed rooms with incompletely burning substances such as stove burners or furnaces and garages having running automobile engines.
  6. Person suffering from carbon monoxide poisoning has to be administered with oxygen-carbon dioxide mixture, so that high levels of CO2 makes carbon monoxide dissociated from haemoglobin.

Question 4.
Artificial ventilation.
Answer:
(1) Artificial ventilation is the artificial respiration. It is the method of inducing breathing in a person when natural respiration has ceased or is faltering. If used properly and quickly, it can prevent death due to drowning, choking, suffocation, electric shock, etc.

(2) The process involves two main steps:
a. Establishing and maintaining an open air passage from the upper respiratory tract to the lungs.
b. Force inspiration and expiration as in mouth to mouth respiration or by mechanical means like ventilator.

(3) A ventilator is a machine that supports breathing and is used during surgery, treatment for serious lung diseases or other conditions when normal breathing fails.

Question 5.
Erythrocytes.
Answer:

  1. Erythrocytes or red blood corpuscles. They are circular, biconcave, enucleated cells.
  2. The RBC size : 7 pm in diameter and 2.5 pm in thickness.
  3. The RBC count : 5.1 to 5.8 million RBCs/ cu mm of blood in an adult male and 4.3 to 5.2 million/cu mm in an adult female.
  4. The average life span of RBC : 120 days.
  5. RBCs are formed by the process of erythropoiesis. In foetus, RBC formation takes place in liver and spleen whereas in adults it occurs in red bone marrow.
  6. The old and worn out RBCs are destroyed in liver and spleen.
  7. Polycythemia is an increase in number of RBCs while erythrocytopenia is decrease in their (RBCs) number.

Functions of RBCs:

  1. Transport of oxygen from lungs to tissues and carbon dioxide from tissues to lungs with the help of haemoglobin.
  2. Maintenance of blood pH as haemoglobin acts as a buffer.
  3. Maintenance of the viscosity of blood.

Question 6.
Heartbeat.
Answer:

  1. The rhythmic contraction and relaxation of the heart is called heartbeat.
  2. Each heartbeat includes one systole and one diastole. During systole the heart contracts and during diastole it relaxes.
  3. The rate with which the heart beats is called heart rate. The normal heart rate is 72 beats per minute.
  4. Tachycardia means faster heart rate of about more than 100 beats per minute.
  5. Bradycardia means slower heart rate that is below 60 beats per minute.

Question 7.
Pulse.
Answer:

  1. A pressure wave that travels through the arteries after each ventricular systole is called a pulse.
  2. The pulse can be felt in any artery that lies near the surface of the body.
  3. The radial artery at the wrist is most commonly used to feel the pulse.
  4. The pulse rate per minute indicates the heart rate. Since each heartbeat generates one pulse in the arteries, the pulse rate is same as that of heart rate, i.e. 72 times per minute.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 8.
Peacemaker.
Answer:

  1. Pacemaker is the region in tile heart which initiates the beating.
  2. The natural pacemaker of the heart is sinoatrial node (SA node).
  3. The pacemaker is autorhythmic, it is able to repeatedly and rhythmically generate impulses.
  4. SA node is responsible for initiation of cardiac excitation. Therefore, it is called a pacemaker.

Question 9.
Blood pressure.
Answer:

  1. Blood pressure is the pressure exerted by the flowing blood on the walls of arteries.
  2. Blood pressure described in two terms viz. systolic blood pressure and diastolic blood pressure. Systolic blood pressure is the maximum pressure of blood when heart undergoes ventricular systole. It is responsible for flow of blood in the arteries. Normal systolic pressure is 120 mm Hg.
  3. Diastolic blood pressure is the minimum pressure of blood when heart undergoes diastole. Normal diastolic pressure is 80 mm Hg.
  4. Blood pressure is represented as 120/80 mm Hg for a normal human being.

Question 10.
Hypertension.
Answer:

  1. In a normal healthy person the blood pressure values are 120 mm Hg (systolic)/ 80 mm Hg (diastolic).
  2. When the blood pressure is persistently more than 140 mm Hg systolic pressure and 90 mm Hg diastolic arterial blood pressure then it is said to be hypertension or high blood pressure.
  3. Excessively high blood pressure is very dangerous as high blood pressure of about 220/120 mm Hg may cause rupturing of blood vessels.
  4. Rupture of eye blood vessels can lead to blindness.
  5. If blood vessels of kidney are affected then nephritis is caused.
  6. Hemorrhage occurring in the brain can lead to stroke or paralysis. Therefore, hypertension is commonly called silent killer. It may be present for years with no distinct symptoms.
  7. The factors causing hypertension are arteriosclerosis (reduction of elasticity of blood vessels), atherosclerosis (deposition, of cholesterol inside the blood vessels wall), obesity, physical or emotional stress, alcoholism, smoking, cholesterol rich diet, increased secretion of renin, epinephrine or aldosterone, etc.

Question 11.
Coronary artery disease (CAD).
Answer:

  1. Coronary artery disease is a condition caused due to problems like atherosclerosis.
  2. In this disease, coronary arteries are narrowed due to deposition of fatty substances.
  3. Due to this the blood flow to the heart is reduced.
  4. In coronary heart disease, the heart muscle is damaged because of an inadequate amount of blood due to obstruction of its blood supply.
  5. The symptoms of CAD depend upon the degree of obstruction.
  6. Symptoms are mild chest pain or angina pectoris.
  7. In severe cases it results in heart attack known as myocardial infarction.

Question 12.
Angina pectoris.
Answer:

  1. Angina pectoris is the pain in the chest. It results from a reduction in blood supply to cardiac muscle due to narrowed and hardened coronary arteries.
  2. Atherosclerosis and arteriosclerosis can cause this problem. Basically, the coronary arteries are affected during angina pectoris.
  3. It causes heaviness and severe pain in the chest. The pain can also be felt at the neck, lower jaw, left arm and left shoulder.
  4. Angina pectoris often occurs during exertion, when the heart demands more oxygen and narrowed blood vessels cannot supply. It disappears with rest.

Question 13.
Heart failure.
Answer:

  1. Heart failure is caused due to progressive weakening of the heart muscle. This results in the failure of the heart to pump the blood effectively.
  2. Hypertension increase the after load on the heart leading to significant enlargement of the heart.
  3. This finally results in heart failure.
  4. Factors responsible for heart failure are advanced age, malnutrition, chronic infections, toxins, severe anaemia or hyperthyroidism, etc.
  5. Any problem leading to degeneration of heart muscle, may result in heart failure.

Question 14.
Atherosclerosis.
Answer:

  1. Atherosclerosis is the deposition of fatty substances and cholesterol on the inner lining of eateries.
  2. This deposition results in the formation of atherosclerotic plaque.
  3. It results in the decrease of the lumen of the blood vessels causing increasing resistance for the blood to flow which in turn results in the hypertension.
  4. Atherosclerosis of the coronary arteries results in decrease in the blood flow to the heart muscles.
  5. Due to such condition, coronary heart disease is caused.

Question 15.
ECG.
Answer:

  1. Electrocardiogram or ECG is the graphic v record of electrical variations produced by the heart during one heartbeat or cardiac cycle.
  2. ECG is taken with the help of an instrument called electrocardiograph or ECG machine. Electrocardiograph records the action potentials generated by the heart muscles.
  3. The electrical activity of heart is represented in the form of a graph plotted with time on X-axis against voltage displacement on Y-axis.
  4. A normal ECG is a graph having series of ridges and furrows. There are waves such as P-wave, QRS complex and T-wave.
  5. P-wave is a small upwards wave representing impulse generated by SA node. P-wave is caused by atrial depolarization that results in atrial contraction.
  6. QRS-complex wave begins as a downward deflection, continues as a large upright triangular wave and ends’ as a downward wave.
  7. QRS-complex wave represents spreading of impulse from SA node to AV node, then to bundle of His and Purkinje fibres. It causes ventricular depolarization resulting in ventricular contraction.
  8. T-wave is a broad upward wave which represents ventricular repolarization resulting in ventricular relaxation.
  9. Functions of ECG are mainly for diagnosis and also for prognosis. It is useful to detect abnormal functioning of heart as in coronary artery diseases, heart block, angina pectoris, tachycardia, ischemic heart disease, myocardial infarction, cardiac arrest, etc.

Question 16.
Angiography.
Answer:

  1. Angiography is an X-ray imaging of the cardiac blood vessels to locate the position of blockages.
  2. Depending upon the degree of blockage, remedial procedures like angioplasty or by¬pass surgery are performed.
  3. In angioplasty a stent is inserted at the site of blockage to restore the blood supply while in by-pass surgery, the atherosclerotic region is by-passed with part of vein or artery taken from any other suitable part of the body, like hands or legs.

Question 17.
Silent Heart Attack or silent myocardial infarction.
Answer:

  1. Silent heart attack is a type of heart attack that lacks the general symptoms of classic heart attack like extreme chest pain, hypertension, shortness of breath, sweating and dizziness.
  2. Symptoms of silent heart attack are so mild that a person often confuses it for regular « discomfort and thereby ignores it.
  3. Men are more affected by silent heart attack than women.

Question 18.
Heart Transplant.
Answer:

  1. Heart transplant is the replacement of severely damaged heart by normal heart from brain-dead or recently dead donor,
  2. Heart transplant is necessary in case of patients with end-stage heart disease and severe coronary arterial disease.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by respiration? How is it useful in the production of energy?
Answer:

  1. Respiration is the biochemical process in which organic compound such as glucose are oxidized to liberate chemical energy.
  2. During respiration energy is released in gradual and step wise process. The released energy is in the form of bonds of ATP (Adenosine Tri Phosphate) molecules are shown below:
    C6H12O6 + 6O2 → 6CO2 + 6H2O + 38 ATP
  3. ATP is the biologically useful energy. ATP drives most of the life process.
  4. When cell requires the energy, ATP is hydrolyzed and is converted into ADP with subsequent release of energy.
  5. The respiratory system, blood and the body cells play an important role in the process of respiration.

Question 2.
How does exchange of gases take place at the alveolar level?
Answer:
1. Exchange of gases between the alveolar air and the blood is known as external respiration.

2. Simple squamous epithelial layer of alveolus is intimately associated with a similar layer lining the capillary wall. Both of these layers are thin walled and together they make up the respiratory membrane through which gaseous exchange occurs between the alveolar air and the blood.

3. Diffusion of gases will take place from an area of higher partial pressure to an area of lower partial pressure until the partial pressure in the two regions reaches equilibrium.

4. The partial pressure of carbon dioxide of blood entering the pulmonary capillaries is 45 mmHg while partial pressure of carbon dioxide in alveolar air is 40 mmHg. Due to this difference, carbon dioxide diffuses from the capillaries into the alveolus.

5. Similarly, partial pressure of oxygen of blood in pulmonary capillaries is 40 mmHg while in alveolar blood it is 104 mmHg. Due to this difference oxygen diffuses from alveoli to the capillaries.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 2

Question 3.
What is the role of haemoglobin in the transport of oxygen in the blood?
Answer:

  1. Haemoglobin is a respiratory pigment present in cytoplasm of RBCs. About 97% of oxygen is transported by these haemoglobin molecules from lungs to tissues.
  2. Haemoglobin has a high affinity for Oa and combines with it to form oxyhaemoglobin. One molecule of Hb has four FeT, each of which can pick up a molecule of oxygen (O2). Hb + 4O2 → Hb (4O2)
  3. Oxyhaemoglobin is transported from lungs to the tissues where it readily dissociates to release O2.
    Hb (4O2) → Hb + 4O2
  4. In the alveoli where PPOa is high and PPCO2 is low, oxygen binds with haemoglobin, but in tissues, where PPO2 is lower and PPCO2 is high, Oxyhaemoglobin dissociates and releases O2 for diffusion into the tissue cells.

Question 4.
What is blood? What is the normal quantity of blood in an adult human being?
Answer:

  1. Blood is the fluid connective tissue that circulates in the body.
  2. Blood is derived from mesoderm.
  3. It is bright red, slightly alkaline fluid having pH about 7.4. It is salty, viscous fluid heavier than water.
  4. The average sized adult has about 5 litres of blood in his/her body which constitutes about 8% of the total body weight.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 5.
Describe the structure and the function of thrombocytes.
Answer:

  1. Thrombocytes or platelets are non- nucleated, round and biconvex blood corpuscles.
  2. They are smallest corpuscles measuring about 2.5 to 5 mm in diameter with a count of about 2.5 lakhs/cu mm of blood.
  3. Their life span is about 5 to 10 days.
  4. Thrombocytes are formed from megakaryocytes of bone marrow. They break from these cells as fragments during the process of thrombopoiesis.
  5. Thrombocytosis is the increase in platelet count while thrombocytopenia is decrease in platelet count.
  6. Thrombocytes possess thromboplastin which helps in clotting of blood.
  7. Therefore, at the site of injury platelets aggregate and form a platelet plug. Here they release thromboplastin due to which further blood clotting reactions take place.

Question 6.
Describe the structure of the heart wall.
Answer:

  1. The heart wall is composed of three layers, viz. outer epicardium, middle myocardium and inner endocardium.
  2. Epicardium is composed of single layer of mesothelium having flat epithelial cells.
  3. Myocardium is composed of cardiac muscle fibres. These muscle fibres perform the function of systole and diastole by showing contraction and relaxation of muscle wall of the heart.
  4. Endocardium is composed of single layer of flat epithelial cells called endothelium.

Question 7.
Name the two heart sounds. How and when are they produced?
Answer:

  1. In one normal heartbeat the heart sounds like lubb and dup are produced once each.
  2. The rhythmic contraction (Systole) and relaxation (diastole) forms are heartbeat. The heart sounds are due to closure of valves.
  3. Lubb sound is produced during ventricular systole when the cuspid valves close both the atrioventricular apertures preventing blood flow into atria.
  4. Dub sound is produced during ventricular diastole when semilunar valves are closed, preventing backflow of blood from pulmonary trunk and systemic aorta into ventricles.

Question 8.
What is double circulation? What is its significance?
Answer:
(1) Double circulation : Movement of blood twice through the heart during one circulation cycle is called double circulation. Body → heart → lungs → heart → body is the course of double circulation.

(2) Significance of double circulation:
a. Double circulation is more effective type of circulation in which oxygenated and deoxygenated type of blood do not intermix.
b. The systemic circulation i.e. from body to heart and back to body while the pulmonary circulation i.e. from heart to lungs and back to heart circulate the blood uniformly.

(3) Coronary and hepatic portal circulation is also achieved due to double circulation.

Question 9.
Describe pulmonary and systemic circulation.
Answer:

  1. In human beings, there is double circulation because blood passes twice through the heart during one cardiac cycle.
  2. The blood follows two routes viz. pulmonary and systemic.
  3. Pulmonary circulation is circulation between heart and lungs. Systemic circulation is the circulation between the heart and body organs (except lungs).
  4. During pulmonary circulation, the blood passes from the right ventricle to the left atrium of the heart through lungs.
  5. The right ventricle pumps deoxygenated blood into the pulmonary trunk which carries it to lungs for oxygenation. The oxygenated blood from the lungs is brought to left atrium by two pairs of pulmonary veins.
  6. During systemic circulation, the blood from the left ventricle passes to the right atrium of heart through body organs.
  7. The left ventricle pumps oxygenated blood into the systemic aorta which carries it to all body organs except lungs. The deoxygenated blood from the body organs is brought to right atrium by superior and inferior venae cavae.

Question 10.
How is cardiac activity regulated?
Answer:

  1. Normal activities of the heart are auto regulated. The specialized muscles help in this regulation.
  2. The heart is said to be myogenic due to this ability.
  3. In the medulla oblongata of brain, there is cardiovascular centre,
  4. From this centre, sympathetic and parasympathetic nerves innervate the sinoatrial node.
  5. Sympathetic nerves secrete adrenaline and it stimulates and increases the heartbeat.
  6. Parasympathetic nerves secrete acetylcholine and it decreases the heart rate.
  7. Rate of heartbeat is controlled in response to inputs from various receptors like proprio-receptors.
  8. These receptors monitor the position of limbs and muscles. There are chemoreceptors which monitor chemical change in blood and baroreceptors that monitor the stretching of main arteries and veins.

Chemical control on heart rate:

  1. Hypoxia, acidosis, alkalosis cause decrease in cardiac activity.
  2. Hormones like epinephrine and nor epinephrine enhance the cardiac activity.
  3. Elevated blood level of K+ and Na+ decreases the cardiac activity.

Question 11.
What are the main features of respiratory surface?
Answer:
The respiratory surface, for the efficient gaseous exchange should have the following features:

  1. It should have a large surface area.
  2. It should be thin, highly vascular and permeable to allow exchange of gases.
  3. It should be moist.

Question 12.
What is the co-relationship between activeness of organism and complexity of transport system?
Answer:

  1. As the size of an organism increases, its surface area to volume ratio decreases. This means it has relatively less surface area available for substances to diffuse through.
  2. Large multicellular organisms therefore cannot rely on diffusion alone to supply their cells with Substances such as food and oxygen and to remove waste products. Large multicellular organisms require specialized transport system.
  3. In short for the organisms to become active, they must be having complex transport system to bring about their vital functions rapidly.

Question 13.
What are the granules in granulocytes?
Answer:

  1. Neutrophils : Granules . of neutrophils contain cationic proteins and other proteins that are used to kill bacteria, some enzymes to breakdown bacterial proteins, lysozymes to breakdown bacterial cell wall. etc.
  2. Eosinophils : Granules of eosinophil contains a unique toxic basic protein receptors that bind to IgE used to help in killing parasites.
  3. Basophils : Granules of basophils contain abundant histamine, heparin and platelet activating factor.

Question 14.
What is haemoglobin count in normal human beings? What is the function of haemoglobin?
Answer:

  1. The normal haemoglobin in adult male is 13-18 mg/100 ml of blood.
  2. In a normal adult female, it is about 11.5-16.5 mg/100 ml of blood.
  3. In anaemic individuals there is lesser amount of haemoglobin.
  4. Functions of haemoglobin is to transport oxygen from lungs to tissues and carbon dioxide from tissues of lungs.
  5. Haemoglobin acts as a buffer and maintains the blood pH.

Question 15.
Why has the heart-recipient to rely upon life-time supply of immunosuppressants?
Answer:
Person who has undergone heart transplant needs lifetime supply of immunosuppressants because in these persons organ rejection is a constant threat. Keeping away the immune system from attacking the transplanted organ requires constant supply of immunosuppressant drugs. These drugs help prevent immune system from attacking (“rejecting”) the donor organ. Typically, these drugs are taken for the life-time for maintaining transplanted organ.

Question 16.
Why is it difficult to hold one’s breath beyond a limit?
Answer:

  1. It is difficult to hold one’s breath beyond a limit because the pressure of oxygen and carbon dioxide in blood changes as one holds his breath.
  2. When the breath is held beyond a limit, the urge to breath becomes irresistible.
  3.  When the breath is held forever, body becomes starved of oxygen and person may fall unconscious and the instinct to breath would take over.

Question 17.
Why and when do the leucocytes perform diapedesis?
Answer:

  1. Diapedesis is the movement of leucocytes through the wall of blood capillaries into the tissue space.
  2. Leucocytes perform diapedesis as an important part of their reaction to tissue injury or infection.
  3. This process forms the part of the innate immune response, involving recruitment of non-specific leucocytes.
  4. Monocytes also use this process during their development into macrophages.
  5. Diapedesis helps leucocytes to perform their functions like phagocytosis, production of antibodies, secretion of inflammatory response chemicals, etc.

Question 18.
Why are obese persons prone to hypertension?
Answer:
(1) Being overweight or obese is a major cause of hypertension, accounting for 65% to 75% of the risk for human primary hypertension.

(2) Following factors play an important role in initiating obesity hypertension:

  1. Physical compression of the kidneys by fat.
  2. Activation of the renin-angiotensin – aldosterone system
  3. Increased sympathetic nervous system activity.
  4. Obesity means more body-surface area. In order to supply blood to these parts. Heart and blood vessels work more resulting into hypertensions.

(3) Blood pressure rises as body weight increases and therefore obese persons are prone to hypertension.

Question 19.
Why does the transplanted heart beats at higher rate than normal?
Answer:

  1. The transplanted heart beats at higher rate than normal (about 100 to 110 beats per minute) because the nerves leading to the heart are cut during the operation. These nerves stimulate the pacemaker i.e. Sinoatrial node.
  2. The new heart also responds more slowly to exercise and does not increase its rate as quickly as before.

Question 20.
Why do large animals cannot carry out respiration without the help of circulatory system?
Answer:

  1. Large animals have various organ systems which always work in a coordinated manner.
  2. These animals provide large respiratory surfaces (numerous alveoli) for the exchange of gases. But these respiratory gases must be carried to the cells of tissues which are away from the respiratory surfaces.
  3. To carry these gases to tissues, there is need of transport system. These gasses are transported from respiratory surfaces to the cells of tissues through blood as a transporting medium.
  4. Therefore, large animals cannot carry out respiration without the help of circulatory system.

Question 21.
What is immunity? Name its types.
Answer:

  1. Immunity is the general ability of a body to recognize, neutralize or destroy and eliminate foreign substances or resist a particular infection or disease.
  2. There are two basic types of immunity, viz. innate immunity and acquired immunity, Acquired immunity is further divided into four types, i.e. Natural acquired active immunity, Natural acquired passive immunity, Artificial acquired active passive immunity and Artificial acquired passive immunity.

Question 22.
Why does the platelet count decrease in dengue patient?
Answer:

  1. The causative pathogen of dengue is dengue virus which induces bone marrow suppression. Since in bone marrow blood cells are formed its suppression causes the deficiency of blood cells leading to low platelet count.
  2. The dengue virus also links with platelets in the blood when there is a virus-specific antibody present in the human body.
  3. When vascular endothelial cell which are infected with dengue virus gets combined with platelets, they tend to destroy platelets. This is one of the major causes of low platelet count in dengue fever.
  4. Even the antibodies that are produced after infection of the dengue virus also cause the destruction of platelets, thus lowering the platelet count.

Question 23.
Why does our immune system fail against pathogens like Trypanosoma cruzi and Plasmodium?
Answer:

  1. Microbes have evolved a diverse range of strategies to destroy the host immune system. The protozoan parasite Trypanosoma cruzi and Plasmodium show similar such adaptations to disturb host defence mechanism.
  2. This parasite attacks host tissues including both peripheral and central lymphoid tissues.
  3. This causes systemic acute response in host body which the parasite tries to overcome. The parasite in fact weakens both innate and acquired immunity.
  4. It interferes with the antigen presenting function of dendritic cells via an action on hosts like lectin receptors. These receptors also induce suppression of CD4+ T cells responses. Therefore, our immune system fail against such pathogens.

Question 24.
What is the relation between immunity and organ transplantation?
Answer:

  1. Those who undergo an organ transplant face the possibility that their immune system will reject their new organ and that they will always be at a higher risk for infections.
  2. The immune system is able to recognize the difference between cells that belong to our body and those that do not by learning to identity protein markers (antigens) that are found on cell and infection surfaces.
  3. In people, the antigens or markers that identity their immune system are referred to as the human leukocyte antigen (HLA).
  4. Antigens that are recognized as unfriendly invaders stimulate an immune response to destroy them.
  5. Therefore, when organ transplantation is done, the immune responses are temporarily stalled. This helps in acceptance of the graft in the recipient’s body.

Question 25.
How do monocytes perform amoeboid movement and phagocytosis?
Answer:
Monocytes can perform phagocytosis. They do this by using intermediary or opsonising proteins such as antibodies or complement that coat the pathogen. They also bind to the microbe directly via pattern-recognition receptors that recognize pathogens. In this way they perform amoeboid movement and indulge in phagocytosis.

Question 26.
How do monocytes modify into macrophages?
Answer:
Monocytes upon having inflammation, selectively travel to the sites of inflammation. Here they produce inflammatory cytokines and contribute to local and systemic inflammation. They are highly infiltrative. They differentiate into inflammatory macrophages, which then remove PAMPs or pathogen-associated molecular patterns and cell debris.

Chart based/Table based questions

Question 1.
Complete the following:

Organism Habitat Respiratory surface/organ
1. Insects Terrestrial —————
2. Amphibian tadpoles of frog, salamanders —————- —————-
3. Fish Aquatic ————–
4. Reptiles, Birds and Mammals —————- —————-

Answer:

Organism Habitat Respiratory surface/organ
1. Insects Terrestrial Tracheal tubes and spiracles
2. Amphibian tadpoles of frog, salamanders Aquatic External gills
3. Fish Aquatic Internal gills
4. Reptiles, Birds and Mammals Terrestrial Lungs

Question 2.

Partial pressure of gases Alveolar air Pulmonary, capillaries
PPO2 ————— —————
PPCO2 —————- —————-

Answer:

Partial pressure of gases Alveolar air Pulmonary, capillaries
PPO2 104 mm Hg 40 mm Hg
PPCO2 40 mm Hg 45 mm Hg

Question 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 4

Question 4.
Complete the following flow chart
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 6

Question 5.
Complete the following Table

Waves on ECG Heart Activity Caused due to
P wave Atrial contraction —————-
QRS wave —————– Ventricular depolarization
T wave —————– Ventricular repolarization

Answer:

Waves on ECG Heart Activity Caused due to
P wave Atrial contraction Atrial depolarization
QRS wave Ventricular contraction Ventricular depolarization
T wave Ventricular contraction Ventricular repolarization

Question 6.

Cardiovascular disorders Symptom
Coronary Artery Diseases (CAD) Deposition of calcium, fat, cholesterol and ———————
—————- Pain in chest resulting from reduction in the blood supply to the cardiac muscles.
Silent Heart Attack Myocardial infarction without ———————-

Answer:

Cardiovascular disorders Symptom
Coronary Artery Diseases (CAD) Deposition of calcium, fat, cholesterol and fibrous tissues in blood vessels.
Angina pectoris Pain in chest resulting from reduction in the blood supply to the cardiac muscles.
Silent Heart Attack Myocardial infarction without showing symptoms of classical heart attack.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 7.

Instrument / Technique Purpose of use
Sphygmomanometer ———————
—————- X-ray imaging of the cardiac blood vessels to locate the position of blockages.
————— To measure ECG.

Answer:

Instrument / Technique Purpose of use
Sphygmomanometer To measure blood pressure.
Angiography X-ray imaging of the cardiac blood vessels to locate the position of blockages.
Electrocardiograph To measure ECG.

Diagram based questions

Question 1.
Give the name and function of A and ‘B’ from the diagram given below
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 7
Answer:

Name Function
(A) Epiglottis Epiglottis prevents the entry of food into trachea.
(B) Tracheal cartilage Tracheal cartilage prevents collapse of trachea and always keeps it open.

Question 2.
Label parts A’ and ‘B’ from the following diagram and answer the following questions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 8
(a) What is the partial pressure of O2 in part ‘B’?
(b) What is the partial pressure of CO2 in part A’?
(c) How many alveoli are present in the lungs?
Answer:
Label A → Blood from pulmonary artery Label B → Alveolus
(a) The partial pressure of O2 in alveolar air is 104 mm Hg.
(b) The partial pressure of CO2 in pulmonary capillaries is 45 mmHg.
(c) There are about 700 million alveoli in the lungs.

Question 3.
Label parts A’ and ‘B’ from the given diagram and give their functions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 9
Answer: Part A → Sinoatrial [SA] node
Function : SA node acts as pacemaker of heart because it has the power of generating a new wave of contraction and making the pace of contraction.
Part B → Atrioventricular [AV] node
Function : Atrioventricular [AV] node acts as pace-setter of heart.

Question 4.
Sketch and label the dorsal (posterior) view of human heart.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 10

Question 5.
Sketch and label the ventral (anterior) view of human heart.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 11

Question 6.
Sketch and label – Electrocardiogram or ECG.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 12

Question 7.
Sketch and label – T.S. of Artery, Vein and Capillary.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 13

Question 8.
Observe the diagrams of blood cells and answer the following questions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 14
(a) Which of the above is agranulocyte ?
(b) Describe its origin and structure.
(c) Mention its types.
(d) Explain its function.
Answer:
(a) The figure ‘D’ is agranulocyte.
(b) Structure : Agranulocytes do not show cytoplasmic granules and their nucleus is not lobed.
(c) Agranulocytes are of two types, viz. lymphocytes and monocytes.
(d) Functions of agranulocytes : Agranulocytes are responsible for immune response of body by producing antibodies and monocytes are phagocytic in function.

Question 9.
Observe the diagrammatic representation of double circulation and answer the given questions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 15

  1. Why the circulation shown in the above diagram is called double circulation?
  2. What are the two main routes of double circulation?
  3. Which blood vessels carry oxygented blood to heart and deoxygenated blood to lungs?
  4. Which blood vessels carry deoxygented blood to heart and oxygenated blood to body organs?

Answer:

  1. During circulation, blood passes twice through the heart, therefore it is called double circulation.
  2. (1) Pulmonary circulation which is from heart to lungs and back from lungs to heart.
    (2) Systemic circulation which is from heart to body and back from all body organs to the heart.
  3. Oxygenated blood is carried to the heart by pulmonary veins. Dexoygenated blood is carried to the lungs by pulmonary artery.
  4. Deoxygenated blood is carried to heart by superior and inferior vena cavae. Oxygenated blood is carried to the body organs by systemic or dorsal aorta.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 10.
Observe the cardiac cycle given below and answer the following questions
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 16

  1. Which phases of cardiac cycle are shown in the above diagrammatic representation ?
  2. How much time is taken for entire heart to be in diastole?
  3. How much longer is ventricular systole as compared to atrial systole?

Answer:

  1. There are four main phases of cardiac cycle shown in the above diagram. They are
    (1) AS : Arterial systole. (2) AD : Atrial diastole. (3) VS : Ventricular systole.
    (4) VD : Ventricular diastole which is along with joint diastole.
  2. Diastole of entire heart is called joint diastole, which is for about 0.4 second.
  3. Ventricular systole is almost for the double time than the atrial systole. Atrial systole is for 0.15 second whereas ventricular systole is for 0.3 second.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Describe the respiratory system of human.
Answer:
Respiratory system of human : Human respiratory system consists of nostrils, nasal chambers, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi, bronchioles, lungs, diaphragm and intercostal muscles.
1. Nostrils and nasal chambers:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 17

  1. Oxygen rich air is taken in the body through the nostrils or external nares. They are external opening of the nose. Carbon dioxide and water vapour are also released out of the body through the same passage i.e. the nostrils.
  2. Internal nares open into the pharynx. The space between external and internal nares is knows as nasal chamber which is lined internally by mucous membrane and ciliated epithelium.
  3. Nasal chamber is divided into two parts by a cartilage called mesethmoid. Each part of these halves is further divided into three regions, viz. vestibule, respiratory part and sensory part.
  4. Vestibule is the anteriormost part of nasal chamber. In the vestibule fine hairs are present. They filter out the dust particles and prevent them from going inside.
  5. Respiratory part is the second region which is richly supplied with the capillaries. Air is made warm and moist in this region.
  6. Sensory part is lined by sensory epithelium. It is concerned with the detection of smell.

2. Pharynx:

  1. Pharynx is a short and vertical tube measuring about 12 cm in length. In pharynx the respiratory and food passages cross each other.
  2. The upper part of pharynx is known as naso-pharynx which conducts the air. The lower part is called laryngo-pharynx or oro¬pharynx which conducts food to the oesophagus.
  3. Tonsils that are made up of lymphatic tissue are present in the pharynx. They kill the bacteria by trapping them in the mucus.

3. Larynx:

  1. Larynx produces sound. In males it increases in size at puberty. This is termed as Adam’s apple. It is clearly seen in the neck region.
  2. From pharynx air enters the larynx. The opening through which it enters is called glottis. Glottis is guarded by a flap called epiglottis.
  3. Epiglottis prevents the entry of food particles into the trachea.
  4. TWo folds of elastic tissue called vocal cords are seen along the side of glottis. When they vibrate the sound is produced.

4. Trachea:

  1. The trachea or wind pipe is about 12 cm long and 2.5 cm wide.
  2. It is situated in front of the oesophagus and runs downwards in the thorax through the neck.
  3. The trachea is made up of fibrous muscular tissue wall which is supported by ‘C’-shaped cartilages. These cartilaginous rings are 16 to 20 in number.
  4. Internally the tracheal wall bears ciliated epithelium and mucous glands.
  5. When any foreign particle enters the trachea inadvertently. It is thrown out by coughing action.
  6. Mucous and ciliary action remove the dust particles and push them upwards to the larynx. These particles are then gulped and taken into the oesophagus.

5. Bronchi and bronchioles:

  1. At the distal end, the trachea divides into two bronchi (Singular – bronchus). Bronchi lie below the sternum or breast bone.
  2. Each bronchus has a complete ring of cartilage for support. The two bronchi enter into the lungs on either side.
  3. After entering into the lungs each bronchus divides into secondary and tertiary bronchi. The tertiary bronchi divide and re-divide to form minute bronchioles.
  4. Bronchioles do not have cartilages in their walls. Each bronchiole ends into a balloon like alveolus.
  5. Owing to the presence of alveoli the lungs become spongy and elastic.

6. Lungs:

  1. Lungs are principal respiratory organs located in the thoracic cavity.
  2. They are pinkish, soft, hollow, paired, elastic and distensible organs.
  3. Each lung is enclosed in a pleural sac which consists of two membranes, viz. an outer parietal and inner visceral.
  4. The parietal and visceral membranes enclose pleural cavity which is filled with pleural fluid. The pleural fluid lubricates and prevents friction when pleural membranes slide on each other.
  5. Lungs are highly vascular as they are richly supplied with blood capillaries.
  6. The left lung has two lobes while the right lung has three lobes. Each lobe has many bronchioles and alveolar sacs. The alveolar sacs are spherical and thin walled.
  7. Each alveolar sac contains about 20 alveoli. The alveoli appear as a bunch of grapes. The lobule in the lung thus consists of alveolar ducts, alveolar sacs and alveoli.
  8. Each alveolus has thin and elastic walls. It is about 0.1 mm in diameter. Alveoli are covered by network of capillaries from pulmonary artery and pulmonary vein. A network of pulmonary capillaries supply the alveolus.
  9. The alveolar wall is 0.0001 mm thick and made up of simple, non-ciliated, squamous epithelium. It has collagen and elastin fibres.
  10. Every lung has about 700 million alveoli. They increase the surface area of the lungs for exchange of gases.

Question 2.
Describe the process of respiration in man.
OR
Describe the mechanism of respiration in human beings.
Answer:
Respiration includes breathing, external respiration, internal respiration and cellular respiration.
A. Breathing : During breathing air comes in and goes out of the lungs. The rate of gaseous exchange is speeded up by breathing. Breathing involves two processes, viz. inspiration and expiration
1. Inspiration:

  1. Inspiration is the process in which the air containing oxygen is taken inside the lung.
  2. Inspiration is the active process which is possible due to intercostal muscles, sternum and diaphragm.
  3. During inspiration, intercostal muscles contract, ribs are pulled outward as a result of which the space in the thoracic cavity is increased.
  4. At the same time the lower part of the breast bone is raised and diaphragm flattens by contraction.
  5. The volume of thoracic cavity is thus increased.
  6. Pressure in the lungs decreases as the lungs expand and their volume is increased. Owing to this the atmospheric air enters inside the body through respiratory passage and reaches the lungs.

2. Expiration:

  1. Expiration is the process in which air containing carbon dioxide and water vapour is expelled out of the lungs.
  2. Expiration is a passive process.
  3. During expiration, intercostal muscles relax and ribs are pulled inwards.
  4. The diaphragm relaxes and becomes dome shaped. Intercostal muscles contract simultaneously and due to these events, the volume of the thoracic cavity is reduced.
  5. The pressure on the lungs is thus increased as a result of which they are compressed.
  6. Due to this, air rushes out of the lungs and is expelled out through the nose.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 18

B. External respiration : The process of external respiration takes place in the lungs where oxygen from the lungs diffuses into the blood capillaries present in the lung tissue. Similarly carbon dioxide from the blood capillaries diffuses out and enters in the alveoli in the lungs.

C. Internal respiration : Internal respiration takes place in the cells of the body. Oxygen brought by the blood is given to the cells and the tissues during internal respiration. Similarly carbon dioxide passes into the blood cells from the cells and tissues.

D. Cellular respiration : Cellular respiration takes place in the mitochondria of the cell, where oxygen is utilised to liberate energy in the form of ATP molecules.

Question 3.
Describe the respiratory disorders.
Answer:

  1. Following are some respiratory disorders : Emphysema is caused due to alveolar abnormalities. Chronic bronchitis results into coughing and shortness of breath.
  2. Viral and bacterial respiratory diseases. Acute bronchitis, sinusitis, laryngitis and pneumonia are some of the inflammatory diseases caused either due to virus or due to bacteria.
  3. Allergens like pollen or pet dander can cause asthma. In asthma constriction of bronchioles takes place causing periodic wheezing and difficulty in breathing.
  4. Occupational hazards cause respiratory diseases like silicosis or asbestosis. In these disorders there is inflammation fibrosis leading to lung damage.

Treatments of respiratory diseases:

  1. Bacterial diseases can be completely cured by specific antibiotics.
  2. Viral diseases need to be taken care of by using vaporizers and decongestants.
  3. Asthma needs treatment by inhalers and nebulizers.
  4. For occupational disorders proper mask and other protective gear is a must.
  5. Lethal diseases like pneumonia should be controlled by medication and rest.

Question 4.
How does transport of O2 and CO2 take place in man?
Answer:
1. Transport of O2:

  1. Only 3% of the total oxygen is transported in a dissolved state by the plasma.
  2. The remaining 97% is transported in the form of oxyhaemoglobin in the RBCs.
  3. Hemoglobin present is RBCs combines with oxygen to form oxyhaemoglobin.
    Hb + 4O2 → Hb (4O2)
  4. Oxyhaemoglobin is transported from lungs to the tissues where it readily dissociates to release O2.
  5. Binding of oxygen with haemoglobin in the alveoli and release of oxygen into the tissue cells depends upon the difference in partial pressure of O2 and CO2.

2. Transport of CO2: Carbon dioxide is transported by RBCs and plasma in three different forms.

  1. By plasma in solution form (7%) : About 7% of CO2 is transported in a dissolved form as carbonic acid (which can be broken down into CO2 and H2O).
    CO2 + H2O = H2CO3.
  2. By bicarbonate ions (70%) : Nearly 70% of carbon dioxide is transported in the form of sodium bicarbonate/potassium bicarbonate in the plasma.
  3. RBCs contains an enzyme, carbonic anhydrase. In the presence of this enzyme CO2 combines with water to form carbonic acid.
  4. Carbonic anhydrase also brings about dissociation of carbonic acid immediately tending to large accumulation of HCO3- ions inside the RBCs.
    CO2 + H2O Carbonic anhydrese H2CO2 Carbonic anhydrase H+ + HCO3-
  5. The bicarbonate ions moves out of RBCs and this would bring about imbalance of the charge inside the RBCs.
  6. To maintain the ionic balance, Cl ions diffuse from plasma into the RBCs. This movement of chloride ions is known as chloride shift or Hamburger’s phenomenon.
  7. HCO3- ions from the plasma then joins to Na+/K+ forming NaHCO3/KHCO3 (to maintain PH of blood).
    HCO3- + Na+ → NaHCO3 Sodium bicarbonate
  8. H+ is taken up by haemoglobin to form Reduced Hb (HHb).
  9. At the level of the lungs due to the low partial pressure of the alveolar air, hydrogen ion and bicarbonate ions recombine to form carbonic acid and in presence of carbonic anhydrase it again yields carbon dioxide and water.
    H+ + HCO3- Carbonic anhydrase H2CO3 Carbonic anhydrase CO2 + H2O.

3. By red blood cells (23%):

  1. Carbon dioxide binds with the amino group of the haemoglobin and form a loosely bound compound carbaminohaemoglobin Hb + CO2 = HbCO2
  2. Due to low partial pressure of CO2 at alveolus carbaminohaemoglobin decomposes releasing the carbon dioxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 5.
Describe different types of leucocytes.
OR
Describe five types of leucocytes, with the help of diagrams. Add a note on their functions.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 19

  1. Leucocytes or White Blood Corpuscles (WBCs) are colourless, nucleated, amoeboid and phagocytic cells.
  2. Their size ranges between 8 to 15 pm. Total WBC count is 5000 to 9000 WBCs/cu mm of blood. The average life span of a WBC is about 3 to 4 days.
  3. They are formed by leucopoiesis in red bone marrow, spleen, lymph nodes, tonsils, thymus and Payer’s patches, whereas the dead WBCs are destroyed by phagocytosis in blood, liver and lymph nodes.
  4. Leucocytes are mainly divided into two types, viz., granulocytes and agranulocytes.
  5. Granulocytes : Granulocytes are cells with granular cytoplasm and lobed nucleus. Based on their staining properties and shape of nucleus, they are of three types, viz. neutrophils, eosinophils and basophils.

(I) Neutrophils:

  1. In neutrophils, the cytoplasmic granules take up neutral stains.
  2. Their nucleus is three to five lobed.
  3. It may undergo changes in structure hence they are called polymorphonuclear leucocytes or polymorphs.
  4. Neutrophils are about 70% of total WBCs.
  5. They are phagocytic in function and engulf microorganisms.

(II) Eosinophils or acidophils:

  1. Cytoplasmic granules of eosinophils take up acidic dyes such as eosin. They have bilobed nucleus.
  2. Eosinophils are about 3% of total WBCs.
  3. They are non-phagocytic in nature.
  4. Their number increases (i.e. eosinophilia) during allergic conditions.
  5. They have antihistamine property.

(III) Basophils:

  1. The cytoplasmic granules of basophils take up basic stains such as methylene blue.
  2. They have twisted nucleus.
  3. In size, they are smallest and constitute about 0.5% of total WBCs.
  4. They too are non-phagocytic.
  5. Their function is to release heparin which acts as an anticoagulant and histamine that is involved in inflammatory and allergic reaction.

Agranulocytes : There are two types of agranulocytes, viz. monocytes and lymphocytes. Agranulocytes do not show cytoplasmic granules and their nucleus is not lobed. They are of two types, viz. lymphocytes and monocytes.
(I) Lymphocytes:

  1. Agranulocytes with a large round nucleus are called lymphocyte.
  2. They are about 30% of total WBCs.
  3. Agranulocytes are responsible for immune response of the body by producing antibodies.

(II) Monocytes:

  1. Largest of all WBCs having large kidney shaped nucleus are monocytes. They are about 5% of total WBCs.
  2. They are phagocytic in function.
  3. They can differentiate into macrophages for engulfing microorganisms and removing cell debris. Hence they are also called scavengers.
  4. At the site of infections they are seen in more enlarged form.

Question 6.
Give an account of external features of the human heart.
Answer:
(1) The heart is hollow, muscular, conical organ about the size of one’s fist with broad base and narrow apex tilted towards left measuring about 12 cm in length. 9 cm in breadth and weighing about 250 to 300 grams.

(2) The human heart has four chambers, two atria which are superior, small, thin walled receiving chambers and two ventricles which are inferior, large, thick walled, distributing chambers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 20

(3) Externally there is a transverse groove between the atria and the ventricles which is known as atrioventricular groove or coronary sulcus.

(4) Between the right and left ventricles there is interventricular sulcus (pi. sulci). In these sulci the coronary arteries and coronary veins are present.

(5) Oxygenated blood to the heart is supplied by coronary arteries while coronary veins collect deoxygenated blood from the heart. The coronary veins join to form coronary sinus which opens into the right atrium.

(6) Right atrium is larger in size than the left atrium. Deoxygenated blood from all over the body is brought through superior vena cava and inferior vena cava and poured into right atrium. Oxygenated blood from lungs is brought to heart by two pairs of pulmonary veins which carry it to the left atrium.

(7) Pulmonary trunk is seen arising from the right ventricle, which carries deoxygenated blood to lungs. While systemic aorta arises from the left ventricle and carries oxygenated blood to all parts of the body.

(8) The pulmonary trunk and systemic aorta are connected by ligamentum arteriosum that represents remnant of ductus arteriosus of foetus.

Question 7.
With the help of well labelled diagram describe the internal structure of human heart.
OR
Sketch and label internal view of heart.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 21
The heart shows four chambers with two atria and two ventricles.

I. Atria:
1. Right atrium:

  1. There are two atria which are separated from each other by interatrial septum. They are thin walled receiving chambers on the upper side.
  2. The right atrium receives deoxygenated blood from upper part of body through superior vena cava and from the lower part of the body by inferior vena cava. In the right atrium opens the coronary sinus.
  3. Eustachian valve guards the opening of inferior vena cava while opening of coronary sinus is guarded by Thebesian valve.
  4. On the right side of interatrial septum is seen an oval depression called the fossa ovalis. In the interatrial septum of the foetus there is an oval opening called foramen ovale. Fossa ovalis is remnant of this foramen ovale.
  5. Right atrium opens into the right ventricle.

2. Left atrium:

  1. The oxygenated blood from the lungs is brought into left atrium through four openings of pulmonary veins.
  2. Left atrium opens into the left ventricle.

II. Ventricles:

  1. There are two ventricles which are separated from each other by interventricular septum. They are two thick walled distributing chambers situated on the lower side of the heart.
  2. Left ventricle has thickest wall as it pumps blood to all parts of the body.
  3. The inner surface of the ventricle is thrown into a series of irregular muscular ridges called columnae carnae or trabeculae carnae.
  4. Each atrium opens into the ventricle of its side through atrioventricular aperture. These apertures are guarded by valves made up of connective tissue. The right atrioventricular valve has three flaps hence called tricuspid valve. Left atrioventricular valve has two flaps hence called bicuspid valve or mitral valve.
  5. Bicuspid and tricuspid valves are attached to papillary muscles of ventricles by chordae tendinae. The chordae tendinae prevent the valves from turning back into the atria during the contraction of ventricles.
  6. From the right ventricle arises pulmonary trunk which carries deoxygenated blood to lungs for oxygenation.
  7. From the left ventricle arise systemic aorta which distributes oxygenated blood to all parts of the body.
  8. Pulmonary aorta and systemic aorta has three semilunar valves at the base which prevent backward flow of blood during ventricular diastole.

Question 8.
With the help of suitable diagram, describe the conducting system of human heart.
Answer:
(1) The human heart is myogenic.

(2) Conducting system of the heart consists of sinoatrial node, atrioventricular node, bundles of His and Purkinje’s fibre system.

(3) The pacemaker of the heart is sinoatrial node because here the heartbeat originates. Pacemaker has power of generation of wave of contraction. This is modified cardiac tissue, also called a nodal tissue.

(4) SA node is situated in the wall of right atrium near the opening of superior vena cava. The wave of contraction generated by SA node is conducted by cardiac muscle fibres to both the atria. This results in contraction resulting into atrial systole.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation 22

(5) The atrioventricular node (AV node) is located in the wall of right atrium near the opening of coronary sinus. AV node receives the wave of contraction generated by SA node through intermodal pathways.

(6) Bundle of His arises from AV node and divides into right and left bundle branches. These are located in the interventricular septum.

(7) The bundle branches further form Purkinje fibres which penetrate into myocardium of ventricles.

(8) The bundle of His and Purkinje fibres conduct the wave of contraction from AV node to myocardium of ventricles causing ventricular systole.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 9.
Describe the detail cardiac cycle.
OR
Explain the working of heart.
Answer:
(1) The working of heart or cardiac cycle is formed by atrial systole, ventricular systole and joint diastole. It takes place in 0.8 second.

(2) During atrial systole from right atrium, the deoxygenated blood is poured into right ventricle through atrioventricular aperture. Similarly, from left atrium, the oxygenated blood enters the left ventricle through atrioventricular aperture. This entire atrial systole lasts for 0.1 second.

(3) After auricular systole follows the ventricular systole. During ventricular systole, the deoxygenated blood from the right ventricle enters the pulmonary trunk, which carries blood to lungs for oxygenation. At the same time, the oxygenated blood from the left ventricle enters the aorta which is then supplied to all parts of the body. The ventricular systole lasts for 0.3 second.

(4) Joint diastole or complete cardiac diastole is the phase taking place after the systole, when the entire heart undergoes relaxation, for 0.4 second.

(5) During joint diastole, the right atrium receives deoxygenated blood from all parts of the body through superior vena cava, inferior vena cava and coronary sinus. The left atrium receives oxygenated blood from the lungs through two pairs of pulmonary veins.

Question 10.
What is blood clotting? How and when does it occur?
Answer:

  1. Blood clotting is coagulation of blood in order to stop the blood flow and resuting blood loss at the time of injury.
  2. When the blood vessel is intact, blood does not clot due to the presence of active anticoagulants like heparin and antithrombin. But when there is an injury causing rupture of a blood vessel, bleeding starts.
  3. This bleeding is stopped by the process of blood clotting during which liquid blood is converted into semisolid jelly.

The events occurring during blood clotting are as follows:

  1. Release of thromboplastin from thrombocytes and injured tissue.
  2. Formation of enzyme prothrombinase in the blood due to initiation of thromboplastin.
  3. Conversion of inactive prothrombin into active thrombin by prothrombinase in the presence of Ca ions.
  4. Conversion of soluble fibrinogen into insoluble fibrin by thrombin.
  5. Formation of a clot by enmeshing platelets, other blood cells and plasma in the fibrin fibres enmesh.

These reactions occur in 2 to 8 minutes. Therefore, clotting time is said to be 2 to 8 minutes.

Question 11.
What is repolarization and depolarization ?
Answer:
Repolarization is a stage of an action potential in which the cell experiences a reduction of voltage due to the efflux of potassium (K+) ions along its electrochemical gradient. This phase occurs after the cell reaches its highest voltage from depolarization.

Depolarization occurs in the four chambers of the heart : both atria first and then both ventricles. The SA node sends the depolarization wave to the atrioventricular (AV) node which-with about a 100 minutes delay to let the atria finish contracting-then causes contraction in both ventricles, seen in the QRS wave.

Question 12.
What is the correlation between depolarization and repolarization as well as contraction and relaxation of the heart?
Answer:
Depolarization and Repolarization:

  1. When cardiac cells are at rest, they are polarized, meaning no electrical activity takes place.
  2. The cell membrane of the cardiac muscle cell separates different concentrations of ions, such as sodium, potassium, and calcium. This is called the resting potential.
  3. Electrical impulses are generated by specialized cardiac cells automatically.
  4. Once an electrical cell generates an electrical impulse, this electrical impulse causes the ions to cross the cell membrane and causes the action potential, also called depolarization.
  5. The movement of ions across the cell membrane through sodium, potassium and calcium channels, is the drive that causes contraction of the cardiac cells/muscle.
  6. Depolarization with corresponding contraction of myocardial muscle moves as a wave through the heart. Depolarization thus corresponds with contraction of heart.
  7. Repolarization is the return of the ions to their previous resting state, which corresponds with relaxation of the myocardial muscle. Repolarization thus corresponds with relaxation of heart.
  8. Depolarization and repolarization are electrical activities which cause muscular activity.
  9. The electrical changes in the myocardial cell during the depolarization – repolarization cycle is detected on ECG.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 8 Respiration and Circulation

Question 13.
How are the signals detected and amplified by electrocardiograph?
Answer:

  1. The action potential created by contractions of the heart wall spreads electrical currents from the heart throughout the body.
  2. The spreading electrical currents create different potentials at points in the body, which can be sensed by electrodes placed on the skin.
  3. The electrodes are made of metals and salts and they act as biological transducers.
  4. Ten electrodes are attached to different points on the body while taking ECG.
  5. There Eire three main leads responsible for measuring the electrical potential difference between arms and legs.
  6. Electrical potential difference between electrodes is recorded.
  7. As in all ECG lead measurements, the electrode connected to the right leg is considered the ground node.
  8. These ECG signals are acquired using a biopotential amplifier and then displayed using instrumentation software. This is recorded on ECG machine or electrocardiograph. The recorded ECG is anailysed by an expert.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Multiple choice questions

Question 1.
For the following, which is the aspect of growth? Example – Increase in length, size and number of cells.
(a) Quantitative
(b) Qualitative
(c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) Three dimensional
Answer:
(a) Quantitative

Question 2.
In vascular plants, growth takes place due to ………………..
(a) conducting tissues
(b) embryo
(c) meristems
(d) stem cell
Answer:
(c) meristems

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 3.
What is growth?
(a) Temporary, irreversible increase in an organism.
(b) Permanent, reversible increase in an organism.
(c) Permanent, irreversible decrease in an organism.
(d) Permanent, irreversible increase in an organism.
Answer:
(d) Permanent, irreversible, increase in an organism

Question 4.
Based on location, plants have these three types of meristems.
(a) Basal, Intercalary and Lateral
(b) Apical, Basal and Lateral
(c) Apical, Interfascicular and Lateral
(d) Apical, Intercalary, Lateral
Answer:
(d) Apical, Intercalary, Lateral

Question 5.
Meristem cells are ………………..
(a) thin walled, vacuolated with prominent nucleus
(b) thick walled, non-vacuolated without nucleus
(c) thin walled, non-vacuolated with prominent nucleus
(d) thick walled, vacuolated with prominent nucleus
Answer:
(c) thin walled, non-vacuolated with prominent nucleus

Question 6.
Select correct sequence of phases of growth.
(a) Phase of formation, phase of elongation, phase of maturation
(b) Phase of cell division, phase of enlargement, phase of elongation
(c) Phase of formation, phase of maturation, phase of elongation
(d) Phase of enlargement, phase of cell division, phase of maturation
Answer:
(a) Phase of formation, phase of elongation, phase of maturation

Question 7.
In which phase of growth, growth rate is at accelerated pace?
(a) Lag phase
(b) Log phase
(c) Steady phase
(d) Stationary phase
Answer:
(b) Log phase

Question 8.
Water is essential for growth because it is necessary ………………..
(a) for turgidity
(b) as nutrient
(c) as raw material
(d) for gravity
Answer:
(a) for turgidity

Question 9.
Which equipment is suitable for measuring linear growth of shoot?
(a) Horizontal microscope
(b) Spectroscope
(c) Crescograph
(d) Auxanometer
Answer:
(d) Auxanometer

Question 10.
Which is correct expression of absolute growth rate (AGR)?
(a) AGR = \(\frac { dn }{ dt }\)
(b) AGR = \(\frac { dt }{ dn}\)
(c) AGR = \(\frac { RGR }{ n }\)
(d) AGR = \(\frac { n }{ RGR }\)
Answer:
(a) AGR = \(\frac { dn }{ dt }\)

Question 11.
Arithmetic growth in plants shows ……………….. graph.
(a) Sigmoid
(b) J-shaped
(c) linear
(d) elliptical
Answer:
(c) linear

Question 12.
What is grand period of growth?
(a) The total time required for all phases to occur
(b) The total time required for exponential phase
(c) The total time required for Lag and Log phase together
(d) The toted time required for stationary phase
Answer:
(a) The total time required for all phases to occur

Question 13.
Which tissue is formed by process of de-differentiation?
(a) Intrafascicular cambium
(b) Secondary phloem
(c) Interfascicular cambium
(d) Secondary xylem
Answer:
(c) Interfascicular cambium

Question 14.
The example of environmental plasticity- heterophylly observed is ………………..
(a) Cotton
(b) Coriander
(c) Larkspur
(d) Buttercup
Answer:
(d) Buttercup

Question 15.
Synthesis of IAA takes place from amino acid ………………..
(a) Methionine
(b) Tryptophan
(c) Valine
(d) Aspartic acid
Answer:
(b) Tryptophan

Question 16.
Find the odd one out.
(a) IAA
(b) 2, 4-D
(c) NAA
(d) IBA
Answer:
(a) IAA

Question 17.
The selective herbicide is ………………..
(a) IBA
(b) GA3
(c) 2, 4 D
(d) NAA
Answer:
(c) 2, 4 D

Question 18.
This hormone promotes rooting in artificial method of cutting ………………..
(a) Gibberellin
(b) Auxin
(c) Cytokinin
(d) Dormin
Answer:
(b) Auxin

Question 19.
Chemically the peculiar structure of gibberellins is ……………….. ring.
la) pyrole ring
(b) purine ring
(c) gibbeane ring
(d) pyrimidine
Answer:
(c) gibbeane ring

Question 20.
First natural cytokinin was obtained from ……………….. by Letham.
(a) Maize grains
(b) Coconut milk
(c) Rice seedling
(d) Tomato
Answer:
(a) Maize grains

Question 21.
A low ratio of cytokinin to auxin induces ……………….. in plants.
(a) rooting
(b) shooting
(c) bud formation
(d) flowering
Answer:
(a) rooting

Question 22.
Apical dominance : Auxin : : Fruit ripening : ?
(a) Gibberellin
(b) Cytokinin
(c) Ethylene
(d) Abscissic acid
Answer:
(c) Ethylene

Question 23.
Which hormone is known as stress hormone ?
(a) Auxin
(b) Gibberellin
(c) Ethylene
(d) Abscissic acid
Answer:
(d) Abscissic acid

Question 24.
Abscissic acid is synthesised from ………………..
(a) Methionine
(b) Malic acid
(c) Mevalonic acid
(d) Mucin
Answer:
(c) Mevalonic acid

Question 25.
Photoperiodic response is because of pigment ………………..
(a) Cytochrome
(b) Phytochrome
(c) Anthocyanin
(d) Phycobilin
Answer:
(b) Phytochrome

Question 26.
The favourable temperature for vernalization is ………………..
(a) 1 to 6 °C
(b) 11 to 16 °C
(c) 10 to 16 °C
(d) – 1 to 1 °C
Answer:
(a) 1 to 6 °C

Question 27.
Identify the group of non-mineral elements needed by plants.
(a) PO4, CO3, SO4
(b) C, H, O
(c) N, P K
(d) C, H, N
Answer:
(b) C, H, O

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 28.
The deficiency symptoms of these minerals are visible in young leaves ………………..
(a) Ca, CO
(b) S, P
(c) Ca, S
(d) Zn, Mg
Answer:
(c) Ca, S

Question 29.
The symptom chlorosis is observed as ………………..
(a) yellowing of leaf
(b) premature leaf fall
(c) malformation of leaf
(d) localized death of tissue
Answer:
(a) yellowing of leaf

Question 30.
…………….. is constituent of chlorophyll.
(a) Mn
(b) Mg
(c) Mo
(d) Fe
Answer:
(b) Mg

Question 31.
This is essential for O2 evolution in photosynthesis and for proper solute concentration
(a) Ca
(b) Cu
(c) Cl
(d) Co
Answer:
(c) Cl

Question 32.
For active absorption of mineral uptake, energy is supplied by ………………..
(a) respiration
(b) chemosynthesis
(c) photosynthesis
(d) transpiration
Answer:
(a) respiration

Question 33.
Cyanobacteria fix nitrogen in specialised cells called ………………..
(a) Velamen
(b) Haustoria
(c) Heteocysts
(d) Hormogonia
Answer:
(c) Heteocysts

Question 34.
In root nodule, symbiotic nitrogen fixer organism is ………………..
(a) Rhizopus
(b) Pseudomonas
(c) Rhizobium
(d) Nitrosomonas
Answer:
(c) Rhizobium

Question 35.
In plant body, amides are transported through ………………..
(a) sieve tubes
(b) xylem vessels
(c) phloem parenchyma
(d) plasmodesmata
Answer:
(b) xylem vessels

Question 36.
Building blocks of proteins are ………………..
(a) amides
(b) amino acids
(c) carboxylic acid
(d) nitrates
Answer:
(b) amino acids

Question 37.
Flowering plants Aster, Dahlia and Chrysanthemum are ………………..
(a) SDP
(b) LDP
(c) DNP
(d) SDP or LDP
Answer:
(a) SDP

Question 38.
Experimental material of Garner and Allard for discovery of photoperiodism was ………………..
(a) Cucumber and Tomato
(b) Dahlia and Aster
(c) Soybean and Tobacco
(d) Cabbage and Spinach
Answer:
(c) Soybean and Tobacco

Question 39.
Which of the following is used for the production of long seedless grapes ?
(a) Auxin
(b) Cytokinin
(c) Ethylene
(d) Gibberellin
Answer:
(d) Gibberellin

Question 40.
In vernalization, the cold stimulus is perceived by ………………..
(a) axillary bud
(b) floral bud
(c) leaves
(d) apical bud (shoot apex)
Answer:
(d) apical bud (shoot apex)

Question 41.
Xanthium is ………………..
(a) SDP
(b) LDP
(c) DNP
(d) not a flowering plant
Answer:
(a) SDP

Question 42.
Growth starts slowly during the ………………..
(a) lag phase
(b) exponential phase
(c) maturation phase
(d) stationary phase
Answer:
(a) lag phase

Question 43.
Cytokinins induce the formation of ………………..
(a) shoot apex
(b) intrafascicular cambium
(c) cork cambium
(d) interfascicular cambium
Answer:
(d) interfascicular cambium

Question 44.
Bakane disease in rice is associated with the discovery of ………………..
(a) cytokinins
(b) gibberellins
(c) auxins
(d) ethylene
Answer:
(b) gibberellins

Question 45.
ABA is also known as ………………..
(a) antitoxin
(b) antivirulent
(c) antioxidant
(d) antigibber ellin
Answer:
(d) antigibberellin

Question 46.
Gibberellins were first discovered from ………………..
(a) bacteria
(b) fungi
(c) algae
(d) gymnosperms
Answer:
(b) fungi

Question 47.
Which of the following is trace element?
(a) Mg
(b) Nitrogen
(c) Sulphur
(d) Mn
Answer:
(d) Mn

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 48.
Which of the following is a macronutrient?
(a) Ca
(b) Mn
(c) Zn
(d) Mo
Answer:
(a) Ca

Question 49.
Nitrogen is an important constituent of ………………..
(a) carbohydrates
(b) sugars
(c) proteins
(d) polyphosphates
Answer:
(c) proteins

Question 50.
Deficiency of phosphorus causes ………………..
(a) stunted growth
(b) inward rolling of leaf margin
(c) brittle cell walls
(d) necrotic spots
Answer:
(a) stunted growth

Question 51.
Which of the following is not an essential element for plant?
(a) Sulphur
(b) Boron
(c) Iron
(d) Cadmium
Answer:
(d) Cadmium

Question 52.
…………….. is a constituent of middle lamella.
(a) Mg
(b) K
(c) Ca
(d) P
Answer:
(c) Ca

Match the columns

Question 1.

Column A (Phase of growth) Column B (Condition)
(1) Lag phase (a) Growth rate faster
(2) Log phase (b) Growth rate steady state
(3) Stationary phase (c) Growth rate slow

Answer:

Column A (Phase of growth) Column B (Condition)
(1) Lag phase (c) Growth rate slow
(2) Log phase (a) Growth rate faster
(3) Stationary phase (b) Growth rate steady state

Question 2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 1
Answer:
(1) -(c) Arithmetic growth
(2) – (a) Rate of growth against time
(3) -(b) Geometric growth curve

Question 3.

Column A Column B
(1) Use of measuring scale (a) Record of primary growth
(2) Crescograph (b) Increase in height of plant
(3) Auxanometer (c) Measure growth in field
(4) Horizontal microscope (d) Measurement of linear growth of shoot

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Use of measuring scale (b) Increase in height of plant
(2) Crescograph (a) Record of primary growth
(3) Auxanometer (d) Measurement of linear growth of shoot
(4) Horizontal microscope (c) Measure growth in field

Question 4.

Column A Column B
(1) Auxin (a) Bolting in rosette plants
(2) Cytokinin (b) Stimulate flowering in SDP
(3) Gibberellins (c) Promotion of growth of lateral buds
(4) Abscissic acid (d) Apical dominance

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Auxin (d) Apical dominance
(2) Cytokinin (c) Promotion of growth of lateral buds
(3) Gibberellins (a) Bolting in rosette plants
(4) Abscissic acid (b) Stimulate flowering in SDP

Question 5.

Column A Column B (Symptoms observed)
(1) Deficiency of Cu (a) Malformed leaves
(2) Deficiency of Bo (b) Leaves with yellow edges
(3) Deficiency of Zn (c) Brown heart disease
(4) Deficiency of K (d) Die back of shoot

Answer:

Column A Column B (Symptoms observed)
(1) Deficiency of Cu (d) Die back of shoot
(2) Deficiency of Bo (c) Brown heart disease
(3) Deficiency of Zn (a) Malformed leaves
(4) Deficiency of K (b) Leaves with yellow edges

Question 6.

Column A Column B (Organisms)
1. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation a. Nitrobacter
2. Denitrification b. Cyanobacteria
3. Free living nitrogen fixers c. Rhizobium
4. Nitrification d. Paracoccus

Answer:

Column A Column B (Organisms)
1. Symbiotic nitrogen fixation c. Rhizobium
2. Denitrification d. Paracoccus
3. Free living nitrogen fixers b. Cyanobacteria
4. Nitrification a. Nitrobacter

Classify the following to form Column B as per the category given in Column A.

Question 1.
Classify the given plant growth regulators as per their specific control of event in plant life cycle in Column A and complete Column B.
(IAA, GA, Cytokinin, Abscissic acid)

Column A Column B
(1) Shedding of leaves ————-
(2) Induce flowering in LDP ————
(3) Apical dominance ————-
(4) Induce RNA synthesis ————-

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Shedding of leaves Abscissic acid
(2) Induce flowering in LDP GA
(3) Apical dominance IAA
(4) Induce RNA synthesis Cytokinin

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 2.
Classify the given specific effects of different types of auxins in Column A and complete Column B with the examples.
(IAA, NAA, 2, 4-D, IBA, 2, 4, 5-T)

Column A Column B
(1) Selective synthetic herbicide ————-
(2) Seedless fruits ————
(3) Flowering in pineapple ————-
(4) Synthetic auxin ————-
(5) Agent orange ————

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Selective synthetic herbicide 2, 4-D
(2) Seedless fruits IAA
(3) Flowering in pineapple NAA
(4) Synthetic auxin IBA
(5) Agent orange 2, 4, 5 – T

Question 3.
Classify the given plant hormones as their specific effect observed in plants in Column A and complete Column B.
(ABA, GA, Ethylene, Kinetin)

Column A Column B
(1) Bolting of rosette plants ————-
(2) Epinasty ————
(3) Closure of stomata ————-
(4) Proliferation of callus ————-

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Bolting of rosette plants GA
(2) Epinasty Ethylene
(3) Closure of stomata ABA
(4) Proliferation of callus Kinetin

Question 4.
Classify the given disease to their cause given in Column B.
(Ethylene, GA, Deficiency of BO, Deficiency of Cu)

Column A Column B
(1) Brown heart disease ————-
(2) Bakane disease of Rice ————
(3) Die back of shoot ————-
(4) Degreening of Banana ————-

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Brown heart disease Deficiency of BO
(2) Bakane disease of Rice GA
(3) Die back of shoot Deficiency of Cu
(4) Degreening of Banana Ethylene

Question 5.
Classify the given organisms related to Nitrogen cycle in Column B.
[Nitrobacter, Rhizobium, Pseudomonas, Nitrosococcus)

Column A Column B
(1) Symbiont in root nodule ————-
(2) Conversion of nitrite to nitrate ————
(3) Denitrification process ————-
(4) Conversion of ammonia to nitrite ————-

Answer:

Column A Column B
(1) Symbiont in root nodule Rhizobium
(2) Conversion of nitrite to nitrate Nitrobacter
(3) Denitrification process Pseudomonas
(4) Conversion of ammonia to nitrite Nitrosococcus

Very short answer questions

Question 1.
Enlist the types of meristems that we observe in plants.
Answer:
In plants, there are apical, intercalary and lateral meristems.

Question 2.
Give characteristic features of meristematic cells.
Answer:
Meristematic cells are thin walled, non- vacuolated with prominent nuclei having granular cytoplasm and are capable of cell division.

Question 3.
What is the role of oxygen in growth?
Answer:
Oxygen is required for respiration of cells and release of energy for the process of growth.

Question 4.
What is the role of water for growth?
Answer:
Water maintains turgidity of the cell and is chief component of protoplasm as well as it is a medium for various biochemical reactions.

Question 5.
Mention the mathematical formula for rate of absolute growth.
Answer:
Absolute Growth Rate = AGR = \(\frac { dn }{ dt }\) where dn is cell number and dt is time interval.

Question 6.
What is exponential phase of growth curve?
Answer:
In exponential phase or log phase, growth rate is faster. It accelerates and reaches its maximum.

Question 7.
Is there any relation between phases of growth and regions of growth curve?
Answer:
Yes, there is relation between the two as initially growth is slow, which accelerates and ultimately it slows down and becomes steady which is observed in growth curve.

Question 8.
Which plant organ does show both arithmetic and geometric growth?
Answer:
Embryo that develops from zygote inside the seed shows initially the growth which is geometric and later on arithmetic.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 9.
Describe the example of plasticity related to internal stimuli.
Answer:
In plants like cotton, coriander and larkspur heterophylly is observed where leaves in juvenile stage and adult stage show different forms.

Question 10.
What is the role of growth hormones in plants?
Answer:
Growth hormones inhibit, promote or modify the growth in plants.

Question 11.
What is the peculiarity of growth hormones ?
Answer:
Growth hormones are needed in very small amount to evoke the response and they act at a site away from their place of production.

Question 12.
Which is the first hormone to be discovered in plants?
Answer:
Auxin IAA i.e. Indole acetic acid is the first hormone to be discovered in plants.

Question 13.
Give the full form of 2, 4 – D.
Answer:
It is synthetic auxin 2, 4-dichlorophenoxy acetic acid.

Question 14.
What is the effect of NAA and 2, 4-D foliar spray?
Answer:
Foliar spray of synthetic hormones induce flowering in plants litchi and pineapple and prevent premature fruit drop in apples, pear and oranges.

Question 15.
How cytokinins control apical dominance ?
Answer:
Cytokinins promote growth of lateral buds by cell division and thus control apical dominance.

Question 16.
What was the discovery of Richmond and Lang?
Answer:
Richmond and Lang discovered that cytokinins delay the process of ageing and senescence, abscission in plant organs.

Question 17.
What is ‘epinasty’?
Answer:
It is an effect of ethylene where it causes drooping of leaves and flowers.

Question 18.
Why is auxin called a growth regulator?
Answer:
Auxin is synthesized at meristematic region of plants and it controls cell enlargement, cell elongation and stimulates growth of stem and root, apical dominance. Hence it is growth promoting hormone.

Question 19.
What is effect of gibberellin application on apple?
Answer:
Gibberellin causes parthenocarpy in apple.

Question 20.
How can we overcome apical dominance?
Answer:
By application of cytokinin we can overcome apical dominance effect.

Question 21.
Which is standard bioassay method for auxins?
Answer:
Avena curvature test/Avena coleoptile test is a standard bioassay method for auxins.

Question 22.
ABA is called as stress hormone why?
Answer:
Answer: ABA induces dormancy in seeds by inhibiting growth. Thus plants can tide over adverse environmental conditions. Hence it is called as stress hormone.

Question 23.
What was the plant material for study of photoperiodism by Garner and Allard?
Answer:
The flowering response of Soybean and Maryland mammoth variety of tobacco was studied by Garner and Allard.

Question 24.
What is photomorphogenesis?
Answer:
Control of morphogenesis by light and phytochrome pigment is called photomorphogenesis.

Question 25.
What is critical concentration of minerals ?
Answer:
The concentration of the essential elements below which plant growth is retarded is termed as critical concentration.

Question 26.
What is a role of Sulphur in plants?
Answer:
Sulphur is constituent of amino acids, proteins, vitamins (mainly thaimine, biotin CoA) and Ferredoxin.

Question 27.
What is a role of nitrogen in plants?
Answer:
Nitrogen is constituent of amino acids, proteins, nucleic acid, vitamins, hormones, coenzymes, ATP and chlorophyll molecule.

Question 28.
Which is the process by which mainly we get nitrogen in human tissues?
Answer:
Industrial nitrogen fixation by Haber – Bosch Nitrate process is responsible for nitrogen found in human tissues.

Question 29.
Give equation of Haber – Bosch process.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 30.
What is nitrogen assimilation?
Answer:
Nitrogen present in the soil as nitrates, nitrites and ammonia is absorbed by plants and converted into nitrogenous organic compounds is nitrogen assimilation.

Give definitions of the following

Question 1.
Growth
Answer:
Growth can be defined as permanent, irreversible increase in the bulk of an organism with change in form.

Question 2.
Efficiency index
Answer:
The increased growth per unit time is called efficiency index.

Question 3.
Absolute growth rate (AGR)
Answer:
The measurement and comparison of total growth per unit time is called absolute growth rate.

Question 4.
Relative growth rate (RGR)
Answer:
The growth of a particular system per unit time expressed on a common basis or alternately it is the ratio of growth in the given time per initial growth.

Question 5.
Differentiation
Answer:
A permanent change in structure and function of cells that leads to their maturation is called differentiation.

Question 6.
Redifferentiation
Answer:
When cells produced from de-differentiation lose their capacity to divide and mature for specific function it is known as re-differentiation.

Question 7.
Development
Answer:
The progressive changes in shape, form and degree of complexity which includes growth, maturation and morphogenesis is referred as development.

Question 8.
Growth Hormone or Growth regulators
Answer:
The internal factors that influence growth by inhibiting, promoting or modifying it are called growth hormones or regulators.

Question 9.
Apical dominance
Answer:
In higher plants growing apical bud inhibits the growth of lateral buds. This is known as apical dominance.

Question 10.
Critical photoperiod
Answer:
That length of photoperiod above or below which the plant shows flowering is critical photoperiod.

Question 11.
Photomorphogenesis
Answer:
The control of morphogenesis of plants by light and phytochrome is photomorphogenesis.

Question 12.
Symptom or hunger sign
Answer:
Any visible deviation from the normal structure and function of the plant is called symptom or hunger sign.

Question 13.
Active absorption of minerals
Answer:
Uptake of mineral ions against concentration gradient, with expenditure of energy (ATP) is called active absorption.

Question 14.
Nitrogen fixation
Answer:
Free nitrogen of air N2 is converted to nitrogenous salts so that it is made available to plants is called nitrogen fixation.

Question 15.
Nitrification
Answer:
Soil microbes, mainly : chemoautotrophs convert ammonia into j nitrate, the form of nitrogen which can be used by plants, this process is nitrification.

Question 16.
Amidation
Answer:
Ammonia may be absorbed by amino acids to produce amides. This process is called amidation.

Name the following

Question 1.
Instrument developed by Indian physiologist to measure growth.
Answer:
Crescograph developed by Sir J.C. Bose.

Question 2.
Instrument to measure linear growth of shoot.
Answer:
Auxanometer.

Question 3.
Type of growth curve for geometric growth.
Answer:
J-shaped or exponential growth curve.

Question 4.
The process by which cork cambium is formed.
Answer:
Dedifferentiation.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 5.
Ability of plant to form different kinds of structures.
Answer:
Plasticity.

Question 6.
Condition where plant exhibits different types of leaves on same plant.
Answer:
Heterophylly.

Question 7.
Growth promoter hormones.
Answer:
Auxins, gibberellins and cytokinins.

Question 8.
Growth inhibitors of plants.
Answer:
Ethylene and abscissic acid.

Question 9.
First hormone that is discovered in plant and its precursor.
Answer:
Amino acid tryptophan is precursor of Indole acetic acid (IAA).

Question 10.
A synthetic hormone that acts as selective herbicide.
Answer:
2, 4 – D (dichlorophenoxy acetic acid).

Question 11.
A plant hormone discovered from fungus.
Answer:
Gibberellic acid (GA).

Question 12.
A plant hormone also present in fish (Herring) sperm DNA.
Answer:
Kinetin (cytokinin).

Question 13.
A plant hormone also present in urine of person suffering from Pellagra.
Answer:
Auxin.

Question 14.
Most widely used source of ethylene for fruit ripening.
Answer:
Ethephon – 2 chloroethyl phosphoric acid.

Question 15.
A precursor from which GA and ABA are synthesized.
Answer:
Mevalonic acid.

Question 16.
Plant antitranspirant.
Answer:
Abscissic acid.

Question 17.
Chemical stimulant of low temperature effect on flowering of plants.
Answer:
Vernalin.

Question 18.
Methods of synthesis of amino acids.
Answer:
Reductive animation and Transamination.

Question 19.
Common amides present in plants.
Answer:
Asparagine and Glutamine.

Question 20.
Nitrogen fixing prokaryotic organisms.
Answer:
Diazotrophs or Nitrogen fixers.

Question 21.
Special structures of cyanobacteria where N2 fixation occurs.
Answer:
Heterocysts.

Question 22.
A synthetic cytokinin hormone.
Answer:
6 – benzyl adenine.

Give Functions/Significance/Importance of the following

Question 1.
Meristems
Answer:
In plants meristems are situated at specific regions where growth takes place by constant and continuous addition of new cells. Meristems have capacity to divide (Mitotic divisions).

Question 2.
Synthetic auxin 2, 4-D
Answer:
It is selective herbicide which kills dicot weeds and foliar spray of 2, 4-D induces flowering in litchi and pineapple, prevents premature fruit drop in apples, pear, oranges.

Question 3.
Coconut milk
Answer:
Coconut milk contains natural cytokinin substance kinetin which is used as nutritional supplement for callus tissue culture where proliferation is noticed due to promotion of cell division.

Question 4.
Ethylene/Ethephon
Answer:
It is used for fruit ripening and as it causes degreening effect by increasing activity of chlorophyllase enzyme for banana and citrus fruits.

Question 5.
Abscissic acid/ABA
Answer:
It is natural growth inhibiting substance in plants and it acts as plant anti Iranspirant causing closure of stomata. It is stress hormone that induces plant to bear the adverse environmental conditions like drought.

Question 6.
Phytochrome
Answer:
It is a proteinaceous pigment present in leaves which perceives stimulus of light for flowering. As it is interconvertible in two forms, it promotes flowering in SDP and inhibits flowering in LDE.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 7.
Vernalization
Answer:
It is response of flowering to low temperature treatment which helps in cultivation of crops in regions where they do not occur naturally and also crops can be produced earlier.

Question 8.
Nitrogen cycle
Answer:
Nitrogen is essential macronutrient for plant growth, it is constituent of amino acids, proteins, nucleic acids, vitamins, hormones, ATP coenzymes, chlorophyll molecule. It is limiting nutrient for plant productivity and agricultural ecosystem. Through food chain it moves to consumers, i.e. animals and decomposers.

Distinguish between the following

Question 1.
Phase of cell division and Phase of cell enlargement
Answer:

Phase of cell division Phase of cell enlargement
1. In this phase cells of meristems divide by mitotic division. 1. In this phase newly formed cells become vacuolated and turgid, osmotically active.
2. Rate of growth at slow pace. 2. Rate of growth at accelerated pace.
3. This is described as lag phase. 3. This is described as log phase.
4. There is no synthesis of any new material. 4. Synthesis of new wall materials and other materials takes place.

Question 2.
Long day plants and Short day plants
Answer:

Long day plants Short day plants
1. Plants that flower only when they are exposed to light period longer than their critical photoperiod are called long day plants (LDP). 1. Plants that flower only when they are exposed to light period shorter than the critical photoperiod are called short day plants (SDP).
2. The plants usually flower in summer. 2. The plants usually flower in winter or late summer.
3. These plants require short night period for flowering. Hence, they are also known as short night plants. 3. These plants require long night period for flowering. Hence, they are also known as long night plants.
4. Plants such as Pea, Radish, Sugar, Beet, Cabbage, Spinach, Wheat, poppy are LDP 4. Plants such as Dahlia, Aster, Tobacco, Chrysanthemum, Soybean (Glycine max) Cocklebur (Xanthium) are SDP

Question 3.
Passive absorption of Minerals and Active absorption of minerals
Answer:

Passive absorption of minerals Active absorption of minerals
1. The movement of mineral ions into root cells due to diffusion, without expenditure of energy is called passive absorption. 1. The uptake of mineral ions by root cells that requires expenditure of ATP energy is known as active absorption.
2. The movement is according to concentration gradient. 2. The movement of mineral ions is against concentration gradient.
3. It takes place by direct ion exchange, diffusion, indirect ion exchange – mass flow and Donnan equilibrium. 3. It takes place by mineral ion accumulation in root hair and carrier concept.

Given reasons

Question 1.
Water is essential for growth in plants.
Answer:

  1. Meristematic cells divide and form new cells.
  2. Absorption of water is necessary for maintaining turgidity in the newly formed cells.
  3. Turgidity results in enlargement of cells in phase of cell elongation.
  4. Water is essential component of protoplasm of cells.
  5. biochemical reactions. Therefore it is essential for growth in plants.

Question 2.
2, 4-D is used as herbicide.
Answer:

  1. 2, 4-D is a synthetic auxin which kills dicot weeds.
  2. Our most of the food crops are cereals, i.e. monocot plants.
  3. Weeds are unwanted plants which otherwise lower the productivity hence to kill them. Selective herbicide is used.

Question 3.
In morphogenesis of plants cytokinin auxin ratio is important.
Answer:

  1. Auxins and cytokinins are growth promoting substances which stimulate cell division and cell enlargement.
  2. A high cytokinin promotes shooting in plants.
  3. A low ratio of cytokinin to auxin induces root development.
  4. A high ratio of cytokinin to auxin induces growth of buds and shoot development.
  5. Thus cytokinin and auxin ratio and their interactions control morphogenesis in plants.

Question 4.
ABA is described as an antitranspirant.
Answer:

  1. ABA is a growth inhibiting hormone.
  2. ABA is responsible for causing efflux of K+ ions from guard cells of stomata.
  3. As a result of this, osmotic changes occur and guard cells become flaccid resulting in closure of stomata.
  4. Transpiration mainly occurs through open stomata and due to closure the activity is checked. Hence it is described as antitranspirant.

Question 5.
Some deficiency symptoms of mineral are visible in young leaves while some appear in older leaves.
Answer:

  1. When mineral element is present below a certain critical concentration it is said to be deficient.
  2. Symptoms are indicated in the form of certain morphological changes on the mobility of element.
  3. These symptoms depend on the mobility of element inside the plant body.
  4. When the element is relatively immobile like S, Ca then the symptoms appear first in young leaves.
  5. When the elements are actively mobilised inside plant body, they are transported to young tissues then the symptoms are visible in older, i.e. senescent leaves e.g. N, Mg, K.

Question 6.
In Donnan equilibrium of passive absorption of minerals concentration of cations increases inside the cell.
Answer:

  1. Minerals exist in soil in the form of charged particles.
  2. Certain negatively charged (anions) get accumulated on the inner side of cell membrane after their entry inside cell.
  3. These anions cannot diffuse out through semipermeable cell membrane.
  4. Thus additional mobile cautions are needed inside the cell to balance these fixed anions.
  5. Hence, the concentration of cations increases inside the cell.

Question 7.
A sudden drop in active absorption of minerals is noticed if roots are deprived of oxygen supply.
Answer:

  1. Absorption of mineral ions from soil against concentration gradient is known as active absorption.
  2. It requires energy (ATP) for absorption by absorbing root cell.
  3. The source of energy is respiration of cells for supply of ATE
  4. When the roots are deprived of oxygen, their respiration process is affected and thus energy is not supplied in required amount. Hence, a sudden drop in absorption of minerals is noticed.

Question 8.
Nitrogen is a limiting nutrient in the agricultural system.
Answer:

  1. Nitrogen is a major nutrient for plant growth.
  2. Proper carbon/nitrogen ratio in soil is necessary for plant growth.
  3. It is component of proteins in the form of amino acids.
  4. Proteins are synthesised from photosynthetic products sugars.
  5. Nitrogen exists in atmosphere but it is inert, non-reactive.
  6. Plants need nitrogen in a reactive form usually nitrate in soil.
  7. This supply need to be maintained through biological and physical nitrogen fixation.
  8. Otherwise productivity is affected hence it is limiting nutrient in the agricultural ecosystem.

Question 9.
Cucumber and sunflower are regarded as photoneutral plants.
Answer:

  1. In cucumber and sunflower, the flower is not controlled by light period.
  2. Both these plants flower in all light periods.
  3. Cucumber and sunflower, therefore, are regarded as photoneutral plants.

Write short notes on the following

Question 1.
Meristems
Answer:

  1. In vascular plants, growth is indeterminate and occurs at specific regions where meristems are located.
  2. Meristems are of three types based on their location – apical, intercalary and lateral.
  3. Meristems are thin walled cells with prominent nucleus with granular cytoplasm, non-vacuolated.
  4. Mitotic divisions take place in meristematic cells.

Question 2.
Phase of cell formation
Answer:

  1. Formative phase is the first phase of growth.
  2. During this phase, the meristematic cells undergo mitosis to form new cells.
  3. During formative phase, the rate of growth is slow.
  4. The phase of cell formation is also called lag phase.
  5. This phase is also known as phases of cell division.

Question 3.
Development
Answer:

  1. Development is progressive changes taking place in shape, form and degree of complexity in an organism.
  2. In plants, it includes all the changes taking place in sequence from seed germination to senescence or death of plant.
  3. Development is an orderly process.
  4. It includes growth, morphogenesis, maturation and senescence.

Question 4.
Plasticity
Answer:

  1. Plasticity is the capacity of plant being molded or formed.
  2. It is ability of plant to develop different kinds of structures in response to environmental factors or stimuli.
  3. Different kinds of structures can be developed in plants due to internal stimuli in different phases, i.e. juvenile and adult.
  4. Heterophylly is shown in plant in different phases or in different environmental conditions.
  5. In coriander and cotton plants, two different kinds of leaves are observed in young (juvenile) and mature (adult) plant.
  6. In buttercup, two different kinds of leaves are observed in terrestrial (on land) and aquatic (in water) habitat.

Question 5.
Phytohormones/Plant Growth Regulators
Answer:

  1. Phytohormones or plant growth regulators are internal factor that influence growth.
  2. They inhibit, promote or modify the plant growth.
  3. Plant hormones are organic substances produced naturally in plants and required in small amount.
  4. Their place of production and site of the activity are different.
  5. Auxins, gibberellins, cytokinins are growth promoters and ethylene, abscissic acid are growth inhibitors.

Question 6.
Phytochrome
Answer:

  1. These are proteinaceous pigments present
  2. Phytochrome exists in two interconvertible forms. Pr and Pfr.
  3. Phytochromes are located in cell membranes of chlorophyllous cells.
  4. When Pfr absorbs red light it is converted to Pr.
  5. Pfr is accumulated in plants during daytime and inhibits flowering in SDP but initiates flowering in LDP

Question 7.
Venralization
Answer:

  1. Effect of temperature on flowering of plants is known as vernalization.
  2. For inducing early flowering pretreatment of seeds or seedlings is done at 1 to 6 °C for about a months duration.
  3. Shoot apical meristem is believed to be site of vernalization stimulus.
  4. Vernalization stimulus is in a form of chemical named vernalin.
  5. Vernalization is effective in ereals (wheat) and crucifers.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 8.
Apical dominance
Answer:

  1. The presence of apical bud inhibits the growth of lateral buds. This phenomenon in which the apical (terminal) bud is active and lateral buds remain inactive is called apical dominance.
  2. It is believed that apical dominance is controlled by an auxin which is synthesized in the apical bud.
  3. From the apical bud, the auxin migrates to the lateral buds and inhibits their growth.
  4. When apical bud is removed, the lateral buds grow and form branches.
  5. For producing more branches therefore, the apical buds are removed.
  6. Cytokinins reverse apical dominance effect by promoting growth of lateral buds by cell division.

Question 9.
Toxicity of micronutrients or mineral toxicity
Answer:

  1. Micronutrients are required in minute quantities by plants.
  2. Their moderate decrease causes deficiency symptoms while their moderate increase causes toxicity.
  3. The reduction in dry weight of a tissue by 10% by any mineral is known as toxicity.
  4. It is not easy to identify toxicity symptoms.
  5. Most of the time, the excess of an element inhibits the uptake of another element resulting in causing the deficiency symptom of that element.
  6. Manganese inhibits calcium translocation towards apex of stem and exhibits symptoms of chlorosis with grey spots appearing on leaves.
  7. This is because manganese competes with iron and magnesium for uptake.
  8. Therefore what we see as symptoms of manganese toxicity, may be the deficiency symptoms of Fe, Mg and Ca.

Question 10.
Day neutral plants (DNP)
Answer:

  1. Day neutral plants are those in which flowering is not affected by the duration of the light period.
  2. Day neutral plants flower in all photoperiods.
  3. Day neutral plants are also known as photoneutral or intermediate plants.
  4. Plants such as cucumber, shoe-flower, sunflower, tomato, maize, balsam, etc. are day neutral plants.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is de-differentiation?
Answer:

  1. The differentiated cells which are formed may again gain the capacity to divide as per need.
  2. Permanent cells (mature cells) undergo de-differentiation and become meristematic.
  3. This acquired feature of living permanent cells is known as de-differentiation.
  4. e.g. Formation of interfascicular cambium and cork cambium from parenchyma cells of medullary rays and outer cortical cells respectively.

Question 2.
Discuss about natural Auxin.
Answer:

  1. F.W. Went named the growth promoting substance as Auxin.
  2. Auxin was also isolated from urine of patient of pellagra.
  3. Indole 3 acetic acid was first hormone discovered in plants.
  4. IAA is most common and natural hormone synthesized at growing tips and responsible for cell elongation.
  5. It is synthesized from tryptophan and shows polar transport – Basipetal transport.

Question 3.
Discuss about discovery of Gibberellins.
Answer:

  1. Gibberellins are growth promoting hormones and were isolated form fungus Gibberella Jujikuroi by Kurasawa.
  2. Rice plants when infected with this fungus show stem elongation i.e. Bakane disease.
  3. Yabuta and Sumuki isolated gibberellins in crystalline form, from fungal culture and named it gibberellins.
  4. Gibberellins are synthesized from mevalonic acid at young leaves, seeds, root and stem tips and show non-polar transport.

Question 4.
Discuss about discovery of cytokinin.
Answer:

  1. Cytokinins are growth promoting hormones that stimulate cell division.
  2. Skoog and Miller discovered first cytokinin when they were investigating nutritional requirements of tobacco callus culture.
  3. It was observed that the callus proliferated when there was addition of coconut milk as supplement.
  4. The degraded sample of herring (fish) sperm DNA also showed similar growth of tobacco callus. They named the substance as kinetin.

Question 5.
Discuss about discovery of abscissic acid.
Answer:

  1. Abscissic acid (ABA) is a natural growth inhibiting hormone.
  2. It was observed by Carns and Addicott that shedding of cotton balls occur due to chemical substance abscission I and II.
  3. From the buds of Acer, Wareing isolated substance that causes bud dormancy and named it as dormin.
  4. These two chemical substances were identical and now known as abscissic acid.
  5. ABA is synthesized in leaves, fruits and seeds from mevalonic acid.

Question 6.
What is day neutral plant (DNP)? Give any two examples.
Answer:

  1. The plants which do not require specific duration of light period or dark period flowering are day neutral plants (DNP).
  2. They flower throughout the year, as they do not need specific photoperiod.
  3. The flowering in these plants is independent of photoperiod.
  4. Examples – cucumber, tomato, cotton, sunflower, maize and balsam.

Question 7.
Discuss about discovery of phytochromes.
Answer:

  1. Phytochromes are proteinaceous pigments present in cell membrane of green cells.
  2. Phytochromes receive photoperiodic stimulus and induce flowering in plants in response to light duration.
  3. Hendrick and Borthwick observed that in SD plants flowering is inhibited if dark period is interrupted by flash of red light (660 nm).
  4. If flash of far red light (730 nm) is given then again flowering is observed in SD plants.
  5. Pigment system of plant receives photoperiodic stimulus and these pigments exist in two interconvertible forms Pfr and Pr

Question 8.
What is mineral nutrition of plants?
Answer:

  1. Plants require inorganic materials for the synthesis of food.
  2. These elements are obtained by plants in the form of minerals mainly form soil.
  3. Chemical analysis of plant ash reveals that about 40 different minerals are needed by plants which are taken from surroundings, (air, soil and water)
  4. These minerals are absorbed in dissolved form, i.e. ionic form through root system mainly root hairs.
  5. Some minerals are required in large amounts (major) while some are needed only in traces or small amounts (minor).

Question 9.
What are symptoms of mineral deficiency in plants?
Answer:
Any visible deviation from the normal structure and function of plants due to lack or unavailability of particular element below its critical concentration is deficiency symptom of that mineral element.

The common symptoms observed in plants are as follows:

  1. Stunting : Retarded growth and thus stem appears short and condensed.
  2. Chlorosis : This is loss or lack of chlorophyll that result in yellowing of leaf.
  3. Necrosis : It is localized death of tissue. Mottling : This is appearance of green or non-green patches or spots on leaves. Abscission : This is premature fall of leaves, buds, fruits and flowers.

Question 10.
Enlist the role of following minerals and the symptoms caused due to their deficiency : (a) Calcium (b) Boron and (c) Chlorine.
Answer:
(a) Calcium:
Role : Involved in selective permeability of cell membranes, activator of certain enzymes, required as calcium pectate in middle lamella of cell wall at root and stem apex (for cell division).
Deficiency symptom : stunted growth.

(b) Boron:
Role : Required for uptake and utilization of Calcium (Ca2+), pollen germination, cell differentiation, carbohydrate translocation. Deficiency symptom : Brown heart disease

(c) Chlorine:
Role : Na+ and K+ help to determine solute concentration and anion – cation balance in cells, necessary for oxygen evolution in photosynthesis.
Deficiency symptom : Poor growth of plant.

Question 11.
What is Donnan Equilibrium?
Answer:

  1. Donnan equilibrium is a process of passive absorption of minerals in plants which is without any expenditure of energy.
  2. It is assumed that certain anions after their entry by diffusion into the cell get fixed on inner side of cell membrane.
  3. Additional mobile cations are needed to balance this fixed anions as they cannot diffuse outside.
  4. Concentration of cations thus increases due to accumulation.
  5. This passive absorption of anions or cations from exterior against their concentration gradients so as to neutralize the effect of cations or anion is known as Donnan equilibrium.

Question 12.
Explain physical nitrogen fixation.
Answer:

  1. Conversion of free nitrogen of air into nitrogenous compounds that are made available to plants for uptake is known as : nitrogen fixation.
  2. Physical nitrogen fixation occurs in step- : wise manner and it takes place in atmosphere j and soil.
  3. Under the influence of electric discharge, lightning and thunder, atmospheric nitrogen combines with oxygen to form nitric oxide.
  4. Nitric oxide is then oxidized to nitrogen peroxide in presence of oxygen.
  5. Nitrogen peroxide combines with rainwater to form nitrous and nitric acid which come on ground as acid rains.
  6. On ground, alkali radicals (mainly of Ca, K) react with nitric acid to produce nitrites and nitrates which are absorbable forms for plants.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 13.
Give equations of physical nitrogen fixation.
Answer:
(1) Physical nitrogen fixation occurs in stepwise manner in atmosphere and on land (soil)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 3

Question 14.
Give the equations of amino acid synthesis.
Answer:
1. Macromolecule proteins are made up of building blocks of amino acids.
2. Amino acids are synthesized by two methods – Reductive animation and transamination.
3. Reductive amination – Ammonia reacts with alpha keto glutaric acid to form glutamic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 4
4. Transamination – Amino group of one amino acid is transferred to other carboxylic acid at keto position.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 5

Question 15.
Explain lag phase, log phase and steady phase of growth.
Answer:
1. In plants, growth curve is always sigmoid, i.e. S-shaped. This is because growth starts slowly during formative phase, becomes rapid during elongation phase and finally slows down to a steady state during the maturation phase.

2. The standard growth curve shows three phases, viz. lag phase, log phase and stationary phase.
(i) Lag phase or initial growth phase : This is the initial phase of growth. During this phase of growth, the rate of growth is slow. It corresponds to formative phase of growth where new cells are formed due to cell division.

(ii) Log phase or exponential phase : This is the second phase of growth. During this phase, the growth is rapid and maximum. It corresponds to the phase of cell elongation.

(iii) Stationary phase or steady phase : The stationary phase is the third and last phase of growth. In this phase, growth slows down and becomes steady. The cells undergo differentiation during stationary phase.

Chart based or Table based questions

Question 1.
Complete the chart of plasticity.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 6
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 7

Question 2.
Complete the flow chart of development.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 8
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 9

Question 3.
Complete the table of growth hormones.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 10
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 11

Question 4.
Complete the table of mineral nutrition of plants.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 12
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 13

Diagram based questions

Question 1.
Draw diagram of photoperiodic response of SDP and LDP.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 14

Question 2.
With the help of diagram show arithmetic growth and geometric growth.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 15

Question 3.
Draw the sigmoid growth curve.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 16

Question 4.
Observe the diagram and answer the questions related to it.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 17

  1. From which cells newly formed cells are added? How?
  2. How is rate of growth in zone of cell elongation?
  3. What is peculiarity of zone of differentiation? How is rate of growth in this region?

Answer:

  1. Meristematlc cells add new cells by mitotic division.
  2. Rate of growth is at accelerated pace.
  3. The rate of growth is at steady state and cells become specialised to perform specific function become mature.

Question 5.
Observe the adjacent graph indicating growth. What is correct labelling of A, B and C respectively?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 18
Answer:
A. Stationary Phase
B. Exponential Phase
C. Lag Phase

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 6.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 19
(1) Observe the above graph indicating increase in height of plants. Which type of growth indicates this pattern of graph?
(2) Give its mathematical expression.
Answer:
(1) Arithmetic growth

(2) Lt = Lo + rt where
Lt = Length at time t,
Lo = Length at time zero r = growth rate,
t = time of growth

Question 7.
Observe the figure given below of two different leaves ‘A’ and ‘B’ Which leaf shows much higher relative growth rate ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 20
Answer:
Relative Growth Rate (RGR) = Growth per unit time as % of intial size.
RGR = \(\frac { Growth per unit time }{ intial size }\) × 100
Leaf A = 10 – 5 = 5, \(\frac { 5 }{ 5 }\) × 100 = 100%
Leaf B = 55 – 50 = 5, \(\frac { 5 }{ 50 }\) × 100 = 10%
Hence fig. A shows more relative growth.

Question 8.
Observe the diagrams A and ‘B’ showing growth in two leaves. Which diagram shows more relative growth?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 21
Answer:
Relative Growth Rate (RGR)
= Growth per unit time as % of intial size.
RGR = \(\frac { Growth per unit time }{ intial size }\) × 100
Leaf A = 20 – 10 = 10, \(\frac { 10 }{ 10 }\) × 100 = 100%
Leaf B = 60 – 50 = 10, \(\frac { 10 }{ 50 }\) × 100 = 20%
Hence Diagram A shows more relative growth.

Question 9.
Identify the type of growth curves observed in plants.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 22
Answer:
Constant linear growth curve for the arithmetic growth.
Exponential (J shaped) growth curve for the geometric growth.
Sigmoid growth curve related to distinct phases of growth.

Question 10.
Fill in the blanks in the given nitrogen cycle.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 23
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 24

Long answer questions

Question 1.
What is hydroponics? How is it useful in identifying the role of nutrients?
Answer:

  1. Growing plants in aqueous (soilless) medium is known as hydroponics. [Greek word hudor = water and ponos = work]
  2. It is technique of growing plants by supplying all necessary nutrients in the water supply given to plant.
  3. A nutrient medium is prepared by dissolving necessary salts of micronutrients and macronutricnts In desired quantity and roots of plants are suspended in this liquid with appropriate support.
  4. Hydroponics is of great use in studying the deficiency symptoms of different mineral nutrients.
  5. The plants uptake mineral nutrients in the form of dissolved ions with the help of root hairs from the surrounding medium or nutrient solution supplied.
  6. While preparing the required nutrient medium particular nutrient can be totally avoided and then the effect of lack of that nntr’cnt can be studied in variation of plant growth.
  7. Any visible change noticed from normal structure and function of the plant is the symptom or hunger sign considered.
  8. For e.g. Yellowing of leaf is observed due to loss of chlorophyll pigments or Chlorosis is noticed if Magnesium is lacking as it is a structural component of chlorophyll pigment.

Question 2.
Explain the active absorption of minerals.
Answer:

  1. Plants absorb minerals from the soil with their root system.
  2. Minerals are absorbed from the soil in the form of charged particles, positively charged cations and negatively charged anions.
  3. The absorption of minerals against the concentration gradient which requires expenditure of metabolic energy is called active absorption.
  4. The ATP energy derived from respiration in root cells is utilized for active absorption.
  5. Ions get accumulated in the root hair against the concentration gradient.
  6. These ions pass into cortical cells and finally reach xylem of roots.
  7. Along with the water these minerals are carried to other parts of plant.

Question 3.
What is growth? What are its characteristics ?
Answer:
Growth : Growth is a “vital process which brings about an irreversible increase in an organism or its part with respect to its size, weight, form and volume.”

Characteristics of growth:

  1. Growth is a permanent increase in size, weight, shape, volume and dry weight of a plant.
  2. The change occurring due to growth is permanent and irreversible.
  3. Growth is an intrinsic process caused due to internal activities.
  4. Growth occurs by cell division and cell elongation followed by cell maturation which lead to the formation of different types of tissues.
  5. Growth in plants is mostly localized, i.e. restricted to some regions of plants possessing meristematic tissues or meris terns.
  6. Growth has a qualitative aspect where development takes place in an orderly manner and differentiation leads to higher and more complex state.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 4.
Describe the phases of growth.
Answer:
There are three phases of growth, viz, formation phase, elongation phase and maturation phase.
(1) Formative phase (Phase of cell division) : This is the first phase of growth. In this phase, the meristematic cells undergo mitosis to produce new cells. Owing to the formation of new cells, there occurs a slight increase in the size of the organ.

(2) Elongation phase (Phase of cell enlargement) : This is the second phase of growth. In this phase, the new cells that are formed, undergo enlargement as a result of which the size and volume of the cells increase. Enlargement of cells occur mostly in linear direction as a result of which the elongation of the root and stem takes place. The enlargement of cells causes a considerable increase in size and weight of an organ and a plant as a whole.

(3) Maturation phase (Phase of cell maturation and differentiation) : Maturation phase is the third and last phase of growth. In this phase, the elongated cells undergo maturation and differentiation to form various types of plant tissues like parenchyma, sclerenchyma, xylem and phloem.

Question 5.
Explain the various conditions of growth that are essential.
Answer:

  1. For a proper growth of plant various environmental and physiological conditions are necessary.
  2. Carbon/Nitrogen ratio in soil is having effect on growth as both carbon and nitrogen are structural elements in carbohydrates, proteins and other biomolecules.
  3. Water is essential component of protoplasm and required for turgidity of cells during cell enlargement phase. It is a medium in which various biochemical reactions ocfcur.
  4. Nutrients are necessary for proper growth. Macronutrients and micronutrients have their specific role.
  5. Temperature of 25 – 35 °C is optimum for growth.
  6. Light is essential for seed germination and photosynthesis.
  7. Oxygen is necessary for respiration and supply of energy.
  8. Gravitational force decides direction of growth for root system and shoot system.
  9. Growth hormones are organic compounds that are involved in various physiological aspects and control of growth.

Question 6.
What are plant growth regulators? Give the characteristics of plant growth regulators.
Answer:
Plant growth regulators : Plant growth regulators or phytohormones or plant hormones as they are also called are organic compounds synthesised by the plants which promote, inhibit or control the growth and other physiological processes.

Characteristics of plant growth regulators:

  1. Plant growth regulators are organic compounds other than nutrients.
  2. They are synthesised at the apices of root, stem and leaves from where they are transported to other parts of plants where they produce their effects.
  3. They are required in minute quantities.
  4. A single plant growth regulator can control or regulate the various aspects of growth.

Question 7.
Enlist the five main types of growth regulators and state the role of abscissic acid in plants.
Answer:
Five main types of growth regulators:

  1. Auxins
  2. Gibberellins
  3. Cytokinins
  4. Ethylene and
  5. Abscissic acid.

Role of abscissic acid (ABA) in plants:

  1. Abscissic acid influences abscission and dormancy.
  2. ABA accelerates senescence of leaves, flowers and fruits.
  3. It is a stress hormone as it is produced during drought and other unfavourable climatic conditions.
  4. ABA induces dormancy in seeds, buds and tubers.
  5. It acts as growth inhibitor as it retards growth.
  6. ABA plays an important role in closing of stomata to check transpiration.
  7. It inhibits and delays cell division and suppresses cambial activity by inhibiting mitosis in vascular cambium.
  8. ABA inhibits flowering in LDP and stimulates flowering in short day plants (SDP).

Question 8.
Write an account of auxins as growth regulators.
Answer:

  1. Auxins are plant growth regulators produced naturally by plants.
  2. They are weak organic acids capable of promoting cell elongation during the growth of stem and root.
  3. Auxins are synthesized in shoot and root apices besides young leaf primordia.
  4. Auxins may be natural or synthetic.
  5. Naturally occurring auxins are indole-3- acetic acid (IAA) and its derivatives.
  6. NAA, 2, 4-D and 2,4, 5-T are synthetic auxins.
  7. Auxins in higher concentration promote the growth of stem.
  8. Auxins play an important role in initiation and promotion of cell division.
  9. Auxins help in the formation of adventitious roots from cuttings when applied in lower concentration.
  10. Auxins play an important role in apical dominance.
  11. Auxin prevents abscission by preventing the action of hydrolytic enzymes in abscission layer.
  12. Auxins are used to produce parthenocarpic fruits in plants like orange, apple, tomato and grapes.

Question 9.
Give an account of physiological effects and application of auxin with examples.
Answer:

  1. Auxins are growth promoting substances synthesized at meristematic regions of plants.
  2. The primary effect of auxin is cell enlargement and it stimulates growth of stem and root.
  3. Apical dominance – The phenomenon where growing apical bud inhibits the growth of lateral bud is apical dominance which is controlled by auxin synthesized at apical bud.
  4. Owing to activity of inducing multiplication of cells it is used in plant tissue culture to produce callus.
  5. Auxin stimulates formation of lateral and adventitious roots hence used for rooting propagation of cuttings.
  6. 2, 4-D is a synthetic herbicide which kills dicot weeds.
  7. Induced parthenocarpy in fruits-oranges, banana, grapes, lemons is by application of auxin.
  8. Foliar spray of NAA and 2, 4-D induces flowering in litchi and pineapple.
  9. Premature fruit drop of apples, pear and oranges is prevented.
  10. Auxins break seed dormancy and promote germination.
  11. Auxins promote early differentiation of xylem and phloem, cell elongation, increase rate of respiration, prevent formation of abscission layer.

Question 10.
Explain the application of gibberellins.
Answer:

  1. Gibberellins are growth promoting hormone and it is present in root tips, stem tips and seeds.
  2. Gibberellins break dormancy of bud, dormancy of seed.
  3. They promote seed germination in cereals by activating or synthesising enzyme amylase to produce sugar.
  4. Gibberellins induce elongation of the cells in stem hence increase in internode length is noticed.
  5. In rosette plants like cabbage it causes ‘bolting’ that is increase in internode length before flowering.
  6. Gibberellins are more effective in inducing parthenocarpy than auxins in plants like tomato, apple and pear.
  7. It is also used to increase fruit size and length of bunches in grapes.
  8. By its application genetically dwarf plants can be converted to phenotypically tall e.g. Maize.
  9. It overcomes requirement of vernalization, delays senescence and prevents abscission.
  10. Application of gibberellins causes production of male flowers on female plants.

Question 11.
Describe about the physiological effects and applications of cytokinin.
Answer:

  1. Cytokinins are growth promoting hormone that promotes cell division. Kinetin, zeatin are examples of cytokinin.
  2. They promote cell division as well as cell enlargement.
  3. High cytokinin promotes shoot development.
  4. Growth of lateral buds is promoted by cytokinins. Thus it controls apical dominance.
  5. Process of ageing and senescence, abscission of plant organs is delayed by their application.
  6. It promotes formation of interfascicular cambium.
  7. It has a role in breaking seed dormancy and promotes seed germination.
  8. Cytokinins induce RNA synthesis.
  9. Cytokinin and auxin ratio and their interactions control morphogenesis and cell differentiation.

Question 12.
Discuss about physiological effects and applications of ethylene.
Answer:

  1. Ethylene is a gaseous growth inhibitor hormone.
  2. It promotes ripening of fruits like bananas, apples and mangoes. The commercial application of ethephon is done.
  3. It initiates growth of lateral roots.
  4. Dormancy of buds and seeds is broken by its application.
  5. It accelerates formation of abscission layer and thus abscission of leaves, flowers and fruits is observed.
  6. Ethylene is responsible for checking growth of lateral buds thus causes apical dominance and retards flowering.
  7. Process of senescence of plant organs is enhanced.
  8. Epinasty, i.e. drooping of leaves and flowers results due to its application in some plants.
  9. It increases activity of chlorophyllase enzyme causing degreening effect in banana and Citrus fruits.

Question 13.
Discuss about experiment of Hendricks and Borthwick for discovery of phytochromes.
Answer:

  1. Phytochrome pigments receive photoperiodic stimulus and control flowering in plants.
  2. Hendricks and Borthwick observed that in SDP flowering is inhibited if continuous dark period is interrupted even by a short duration or flash of red light of wavelength 660 nm.
  3. If this interruption is again exposed to flash of far red light of wavelength 730 nm, then these plants flower.
  4. From this they concluded that some pigment system in plant receives the photoperiodic stimulus.
  5. These pigment proteins are called phytochromes and it exists in two interconvertible forms – Pr and Pfr.
  6. These pigments are located in cell membranes of green cells.
  7. Pfr is biologically active form and during daytime it gets accumulated in the plant.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition

Question 14.
Give schematic representation of nitrogen cycle and enlist important steps of this cycle.
Answer:

  1. Atmospheric nitrogen is a source of nitrogen cycle.
  2. The important steps of the cycle are Nitrogen fixation, Nitrification, Ammonification, Nitrogen assimilation by plants. Amino acid synthesis and amidation, Denitrification and sedimentation.
  3. Amino acid are building blocks of proteins. Amides are amino acid with two amino groups.
  4. Schematic representation of Nitrogen
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Biology Important Questions Chapter 7 Plant Growth and Mineral Nutrition 25

Question 15.
What is nitrogen cycle? Describe it briefly.
Answer:

  1. The cyclic movement of nitrogen between the atmosphere, biosphere and geosphere in different forms is called nitrogen cycle.
  2. Nitrogen cycle is one of the most important biogeochemical cycles.
  3. The nitrogen cycle involves many processes such as cycling of nitrogen through the biosphere, atmosphere and geosphere, nitrogen fixation, nitrogen uptake, formation of biomass, ammonification, nitrification and denitrification, etc.
  4. Bacteria such as Nitrosomonas, Nitrosococcus and Nitrobacter are the nitrifying bacteria which play an important role in nitrification.
  5. Denitrification is carried out by the bacteria Pseudomonas denitrifficans. From this it is obvious that bacteria play a major role in nitrogen cycle.
  6. Nitrogen fixation occurs by physical, industrial and biological methods. Prokaryotic organism play an important role in biological nitrogen fixation.